JP7456406B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a storage section that stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball firing device and directed toward the gaming area according to the player's firing operation. is fired. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a lottery process is executed, for example, or a process for increasing the number of game balls available to the player is executed. Ru.

In a slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game in a situation where gaming value such as medals is being bet, a lottery process is executed by a control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. If the result of the stoppage after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2020-044062 A

Here, in gaming machines such as those illustrated above, it is necessary to ensure that games are played appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows games to be played appropriately.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 provides a first caution event control that executes a predetermined caution event that allows a predetermined caution to be given to a player when a predetermined gaming state ends. means and
Even if the predetermined gaming state continues, the predetermined gaming state actually continues after the predetermined effect that allows the player to recognize that the predetermined gaming state may end is executed. means for generating a revival response effect in which a specific effect is executed to make the player aware of the fact;
a second caution event control means for causing the predetermined caution event to be executed in a situation where the revival response effect occurs;
Equipped with
In a situation where a new game is not started, the period from the start of the predetermined effect to the start of the specific effect is the period from the start of the predetermined effect until the start of the predetermined caution event and the predetermined effect. The period is longer than the total period from the start of the cautionary event until the end of the specified cautionary event, and
The second caution event control means is configured to not cause the predetermined caution event to be executed if a game is newly started before the predetermined caution event is started in a situation where the revival compatible performance occurs. Features.

According to the present invention, it is possible to ensure that games are played appropriately.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the slot machine in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing. It is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of each reel. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern and a combination line that can be visually recognized from a display window. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. (a) It is a front view of a common display area, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of information corresponding to a stop order displayed on a dual-purpose display section. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device and the display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display unit. FIG. 2 is an electrical configuration diagram of a slot machine. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the combination performed by main side MPU. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a winning combination lottery table when betting 3 cards. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a role selection table when two coins are bet. It is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the stop order of the reels and the winning pattern that is established. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart showing the corresponding processing when the game ends, which is executed by the main MPU. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state and a gaming section that exist in a slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing the first control processing of the game area executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd control process of the game section performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for advantageous conditions at the time of the start of a game performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for pseudo bonuses performed by main side MPU. 12 is a flowchart showing AT state processing executed by the main MPU at the start of the game. 13 is a flowchart showing an AT process executed by a main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the production control process for AT performed by production side MPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of display performance corresponding to the base performance of the AT state in the image display device, and (b) An example of the display performance corresponding to the false precursor state or the real precursor state in the image display device. (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a display effect corresponding to the end of the AT state in the image display device. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how the effects corresponding to the precursor states progress. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining combinations of symbols that result in a normal replay winning, a first special replay winning, and a second special replay winning in the second embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a winning combination lottery table when betting 3 cards. It is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the stop order of the reels and the winning pattern that is established. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a notification is made on the main line to encourage the achievement of a first special replay winning, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a notification is made on the main line to encourage the achievement of a second special replay winning. It is a flowchart which shows the stop order notification control process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the notification control process performed by production side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus process executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart showing the winning determination process executed by the main MPU. (a) to (k) are time charts showing the operation contents when the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is achieved in each game state. It is a flowchart which shows the winning determination process performed by the main side MPU in 3rd Embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing AT state processing at the start of a game executed by the main MPU in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for AT performed by main side MPU. 12 is a flowchart showing additional period processing executed by the main MPU. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the selection manner of the number of points to be awarded when an additional lottery process for the add-on period is executed by referring to a lottery table for the first add-on period, and the selection manner of the number of points to be awarded when an additional lottery process for the add-on period is executed by referring to a lottery table for the second add-on period. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution contents of the effect executed on the image display device during the first additional period. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution contents of the effect executed by the image display device during the second additional period. FIG. 6 is an electrical configuration diagram for enabling image display in a first addition period and a second addition period. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by production side MPU. A flowchart showing the performance setting process for the added period executed by the performance side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display control process for the additional period performed by the production side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing divided image rendering processing executed in VDP. 13A to 13D are explanatory diagrams for explaining how drawing data is created in a frame area of a frame buffer that is the drawing target by executing drawing processing for a divided image. 12 is a flowchart illustrating divided image rendering processing executed in VDP in the fifth embodiment. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device when the pseudo-bonus state without transition to the AT state ends in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for pseudo bonuses performed by main side MPU. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the performance control process for pseudo bonuses performed by the performance side MPU, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the performance side RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing of various end displays performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the control process of the warning display performed by production side MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how a bonus end display and a caution display are executed when a pseudo bonus state without transition to an AT state ends. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device when the AT state ends, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a revival effect. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for AT performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd control process of the game section performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the production control process for AT performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a revival support performance performed by the performance side MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how an AT end display and a caution display are executed in the AT state. A flowchart showing the revival-compatible performance processing executed by the performance side MPU in the seventh embodiment. 13A to 13C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution content of the revival-responsive effect when a bet setting for gaming media is made to start a new game before the timing for the revival effect to occur. (A) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device when the reel stop operation is performed according to the stop order notified by the image display device in the eighth embodiment, and (B) FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device when the reel stopping operation is performed in a stopping order different from the stopping order notified by the display device. It is a flowchart which shows the stop order monitoring process performed by production side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a medium attachment process executed by the main MPU. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the display information update process performed by production side MPU, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the storage area of production side RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for AT performed by main side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the AT state processing executed by the main MPU at the start of a game. It is a flowchart which shows the production control process for AT performed by production side MPU. 11A to 11I are time charts showing how the AT end display and the caution display are executed in the AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT performed by the main side MPU in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production control process for AT performed by production side MPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device when the setting process of clear end display is executed, and (b) the beginning of the second section after the setting process of clear end display is executed. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device when a result display setting process and a caution display setting process are executed in response to reception of a conversion command. It is an assembled perspective view of the left reel in a 10th embodiment. (a) A connection diagram showing a drive system of a stepping motor, and (b) a diagram showing drive characteristics of a stepping motor. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of an excitation sequence table. (a) It is an explanatory view for explaining an acceleration table, and (b) It is an explanatory view for explaining a stop table. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel control process executed by a main MPU. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area of the main side RAM used to execute rotation control of each reel. 3 is a flowchart showing stepping motor control processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for acceleration control performed by main side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a stop control process executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a recovery process executed by a main MPU. 23 is a flowchart showing a reel control process of a master MPU in an eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for acceleration control performed by main side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing pseudo-stop start processing executed by the main MPU. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pseudo-stopped table. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how each reel moves up and down in small increments while a combination of pseudo-stop symbols exists on the main line during a pseudo-stop. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how a pseudo stop is performed in a starting game in a pseudo bonus state. 12 is a flowchart showing advantageous state processing performed by the main MPU at the start of a game in the twelfth embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an AT transition lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the initial grant number of main side MPU in 13th Embodiment. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first initial award number lottery table, (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second initial award number lottery table, and (c) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the initial award number table. FIG. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the program stored in the main side ROM and the address of the main side ROM in the 14th embodiment, and (b) it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of a 3-byte CALLS instruction. (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of a 2-byte CALLS instruction; (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of a 2-byte CALLS instruction; FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a circuit configuration provided in the main MPU to provide a 2-byte start address to the management controller of the main ROM. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for pseudo bonuses of the main side MPU in 15th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for AT performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd control process of the game section performed by main side MPU. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between programs stored in the main ROM and addresses of the main ROM. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between a program stored in a main ROM and an address of the main ROM in the sixteenth embodiment. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of a CALLV instruction, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining an index table, and (c) a program to be read when the CALLV instruction is executed. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a circuit configuration provided in the main MPU to provide the 2-byte start address of the main ROM to the management controller of the main ROM. It is a flowchart which shows the process for pseudo bonuses performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for AT performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd control process of the game section performed by main side MPU.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine 10, which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 has a plurality of wooden panels fixed to it, so that the casing 11 is formed into a box-like shape that is open toward the front.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the housing 11 using a shaft portion 15 provided on the left side of the housing 11 as a rotation axis. Note that the front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the back side thereof, and this locked state is released by unlocking the key cylinder 14 with a predetermined key.

As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12. The game panel 20 is formed with three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R arranged side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R are made of a transparent or semitransparent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through each of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 11a, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is formed into a cylindrical shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis becomes the rotational axis of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis that extends substantially horizontally, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one with each display window portion 21L, 21M, and 21R. There is. Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 21L, 21M, 21R. Furthermore, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed as if they were moving from top to bottom through the respective display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

As shown in FIG. 1, a start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20, which is operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. When the start lever 41 is operated when a predetermined number or more of gaming media (or gaming value), which is either a medal or a virtual medal, has been bet, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating at the same time.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are provided that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each stop button 42, 43, 44 is arranged directly below the display window portion 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the reel 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. Each stop button 42, 43, 44 becomes in a state where it can be stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the left reel 32L started rotating.

The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped based on the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44. The period until the execution of various processes such as the granting of a number and the management of the gaming state is completed corresponds to one game (game round).

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 by the selector 52 provided on the back of the front door 12 if the acceptance is permitted, and if the acceptance is prohibited, the medals are guided to the hopper device 53. The medals are led to a medal receiving tray 59 from a medal outlet 58 provided at the lower front of the front door 12 (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has a function of discharging medals stored in a storage tank to a medal receiving tray 59 through a medal discharge port 58 when a prize corresponding to the provision of game media is established on the main line ML, which will be described later. have. As shown in FIG. 1, below the medal slot 45, a return button 46 is provided which is pressed when the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 become stuck in the selector 52.

On the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, there are provided a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time, and a second credit insertion button 48 for inserting two virtual medals at one time. In this slot machine 10, there are two situations in which the number of gaming media (medals or virtual medals) that can be bet (i.e., bet setting) at one time is "3" and "2".

The first credit input button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and three or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In this case, the number of virtual medals decreases by three, but the number of bets becomes "3". The first credit input button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In this case, the number of virtual medals decreases by two, but the number of bets becomes "3". The first credit input button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "2", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In this case, the number of virtual medals decreases by one, but the number of bets becomes "3". The first credit input button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In this case, the number of virtual medals decreases by two, but the number of bets becomes "2". The first credit input button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In this case, the number of virtual medals decreases by one, but the number of bets becomes "2".

Note that if the first credit input button 47 is operated when the number of virtual medals stored and stored is less than the difference between the number of bets available and the current number of bets, the number of bets will be changed to that of the virtual medals. The number of virtual medals increases and the number of virtual medals becomes 0.

When the second credit input button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In this case, the number of virtual medals decreases by two, but the number of bets becomes "2". The second credit input button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In this case, the number of virtual medals decreases by one, but the number of bets becomes "2". When the second credit input button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In this case, the number of virtual medals decreases by two, but the number of bets becomes "2". The second credit input button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In this case, the number of virtual medals decreases by one, but the number of bets becomes "2".

If the second credit insertion button 48 is operated when the number of stored virtual medals is one and the current number of bets is "0," the number of bets becomes "1" and the number of virtual medals becomes zero.

The first credit input button 47 has a wider pressing surface than the second credit input button 48, which is pressed when the player operates the button. This improves the operability of the first credit input button 47.

A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. This slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores surplus inserted medals and paid-out medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement button 51 is operated in a situation where virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal ejection port 58 as real medals.

As shown in Figures 2 and 3, inside the cabinet 11, a power supply unit 54 is provided to the left of the hopper unit 53. The power supply unit 54 is provided with a power switch 55 that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and a setting key insertion hole 57 into which a setting key held by the amusement hall manager is inserted and operated to change the setting value of the slot machine 10 within the range of "1" to "6."

Next, the symbols attached to each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will be explained.

Figure 4 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Numbers from "0" to "20" are also assigned to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but these numbers are numbers used by the main control device 70 (described below) to identify the symbols that are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, and are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, these numbers will be used in the following explanation.

Symbols include "Bell" symbol (for example, 20th on left reel 32L), "Replay" symbol (for example, 19th on left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (for example, 18th on left reel 32L), " Red 7” symbol (for example, 15th on left reel 32L), “BAR” symbol (for example, 10th on left reel 32L), “Cherry” symbol (for example, 9th on left reel 32L), “White 7” symbol (For example, the 5th position on the left reel 32L). The number and arrangement order of various symbols are different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIG. 5 is a front view of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. Each of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

In this slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect the positions where the symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols of the right reel 32R. When the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is started with a predetermined number or more of gaming media bet, and a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the benefit of giving gaming media is earned. , the benefit of replaying, or the transition of gaming status.

In other words, in this slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which a prize can be won. The main line ML is set as a line extending in a straight line. Therefore, the subline SL1 connecting the upper row symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle row symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the lower row symbols of the right reel 32R, the upper row symbols of the left reel 32L, the upper row symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the upper row symbols of the right reel 32R. The connected subline SL2, the subline SL3 that connects the lower symbols of the left reel 32L, the lower symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbols of the right reel 32R, the lower symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. Even if a combination of winning symbols is established on a line extending in a straight line, such as the subline SL4 connecting the upper row symbols, the winning will not be established.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 6, a description will be given of the correspondence between the symbol combinations that result in winnings and the benefits that will be awarded when the winnings occur. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the combination of symbols that result in a winning combination and the benefits that are awarded when the winning combination occurs.

The minor prizes for which game media are awarded are the 1st supplementary prize, the 2nd supplementary prize, the 3rd supplementary prize, the 4th supplementary prize, the 5th supplementary prize, the 6th supplementary prize, the 7th supplementary prize, and the 8th supplementary prize. There are supplementary prizes, 9th supplementary prizes, 1st bell prizes, 2nd bell prizes, 1st watermelon prizes, 2nd watermelon prizes, and cherry prizes. Specifically, in the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" symbol, This will be the first supplementary prize. In the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the second supplementary prize will be won. becomes. In the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Red 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Bell" symbol, the third supplementary prize will be awarded. becomes. In the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "BELL" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the 4th supplementary prize is awarded. Become. In the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Bell" symbol, the middle reel 32M's stopping symbol is a "BAR" symbol, and the right reel 32R's stopping symbol is a "Bell" symbol, the 5th supplementary prize is awarded. Become. In the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "BAR" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "BELL" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BELL" symbol, the 6th supplementary prize is awarded. Become. In the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "White 7" symbol, the 7th supplementary prize will be awarded. becomes. In the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "White 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Bell" symbol, the 8th supplementary prize will be awarded. becomes. In the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "white 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the 9th supplementary prize will be awarded. becomes. In the case of any of the first to ninth supplementary winnings, the number of game media to be awarded becomes "1".

On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Bell" symbol, the first bell will be won. becomes. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, the second bell will be won. becomes. In the case of either the first bell winning or the second bell winning, the number of game media to be awarded becomes "15".

On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "watermelon" symbol, the first watermelon prize is won. becomes. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Watermelon" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the second watermelon is won. becomes. If either the first watermelon prize or the second watermelon prize is won, the number of game media to be awarded becomes "5". When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L becomes a "Cherry" symbol on the main line ML, a cherry prize is awarded regardless of which of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. In the case of a cherry prize, the number of game media to be awarded becomes "4".

Winnings that give the privilege of playing the next game without betting game media include a normal replay winning, a first chance replay winning, and a second chance replay winning. Specifically, on the main line ML, if the stopped symbols on the left reel 32L are "Replay" symbols, the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M are "Replay" symbols, and the stopped symbols on the right reel 32R are "Replay" symbols, On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Red 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Red 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the main line On the ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Replay" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Red 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Replay" symbol, on the main line ML If the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Replay" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Red 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, or when the left reel is on the main line ML. When the stopping symbol on the 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, a normal replay win is obtained. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the first chance replay will occur. It will be a prize. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Replay" symbol, a second chance replay occurs. It will be a prize.

If any of the above-mentioned replay wins occur, a replay benefit will be granted that will allow you to play the next game without having to bet on game media. Specifically, if one of the replays wins in a game in which "3" gaming media is bet, there is no need to bet on the gaming media, but the next game is played with "3" gaming media bet. It becomes possible to start playing the game. Additionally, if you win any replay prize in a game in which you bet the game media "2", you will not need to bet on the game media, but you will start playing the next game with the game media "2" bet. It becomes possible to do so.

There are first CB winnings and second CB winnings as state transition winnings in which only the gaming state transition is performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Red 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Red 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "White 7" symbol. If there is, the 1st CB prize will be awarded. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "white 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" symbol, then 2CB won the prize. If the first CB win is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the first CB state ST2, and if the second CB win is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the second CB state ST3 (see FIG. 19).

The first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states in which when a combination of symbols corresponding to a small winning combination stops on the main line ML, a winning is established and medals are paid out regardless of the presence or absence of a winning combination. For example, even if the winning flag corresponding to the first bell winning is not set to "1", if the combination of symbols corresponding to the first bell winning stops on the main line ML, the game media will be delivered to the player. Granted. On the other hand, replay winnings are established on the condition that the corresponding winning combination has been won in the lottery.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, reel control that is different from that in the non-CB state is performed. In the non-CB state, reel control is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, allowing the reels to slide for up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. That is, in the non-CB state, reel control is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop the reel before a specified time (190 milliseconds) elapses after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. On the other hand, in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the above reel control is performed for the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, that is, the same reel control as in the normal game, but the above reel control is not performed for the left reel 32L. Regarding the left reel 32L, reel control is performed such that the left reel 32L is allowed to slide only up to one symbol at most after the left stop button 42 is operated. That is, in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, reel control is performed on the left reel 32L to stop the reel before a specified time (75 msec) shorter than the specified time elapses after the left stop button 42 is operated.

In addition, in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the reel control that allows only one symbol to slide at most is not limited to the left reel 32L, but the reel control that allows the reel to slide by a maximum of one symbol is not limited to the left reel 32L. Control may be performed in which the reels are slid only up to one symbol, or reel control may be performed in which only a predetermined reel is slid by a maximum of one symbol. Furthermore, if the stop button is operated in a certain order, the reel control is performed such that the reel corresponding to the second operated stop button or the last operated stop button is slid up to a maximum of one symbol. Reel control may be performed in which the reel corresponding to the button is slid by a maximum of one symbol.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, if the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning is won, the replay winning is given priority, and if the replay winning is not possible, the first bell winning can be achieved. Furthermore, even if the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning is not won, the first bell winning can be achieved.

Both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are gaming states in which the amount of gaming media owned by the player is not increased. Furthermore, in both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the number of gaming media owned by the player at the end of the gaming state is greater than the number of gaming media owned by the player at the start of the gaming state. This is a gaming state in which the number of .

Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be explained.

At the top of the front door 12, as shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61 and a speaker 62 are provided, as well as an image display device 63. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and is also controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so that a light emitting effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair of left and right speakers, and the sound output is controlled so that when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, a sound or sound corresponding to the abnormality is output, and a sound or sound corresponding to the winning result is output. The sound output is controlled so that it is output. Further, the speaker 62 is controlled to output sound so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, or may be a dot matrix display device. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the display is controlled so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. The image display device 63 is also controlled so that an image corresponding to the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game is displayed on the display surface. In other words, a display performance is executed on the image display device 63.

On the game panel 20 of the front door 12, below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, there is a credit display section 65 that displays the number of virtual medals stored and stored, and a credit display section 65 that displays the number of virtual medals that are awarded when winning a small prize. In addition to displaying the number of gaming media, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified on the image display device 63, a display corresponding to the notified content is displayed, and furthermore, the management result of the game history is notified. A dual-purpose display section 66 that displays a display, and a section display section 67 that displays a display corresponding to the fact that the game section is the second section are provided. The credit display section 65 is composed of a 7-segment display, and each segment uses a monochromatic LED such as green.

FIG. 7A is a front view of a common display area 68 in which a dual-purpose display section 66 and a section display section 67 are provided. As shown in FIG. 7A, the common display area 68 includes a dual-purpose display section 66 in which two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and a section display section consisting of one light emitting section. 67 are aggregated.

When any of the small prize winnings (first to ninth compensation winnings, first bell winning, second bell winning, first watermelon winning, second watermelon winning, or cherry winning) corresponding to the award of game media is achieved, the number of game media awarded corresponding to the small prize winning is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 at the end of the game in which the small prize winning is achieved. Specifically, when any of the first to ninth compensation winnings is achieved in a non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is not displayed and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "1", thereby notifying that "1" game media has been awarded. When any of the first bell winning and the second bell winning are achieved in a non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a displays "1" and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "5", thereby notifying that "15" game media have been awarded. In addition, when either the first watermelon winning or the second watermelon winning occurs in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a becomes non-displayable and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "5", thereby notifying that "5" gaming media have been awarded. In addition, when a cherry winning occurs in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a becomes non-displayable and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "2", thereby notifying that "2" gaming media have been awarded.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the number of game media awarded by winning a small winning combination is "1". Therefore, when a small winning combination is achieved in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "1" is displayed on the right-hand 7 segment display 66b. This notifies the user that "1" game media has been awarded.

On the other hand, even if a winning is achieved in which no gaming media is awarded, such as any replay winning or any CB winning, the display corresponding to the winning will not be displayed on the combined display section 66, and in this case, each The seven segment displays 66a, 66b remain hidden. The display of the number of game media awarded on the dual-purpose display section 66 ends when the game media is bet to start the next game after the game in which the display was made, and each 7-segment display is displayed at the timing of this bet. The containers 66a and 66b are in a non-display state.

When the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified on the image display device 63, information corresponding to the notified stopping order is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. FIG. 7B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. As shown in FIG. 7(b), in this slot machine 10, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified by the image display device 63, and the first stop is the left reel 32L, and the second stop is the middle reel. 32M and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The stop order is that the left reel 32L is the first stop, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second stop is the middle reel 32M. A stop order in which the second stop is the middle reel 32M and the third stop is the left reel 32L, a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are arbitrary, and a stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest are arbitrary. There is an arbitrary stopping order and a stopping order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary.

The stop order is notified on the image display device 63 when a winning combination is won in the winning combination processing in a non-CB state, including the first bell winning data and any of the first to sixth supplementary winning data, or It can be executed when a combination including the second bell winning data and any of the seventh to ninth supplementary winning data is won. Specifically, when winning a winning combination that includes the first bell winning data and any of the first to sixth supplementary winning data, the reel 32L is moved in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning winning combination among the above-mentioned stopping orders. , 32M, and 32R are stopped, the first bell prize is established, and if reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning combination, the first to sixth supplementary winnings are made. Either one can hold true. If the first bell win is achieved, "15" gaming media will be awarded to the player as already explained, and if any of the first to sixth supplementary prizes is achieved, "1" will be given to the player as already explained. game media are given to the player.

If you win a combination that includes the 2nd bell winning data and any of the 7th to 9th supplementary winning data, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will move in the stopping order that corresponds to the current winning combination among the above stopping orders. If the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning combination, one of the 7th to 9th supplementary wins will be achieved. obtain. If the second bell win is achieved, "15" game media will be awarded to the player as already explained, and if any of the 7th to 9th supplementary prizes is achieved, "1" will be awarded as already explained. game media are given to the player.

When any of the above stop orders is notified on the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a in the dual-purpose display section 66 remains in a non-display state, while the right 7-segment display 66b , a display corresponding to the stop order of the notification target is displayed. This display content is as shown in FIG. 7(b), and the display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display section 66 is set in one-to-one correspondence with the content of the stop order notification on the image display device 63. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of display contents on the dual-purpose display section 66 may be set to correspond to some or all of the stop order notification contents on the image display device 63. Good too.

The display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display section 66 is different from the display content that is displayed when the dual-purpose display section 66 displays a display corresponding to the provision of game media. This makes it easy to distinguish whether the content displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66 corresponds to the number of game media awarded or the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIGS. 8A and 8B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device 63 and the display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display unit 66.

When the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified on the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. Unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed, and in each unit display image G1 to G3, images corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. FIG. 8(a) shows how the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. , the left unit display image G1 displays an image "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L, and the middle unit display image G2 displays an image "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M. , an image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R is displayed on the right unit display image G3.

The image display device 63 displays an image notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as described above, while the dual-purpose display section 66 displays the images that notify the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. 8(b). "L" is displayed corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R. That is, on the image display device 63, unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed, and in each unit display image G1 to G3, the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the same order. While a corresponding image is displayed, the dual-purpose display section 66 displays a display that is unrelated to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Thereby, even if a display corresponding to the notification content of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display content on the image display device 63.

The display range of the dual-purpose display section 66 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63. From this point as well, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the dual-purpose display section 66 compared to the image display device 63. Further, the dual-purpose display section 66 is located on the opposite side to the image display device 63 across the display window sections 21L, 21M, and 21R that make the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R visible. As a result, the dual-purpose display section 66 is placed at a position separated from the image display device 63, which also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the dual-purpose display section 66.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, a display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the dual-purpose display section 66 and a display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display device 63. This display is started after the lottery process for the combination is performed and before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is activated. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the dual-purpose display section 66 is started earlier than the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63. However, these displays may be started at the same time or substantially at the same time, or the display start order may be reversed. In addition, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the dual-purpose display unit 66 and the image display device 63 is a command to stop all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed. will be terminated if this occurs.

The dual-purpose display section 66 is arranged at the center of the common display area 68, whereas the section display section 67 is arranged at the corner side of the common display area 68. The section display section 67 is a display section for notifying that the game section is the second section SC2 of the first section SC1 and the second section SC2 (see FIG. 19). The second section SC2 refers to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the player to achieve winnings that are advantageous to the player when winning different winning combinations depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. As a result of the notification of the stop order, the expected value of acquiring gaming media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of gaming media betted in one game" from the "expected number of gaming media awarded in one game") becomes "0". This is an interval in which an advantageous gaming state (specifically, a pseudo-bonus state ST4 and an AT state ST5) that can exceed the maximum value of ``10'' can be started, and an interval in which the advantageous gaming state can continue. On the other hand, the first section SC1 is a section in which the recorded advantageous gaming state does not start and the advantageous gaming state does not continue.

The section display section 67 shows when winning a winning combination that is subject to different winnings depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, or a winning winning combination that differs depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. When the player is informed of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which makes it possible to win an advantageous prize for the player, an advantageous gaming state occurs in which the expected value of acquisition of gaming media exceeds "0", the light is turned on. becomes. In this case, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 correspond to the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state, while the second section SC2, which is neither the pseudo-bonus state ST4 nor the AT state ST5, does not correspond to the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when transitioning from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2, the section display section 67 may or may not switch from the off state to the on state. If the section display section 67 is maintained in the off state when moving to the second section SC2, when the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5 is started in the second section SC2, the section display section 67 will change from the off state. The light will turn on. When the section display section 67 is in the lighting state, the lighting state is maintained until the second section SC2 ends, and it is turned off when the second section SC2 ends and the transition to the first section SC1 occurs. Become.

As described above, the section display section 67 is arranged in such a manner that once it is turned on in the second section SC2, it remains lit until the end of the second section SC2. The dual-purpose display unit 66 is turned on when a game medium is given and turned off when the next game starts, and the image display device 63 displays the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. When the game is played, the light is turned on, and when the game ends, the light is turned off. Therefore, in a configuration in which the section display section 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 so as not to be too noticeable to the player, in the situation of the second section SC2, only the section display section 67 is displayed in the common display area 68. It becomes possible to actively cause a situation where the lighting is on, and it becomes easier for the manager of the game hall to check the section display section 67.

In addition, instead of the configuration in which the lighting state of the interval display section 67 is maintained in the second interval SC2, a configuration may be adopted in which a blinking display is performed on the interval display section 67 at a predetermined period in the second interval SC2. Furthermore, other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used as the dual-purpose display section 66 and the section display section 67.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main controller 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main controller 70 is attached to a back plate 11b that forms the back surface of the housing 11. The main control device 70 includes a main control board 71 housed in a board box 81. An MPU 72 is mounted on an element mounting surface, which is one board surface of the main control board 71. The board box 81 is formed transparent so that the MPU 72 housed in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81. Although the board box 81 is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 housed in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81. The main controller 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 in a board box 81 such that an opposing wall 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10. Therefore, by opening the front door 12 toward the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 and exposing the internal space of the housing 11, it becomes possible to visually see the opposing wall 82 of the board box 81, and also to expose the internal space of the housing 11. It becomes possible to visually observe the MPU 72 through the opposing wall portion 82.

The board box 81 is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies back and forth, and these plurality of case bodies are provided with a structure to prevent separation of these case bodies and to leave traces when these case bodies are separated. A coupling portion 83 is provided. A plurality of coupling portions 83 are arranged in parallel on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 81 . As a result, even if some of the joints 83 are broken and the case body is separated in a state in which separation of the case body is prevented using some joints 83, another joint By bringing 83 into the connected state, it is possible to prevent the case body from separating again. Furthermore, since the joint 83 is destroyed when the case body is separated and traces thereof remain, it is possible to determine whether or not the case body has been illegally separated by visually checking the joint part 83. Become. Furthermore, a seal 84 is pasted on one side of the board box 81 other than the side on which the coupling portion 83 is arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the seal 84 is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body. This makes it possible to leave traces of the seal 84 if it is peeled off when the case body is separated.

As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70. The production control device 90 is arranged behind the image display device 63 in the front door 12 in an overlapping manner. The production control device 90 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 based on commands received from the main control device 70. Note that the production control device 90 has a control board housed in a board box like the main control device 70.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram of FIG. 9.

As already explained, the MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71 of the main control device 70. The MPU 72 includes a ROM 73 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 72, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73. A RAM 74, a random number circuit 75 that sequentially updates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range based on a clock signal output from a clock circuit, and a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency are provided. In addition, the MPU 72 includes an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 73 and RAM 74 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 72, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 72, there is a reel unit 31, a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a that individually detect the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44, and a medal input. An inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted from the mouth 45, credit insertion detection sensors 47a and 48a that individually detect the operation of each credit input button 47 and 48, and a payment detection sensor 51a that detects the operation of the payment button 51. , a payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, a reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54, a setting key detection sensor that detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57, etc. Various sensors are connected to the MPU 72, and signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 72.

Connected to the output side of the MPU 72 are the reel unit 31, the selector drive section 52a provided in the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the dual-purpose display section 66, the section display section 67, the production control device 90, and the like. In each game, the MPU 72 controls the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R of the reel unit 31. The selector 52 guides the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 to the hopper device 53 after detecting them with the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if acceptance is permitted, and directs them to the hopper device 53 after detecting them with the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if acceptance is prohibited. It has a function of discharging medals to the medal receiving tray 59 without detecting them. The selector drive unit 52a has a function of switching the state of the selector 52 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state, and specifically, moves the passage switching piece provided on the selector 52 to the reception permission position. and the position for prohibiting reception. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state by switching the output state and stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a.

The MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53 when a small winning combination is established and medals are to be paid out. Further, the MPU 72 controls the display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 so that when the award of game media occurs, the number of game media to which the award is made is displayed. Furthermore, the MPU 72 controls the display of the section display unit 67 so that when a notification start opportunity occurs in the second section SC2, notification that the second section SC2 is in progress is performed. Furthermore, the MPU 72 controls the display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the game management result is displayed. In addition, the MPU 72 transmits a command to the production control device 90 at each timing of each game, and also transmits a command to the production control device 90 to notify the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display device 63. In this case, display control of the dual-purpose display section 66 is executed so that a display corresponding to the content to be notified is performed. In this case, direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the effect control device 90, whereas direct display control of the dual-purpose display section 66 is performed by the MPU 72. In other words, direct display control is performed in the production control device 90 for the image display device 63, which is the target of relatively complicated display control, and the dual-purpose display unit 66, which is the target of relatively simple display control. Direct display control is executed by the MPU 72. Thereby, while reducing the processing load on the MPU 72, it is possible to perform both a display that emphasizes increasing attention to the performance and a display that emphasizes reliability.

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply device 54 is equipped with a power supply section and a power outage monitoring circuit that supply drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 70, and the power outage monitoring circuit supplies power to the power supply section from an external power source. monitors the current voltage, and outputs a power outage signal to the MPU 72 when the voltage falls below the reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes processing at the time of a power outage by receiving a power outage signal, and after the power is restored, it is possible to return to the processing state before the power outage. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power outage power supply section for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power outage in a situation where the supply of operating power from an external power source is cut off. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, data is retained in the RAM 74 when backup power can be supplied from the power supply unit during a power outage (for example, on the 1st or 2nd day). be done.

The production control device 90 includes a production control board 91 for controlling execution of various notifications and various productions. The production control board 91 is equipped with an MPU 92. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 93. A certain RAM 94 is built in, as well as a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like.

Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips. In addition, although backup power is not supplied to the RAM 94 from the power-off power supply part of the power supply unit 54 in a situation where the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, the configuration is such that backup power is supplied to the RAM 94. Good too.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. As already explained, the MPU 72 of the main controller 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and various commands are received from the MPU 72. An upper lamp 61, a speaker 62, and an image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. The MPU 92 controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61, the sound output of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63 based on commands received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, thereby performing various notifications and various effects. make it happen.

Although not shown, the production control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, etc. in addition to the MPU 92. The VDP is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the image display device 63. The VDP intervenes in the reading and writing of data in the video RAM, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the image display device 63. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the image display device 63. This character ROM stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63. When the MPU 92 determines the execution content of the effect based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 sends a drawing list that instructs the content of the image corresponding to each update timing to the VDP according to the determined execution content of the effect. Output. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and uses the read image data to create display data in the video RAM. Then, the VDP outputs an image signal corresponding to the created display data to the image display device 63, thereby causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73, and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are respectively referred to as the main side MPU 72, the main side ROM 73, and the main side RAM 74, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the production control device 90 are respectively referred to as the production side. They are called MPU92, production side ROM93, and production side RAM94.

Next, the processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained. First, the main processing executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 10.

In the main processing, initialization processing is first performed (step S101). In the initialization process, interrupts by timer interrupt processing are permitted, and various initial settings are made for the register group, I/O device, etc. in the main MPU 72. Thereafter, it is determined whether the power is turned on with the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on (step S102). If the power is turned on with the ON operation performed using the setting key (step S102: YES), if the reset button 56 is not pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: NO), After executing the partial clearing process (step S104), the setting value updating process is executed (step S106). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: YES), after executing the all clear process (step S105), the setting value update process is executed (step S106). In the partial clearing process (step S104), a part of the area of the main side RAM 74 is initialized, and in the all clearing process (step S105), all areas of the main side RAM 74 are initialized. In the partial clearing process, areas other than the area where the 2nd CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 are cleared to "0" and initialized, and in the all clearing process, all areas including the area where the 2nd CB winning data is stored are initialized. The area is cleared to "0" and initialized.

In the setting value update process, the current setting value is read on the condition that the setting key is inserted and turned on, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display section 65. When the setting value update process is executed, either the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) has been executed before that, so a credit is displayed at the start of the setting value update process. In the section 65, a display corresponding to the set value being "1" is displayed. In the setting value update process, the setting value is updated by "1" each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated setting value is displayed on the credit display section 65. Note that if the reset button 56 is operated in a situation where the set value is "6", the set value is updated to "1". When the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated, the setting value selected at that time becomes the setting value set in the current setting value update process, and the setting value update process ends. do. In this case, the display of the set value on the credit display section 65 is ended. Thereafter, the process shifts to normal processing (step S107). The normal processing will be explained in detail later.

If the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S102: NO), the power recovery process from step S108 onwards is executed. The power restoration process is a process for restoring the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power was shut off. In the power restoration process, it is determined whether the setting values of the slot machine 10 are normal by checking the main side RAM 74 (step S108). Specifically, the setting value is determined to be normal if it is any one of "1" to "6", and it is determined to be abnormal if it is equal to or greater than "0" or "7". If the set value is normal, it is determined whether the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S109). A power outage flag is provided in the main side RAM 74, and when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped and a predetermined power outage process is normally executed, the power outage flag is set to "1". is set. If the power outage flag is set to "1", it is checked whether the RAM determination value is normal (step S110). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked to see if the value is normal.

If an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S108 to S110, it means that the power outage processing at the previous power outage was executed normally. In this case, by writing the value of the stack pointer saved in the main side RAM 74 to the stack pointer of the main side MPU 72 and restoring the data saved in the main side RAM 74 to the register of the main side MPU 72, the register of the main side MPU 72 can be changed. The state is restored to the state before the power was cut off (step S111). Furthermore, the power failure flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S112). Thereafter, after transmitting a power restoration command for recognizing the execution of the power restoration process to the production side MPU 92 (step S113), the process returns to the address before the power was cut off (step S114).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in any of steps S108 to S110, an operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, the execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S115), and by clearing all output ports of the main MPU 72 to "0", all actuators connected to the relevant output ports are disabled. is turned off (step S116), and an error notification process is executed to notify the hall manager and the like of the occurrence of an error (step S117). And it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing a partial clear process (step S104) or a complete clear process (step S105).

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 11. Note that the timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 milliseconds.

In the register save process (step S201), the values of all registers in the main MPU 72 that are used in the normal process described below are saved to the main RAM 74. In step S202, it is confirmed whether the power outage flag is set to "1", and if the power outage flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S203 and power outage processing is executed.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the power outage processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed, and if the transmission has not been completed, this processing is ended, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing, and the command transmission is completed. If the command transmission has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is stored in the main RAM 74. Thereafter, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, a determination value for determining whether the data in the main side RAM 74 is normal or not when the power outage is resolved is calculated and stored in the main side RAM 74, and subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the above processing, the system enters an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If the power outage flag is not set to "1" in step S202, various processes starting from step S204 are performed. In step S204, a watchdog timer clearing process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S205, interrupt end declaration processing is performed to enable the next timer interrupt to be set for the main MPU 72 itself. In step S206, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motor provided on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In step S207, the status of various sensors connected to the input ports is read, and a sensor monitoring process is performed to monitor whether the read results are normal. In step S208, a timer subtraction process is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S209, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the outside. In step S210, a command output process is performed to send various commands to the performance side MPU 92. In step S211, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S212, the values of each register saved in the main side RAM 74 in the previous step S201 are restored to the corresponding register in the main side MPU 72.

In step S213, a management process is executed to manage the game history and display contents corresponding to the management results on the combined display unit 66. Specifically, the ratio of the total number of games in the second section SC2, which will be described later, to the total number of games is calculated, and the ratio of the calculation result is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the ratio of the total number of games in the second section SC2 to the total number of games is calculated for each set value. In this configuration, even if the setting value is changed, the calculation may be continued without initializing the ratio information that is performed for each setting value. Thereafter, in step S214, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processes is ended.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 12.

First, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt (step S301). Thereafter, a start waiting process is executed (step S302). In the start waiting process, if any replay winning has been achieved in the previous game, the bet setting counter 74a provided in the main side RAM 74 sets the same number of bets as the previous bet number (see FIG. 9). Set to . The bet number setting counter 74a is a counter used by the main MPU 72 to specify the number of bets for the game to be executed. If a replay prize has not been established in the previous game, if the current gaming state is not the 2nd CB state ST3, set "3" as the maximum number of bets for this game, and the current gaming state is set to 2nd CB state ST3. If it is the 2CB state ST3, "2" is set as the upper limit number of bets for the current game. On the condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is not the current bet upper limit number, it is determined whether the number of stored virtual medals is one or more and a valid bet operation has been performed. The main side RAM 74 is provided with a credit counter 74b (see FIG. 9) as an area for storing the number of stored virtual medals. If a valid bet operation is performed when the value of the credit counter 74b is 1 or more, a bet setting process is executed.

In the bet setting process, when the first credit input button 47 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is greater than or equal to the upper limit bet number, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is changed. The maximum number of bets is set, and the value corresponding to the number of virtual medals used for the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than the maximum number of bets. If so, the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0" after adding the value of the credit counter 74b to the bet number setting counter 74a. In the bet number setting process, when the second credit input button 48 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is 2 or more, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is is set to "2", and the value corresponding to the number of virtual medals used at the time of the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than 2, If there is, the value of the credit counter 74b is added to the bet number setting counter 74a, and then the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0".

In the start waiting process, if one medal is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a due to a medal being inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is the bet upper limit. If the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is less than the upper limit number of bets, 1 is added to the value of the bet number setting counter 74a, and if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is greater than or equal to the upper limit number of bets, the value of the credit counter 74b of the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1. When the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is greater than or equal to the upper limit number of bets and the value of the credit counter 74b is greater than or equal to the upper limit stored memory number (specifically, "50"), an acceptance prohibition process is executed. By executing the reception prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, the medal is discharged to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

In the start waiting process, if the settlement button 51 is operated, the settlement process is executed. In the settlement process, if a replay win has not been achieved, the hopper device 53 is controlled and driven so that the number of medals corresponding to the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b are discharged to the medal tray 59. In this case, the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" and the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0". On the other hand, if a replay win has been achieved, the hopper device 53 is controlled and driven so that the number of medals corresponding to the value of the credit counter 74b are discharged to the medal tray 59. In this case, the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0".

After executing the start waiting process in step S302, it is determined whether or not the number of bets that can be set to start the game has been completed (step S303). If a negative determination is made in step S303, the process returns to step S302. If an affirmative determination is made in step S303, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304). If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to step S302.

If the start lever 41 is operated (step S304: YES), the main line ML is validated and then reception prohibition processing is executed (step S305). By executing the reception prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, the medal is discharged to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

Thereafter, in step S306, a start setting process is executed to perform various settings when the game is started, and in step S307, a role lottery process is executed to perform a lottery for the role in the current game. In step S308, a reel control process is executed to drive and control each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the current winning combination.

Then, the medium granting process is executed (step S309). In the medium granting process, if a small win has been achieved in the current game, a process is executed to grant the player a number of game media corresponding to the small win. Specifically, when granting virtual medals, a value corresponding to the current small win is added to the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74, and if the value of the credit counter 74b has reached the upper limit of the number of stored memories, the hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the number of medals exceeding the upper limit of the number of stored memories is paid out to the medal tray 59. In addition, in the medium granting process, the display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is controlled so that a display corresponding to the number of game media to be granted this time is displayed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the dual-purpose display unit 66 continues until a new bet of game media is made.

Thereafter, a corresponding process at the end of the game is executed to enable setting of the game state and game period corresponding to the result of the current game (step S310). Further, an external output setting process for outputting the status of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the gaming hall is executed (step S311). Thereafter, an acceptance permission process is executed (step S312). By executing the acceptance permission process, the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a and then collected by the hopper device 53.

Next, the role selection process executed in step S307 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 13.

In step S401, a random number to be used when determining the validity of a winning combination is acquired. This slot machine 10 is configured to latch the random number from the random number circuit 75 when the start lever 41 is operated. The random number circuit 75 generates random numbers from "0" to "65535", and the main MPU 72 stores the value latched by the random number circuit 75 in the main RAM 74 when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed. With this configuration, it becomes possible to obtain a random number promptly at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it becomes possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The random number circuit 75 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, the lottery table for determining whether the winning combination is a winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S402). In this slot machine 10, six setting values from "1" to "6" are prepared in advance, and by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turning it ON and performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to set which setting value corresponds to the winning probability for the winning combination to be executed. The winning probability is more favorable for the player when the setting value is "n+1" than when it is "n". Specifically, the winning probability of a predetermined combination is higher when the setting value is "n+1" than when it is "n", so that the setting value is more favorable for the player than when it is "n". In addition, even if the setting value is the same level, it is more favorable for the player when the number of gaming media bet is "3" than when it is "2". In addition, there are a first CB state ST2 and a second CB state ST3 as game states. In step S402, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current setting value, the current number of bets, and the current game state is selected.

The lottery table in the non-CB state will be described by taking as an example the case where the set value is "3". FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning combination table when betting 3 cards, which is selected when the number of bets is "3", and FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning combination table selected when the number of bets is "2". It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a winning combination lottery table when two cards are bet. Note that in the following description, reference is made to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 16 as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the index value IV is set in the winning combination table regardless of whether a 3-card bet or a 2-card bet is made. Each index value IV is associated with winning data (that is, winning combination), and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding index value IV in relation to the maximum value (“65535”) of the random number circuit 75. Also, the number of index value IVs is the same when betting 3 coins and when betting 2 coins, and the types of winning data set for each index value IV are 3 coin bets except for index value IV = 17. It is the same when betting 2 cards and when betting 2 cards.

Specifically, the index values IV=1 to 6 are set with the first bell winning data and any of the first to sixth supplementary winning data. If you win with index value IV=1, as shown in FIG. If the third stop (the reel where the last stop command was issued) is the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the first bell is guaranteed to win regardless of the timing of operating each stop button 42 to 44. , and in other cases, the first supplementary prize may be established. If you win with index value IV=2, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to 44 The first bell winning is guaranteed regardless of the operation timing, and in other cases, the fourth supplementary winning can be achieved. If you win with index value IV=3, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, each stop button 42 to 44 The first bell winning is guaranteed regardless of the operation timing, and the third supplementary winning can be achieved in other cases. If you win with index value IV=4, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to 44 The first bell winning is guaranteed regardless of the operation timing, and the sixth supplementary winning can be achieved in other cases. If you win with index value IV=5, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to 44 The first bell winning is guaranteed regardless of the operation timing, and the second supplementary winning can be achieved in other cases. If you win with index value IV=6, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to 44 The first bell winning is guaranteed regardless of the operation timing, and the fifth supplementary winning can be achieved in other cases.

In this slot machine 10, as already explained, in the non-CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled so that they can be slid up to a maximum of 4 symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. It will be done. In other words, reel control is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop the reel before a predetermined time (190 milliseconds) elapses after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. By performing such reel control, it is possible to make it easier to win a prize corresponding to a winning combination, and to avoid winning a prize corresponding to a non-winning combination. becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R constitutes a combination of symbols for winning a prize. If there are five or more symbols between the constituent symbols, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML depending on the timing of operation of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 (this phenomenon is also referred to as "missing"). say). The 1st bell prize, the 2nd bell prize, and various replay prizes are prizes that will not be missed if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order. Watermelon winnings, second watermelon winnings, cherry winnings, first CB winnings, and second CB winnings are winning modes that may be missed depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 relative to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the index values IV=7 to 9, the second bell winning data is set and one of the seventh to ninth supplementary winning data is set. In the case of winning with index value IV=7, as shown in FIG. The second bell winning is guaranteed regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the seventh supplementary winning can be achieved. If you win with index value IV = 8, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the types of reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped second and third and the operation of each stop button 42 to 44. The second bell winning is guaranteed regardless of the timing, and the ninth supplementary winning can be achieved in other cases. If you win with index value IV=9, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the types of reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped second and third and the operation of each stop button 42 to 44. A second bell prize is definitely achieved regardless of the timing, and an eighth supplementary prize can be achieved in other cases.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the first bell winning data is set to the index value IV=10. If a win is achieved with the index value IV=10, as shown in FIG. 16, the 1st bell prize is guaranteed regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. .

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, only the first watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV=11. If the win is achieved with the index value IV=11, the first watermelon prize can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, as shown in FIG. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first watermelon prize will not be achieved. As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, only the second watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV=12. In the case of winning with index value IV=12, as shown in FIG. 16, the second watermelon prize can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the second watermelon prize will not be achieved.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, only the cherry winning data is set to the index value IV=13. In the case of a win with the index value IV=13, as shown in FIG. 16, a cherry win can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L, there is a possibility that a cherry prize will not be achieved.

As shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, only the first chance replay winning data is set for index value IV=14. When a win occurs with index value IV=14, as shown in FIG. 16, the first chance replay winning is surely established regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Also, as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, only the second chance replay winning data is set for index value IV=15. When a win occurs with index value IV=15, as shown in FIG. 16, the second chance replay winning is surely established regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Also, as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, only the normal replay winning data is set for index value IV=16. If a win occurs with index value IV = 16, as shown in Figure 16, a normal replay win is guaranteed regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44.

For the index value IV=17, only the 1st CB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 14 in the role lottery table when betting 3 cards, and as shown in FIG. 15 in the role lottery table when betting 2 cards. As shown, only the second CB winning data is set. In other words, the 1st CB winning data is data that is set as a winning combination only when the number of bets on the gaming medium is "3", and the 1st CB winning data is the data that is set as a winning combination only when the number of bets on the gaming medium is "3". It can be true. In addition, the 2nd CB winning data is data that is set as a winning combination only when the number of bets on gaming media is "2", and the 2nd CB winning data is only set when the number of bets on gaming media is "2". It can be true. When the first CB winning data is set, if the number of bets on the game medium is "3", the first CB winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first CB prize will not be achieved. When the second CB winning data is set, if the number of bets on the game medium is "2", the second CB winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. 16. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the second CB prize will not be achieved.

Here, the winning data other than the 1st CB winning data and the 2nd CB winning data will be erased in the winning game regardless of whether the corresponding winning is achieved or not, and will be deleted in the game after the winning game. is not carried over. On the other hand, the 1st CB winning data and the 2nd CB winning data can be cleared by clearing the main side RAM 74 (for the 1st CB winning data, a partial clearing process (step S104) or a complete clearing process (step S105)), the 2nd CB winning data Unless the all clear process (step S105) is performed, the game will be stored and held until the corresponding winning is achieved, even if it is a game subsequent to the winning game. In this case, in a game where either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is carried over, the index values IV corresponding to the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are excluded from the lottery targets.

In other words, if the first CB winning data is set in the main RAM 74 as a result of a game being played with the number of bets being "3", and the first CB winning data is carried over because the first CB winning data is not established, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets being "3", and the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets being "2". Also, if the second CB winning data is set in the main RAM 74 as a result of a game being played with the number of bets being "2", and the second CB winning data is carried over because the second CB winning data is not established, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets being "3", and the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets being "2". This makes it possible to prevent either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data from being newly stored even if either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data has already been stored, and makes it possible to prevent multiple CB winning data from being accumulated and stored.

When the role selection table for betting three coins in FIG. 14 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV=1, the probability of winning when the index value IV=2, the probability of winning when the index value IV=3, the probability of winning when the index value IV=4, the probability of winning when the index value IV=5, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=6 are each about 1/21.8. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=7, the probability of winning when the index value IV=8, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=9 are each about 1/21.8. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=10 is about 1/9.4. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=11 is about 1/164. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=12 is about 1/146. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=13 is about 1/423. Furthermore, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 14 is approximately 1/328. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 15 is approximately 1/164. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 16 is approximately 1/7.3. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 17 is approximately 1/3.3.

On the other hand, when the winning combination table when betting 2 cards in FIG. The probability is low. Specifically, when the winning combination table is selected when 2 coins are bet, the probability of winning at each index value IV = 1 to 16 is the probability when the winning combination table when 3 coins is bet is selected. The probability is less than 2/3. As a result, a game that is executed in a situation where ``3'' game media is bet is more likely to involve the granting of game media than a game that is executed in a situation where ``2'' game media is bet. It becomes possible to increase the probability of occurrence of a small prize winning and a replay winning in which a replay is given.

However, when the winning combination table is selected when 2 bets are made, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is about 1/2.2. On the other hand, when the winning combination table for betting 3 cards is selected as described above, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is about 1/3.3. As a result, the probability that the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 in a game executed in a situation where a game medium of "2" is bet is calculated when a game medium of "3" is bet. It is possible to make the probability that the first CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 higher than that in the game played.

In addition, the main side ROM 73 contains a winning lottery process for each of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 (FIG. CB lottery table referred to in ) is stored. Only one index value IV is set in the CB lottery table, and normal replay winning data is set in that one index value IV. The probability of winning with the index value IV is 3/10, and if the index value IV wins, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will stop if the left stop button 42 is operated at a predetermined timing. A regular replay prize will be won regardless of the order. If the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not at a predetermined timing, a normal replay winning will not be achieved even if normal replay winning data is stored. On the other hand, if the winning is achieved with the index value IV but the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not at the predetermined timing, or if the winning is not achieved with the index value IV, the first bell winning may be achieved.

Here, index values IV other than index value IV=12 and 15 have the same winning probability among the set values of "1" to "6". This applies whether the number of bets on the game media is "3" or "2". On the other hand, the winning probabilities for index values IV=12 and 15 are different between the set values of "1" to "6". Specifically, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 12 is the lowest when the setting value is "1", the higher the setting value is, the higher the winning probability is, and the highest when the setting value is "6". expensive. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV=15 is the lowest when the set value is "1", the higher the set value is, the higher the winning probability is, and the highest when the set value is "6". This makes it possible to provide a difference in advantageousness between the set values "1" to "6".

Returning to the description of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), after selecting the lottery table in step S402 and setting the index value IV to "1" (step S403), the determination value used to determine whether the winning combination is correct or not is determined. DV is set (step S404). In this judgment value setting process, a new judgment value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current judgment value DV. In addition, in the first judgment value setting process, the value of the random number obtained in step S401 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the index value IV=1, which is the current index value IV, is set to the value of the random number. is added to obtain a new judgment value DV.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the combination corresponding to the index value IV is valid (step S405). In determining the validity of the combination, it is determined whether the determination value DV exceeds "65535". If it exceeds "65535" (step S405: YES), a winning data acquisition process is executed to set winning data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 (step S406).

If the judgment value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S405: NO), it means that the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV has failed. In such a case, after adding 1 to the index value IV (step S407), it is determined whether there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether there is a determination target to be determined (step S408). Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a target to be determined, the process returns to step S404 and the determination of the validity of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S404, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV used to judge the validity of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S405, the winning combination is determined based on the determination value DV.

When the process of step S406 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S408, it means that the determination of the validity of the winning combination has ended. In this case, a first stop information setting process is performed to set stop information for reel stop control (step S409). Thereafter, in step S410, an advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is executed, and in step S411, a first control process for the game section is executed. The processing contents of steps S410 and S411 will be explained later.

Thereafter, a stop order notification control process is executed (step S412). In the stop order notification control process, if the current gaming state is a pseudo-bonus state ST4 or an AT state ST5 (see FIG. 19), which will be described later, in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), any of the index values IV=1 to 6 is selected. If the winning number is 3, the display corresponds to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which makes it possible to win the first bell, provided that the number of bets in the current game is "3". is executed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, which makes it possible to win the first bell, is notified on the image display device 63. It is transmitted to the production side MPU92. In addition, if you win one of the index values IV = 7 to 9 in the winning combination lottery process (Figure 13), the second A display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that makes it possible to achieve a bell win is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32M that make it possible to achieve a second bell win. A command is sent to the production side MPU 92 to notify the stop order of 32R on the image display device 63. When the production side MPU 92 receives a command corresponding to notification of the stop order as described above, it controls the image display device 63 to display the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the command. . In addition, if the number of bets in this game is "2", it is assumed that one of the index values IV = 1 to 9 has been won in the hand lottery process (Figure 13) in the pseudo bonus state ST4 or AT state ST5. In this case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified on the image display device 63 and the dual-purpose display unit 66, but the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified as in the case where the bet number is "3". It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is executed.

Thereafter, a game start command transmission process is executed (step S413). In the transmission process, if any role has been won in the current role lottery process (Figure 13), information corresponding to the winning role and information corresponding to the current gaming state are sent. and information corresponding to the processing results of steps S410 and S411 are set in a game start command, and the game start command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. The game start command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that a new game has started, and is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize various information determined by the main side MPU 72. . When the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command, it grasps various information about the current game from the game start command, and determines the contents of the production in a manner according to the grasped various information. Then, a data table corresponding to the content of the determined performance is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94, and according to the read data table, the light emission of the upper lamp 61 is controlled, the sound output of the speaker 62 is controlled, and the display of the image display device 63 is performed. Execute control.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S308 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 17.

First, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R (step S501). In the rotation start process, it is checked whether a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the previous game, and if it has not elapsed. In this case, the process waits until the wait time elapses. If the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and rotation start information is set in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74. By performing such processing, acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing of step S206 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating. Thereafter, the process waits until each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R rotates at a predetermined rotational speed, and then ends the rotation start process. Further, the main side MPU 72 can generate a stop command by lighting up the lamps (not shown) of each stop button 42 to 44 when the rotational speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R reaches a constant speed. This will be notified to players, etc.

Thereafter, it is determined whether any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S502). If none of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, the process of step S502 is repeatedly executed until one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When it is determined that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, it is determined whether the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been generated. (Step S503). If a stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S502, and the process of step S502 is repeatedly executed until one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S504). The stop instruction command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize which stop button 42 to 44 has been operated to generate a stop instruction. When a stop command is transmitted, stop control processing shown in steps S505 to S511 is performed to stop the rotating reels.

In the stop control process, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position (specifically, the lower stage) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is checked (step S505). Specifically, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. Thereafter, based on the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped this time is calculated (step S506).

In this slot machine 10, as a stopping mode in which each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, there is a stopping mode in which the reached symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. A stopping mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped after sliding for 1 symbol, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding for 2 symbols, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding for 3 symbols, and a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding for 4 symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are available, including a stopping mode in which the slide is stopped after sliding. Therefore, in step S506, a value between "0" and "4" is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74.

Thereafter, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stopped symbol to be actually stopped at the base position is determined (step S507). Then, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stopped symbol are equal (step S508), and if they are equal, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R A reel stop process is performed to stop the rotation of the reel (step S509). After that, it is determined whether all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped (step S510). If all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed (step S511), and the process returns to step S502.

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), and by using the stop information, , when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to stop, it is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") for the reached symbol that has reached the base position. As the stop information, slip number data indicating the correspondence between each symbol and the slip number is stored in advance in the main side ROM 73 in correspondence with each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the slip number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is derived while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating. .

As a process for setting the above-mentioned stop information, a stop information first setting process is executed in step S409 of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), and a process is executed in step S511 of the reel control process (FIG. 17). There is a second stop information setting process. In the stop information first setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the winning combination lottery process. The second stop information setting process is a process for changing the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74 in the first stop information setting process or the previous second stop information setting process after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the stop numbers of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. .

When it is determined in step S510 that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a winning determination process is executed in step S512. In the winning determination process, the type of symbols stopped on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is identified. Then, based on the contents of the winning data stored in the main RAM 74, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning role in the role selection process, and if it is a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning role, a winning role is established and a winning corresponding process is executed. In the winning corresponding process, if the winning is a small role winning, information on the number of game media to be awarded is set in the main RAM 74 so that game media can be awarded in the media awarding process. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed so that a replay setting process is executed in the next start waiting process.

After executing the winning determination process, a winning result command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S513). The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not a winning has been achieved this time, and if a winning has been achieved, data indicating the type of winning.

Next, the corresponding process when the game ends, which is executed in step S310 of the normal process (FIG. 12), will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 18. Note that since the process of step S310 in the normal process (FIG. 12) is executed after the reel control process (step S308), the corresponding process at the end of the game is to stop the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game. It will be executed after

First, CB processing is executed to perform transition control and progress control of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S601). In the CB process, if the first CB winning is achieved in the current game, the first CB status flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" and the first CB winning data in the main side RAM 74 is cleared. Then, a first CB winning command indicating that the state has shifted to the first CB state ST2 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. As a result, the gaming state becomes the first CB state ST2. In the first CB state ST2, the game is executed only in a situation where "3" game media is bet. In the CB processing, if the second CB winning is achieved in the current game, the second CB status flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" and the second CB winning data in the main side RAM 74 is cleared. Then, a second CB winning command indicating that the state has shifted to the second CB state ST3 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. As a result, the gaming state becomes the second CB state ST3. In the second CB state ST3, the game is executed only in a situation where "2" game media is bet. In the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, if the first bell winning is achieved in the current game, the value of the total award counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is incremented by one. The total award counter is a counter for specifying the total number of game media awarded in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 by the main MPU 72, and is a counter for specifying the total number of game media awarded in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, and is used to specify the total number of game media awarded in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3. Cleared to "0" if When the value of the total addition counter after adding 1 reaches "30" which is the end reference number for the first CB state ST2 and second CB state ST3, the CB state flag corresponding to the current CB state ST2 and ST3 is set to "0". clear. Then, a CB end command indicating that the current CB states ST2 and ST3 have ended is transmitted to the production side MPU 92.

In the response process at the end of the game, after executing the CB process in step S601, the process corresponds to the current gaming state on the condition that it is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S602: NO). The process jumps to (step S603). Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1, the normal processing is executed (step S604), and when the gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus processing is executed (step S605). ), when the gaming state is the AT state ST5, the AT process is executed (step S606), and when the gaming state is the end preparation state ST6, the second control process for the gaming section is executed (step S607). . Further, the second control process (step S607) for the game section is also executed when any one of the normal process in step S604, the pseudo bonus process in step S605, and the AT process in step S606 is executed. Further, the second control process (step S607) for the game section is also executed in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3. The processing contents of steps S604 to S607 will be explained in detail later.

If the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, by making an affirmative determination in step S602, the normal processing in step S604, the pseudo bonus processing in step S605, and the AT processing in step S606 are performed. No processing is performed. Therefore, in the case of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, processing for advancing the normal gaming state ST1, processing for advancing the pseudo bonus state ST4, and processing for advancing the AT state ST5 are executed. Not done. On the other hand, even if the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the second control process for the gaming section in step S607 is executed. Therefore, even if the vehicle is in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the process for advancing the second section SC2 is executed.

<About gaming status and gaming section>
Next, the game state and game period will be explained. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the gaming states and gaming sections that exist in the slot machine 10.

The slot machine 10 has a normal gaming state ST1, a first CB state ST2, a second CB state ST3, a pseudo bonus state ST4, an AT state ST5, and an end preparation state ST6 as gaming states. These gaming states ST1 to ST6 do not occur overlappingly with each other.

The normal gaming state ST1 is a gaming state that remains when the main side RAM 74 is partially cleared (step S104) or completely cleared (step S105). Further, when the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 that occurred in the normal gaming state ST1 ends, or when the end preparation state ST6 ends, the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state ST1. In the normal game state ST1, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of bets on game media is "3" or "2".

The normal gaming state ST1 is calculated from the expected net increase value of game media in one game ("expected number of game media to be provided in one game") to "games betted in one game" regardless of whether 3 coins are bet or 2 coins are bet. The value obtained by subtracting the number of media) is 0 or less. In addition, the normal gaming state ST1 includes a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and a non-internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74. An internal state stored in RAM 74 exists.

The first CB state ST2 is a gaming state to which the game enters when the first CB winning is achieved in a situation where the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. In the first CB state ST2, it is possible to execute one game when the number of bets on the game medium is "3", while it is possible to execute one game when the number of bets on the game medium is "2". I can't. Further, the second CB state ST3 is a gaming state to which the second CB winning data is entered when the second CB winning is achieved in a situation where the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. In the second CB state ST3, it is possible to execute one game when the number of bets on game media is "2", but since the upper limit number of bets is set to "2", it is possible to bet "3" game media. Can not do it.

The first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are gaming states in which the amount of gaming media owned by the player is not increased. Furthermore, in both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the number of gaming media owned by the player at the end of the gaming state is greater than the number of gaming media owned by the player at the start of the gaming state. This is a gaming state in which the number of .

The pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a gaming state that transitions to when a transition condition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is satisfied in the normal gaming state ST1. The pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends when the remaining number of consecutive games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 becomes "0". When the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends and the conditions for transition to the AT state ST5 are not satisfied, the state transitions to the end preparation state ST6.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of bets on the game media is "3" or "2". The pseudo bonus state ST4 includes a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and a non-internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74. A stored internal state exists.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, if any of the index values IV=1 to 6 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to achieve the first bell prize is announced. Furthermore, in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, if any of the index values IV=7 to 9 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the second bell prize is announced. When the first bell prize or the second bell prize is achieved, "15" game media are awarded. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media awarded in one game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, if 3 coins are bet, the expected net increase in gaming media in one game exceeds "0", and in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, if 2 coins are bet, the game in one game The expected value of net increase in media becomes 0 or less.

The AT state ST5 is a gaming state to which the transition condition to the AT state ST5 is established in the pseudo bonus state ST4. The AT state ST5 ends when the remaining number of game media to be given becomes "0" or when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. When the AT state ST5 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, the AT state moves to the end preparation state ST6. Further, when the AT state ST5 ends when the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, is satisfied, the state shifts to the normal gaming state ST1.

In the AT state ST5, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of bets on game media is "3" or "2". The AT state ST5 includes a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and a non-internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. There exists an internal state that is

In the AT state ST5, if any of the index values IV=1 to 6 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize is announced. Furthermore, in the AT state ST5, if any of the index values IV=7 to 9 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will enable the establishment of the second bell prize is announced. When the first bell prize or the second bell prize is achieved, "15" game media are awarded. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be awarded in one game in the AT state ST5. In the AT state ST5, if you bet 3 coins, the expected net increase in gaming media in one game will exceed 0, and in the AT state ST5, if you bet 2 coins, the expected net increase in gaming media in one game will exceed 0. The expected net increase value is 0 or less.

The termination preparation state ST6 is a gaming state to which the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without the conditions for transition to the AT state ST5 being satisfied. Further, the end preparation state ST6 is a gaming state that is transitioned to when the AT state ST5 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, being satisfied.

The end preparation state ST6 ends when one game has been executed. When the end preparation state ST6 ends, a transition is made to the normal gaming state ST1. In the end preparation state ST6, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of bets on the game media is "3" or "2". The end preparation state ST6 is a gaming state in which the expected net increase value of gaming media in one game is 0 or less regardless of whether 3 coins are bet or 2 coins are bet. In addition, the termination preparation state ST6 includes a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and a non-internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74. There is an internal state stored in RAM 74.

In the configuration in which various game states ST1 to ST6 exist as described above, a game zone is set in addition to these game states ST1 to ST6. A first zone SC1 and a second zone SC2 are set as game zones. In other words, in this slot machine 10, the factors that determine the game situation are the number of game media bets of "2" and "3", the setting values of "1" to "6", various game states ST1 to ST6, and the game zones of the first zone SC1 and the second zone SC2.

The first section SC1 refers to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the player to achieve winnings that are advantageous to the player when winning different winning combinations depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. As a result of the notification of the stop order, the expected net increase in gaming media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of gaming media bet on in one game" from the "expected number of gaming media awarded in one game") becomes "0". This is a section in which an advantageous gaming state (pseudo-bonus state ST4 and AT state ST5) that can exceed `` is not started, and the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state is not continued. When the main side RAM 74 is partially cleared (step S104) or completely cleared (step S105), the normal gaming state ST1 is entered and the first section SC1 is entered. Furthermore, when the initialization process for the second section SC2 is executed in the second section SC2, the first section SC1 is also set.

When an opportunity to move to the second section SC2 occurs in the first section SC1 based on the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), the first section SC1 shifts to the second section SC2. In this case, if a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the first section SC1, an opportunity to move to the second section SC2 may occur, while in the first section SC1, the number of bets is "2". Even if a certain game is executed, no trigger for transition to the second section SC2 occurs. Therefore, a player who expects to move to the second section SC2 in the first section SC1 needs to execute a game where the number of bets is "3" instead of a game where the number of bets is "2". There is. The second section SC2 is a section in which the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state can be started, and is a section in which the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state can continue. The second section SC2 ends when the pseudo bonus state ST4, the AT state ST5, or the end preparation state ST6 ends and the state shifts to the normal gaming state ST1. When the second section SC2 ends, the process moves to the first section SC1.

As a condition for ending the second section SC2, the second section SC2 is continued without transitioning to the first section SC1, so that the total number of games played reaches the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games). By reaching this point and by continuing the second section SC2 without transitioning to the first section SC1, the restricted total net increase number of gaming media reaches the upper limit net increase number (specifically, 2400 sheets). An ending condition is set that one of the following conditions must be met. The limited total net increase in the number of game media is defined as "the total number of game media awarded by games executed while the second section SC2 continues (in a situation where no game media are awarded, it is "0"). ”)” minus “the total number of game media used to execute the game in a situation where the second section SC2 is continued (“0” in a situation where the game is not being executed)” is specified. In the case of a difference in the number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference in the number of sheets is taken as a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets is an increase in the predetermined difference in the number of sheets from the predetermined reference value. If any one of these ending conditions is satisfied, even if it is in the middle of AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 is ended in the game in which the ending condition was satisfied, the second section SC2 is ended, and the first The situation shifts to the normal gaming state ST1 in the section SC1. This makes it possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing excessively.

The player can stay in the normal gaming state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state ST3 in either the first section SC1 or the second section SC2. On the other hand, the pseudo bonus state ST4, the AT state ST5, and the termination preparation state ST6 do not stay in the first section SC1, but only in the second section SC2.

In the normal gaming state ST1 in the second section SC2, a transition lottery process to a pseudo-bonus state ST4 may be executed based on the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13) in each game. is executed in a game where the number of bets is "3", but is not executed in a game where the number of bets is "2". In addition, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, the value of the number of canceled games counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 every time one game is executed, and the value of the number of canceled games counter after the 1 subtraction is If the value is "0", the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed, but the subtraction of the number of canceled games counter is executed in the game where the number of bets is "3", while the number of bets is It is not executed in games where the number is "2". Therefore, in the normal gaming state ST1 in the second section SC2, it is better to run a game with a bet number of "3" than to run a game with a bet number of "2". This is advantageous for the player.

Even if it is advantageous to execute a game with a bet number of "3" in the normal game state ST1, pseudo bonus state ST4, and AT state ST5 in the second section SC2, the number of game media awarded in a game with a bet number of "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, pseudo bonus state ST4, and AT state ST5 in the second section SC2 is added as the limited total net increase in game media in the second section SC2, and a game with a bet number of "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, pseudo bonus state ST4, and AT state ST5 in the second section SC2 is added as the total number of games executed by continuing the second section SC2. In other words, even though a game with a bet number of "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, pseudo bonus state ST4, and AT state ST5 in the second section SC2 is disadvantageous to the player, the game contributes to the side that establishes the ending condition of the second section SC2. From this perspective, when the player is in the normal game state ST1, the pseudo bonus state ST4, or the AT state ST5 in the second section SC2, it is more advantageous for the player to have a game with a bet of "3" played than to have a game with a bet of "2" played.

Even in the second section SC2, the first CB winning can be achieved as well as the second CB winning as in the first section SC1. When the 1st CB winning is achieved in the 2nd section SC2, the 1st CB state ST2 is established in the 2nd section SC2, and the 2nd section SC2 is maintained even in the 1st CB state ST2 and after the 1st CB state ST2 ends. Ru. In addition, if the 2nd CB winning is achieved in the 2nd section SC2, the 2nd CB state ST3 will be established in the 2nd section SC2, and the 2nd section SC2 will remain in the 2nd CB state ST3 even after the 2nd CB state ST3 ends. maintained. As already explained, in both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the number of gaming media owned by the player at the end of the gaming state is greater than the number of gaming media owned by the player at the start of the gaming state. This is a game state in which the number of media is reduced. In other words, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are gaming states that are disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, the games executed in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 in the second section SC2 are added to the total number of games executed as the second section SC2 continues. In other words, even though the games executed in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are disadvantageous for the player, the games contribute to satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2. . Therefore, if the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, it will be more disadvantageous for the player.

<About the second section SC2>
Next, the second section SC2 will be explained. First, the first control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 20. The first control process of the game section is executed in step S411, which is a process executed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination is completed in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13).

First, it is determined whether the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S701). The second section flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not the game section is the second section SC2, and when the second section flag is set to "1", it is the second section SC2. , and the case where the value of the second section flag is "0" is the first section SC1. If the second section flag is set to "1" (step S701: YES), the processes after step S702 are not executed. As a result, in the case of the second section SC2, the direct lottery process in step S706 and the lottery process for the number of released games in step S710 are not executed.

If the second section flag is not set to "1" (step S701: NO), it is determined whether the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S702). If the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S702: YES), the processing from step S703 onwards is not executed. As a result, even if it is in the first section SC1, if it is in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the process for setting it in the second section SC2 in step S705, the direct lottery process in step S706, and the step S710 The lottery process for the number of games to be released will not be executed.

If the current gaming state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S702: NO), it is determined whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3". Then, it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S703). If the number of bets in the current game is "2" (step S703: NO), the processes from step S704 onwards are not executed. As a result, in a game where the number of bets is "2" even if it is in the first section SC1, the process for setting it in the second section SC2 in step S705, the direct lottery process in step S706, and the cancellation game in step S710 The number lottery process will not be executed.

If the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S703: YES), it is determined whether any index value IV has been won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the current role (step S704). ). If the current winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13) is a loss (step S704: NO), the process from step S705 onward is not executed. As a result, even if the winning combination is in the first section SC1, if it is a loss in the lottery process (FIG. 13), the process for setting it in the second section SC2 in step S705, and the direct lottery process in step S706. And the lottery process for the number of games to be canceled in step S710 will not be executed.

If any index value IV is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) for this winning combination (step S704: YES), the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 is The number of consecutive games counter 74c (see FIG. 9) and the total number of wins counter 74d (see FIG. 9) provided in the ``games continued'' counter 74c (see FIG. 9) are each cleared to "0" (step S705). The second section SC2 is set by setting the second section flag to "1".

The number of consecutive games counter 74c is used for specifying, in the main MPU 72, the number of times the game is executed from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between. is the counter. If the value of the number of consecutive games counter 74c reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games) in the second period SC2, even if it is in the middle of the AT state ST5, the number of consecutive games counter 74c is Then, the second section SC2 ends, and the state shifts to the first section SC1, which is the normal gaming state ST1.

The total acquisition counter 74d is a counter for the master MPU 72 to determine the limited total net increase in game media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between. As already explained, the limited total net increase in game media is the increase in the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value, where the minimum value of the predetermined difference is the predetermined reference value, and the difference is the amount obtained by subtracting the total number of game media consumed to execute games when the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no game media is being executed) from the total number of game media awarded by games executed when the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no game media is being awarded). If the value of the total winnings counter 74d reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit of the net increase in number of coins (specifically, 2,400 coins) in the second section SC2, even if the game is in the middle of the AT state ST5, the second section SC2 ends in the game in which the value is reached, and the game transitions to the first section SC1, which is the normal game state ST1.

Thereafter, a direct lottery process is executed (step S706). In the direct lottery process, the direct lottery table provided in the main side ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is regularly updated in the main side RAM 74 are used to decide whether or not to be a direct win in the pseudo bonus state ST4. do. In the lottery process for the winning combination in this game (Figure 13), if the index value IV = 11 is won, there is a 2% probability that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will be a direct win, and the index value IV = 12 will be won. If it is, there is a 1% probability that you will win the pseudo bonus state ST4, and if you have won the index value IV = 13, there is a 10% probability that you will be the direct winner of the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the index value IV = If you win 14, there is a 5% chance that you will win the pseudo bonus state ST4, and if you win the index value IV = 15, you will have a 2% chance that you will win the pseudo bonus state ST4. . In this case, the lower the index value IV has a lower probability of winning in the lottery process (FIG. 13), the higher the probability of a direct win in the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13).

If the direct hit lottery process results in a direct hit win to pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S707: YES), the first transition confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S708). The first transition confirmation flag is a flag that the main MPU 72 uses to identify that a win to transition to pseudo bonus state ST4 has occurred in the direct hit lottery process (step S706) executed when transitioning to the second section SC2. If the first transition confirmation flag is set to "1", processing is executed to transition the game state to pseudo bonus state ST4 when the current game ends.

Thereafter, a lighting process for the section display section 67 is executed (step S709). In the lighting process of the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from an unlit state to a lit state. As a result, the section display section 67 starts notifying that it is the second section SC2.

If the direct hit lottery process does not result in a direct win in the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S707: NO), a lottery process for the number of games to be released is executed (step S710). The number of released games is the number of games required before the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs. In the lottery process for the number of canceled games, first, a lottery table for the number of canceled games stored in advance in the main side ROM 73 is read out, and numerical information is obtained from a lottery counter that is regularly updated in the main side RAM 74. Then, the number of games to be canceled is selected by comparing the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter against the lottery table for the number of games to be canceled. In this case, one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games, and 800 games is selected as the number of games to be released. Furthermore, the selection probabilities for each number of canceled games are the same. After executing the lottery process for the number of canceled games, the number of canceled games selected in the lottery process for the number of canceled games is set in the number of canceled games counter in the main side RAM 74 (step S711). The canceled game number counter is a counter used by the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of canceled games.

Thereafter, a lighting lottery process for the section display section 67 is executed (step S712). In the lighting lottery process of the section display section 67, the lighting lottery table provided in the main side ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is regularly updated in the main side RAM 74 are used to set the current second section SC2 from the beginning. It is determined by lottery whether the section display section 67 should be turned on (that is, immediately turned on) or whether the section display section 67 should be turned on (that is, on standby) when transitioning to the subsequent pseudo-bonus state ST4. In the lottery process for the winning combinations in this game (Figure 13), if you win one of the index values IV = 1 to 10, there is a 50% probability that the immediate lighting will be selected, and a 50% probability that the lighting will be on standby. is selected, and if the index value IV = 11 is won, there is a 65% probability that the immediate lighting will be selected, and a 35% probability that the lighting standby will be selected, and if the index value IV = 12 is selected. There is a 62% probability that immediate lighting will be selected, a 38% probability that lighting standby will be selected, and if the index value IV = 13 is selected, immediate lighting will be selected with an 80% probability and a 20% probability. If the lighting standby is selected and the index value IV = 14 is selected, there is a 75% probability that the immediate lighting is selected, and a 25% probability that the lighting standby is selected and the index value IV = 15 is selected. In this case, there is a 70% probability that immediate lighting will be selected and a 30% probability that lighting standby will be selected, and if the index value IV = 16 is selected, immediate lighting will be selected with a 40% probability and 60% probability. The lighting standby mode is selected with a probability, and when the index value IV=17 is selected, the immediate lighting mode is selected with a 30% probability and the lighting standby mode is selected with a 70% probability. In this case, the lower the index value IV has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), the higher the probability that immediate lighting will be selected.

If immediate lighting is selected in the section display section 67 lighting lottery process (step S712) (step S713: YES), the section display section 67 lighting process is executed (step S714). In the lighting process for the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from an unlit state to a lit state. As a result, the section display section 67 starts notifying that it is the second section SC2.

On the other hand, if lighting standby is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S712) of the section display unit 67 (step S713: NO), the lighting standby flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" ( Step S715). The lighting standby flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that switching of the section display section 67 from the unlit state to the lit state is on standby in the second section SC2.

Next, the second control process for the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 21. The second control process for the game section is executed in step S607 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 18). As mentioned above, the corresponding process at the end of the game is executed after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game has all stopped, so the second control process in the game section is also the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game. is executed after all have stopped.

If the second section flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S801: YES), the state of the flag in the main RAM 74 is checked to determine whether the current game state is the end preparation state ST6 (step S802). If the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without transitioning to the AT state 5, or if the AT state ST5 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 being met, the game transitions to the end preparation state ST6.

If the game is in the end preparation state ST6 (step S802: YES), it is determined whether the end preparation completion flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S803). The end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to determine whether one game has been played in the end preparation state ST6. In the pseudo bonus process (step S605) in the response process at the end of the game (FIG. 18), if it is determined that the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is 0 games and that the game will transition to the normal game state ST1 after that, a flag is set to set the game to the end preparation state ST6 and the end preparation completion flag is cleared to "0". In addition, in the AT process (step S606) in the response process at the end of the game (FIG. 18), if it is determined that the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 is "0" and that the game will transition to the normal game state ST1, a flag is set to set the game to the end preparation state ST6 and the end preparation completion flag is cleared to "0".

If the termination preparation completion flag is not set to "1" (step S803: NO), the termination preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S804), and then the processing from step S805 onward is executed. If the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S803: YES), it means that one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST6. In this case, processing for ending the second section SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, initialization processing for the second section SC2 is executed (step S814). In the initialization process for the second section SC2, the second section flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In addition, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the user stays in the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 must be included, including the counter for storing the remaining number of game media given in the AT state ST5. By clearing various data (including the AT status flag) indicating the status, the gaming status is shifted to the normal gaming status ST1. Note that even in the middle of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the second section SC2 is ended by executing the initialization process of the second section SC2. continues without being terminated.

Thereafter, when the section display section 67 is in the lit state, the section display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the unlit state (step S815). As a result, the notification on the section display section 67 that it is the second section SC2 is ended. Thereafter, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S816). Thereby, the performance side MPU 92 causes the performance corresponding to the completion of the second section SC2 to be executed.

If it is not in the termination preparation state ST6 (step S802: NO) or if the process of step S804 is executed, the value of the number of continuous games counter 74c in the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S805). As already explained, the continuous game number counter 74c tells the main MPU 72 the number of times the game has been executed since the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without intervening the first section SC1. This is a counter for specifying.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the continuous game number counter 74c after being incremented by 1 is greater than or equal to the upper limit number of games, 1500 (step S806). When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is 1500 or more, it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S806, and processing for ending the second section SC2 in steps S814 to S816 is executed. The processing contents of steps S814 to S816 are as already described. As a result, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1, and even if the AT state ST5 is in the middle, the AT state ST5 is forcibly ended and becomes the normal gaming state ST1.

If the value of the number of consecutive games counter 74c is less than 1500 (step S806: NO), in this game, has a replay prize of any one of a first chance replay prize, a second chance replay prize, or a normal replay prize been established? It is determined whether or not (step S807). In this case, whether the number of bets in the current game is "2" or "3" is subject to the determination in step S807, and the current game is in the normal gaming state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state. Any gaming state among state ST3, pseudo-bonus state ST4, and AT state ST5 is subject to the determination in step S807.

If no replay prize has been won (step S807: NO), the number of bets for the current game (i.e., the value of the bet number setting counter 74a) is subtracted from the total number of wins counter 74d in the main side RAM 74 (step S808). . In this case, even if a replay prize was established in the previous game and the current game is a game that corresponds to replaying due to the establishment of the replay prize, the number of bets for the current game (i.e., the number of bets setting counter 74a) ) is subtracted from the total acquisition number counter 74d.

As already explained, the total acquisition number counter 74d calculates the limited net increase in the total number of gaming media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without intervening the first section SC1. This is a counter for identification by the main MPU 72. As already explained, the limited total net increase in the number of game media is defined as "the total number of game media awarded by games executed while the second period SC2 continues (the total number of game media awarded is The total number of game media consumed to execute the game in a situation where the second section SC2 continues ("0" in a situation where the game is not being executed) to "0" in a situation where the game is not being executed. '' is the predetermined difference number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets is an increase in the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value.

After that, in this game, any of the minor prizes for which game media will be awarded (1st to 9th supplementary prizes, 1st bell prize, 2nd bell prize, 1st watermelon prize, 2nd watermelon prize, and cherry prize) ) is established (step S809). In this case, whether the number of bets in the current game is "2" or "3" is subject to the determination in step S809, and the current game is in the normal gaming state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state. Any gaming state among state ST3, pseudo-bonus state ST4, and AT state ST5 is subject to the determination in step S809. When an affirmative determination is made in step S809, the number of game media awarded in the current game is added to the total acquisition counter 74d of the main side RAM 74 (step S810).

If a negative determination is made in step S809, or if the process in step S810 is executed, it is determined whether the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main side RAM 74 is 0 or more (step S811). If the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is less than 0 (step S811: NO), the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" (step S812).

As described above, in step S808, the number of bets for the current number of games is subtracted from the total number of wins counter 74d, so for example, any small winning combination is achieved in the game in the normal gaming state ST1 immediately after moving to the second section SC2. If not, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d will be less than zero. In this case, by making a negative determination in step S811, the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" in step S812. As a result, the "total number of game media awarded by games executed while the second section SC2 continues ("0" in a situation where no game media is given)" to "the total number of game media awarded in the second section SC2" If the predetermined difference number is the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media used to execute the game in a situation where SC2 is continued (“0” in a situation where the game is not being executed), Using the minimum value of the predetermined difference number as a predetermined reference value, a limited total net increase in the number of game media, which is the number of sheets increased by the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value, is measured using the total acquisition number counter 74d. becomes possible.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S807, if an affirmative determination is made in step S811, or if the process of step S812 is executed, does the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceed the upper limit net increase number "2400"? It is determined whether or not (step S813). If the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds "2400", it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S813, and processing for ending the second section SC2 in steps S814 to S816 is executed. The processing contents of steps S814 to S816 are as already explained. As a result, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1, and even if the AT state ST5 is in the middle, the AT state ST5 is forcibly ended and becomes the normal gaming state ST1.

Here, if any replay winning is established, an affirmative determination is made in step S807, so that the processing in steps S808 to S812 is not executed. In a game where a replay win is achieved, the gaming media owned by the player at the start of the game is used to set bets, but as a profit from the replay win, the same number of bets as the number of bets in the game where the replay win was achieved is It becomes possible to replay a new game depending on the number of bets. In other words, in a game in which a replay prize is achieved, the number of game media owned by the player does not change. In this case, by not executing the processes of steps S808 to S812 in a game in which a replay winning is achieved, in a game where the number of game media owned by the player does not change, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d It becomes possible to omit the execution of processing for changing the , and it becomes possible to omit the execution of wasteful processing.

On the other hand, even in a game in which a replay prize has been won, it is determined in step S813 whether the value of the total number of winnings counter 74d exceeds "2400" which is the upper limit net increase number. As a result, even though the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d had already exceeded the upper limit net increase number of "2400" in the game before the game in which the replay winning was established, due to noise etc. Even if the initialization process of section SC2 has not been executed, it is specified that the value of the total number of winnings counter 74d exceeds "2400" which is the upper limit net increase number in a subsequent game in which a replay winning was achieved. This makes it possible to perform the initialization process of the second section SC2.

If a negative determination is made in step S813, ending handling processing is executed (step S817). In the ending handling process, on the condition that the first ending flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is not set to "1", the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main side RAM 74 and the AT provided in the main side RAM 74 are It is determined whether the sum of the value of the continuation counter 74e divided by the expected value of acquisition of game media in the AT state ST5 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2. The AT continuation counter 74e is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of game media provided in the AT state ST5. The expected value of game media acquired in one game in AT state ST5 is approximately 5 pieces. As already explained, the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is set to 1500 games. Note that the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is not limited to 1500 games, and may be less than 1500 games or may be more than 1500 games.

If the value of the above sum is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2, the first ending flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1". The first ending flag is a flag that allows the master MPU 72 to identify that the number of games played in the second section SC2, measured using the continued game counter 74c, is likely to reach the upper limit number of games. When the first ending flag is set to "1", no addition of the remaining number of points to be awarded occurs in the AT state ST5. This makes it possible to prevent further addition of the remaining number of points to be awarded in the AT state ST5 in a situation where the ending condition for the second section SC2 is met.

Although the present slot machine 10 is configured such that the value of the sum does not exceed the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 during the pseudo bonus state ST4, it may be configured such that it can exceed the upper limit number of games. In this case, the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main side RAM74, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter provided in the main side RAM74, and the value of the AT continuation counter 74e provided in the main side RAM74 are used to calculate the number of games in the AT state ST5. It is preferable that the first ending flag is set to "1" when the sum of the value divided by the expected acquisition value of the medium is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2.

When the first ending flag is set to "1", a first ending command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. When the production side MPU 92 receives the first ending command in a situation where the production according to the execution mode corresponding to the ending period has not yet started, if the gaming state at that time is the AT state ST5, the production side MPU 92 receives the first ending command. Taking this as an opportunity, the execution mode of the performance in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is changed to the execution mode corresponding to the ending period. On the other hand, if the production side MPU 92 receives the first ending command in a situation where the production according to the execution mode corresponding to the ending period has not yet started, and the gaming state is not in the AT state ST5, the production side MPU 92 shifts to the AT state ST5. In this case, the execution mode of the performance in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is made to be the execution mode corresponding to the ending period.

In the ending handling process, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main side RAM 74 and the AT continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 are calculated on the condition that the second ending flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is not set to "1". It is determined whether the sum with the value of 74e is greater than or equal to the upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2. As already explained, the upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2 is set to 2400 sheets. Note that the upper limit net increase in number of sheets in the second section SC2 is not limited to 2400 sheets, and may be less than 2400 sheets or more than 2400 sheets.

When the value of the above sum is equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2, the second ending flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". The second ending flag is used by the main MPU 72 to specify that there is a high possibility that the restricted total number of net additions of gaming media measured using the total acquisition number counter 74d will reach the upper limit net addition number. It's a flag. When the second ending flag is set to "1", the remaining number of grants will not be added in the AT state ST5. As a result, in a situation where the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, it is possible to prevent the remaining number of AT states ST5 from being further added.

The present slot machine 10 is configured such that the sum value does not exceed the upper limit net increase number of coins in the second section SC2 during the pseudo bonus state ST4, but it may be configured such that it can exceed the upper limit net increase number. In this case, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main side RAM 74, the value of the result of integrating the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 with the expected value of acquisition of gaming media in the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the value of the main side RAM 74. It is preferable to set the second ending flag to "1" when the sum with the value of the AT continuation counter 74e exceeds the upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2.

When the second ending flag is set to "1", a second ending command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. When the production side MPU 92 receives the second ending command in a situation where the production according to the execution mode corresponding to the ending period has not yet started, if the gaming state at that time is the AT state ST5, the production side MPU 92 receives the second ending command. Taking this as an opportunity, the performance mode in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is changed to the mode corresponding to the ending period. On the other hand, if the production side MPU 92 receives the second ending command in a situation where the production according to the execution mode corresponding to the ending period has not yet started, and the gaming state is not the AT state ST5, the production side MPU 92 shifts to the AT state ST5. In this case, the execution mode of the performance in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is made to be the execution mode corresponding to the ending period.

<Regarding normal gaming state ST1>
Next, the processing contents in the normal gaming state ST1 will be described.

In the normal game state ST1, in the advantageous lottery process (step S410) at the start of the game in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and the current game In the lottery process for this winning combination (FIG. 13), on the condition that the state is not the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, and the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3". It is determined whether or not one of the index values IV=11 to 15 has been won, and if it has been won, a transition lottery process is executed. In the transition lottery process, a transition lottery table provided in the main side ROM 73 and a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main side RAM 74 are used to determine whether or not to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 by lottery. In this case, the lower the index value IV has a lower probability of winning in the combination lottery process (FIG. 13), the higher the probability of winning the pseudo bonus state ST4. When the transfer lottery process results in a transfer winning of the pseudo bonus state ST4, a second transfer confirmation flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1".

In the normal gaming state ST1, "1" is set in the first transition confirmation flag or the second transition confirmation flag in the main side RAM 74 in the normal processing (step S604) in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 18). In this case, processing for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is executed. As already explained, the first transition confirmation flag is set to "1" when a direct win is achieved in the direct lottery process (step S706) in the first control process (FIG. 20) of the game section, and the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1". As already explained, is set to "1" when a transition lottery is won in the transition lottery process in the advantageous lottery process (step S410) at the start of the game. If the first transition confirmation flag is set to "1", by setting the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 to "50", a game with a bet number of "3" will be executed 50 times. A pseudo-bonus state ST4 is set that continues until If the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1", by setting the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 to "20", a game with a bet number of "3" will be executed 20 times. A pseudo-bonus state ST4 is set that continues until Further, a command indicating that the state has shifted to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. By receiving the command, the performance side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute the performance corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4.

In the normal processing (step S604), if both the first transition confirmation flag and the second transition confirmation flag of the main side RAM 74 are not set to "1", the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". The main side RAM 74 The value of the unlocked games counter is subtracted by 1. If the value of the unlocked game number counter after subtracting 1 is "0", by setting the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 to "20", a game with a bet number of "3" will be executed 20 times. The pseudo-bonus state ST4 is set to continue until the bonus is reached. Further, a command indicating that the state has shifted to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. By receiving the command, the performance side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute the performance corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4.

In the normal processing (step S604), when the processing for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is executed and the lighting standby flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", the section display section 67 is Switch from off to on. As a result, the section display section 67 starts notifying that it is the second section SC2.

<About pseudo bonus state ST4>
Next, the processing contents in the pseudo bonus state ST4 will be explained. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing advantageous state processing executed by the main MPU 72 at the start of the game. The advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is a step that is executed after the winning combination determination process (FIG. 13) is completed and before the first control process (step S411) of the game section. This is executed in S410. The advantageous state process at the start of the game is executed when the advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is executed in a pseudo bonus state ST4 or an AT state ST5.

First, by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S901). If the number of bets in the current game is "2" (step S901: NO), the processes after step S902 are not executed. As a result, even if the game is in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5, in a game where the number of bets is "2", the processing from step S902 onwards will not be executed.

If the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S901: YES), it is determined whether the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S902). If the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S902: YES), the processing from step S903 onwards is not executed. As a result, even if the pseudo bonus state flag or AT state flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", if the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is present, the processing from step S903 onward is performed. It will not be executed.

If the current gaming state is not the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S902: NO), the current gaming state is It is determined whether the gaming state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S903). If the current gaming state is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S903: NO), it means that the current gaming state is the AT state ST5, so the process for AT state at the start of the game is executed (step S904). . The AT state processing at the start of the game will be explained later.

If the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S903: YES), it is determined whether the AT transition confirmation flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S905). The AT transition confirmation flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the conditions for transition to the AT state ST5 have already been satisfied in the pseudo bonus state ST4. If the AT transition confirmation flag has already been set to "1" (step S905: YES), this means that the conditions for transition to the AT state ST5 have already been met in the current pseudo-bonus state ST4. Processing for determining whether to transition to the AT state ST5 thereafter is not executed.

If the AT transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S905: NO), the AT transition lottery process is executed (step S907) on the condition that the index value IV = 11 to 15 is won in the lottery process for the role in the current game (Figure 13) (step S906: YES). In the AT transition lottery process, using the AT transition lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74, it is determined by lottery whether or not to transition to the AT state ST5 after the end of the current pseudo bonus state ST4. In the lottery process for the role in this game (FIG. 13), if the index value IV=11 is selected, there is a 20% probability of winning the AT transition, if the index value IV=12 is selected, there is a 10% probability of winning the AT transition, if the index value IV=13 is selected, there is a 40% probability of winning the AT transition, if the index value IV=14 is selected, there is a 30% probability of winning the AT transition, and if the index value IV=15 is selected, there is a 20% probability of winning the AT transition. In this case, the lower the probability of winning the lottery process for the role (FIG. 13), the higher the probability of winning the AT transition. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low probability of winning in the lottery process for the role (FIG. 13).

If the AT transition is won (step S908: YES), the AT transition confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S909). After that, an AT transition winning command indicating that the AT transition has been won is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S910). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the AT transition winning command, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to execute a performance indicating that the AT transition has been won.

Next, the pseudo bonus processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23. The pseudo bonus process is executed in step S605 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 18). As mentioned above, the corresponding process at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game have stopped, so the pseudo bonus process is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game have stopped. is executed after.

First, by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S1001). If the number of bets in the current game is "2" (step S1001: NO), the processes after step S1002 are not executed. As a result, even if a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the remaining number of consecutive games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not subtracted.

Note that when in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), the pseudo bonus process (FIG. 23) itself is not executed, so even if the CB state is started in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the CB state is not executed. The number of games played in the state is not treated as the number of games played in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Therefore, even if the pseudo-bonus state ST4 shifts to the CB state in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, after the CB state ends, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will restart from the state with the remaining number of consecutive games immediately before shifting to the CB state. .

If the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S1001: YES), the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S1002). Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S1003). If the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S1003: YES), it is determined whether the AT transition confirmation flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1004).

If the AT transition confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S1004: YES), it means that the conditions for transition to the AT state ST5 are satisfied in the current pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, first, the pseudo bonus state flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1005). Thereafter, information corresponding to "200", which is the initial number of AT statuses ST5, is set in the AT continuation counter 74e provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S1006). Furthermore, the AT state flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1007). Then, an AT transition command indicating that transition to AT state ST5 will occur is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1008). When receiving the AT transition command, the production side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute a production indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 will occur.

On the other hand, if the AT transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S1004: NO), a termination preparation state ST6 setting process is executed (step S1009). In this setting process, the pseudo bonus state flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In addition, in the setting process, the completion preparation state flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". The termination preparation state flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the game is in the termination preparation state ST6, and when the termination preparation state flag is set to "1", the gaming state becomes the termination preparation state ST6. Further, the termination preparation completion flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1010). As already explained, the termination preparation completion flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether one game has been executed in the termination preparation state ST6.

In the termination preparation state ST6, as already explained, if an affirmative determination is made in step S802 in the second control process (FIG. 21) of the game section and the termination preparation completion flag is not set to "1", (step S803: NO), after setting the end preparation completion flag to "1", execute a process to determine whether or not the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, and execute the second control process ( FIG. 21) ends. On the other hand, if the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S803: YES), processing for ending the second section SC2 and moving to the first section SC1 is executed (steps S814 to S816). ). As a result, the second section SC2 ends when the game following the game in which the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends.

After executing the process of step S1010, a bonus end command indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1011). When receiving the bonus end command, the production side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute a production indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended.

<About AT state ST5>
Next, the processing contents in AT state ST5 will be explained. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing AT state processing executed by the main MPU 72 at the start of the game. As already explained, the AT state process at the start of the game is executed in step S904 in the advantageous state process at the start of the game (FIG. 22).

First, it is determined whether "1" is set in either the first ending flag or the second ending flag in the main side RAM 74 (step S1101). As already explained, the first ending flag is used by the main MPU 72 to indicate that there is a high possibility that the number of games to be executed in the second section SC2, which is measured using the number of consecutive games counter 74c, will reach the upper limit number of games. This is a flag for identification. As already explained, the second ending flag is used by the main MPU 72 to indicate that there is a high possibility that the restricted total number of net additions of gaming media measured using the total acquisition number counter 74d will reach the upper limit net addition number. This is a flag for identification. If either the first ending flag or the second ending flag is set to "1" (step S1101: YES), the processes after step S1102 are not executed. As a result, in a situation where there is a high possibility that the number of games to be executed in the second section SC2 will reach the upper limit number of games, or a situation where there is a high possibility that the total number of limited net additions of game media will reach the upper limit net addition number, The process for adding the remaining number of AT state ST5 to be added after step S1102 will not be executed.

If “1” is not set in both the first ending flag and the second ending flag (step S1101: NO), the index value IV=11 to 15 is On the condition that one of them has been won (step S1102: YES), an additional lottery process is executed (step S1103). In the additional lottery process, the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 is increased by using the additional lottery table provided in the main side ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is regularly updated in the main side RAM 74. It is decided by lottery whether or not to generate an additional amount. In this case, in the case of an additional win, the remaining number of awards will be increased in a direct hit mode in the game, and in a waiting game corresponding to the precursor state from the game (specifically, 10 games). Two types of premonitory conditions are set: a mode of this precursory state in which the remaining number of grants is increased when the number of games is completed. Furthermore, in the add-on lottery process, even if there is no add-on win, it may be a false omen win. When a false omen is won, a false omen state is generated from the game concerned until the number of standby games (specifically 10 games) are played.

In both the real precursor state and the false precursor state, the content of each game on the image display device 63 is such that a highly anticipated performance in which an increase in the number of remaining game media given in the AT state ST5 occurs is likely to be executed. , the performance content is determined according to the table corresponding to the precursor state. In this case, in the real precursor state and the false precursor state, more flashy effects are executed on the final game side than on the starting game side. Specifically, in some consecutive games, including the final game in the real precursor state and the false precursor state, the same character is displayed in multiple games, or the production follows a series of stories. can be done. Further, in the real precursor state, a performance with a higher expectation level is more likely to be executed than in the false precursor state. In this precursor state, an effect is displayed to make the player aware that an increase in the remaining number of grants will occur in the final game of the game with the above number of waiting games, and in the false precursor state, an effect is displayed in the final game of the game with the above number of waiting games. An effect is displayed to make the player aware that the remaining number of awards will not increase.

Specifically, regarding the additional lottery process, if the index value IV = 11 is won, a direct win with a 5% probability that the number of eligible tickets will be 30 will be selected; A win in this precursor state where 30 coins will be selected is selected, a direct win with a 5% probability of receiving 50 coins, and a 5% probability of winning in this precursor state with 50 coins to be awarded. The winner will be selected with a 10% probability that the winner in the false omen state will be selected, and the winner will be selected with a 70% probability. If the index value IV = 12 is won, a direct win with a 5% probability of awarding 20 coins will be selected, and a 5% probability of a direct win with a 5% probability of awarding 20 coins. A win is selected, a direct win with a 5% probability of receiving 40 tickets, a 5% chance of winning the main state, with a 5% probability of receiving 40 tickets, and a 10% probability. In this case, the winner of the false omen state is selected, and the probability of winning is 70%. If the index value IV = 13 is won, a direct win with a 10% probability of awarding 30 coins will be selected, and a 10% probability of a direct win with a 10% probability of awarding 30 coins. A win is selected, a direct win with a 10% probability of awarding 50 tickets is selected, a 10% probability of winning in this precursor state where the award target is 50 tickets, and a 10% probability of winning. , a direct win with a target number of 100 coins to be awarded is selected, a 10% probability of winning in the genuine precursor state with a 100 coins to be awarded, and a 20% probability of winning in a false precursor state. , there is a 20% probability that it will be a miss. If the index value IV = 14 is won, a direct win with a 10% probability of awarding 20 tickets will be selected, and a 10% probability of winning the award will result in 20 tickets. A win is selected, a direct win with a 10% probability of awarding 40 tickets is selected, a 10% probability of winning in this precursory state where the award target number is 40 tickets, and a 10% probability of winning. , a direct win with a target number of 90 coins to be awarded is selected, a 10% probability of winning in the true precursor state with a 90 coins to be awarded, and a 20% probability of winning in a false precursor state. , there is a 20% probability that it will be a miss. If the index value IV = 15 is won, a direct win with a 5% probability of awarding 30 coins will be selected, and a 5% probability of a direct win with a 5% probability of awarding 30 coins. A win is selected, a direct win with a 5% probability of receiving 50 coins, a 5% chance of winning with a 50% chance, and a 10% probability of winning in this precursor state. In this case, the winner of the false omen state is selected, and the probability of winning is 70%.

As described above, the lower the index value IV has a lower probability of winning in the lottery process (FIG. 13), the higher the probability of winning. Further, the lower the index value IV has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), the higher the expected value of the number of additional awards. Furthermore, the lower the index value IV has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), the higher the probability of winning in a false omen state. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13).

If a direct win is selected in the additional lottery process (step S1103) (step S1104: YES), the value of the award number selected as a direct win in the current additional lottery process (step S1103) is stored in the AT of the main side RAM 74. It is added to the continuation counter 74e (step S1105). Thereafter, a direct winning command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1106). The direct winning command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that a direct winning was achieved in the additional lottery process (step S1103) and the number of awards given in the direct winning. When the production-side MPU 92 receives the direct winning command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute a production indicating that an addition of the remaining number of game media in the AT state ST5 has occurred. Make it.

If the winning of this precursor state is selected in the additional lottery process (step S1103) (step S1107: YES), the value of the award number selected as the winning of this precursor state is used in the current additional lottery process (step S1103). It is added to the scheduled number counter 74f (see FIG. 9) provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S1108). The scheduled number counter 74f is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of grants to be added to the AT continuation counter 74e in the final game of the number of standby games in this precursory state.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the present precursor flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1109). The present precursor flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the current state is the present precursor state. If the real omen flag is not set to "1" (step S1109: NO), it is determined whether the false omen flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1110). The false omen flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the current state is a false omen state. If the false precursor flag is not set to "1" (step S1110: NO), "10" is set as the value corresponding to the number of standby games in which the present precursor state continues, and the standby flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "10". The counter 74g (see FIG. 9) is set (step S1111). The standby counter 74g is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of remaining standby games in the case of the real precursor state or the false precursor state.

If one of the index values IV=11 to 15 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13) in a situation where the main sign state is already present, an additional lottery process is executed. When a direct win is achieved in the additional lottery process, the number of awards selected as the direct win is added to the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 even during this precursory state.

When the main premonition state is won in the additional lottery process executed in a situation where the main premonition state is already in the main premonition state, the number of awards selected as the winning of the main premonition state is added to the scheduled number counter 74f of the main RAM 74, so that when the current main premonition state ends, the value of the scheduled number counter 74f after the addition is added to the AT continuation counter 74e. In other words, when the main premonition state is won in the middle of the main premonition state, the number of awards added to the AT continuation counter 74e when the current main premonition state ends increases by the number of awards selected in the newly won main premonition state. However, even if the main premonition state is newly won, if the main premonition flag of the main RAM 74 is already set to "1", a positive judgment is made in step S1109, and the number of waiting games is not set to the waiting counter 74g in step S1111. Therefore, even if the main premonition state is won in the additional lottery process in the middle of the main premonition state, the number of waiting games for the main premonition state is not extended. This makes it possible to prevent the main premonition state from continuing excessively.

If the actual precursor state is won in the additional lottery process executed in a situation where the false precursor state is already a false precursor state, the number of grants selected as the winning of the actual precursor state is stored in the planned number counter 74f of the main side RAM 74. Since the values are added, the false precursor state will be promoted to the real precursor state midway through. Then, when this pre-prompt state after promotion ends, the value of the scheduled number counter 74f is added to the AT continuation counter 74e. However, even if the actual precursor state is won during the false precursor state, if the false precursor flag in the main side RAM 74 is already set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S1110. As a result, the number of standby games is not set to the standby counter 74g in step S1111. Therefore, even if the actual precursor state is won in the additional lottery process during the false precursor state, the actual precursor state after promotion will be the same as the number of remaining waiting games of the false precursor state before promotion. exit in case. This makes it possible to prevent the false precursor state and the real precursor state from continuing excessively.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1109, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1110, or if the process of step S1111 is executed, this precursor command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1112). This portent command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the main portent state has been won in the additional lottery process (step S1103) and the number of awards given in the winning of the main portent state. When the performance-side MPU 92 receives this precursory command, it causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute the performance corresponding to this precursory state. Thereafter, the real precursor flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and the false precursor flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1113).

If a false precursor state winning is selected in the additional lottery process (step S1103) (step S1114: YES), it is determined whether the value of the standby counter 74g of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1115). . If the value of the standby counter 74g is "0" (step S1115: NO), "10" is set in the standby counter 74g as a value corresponding to the number of standby games in which the false precursor state continues (step S1116). ). Thereafter, a false omen command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1117). The false omen command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the false omen state has been won in the additional lottery process (step S1103). When receiving the false omen command, the production side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute a production corresponding to the false omen state. Thereafter, the false precursor flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1118).

On the other hand, even if the false precursor state is won, if the value of the standby counter 74g is 1 or more (step S1115: YES), the process for starting the false precursor state in steps S1116 to S1118 is executed. do not. Therefore, even if the false omen state is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103) in a situation where the real omen state or the false omen state is already in place, the false omen state will not be newly set and the execution will continue. The number of waiting games in the real precursor state or false precursor state is not increased. This makes it possible to prevent the precursor state from continuing excessively.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing AT processing executed by the main MPU 72. The AT process is executed in step S606 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 18). As mentioned above, the processing at the end of the game is executed after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game have all stopped, so the AT processing also stops the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game. executed later.

First, by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S1201). If the number of bets in the current game is "2" (step S1201: NO), the processes from step S1202 onwards are not executed. As a result, even if a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in AT state ST5, the remaining number of bets in AT state ST5 is not subtracted, and furthermore, in AT state ST5, the real precursor state or false precursor state If a condition has occurred, the number of standby games for the precursor condition is not subtracted.

Note that in the case of the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), the AT process (FIG. 25) itself is not executed, so even if the CB state is started in the middle of the AT state ST5, it is not executed in the CB state. The number of games played is not treated as the number of games played in AT state ST5. Therefore, even if the AT state ST5 transitions to the CB state in the middle, after the CB state ends, the AT state ST5 will be restarted from the state with the remaining number of grants immediately before the transition to the CB state.

If the number of bets in this game is "3" (step S1201: YES), a small winning combination has been achieved in this game, and a number of game media exceeding the number of bets "3" has been awarded. It is determined whether or not (step S1202). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the first bell winning, the second bell winning, the first watermelon winning, and the second watermelon winning has been achieved. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, on the condition that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1203: YES), the process of subtracting the AT continuation counter 74e is executed (step S1204). . In the subtraction process, the bet number "3" is subtracted from the number of game media awarded in the current game, and the value after the subtraction is subtracted from the AT continuation counter 74e.

Note that the configuration is not limited to the above, and if the award of game media occurs in a situation where the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more, the number of awards itself is counted as the number of credits provided to the AT continuation counter without subtracting the number of bets. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the value is subtracted from the value of 74e. In this case, the AT state ST5 ends when the total number of game media paid out reaches or exceeds the end reference number. Further, if the award of game media exceeding the number of bets or the replay winning is not achieved, the player's number of game media decreased by the execution of the game may be added to the AT continuation counter 74e. In this case, the AT state ST5 ends when the total net addition of game media becomes equal to or greater than the end reference number.

If a negative determination is made in step S1202, if a negative determination is made in step S1203, or if the process in step S1204 is executed, on the condition that the value of the standby counter 74g of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1205 :YES), the value of the standby counter 74g is subtracted by 1 (step S1206). If the value of the standby counter 74g after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S1207: YES), it is determined whether the main sign flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1208). ).

If the present precursor flag is set to "1" (step S1208: YES), it means that the precursor state to be ended this time is the present precursor state. In this case, an addition process of the remaining grant number is executed (step S1209). In this addition process, the value set in the scheduled number counter 74f of the main side RAM 74 is added to the AT continuation counter 74e. As a result, when the final game of this precursor state ends, the number of game media to be awarded in the current precursor state is added to the remaining number of game media to be awarded in AT state ST5.

When a negative determination is made in step S1208 or when the process in step S1209 is executed, each of the real precursor flag and false precursor flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1210). As a result, if the current state is the actual precursor state, the actual precursor state ends, and if the current state is the false precursor state, the false precursor state ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1205, if a negative determination is made in step S1207, or if the process of step S1210 is executed, it is determined whether the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is "0". (Step S1211). If the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0" (step S1211: YES), it means that the remaining number of game media given in the current AT state ST5 is "0". In this case, by determining whether the value of the standby counter 74g of the main side RAM 74 is "0", it is determined whether the current state is a real precursor state or a false precursor state (step S1212).

If the current state is neither the real precursor state nor the false precursor state, and the value of the standby counter 74g of the main side RAM 74 is "0" (step S1212: YES), a process for setting the termination preparation state ST6 is executed (step S1213). ). In this setting process, the AT status flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In addition, in the setting process, the completion preparation state flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". The termination preparation state flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the game is in the termination preparation state ST6, and when the termination preparation state flag is set to "1", the gaming state becomes the termination preparation state ST6. Thereafter, the termination preparation completion flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1214). As already explained, the termination preparation completion flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether one game has been executed in the termination preparation state ST6.

In the termination preparation state ST6, as already explained, if an affirmative determination is made in step S802 in the second control process (FIG. 21) of the game section and the termination preparation completion flag is not set to "1", (step S803: NO), after setting the end preparation completion flag to "1", execute a process to determine whether or not the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, and execute the second control process ( FIG. 21) ends. On the other hand, if the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S803: YES), processing for ending the second section SC2 and moving to the first section SC1 is executed (steps S814 to S816). ). As a result, the second section SC2 ends when the game following the game in which the AT state ST5 ends.

Thereafter, an AT end command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1215). The AT end command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the AT state ST5 has ended. When the performance-side MPU 92 receives the AT end command, it controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display so that the performance corresponding to the normal gaming state ST1 is started after the performance indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended is executed. Controls the device 63.

On the other hand, if the current state is a real precursor state or a false precursor state and the value of the standby counter 74g of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1212: NO), the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0" and the current AT Even if the remaining number of game media to be given in state ST5 is "0", the processing for ending AT state ST5 in steps S1213 to S1215 is not executed. As a result, even if the remaining number of game media awarded in AT state ST5 becomes "0", in the case of the real precursor state or false precursor state, AT state ST5 continues without ending. In the case of this precursor state, the value of the scheduled number counter 74f of the main side RAM 74 is added to the AT continuation counter 74e in the final game of the present precursor state, so even after this precursor state ends, the AT state ST5 continues. In the case of a false omen state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is not added in the final game of the false omen state, but if a direct win is achieved in the additional lottery process (step S1103) during the false omen state, Since the selected number of grants is added to the AT continuation counter 74e, the AT state ST5 can continue even after the false precursor state ends.

Figure 26 is a flowchart showing the performance control process for AT executed by the performance side MPU 92. The performance control process for AT is repeatedly executed by the performance side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (e.g., 4 millisecond cycle).

If an AT transition command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1301: YES), the AT base table stored in advance in the performance side ROM 93 is read out to the performance side RAM 94 (step S1302). By controlling the execution of the effect according to the AT base table, the upper lamp 61 performs a light emitting effect corresponding to the base effect in the AT state ST5, and the speaker 62 produces a sound output effect corresponding to the base effect in the AT state ST5. is performed, and a display effect corresponding to the base effect of AT state ST5 is performed on the image display device 63.

FIG. 27(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the base effect of the AT state ST5 on the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 27(a), in the base effect for the AT state ST5, a moving image display of the base image G11 using the base character image is performed. Further, a remaining number display image G12 for notifying the remaining number of game media to be awarded in the AT state ST5 is displayed, and an acquired number display image G13 for notifying the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5 is displayed. Is displayed. Based on the command received from the main side MPU 72, the production side MPU 92 can grasp the remaining number of game media given in the AT state ST5 and the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5, and according to the grasped information. The display contents of the remaining grant number display image G12 and the acquisition number display image G13 are updated as appropriate.

If a direct winning command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1303: YES), the number of grants for the current direct winning is determined from the information included in the direct winning command (step S1304), and the number of grants that has been determined is The corresponding direct winning table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S1305). By controlling the execution of the effect according to the direct hit winning table, the upper lamp 61 performs a light emitting effect corresponding to a direct hit winning, the speaker 62 performs a sound output effect corresponding to a direct hit winning in AT state ST5, A display effect corresponding to a direct win is performed on the image display device 63. In this case, the image display device 63 displays an image to notify the number of awards for this direct win, superimposed on a part of the base effect of AT state ST5, and after the display is performed, the number of awards will be announced. A display is performed in which the number is added to the number in the remaining grant number display image G12. In the remaining award number display image G12, a number resulting from adding the award number in the current direct win to the remaining award number up to that point is displayed. This allows the player to understand that the remaining number of awards has increased due to the direct win.

Here, even if there is a direct win in the real omen state or false omen state, in the game in which the direct win has been achieved, the image display device 63 displays the current An image for notifying the number of awards given in a direct win is displayed, and after this display is performed, a display is performed in which the number of awards is added to the number of the remaining number of awards display image G12. Therefore, even if the player is in the real precursor state or the false precursor state, the player can understand that the remaining number of awards has increased due to a direct win.

If a false omen command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1306: YES), the false omen table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S1307). By controlling the execution of the effect according to the false omen table, the upper lamp 61 performs a light emitting effect corresponding to the false omen state, the speaker 62 performs a sound output effect corresponding to the false omen state, and displays an image. In the device 63, a display effect corresponding to the false precursor state is performed.

FIG. 27(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a display effect corresponding to a false omen state or a real omen state on the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 27(b), in the display performance corresponding to the false precursor state or the real precursor state, the remaining grant number display image G12 and the acquired number display image G13 are displayed, similar to the base performance for the AT state ST5. Furthermore, in the display performance corresponding to the false omen state or the real omen state, a moving image of the omen effect image G14 is displayed using the omen effect character image. In the precursor performance image G14, a performance with a high degree of expectation that an increase in the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 will occur is likely to be executed. In addition, more flashy effects are executed on the final game side than on the starting game side in the false precursor state or the real precursor state. Specifically, in some consecutive games including the final game, an effect in which the same character is displayed or an effect according to a series of stories may be performed in a plurality of games. Furthermore, in the final game in the false precursor state, an image is displayed that allows the player to recognize that the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 will not increase. In the situation shown in FIG. 27(b), since the remaining number of game media to be awarded in the AT state ST5 is "0" in the middle of the false precursor state, the remaining number to be awarded is displayed in the remaining number display image G12. Although "0 sheets" is displayed, the AT state ST5 continues without ending because it is in the middle of a false precursor state.

If this precursor command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1308: YES), the number of grants selected due to the victory of the precursor state that triggered the transmission of this precursor command is calculated from the information included in the precursor command. The determined number of plans is added to the planned number of provision counter provided in the performance side RAM 94 (step S1309). Thereafter, it is determined whether the current state is in execution of a real precursor state or a false precursor state (step S1310).

If the actual precursor state or false precursor state performance is not being executed (step S1310: NO), the actual precursor table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S1311). By controlling the execution of the effect according to the main sign table, the upper lamp 61 performs a light emission effect corresponding to the main sign state, the speaker 62 performs a sound output effect corresponding to the main sign state, and displays an image. In the device 63, a display effect corresponding to this precursory state is performed. The content of the display effect on the image display device 63 corresponding to this precursor state is the same as the content of the display effect corresponding to the false precursor state, except for the final game, and the remaining grant number is displayed as shown in FIG. 27(b). A moving image display of the image G12, the acquisition number display image G13, and the omen effect image G14 is performed. In the final game of this premonitory state, an image for informing the number of grants corresponding to the value of the scheduled number of grants counter in the production side RAM 94 is displayed, and after this display is performed, the remaining number of grants is displayed in the remaining number of grants display image G12. A display that adds to the number is performed. In the remaining number of grants display image G12, a number resulting from adding the number of grants at the end of the current precursor state to the remaining number of grants up to that point is displayed. This allows the player to understand that the remaining number of awards has increased due to this precursory state.

If the performance of the real precursor state or the false precursor state is being executed (step S1310: YES), a correction process is executed (step S1312). In the correction process, if the current state is in the middle of the false omen state, the data corresponding to the performance of the final game on the false omen table read out to the performance side RAM 94 is used as the remaining number of game media in the AT state ST5. The data is changed to data that makes it possible to execute a performance corresponding to an increase in the amount of time and to notify the number of grants corresponding to the value of the grant constant counter in the performance side RAM 94. In addition, if the current situation is in the middle of the main sign state, the data corresponding to the performance of the final game in the main sign table read out to the performance side RAM 94 is added in step S1309, and then the performance side RAM 94 is added. Change the data to enable notification of the number of grants corresponding to the value of the constant counter.

As already explained, even if the real precursor state is won during the false precursor state or the real precursor state, the value of the standby counter 74g in the main side RAM 74 will not be changed, so the number of remaining standby games in the current precursor state will be changed. After the winning of this precursory state, the remaining number of standby games are used up and this precursory state ends. Therefore, even if the actual precursor state is won in the middle of the false precursor state or the actual precursor state, the performance side MPU 92 uses the final game data in the precursor table to execute the performance corresponding to the current precursor state. Only the correction is made, and no processing is performed to increase the number of games in which effects corresponding to the precursory state are executed. Thereby, in a game where the value of the planned number counter 74f of the main side RAM 74 is added to the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 in the main side MPU 72, the number of grants to be added is notified to the player. becomes possible.

If an AT end command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1313: YES), the AT end table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S1314). The performance execution control is performed according to the AT end table, so that the upper lamp 61 produces a light emission performance corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5, the speaker 62 produces a sound output performance corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5, and the image display device 63 produces a display performance corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5.

FIG. 27(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a display effect corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5 on the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 27(c), in the display effect corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5, a moving image of the end image G15 is displayed using the end character image. In addition, a character image G16 saying "END" is displayed to clearly indicate that the AT state ST5 has ended, and a total number of game media image G17 is displayed to notify the total number of game media acquired in the current AT state ST5. is displayed.

In the AT production control process (FIG. 26), other processes are executed in addition to the above-mentioned processes (step S1315). In other processes, as the game progresses, data to be referenced in various tables is updated, and the performance contents are updated. Further, when a game medium is awarded, a process is executed to update the display contents of the remaining number display image G12 and the acquired number display image G13 accordingly. Furthermore, when the first ending command or the second ending command is received from the main MPU 72, a process for performing an ending effect is executed.

Next, the progress of the performance corresponding to the precursor state will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 28. 28(a) shows the period in AT state ST5, FIG. 28(b) shows the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74, and FIG. 28(c) shows the value of the standby counter 74g of the main side RAM 74. 28(d) shows the timing of a direct win in the add-on lottery process (step S1103), FIG. 28(e) shows the period of the real precursor state, and FIG. 28(f) shows the false precursor state. indicates a period of time.

First, a case will be described in which the AT state ST5 ends when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" during the false precursor state and the false precursor state ends.

At timing t1, AT state ST5 is started as shown in FIG. 28(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 28(b), the AT continuation counter 74e is set to "200", which is the initial number of AT status ST5. The game is repeatedly executed in the AT state ST5, and as game media exceeding the number of bets are awarded in the game, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b).

Thereafter, at timing t2, as shown in FIG. 28(d), a direct win is performed in the additional lottery process (step S1103). Therefore, at the timing t2, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e increases as shown in FIG. 28(b).

Thereafter, at timing t3, in the additional lottery process (step S1103), the present precursor state is won, so that the present precursor state is started as shown in FIG. 28(e), and as shown in FIG. 28(c). ``10'' corresponding to the number of standby games is set in the standby counter 74g. Even in this premonitory state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as the game is executed and game media exceeding the number of bets are awarded as shown in FIG. 28(b). Further, as the game is executed in this precursor state, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c).

Thereafter, at timing t4, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(c), and this precursor state ends as shown in FIG. 28(e). In this case, the number of grants set in the scheduled number counter 74f of the main side RAM 74 when the present precursor state is started is added to the AT continuation counter 74e, so that the AT The value of the continuation counter 74e increases.

Thereafter, by winning the false omen state in the additional lottery process (step S1103) at timing t5, the false omen state starts as shown in FIG. 28(f), and as shown in FIG. 28(c). ``10'' corresponding to the number of standby games is set in the standby counter 74g. Even in the false precursor state, the game is executed and game media exceeding the number of bets are awarded, so that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b). Further, as the game is executed in the false precursor state, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c). Thereafter, at timing t6, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(c), and the false precursor state ends as shown in FIG. 28(f). In the false precursor state, the number of grants does not increase, so the AT continuation counter 74e does not increase as shown in FIG. 28(b).

Thereafter, by winning the false omen state in the additional lottery process (step S1103) at timing t7, the false omen state starts as shown in FIG. 28(f) and as shown in FIG. 28(c). ``10'' corresponding to the number of standby games is set in the standby counter 74g. Even in the false precursor state, the game is executed and game media exceeding the number of bets are awarded, so that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b). Further, as the game is executed in the false precursor state, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c).

Thereafter, at timing t8 in the middle of the false precursor state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b). However, at the timing of t8, the value of the standby counter 74g is 1 or more as shown in FIG. AT state ST5 continues without ending. Thereafter, at timing t9, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(c), and the false precursor state ends as shown in FIG. 28(f). In the false precursor state, the number of grants does not increase, so the AT continuation counter 74e does not increase as shown in FIG. 28(b). Furthermore, at timing t9, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e has already become "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b). Therefore, at the timing t9, the AT state ST5 ends as shown in FIG. 28(a).

Next, a case will be described in which the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" during the false precursor state and a direct win occurs during the false precursor state.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), when the false premonition state is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103) at timing t10 in AT state ST5, the false premonition state begins as shown in FIG. 28(f), and the standby counter 74g is set to "10" corresponding to the number of standby games as shown in FIG. 28(c). Even in the false premonition state, a game is played and gaming media exceeding the number of bets is awarded, so that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b). Also, when a game is played in the false premonition state, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c).

Thereafter, at timing t11 in the middle of the false precursor state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b). However, at the timing of t11, the value of the standby counter 74g is 1 or more as shown in FIG. AT state ST5 continues without ending.

Thereafter, at timing t12, which is in the middle of the false omen state, as shown in FIG. 28(d), a direct win occurs in the additional lottery process (step S1103). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28(b) at the timing t12, the number of awards selected in the direct win is added to the AT continuation counter 74e, so that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes 1 or more. When the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes 1 or more, the game is executed in the false precursor state, and game media exceeding the number of bets are awarded, so that the AT continuation counter 74e increases as shown in FIG. 28(b). The value of is subtracted.

Thereafter, at timing t13, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(c), and the false precursor state ends as shown in FIG. 28(f). In the false precursor state, the number of grants does not increase, so the AT continuation counter 74e does not increase as shown in FIG. 28(b). However, at the timing t13, as shown in FIG. 28(b), the number of grants increased at the timing t12 is not "0", so the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more. Therefore, even if the false precursor state ends, the AT state ST5 continues. Thereafter, at timing t14, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b), and the AT state ST5 ends as shown in FIG. 28(a).

Next, a case will be described in which the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" in the middle of the false precursor state and the actual precursor state is won in the middle of the false precursor state.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), the false precursor state is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103) at timing t15, which is the AT state ST5, so that the false precursor state is won as shown in FIG. 28(f). When the game starts, "10" corresponding to the number of standby games is set in the standby counter 74g as shown in FIG. 28(c). Even in the false precursor state, the game is executed and game media exceeding the number of bets are awarded, so that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b). Further, as the game is executed in the false precursor state, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c).

Thereafter, at timing t16 during the false precursor state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b). However, at the timing of t16, the value of the standby counter 74g is 1 or more as shown in FIG. AT state ST5 continues without ending.

Thereafter, at timing t17, which is in the middle of the false omen state, the actual omen state is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103), so that the false omen state is entered as shown in FIGS. 28(e) and 28(f). It is promoted to the main omen state. However, as shown in FIG. 28(c), the number of standby games is not reset to the standby counter 74g, and the remaining number of standby games is carried over as is.

At timing t18, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(c), and this precursor state ends as shown in FIG. 28(e). In this case, the number of grants set in the scheduled number counter 74f of the main side RAM 74 when the present precursor state is started is added to the AT continuation counter 74e, so that the AT The value of the continuation counter 74e increases. Therefore, even if this precursor state ends, the AT state ST5 continues. Thereafter, at timing t19, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b), and the AT state ST5 ends as shown in FIG. 28(a).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

If the AT state ST5 is in the real precursor state or the false precursor state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0", that is, even if the remaining number of game media given in the AT state ST5 is "0", the AT state remains ST5 continues without ending. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the AT state ST5 can continue even if the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 becomes "0". Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the execution of the performance in the real precursor state or the false precursor state from ending prematurely with the end of the AT state ST5.

In particular, in the case of a false precursor state that does not provide an opportunity to increase the remaining number of game media awarded in AT state ST5, even if the remaining number of game media awarded in AT state ST5 becomes "0", AT state ST5 This is a configuration that continues without ending. As a result, in situations where the remaining number of game media awarded is not "0", a false precursor state that only serves as a performance that does not change the player's profits can be replaced with '', it is possible to maintain the AT state ST5, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the false precursor state.

Even if the remaining number of game media awarded in AT state ST5 is "0" due to the false precursor state, if AT state ST5 continues, the remaining number of game media awarded remains "0" and remains in the false precursor state. When the AT state ST5 ends, the AT state ST5 also ends. This makes it possible to prevent the AT state ST5 from continuing excessively.

If a direct win occurs in the add-on lottery process in AT state ST5, the remaining number of game media awarded in AT state ST5 will increase, so the player should expect a direct win to occur in AT state ST5. Become. In this case, if the AT state ST5 continues even if the remaining number of grants mentioned above is "0" due to the false omen state, if the AT state ST5 becomes a direct win in this continued situation, the above The remaining number of grants will increase. This makes it possible for the player to expect a direct win even in a situation where the AT state ST5 continues due to the false omen state.

Even if a real omen win or a false omen win occurs in the real omen state or false omen state, the remaining number of games in the omen state is maintained without increasing. This makes it possible to prevent the false precursor state from continuing excessively.

<Second embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the manner in which replay winnings are established and the content of the game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining symbol combinations that result in a normal replay win, a first special replay win, and a second special replay win.

As shown in FIG. 29, in this embodiment, on the main line ML, the stopping symbols on the left reel 32L are "Replay" symbols, the stopping symbols on the middle reel 32M are "Replay" symbols, and the stopping symbols on the right reel 32R are "Replay" symbols. If it is a "Replay" symbol, on the main line ML, the stop symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Replay" symbol, the stop symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Replay" symbol, and the stop symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Red 7" symbol. In this case, on the main line ML, the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Replay" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Red 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is the "Red 7" symbol. In this case, on the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Red 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Replay" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Red 7" symbol, On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Replay" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Replay" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, then on the main line ML , if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Replay" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "BAR" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, or when the left reel is on the main line ML. If the stopping symbol on the 32L is a "BAR" symbol, the middle reel 32M's stopping symbol is a "replay" symbol, and the right reel 32R's stopping symbol is a "BAR" symbol, a normal replay win will occur.

In this embodiment, in addition to the normal replay win, the first chance replay win, and the second chance replay win, the first special replay win and the second special replay win are set as replay wins. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "red 7" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" pattern, the first special replay win is made. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "BAR" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "BAR" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" pattern, the second special replay win is made.

In this slot machine 10, in the same way as in the first embodiment, in the non-CB state, each reel 32L is controlled to be able to slide up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. , 32M, and 32R. In other words, reel control is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop the reel before a predetermined time (190 milliseconds) elapses after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. By performing such reel control, it is possible to make it easier to win a prize corresponding to a winning combination, and to avoid winning a prize corresponding to a non-winning combination. becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R constitutes a combination of symbols for winning a prize. If five or more symbols exist between the constituent symbols, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44. The first special replay winning and the second special replay winning are winning modes that may not be realized depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational position of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning combination lottery table when 3 coins are bet in this embodiment, which is selected when the set value is "3" and the number of bets is "3". Note that in the following description, reference is made to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 31 as appropriate.

The same winning data and point value PV as the winning combination table (FIG. 14) when betting 3 coins in the first embodiment are set in the index values IV=1 to 16. Furthermore, the same winning data and point value PV as the index value IV=17 of the winning combination table (FIG. 14) when betting 3 cards in the first embodiment is set for the index value IV=19.

Normal replay winning data and first special replay winning data are set to index value IV=17. If you win with the index value IV=17, as shown in FIG. 31, if the first stop is the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M, the second and third stop reels 32L, 32M, 32R A normal replay winning is guaranteed regardless of the type of the button and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. On the other hand, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, regardless of the types of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R targeted for the second and third stops, either the first special replay win or the normal replay win is guaranteed. To establish. In this case, if the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational position of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is such that the first special replay winning can be achieved, priority is given to establishing the first special replay winning. , if the operation timing is a timing at which it is impossible to achieve the first special replay winning, the normal replay winning will be achieved.

The index value IV=18 is set with normal replay winning data, first special replay winning data, and second special replay winning data. In the case of a win with the index value IV=18, as shown in FIG. 31, if the first stop is the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M, the second and third stop targets are reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. A normal replay winning is guaranteed regardless of the type of the button and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. On the other hand, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the first special replay win, the second special replay win, and the normal replay win, regardless of the types of the second and third stop reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Either of these will definitely hold true. In this case, if the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational position of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is such that the first special replay winning can be achieved, priority is given to establishing the first special replay winning. , If the operation timing is a timing that allows the second special replay winning to be established, priority will be given to establishing the second special replay winning, and the operation timing will be the timing to establish the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning. If the timing is such that it is impossible to do so, a replay win will normally be established.

Here, the symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in this embodiment is the same as the symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the first embodiment shown in FIG. In the configuration shown in FIG. 4, in which the right reel 32R needs to be stopped as the first stop in order to establish the first special replay win or the second special replay win when the index value IV=18 is won as described above. As such, on the right reel 32R, there are more symbols than 4 symbols, which is the number of symbols corresponding to the maximum number of slips, between the "Red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. Therefore, when the index value IV=18 is won, the right stop button 44 is operated to stop so that the "Red 7" symbol stops on the main line ML of the right reel 32R with the aim of establishing the first special replay win. In this case, the "BAR" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the second special replay winning will not be achieved because the "BAR" symbol does not stop. In addition, in order to establish a second special replay winning when the index value IV = 18 is won, the right stop button 44 was operated to stop so that the "BAR" symbol stopped on the main line ML of the right reel 32R. In this case, the "Red 7" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the first special replay winning will not be achieved because the "Red 7" symbol does not stop. In other words, when the right reel 32R is first stopped when the index value IV=18 is won, each reel 32L, 32M is set so that the first special replay win and the second special replay win have priority over the normal replay win. , 32R, the stop control does not set a priority between the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning, and the player operates the stop buttons 42 to 44. Depending on the timing, it is possible to select which one of the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize will be established.

As shown in FIG. 30, the index value IV=17 is set to "600" as the point value PV, and the index value IV=18 is set to "200" as the point value PV, so the index value IV The probability of winning with index value IV=17 is about 1/109, and the probability of winning with index value IV=18 is about 1/328. In other words, the index value IV = 18 that allows both the first special replay win and the second special replay win to occur, means that only the first special replay win among the first special replay win and the second special replay win can occur. The winning probability is set lower than the obtained index value IV=17.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, if the winning combination is won with the index value IV=17 in the lottery process (FIG. 13), a notification is made on the main line ML to urge the establishment of the first special replay winning. In addition, if the index value IV=18 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13) in the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 is the first half, the establishment of the first special replay prize will be displayed on the main line ML. If the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is present, a notification is made on the main line ML to urge the establishment of the second special replay winning. These notifications will be explained with reference to explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 32(a) and 32(b). FIG. 32(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how notification is made on the main line ML to encourage the establishment of the first special replay prize, and FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a notification is made to encourage the establishment of a winning prize. The first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is the situation until half of the initial number of continuous games (20 games or 50 games) are played when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started. The second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is the situation after half of the initial number of consecutive games have been played.

If you win the index value IV=17 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13) in pseudo-bonus state ST4, or if you win the index value IV=18 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13) in the first half of pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, in the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 32(a1), the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the second and third stop targets are arbitrary types of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. A display corresponding to the order is performed, and a display indicating that the "Red 7" symbol should be aimed at is performed on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, in the dual-purpose display section 66, as shown in FIG. 32(a2), the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the types of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are the second and third stop targets are in an arbitrary stop order. A corresponding display takes place. Then, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in the order according to the notification, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop the reels 32L, 32M, 32R while aiming at the "red 7" symbol, as shown in FIG. As shown in (a3), a combination of a "red 7" symbol, a "red 7" symbol, and a "red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML.

If the index value IV=17 is won in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, or if the index value IV=18 is won in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, transition to the AT state ST5 after the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. will be confirmed. In this case, in such a situation, the right reel 32R is first stopped and a notification to aim for the "Red 7" symbol on the main line ML is given on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the player follows the notification. By stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in this order and stopping the stop buttons 42 to 44 while aiming at the "Red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, As shown in a3), a combination of a "red 7" symbol, a "red 7" symbol, and a "red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. This makes it possible to notify the player that the transition to the AT state ST5 has been determined using the results of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, even if the index value IV = 16, in which only the normal replay winning data is set, is won in the hand lottery process (Fig. 13), the right reel will be moved with a predetermined probability (for example, 20%). 32R is first stopped, and a notification to aim for the "Red 7" symbol on the main line ML is made on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In this case, stop the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the order according to the notification, and stop the stop buttons 42 to 44 on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, aiming at the "Red 7" symbol on the main line ML. Even if you operate it, the "Red 7" symbol will stop on the main line ML for reels 32L, 32M, and 32R up to the second stop, but the "Red 7" symbol will stop on the main line ML for the third stop reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. "Red 7" symbol does not stop. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform an effect that makes the player expect a transition to the AT state ST5 by using the notification that makes the user aim at the "red 7" symbol as described above.

If you win the index value IV = 17 in the pseudo bonus state ST4 or if you win the index value IV = 18 in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the notification that makes you aim for the "red 7" symbol as described above is Even if this occurs, if the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not stopped in the order according to the notification, or the "Red 7" symbol appears on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. If you do not stop the stop buttons 42 to 44 at the timing to stop, the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol will not be stopped and displayed on the main line ML, Normally, a replay prize is established. However, even in this case, the transition to the AT state ST5 occurs after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends. This makes it possible to prevent the benefit of transitioning to the AT state ST5 from being lost due to the player's stopping operation.

In the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, if the winning combination is won with index value IV=18 in the lottery process (FIG. 13), the image display device 63 shows that the first stop is on the right reel 32R as shown in FIG. 32(b1). The type of reels 32L, 32M, 32R of the second and third stopping targets is displayed in accordance with the stopping order, and the "BAR" symbol should be aimed at on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. A display will appear to indicate that. In addition, in the dual-purpose display section 66, as shown in FIG. 32(b2), the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the types of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are the second and third stop targets are in an arbitrary stop order. A corresponding display takes place. Then, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in the order according to the notification, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are stopped by aiming at the "BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, as shown in FIG. As shown in b3), a combination of a "BAR" symbol, a "BAR" symbol, and a "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML.

If the index value IV = 18 is won in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, it is confirmed that the transition to the AT state ST5 will occur after the end of the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the index value IV = 17 in the pseudo bonus state ST4. In the case of winning and in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a transition is made to an AT state ST5 which is more advantageous than the case where the index value IV=18 is won. Specifically, the initial number of AT state ST5 is greater than the number when transition to AT state ST5 occurs under other conditions. In this case, in such a situation, the right reel 32R is first stopped, and a notification to aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML is made on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the order according to the notification is made. By stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and stopping the stop buttons 42 to 44 while aiming at the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, As shown in , a combination of a "BAR" symbol, a "BAR" symbol, and a "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. This makes it possible to notify the player that the transition to the more advantageous AT state ST5 has been determined by using the results of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, even if the index value IV = 16, for which only replay winning data is set, is won in the winning combination lottery process (Fig. 13), there is a predetermined probability (for example, 10%). , the right reel 32R is first stopped, and a notification to aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML is made on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In this case, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in the order according to the notification, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R while aiming at the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. Even if you do so, the "BAR" symbol will stop on the main line ML for reels 32L, 32M, and 32R up to the second stop, but the "BAR" symbol will stop on the main line ML for the third stop reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. ” The pattern does not stop. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform an effect that makes the user expect to move to the more advantageous AT state ST5 by using the notification that makes the user aim at the "BAR" symbol as described above.

Even if you win the index value IV = 18 in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and even if a notification to aim for the "BAR" symbol as described above occurs, the reels will be reeled in the order according to the notification. If you do not stop the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, or if you do not operate the stop buttons 42 to 44 at the timing when the "BAR" symbol stops on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, The combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol is not stopped and displayed on the main line ML, and a replay winning is normally achieved. However, even in this case, after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, a transition is made to the more advantageous AT state ST5. This makes it possible to prevent the benefit of shifting to the more advantageous AT state ST5 from being lost due to the player's stopping operation.

Here, the first special replay winning data is set to the index value IV=17, and the first special replay winning data and the second special replay winning data are set to the index value IV=18. In the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, if the index value IV = 17 or 18 is won, the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and "Red 7" symbol is stopped on the main line ML. An announcement will be made. On the other hand, in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, if the index value IV = 18 is won, a notification is made on the main line ML to stop the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol. be exposed. As a result, by using the index value IV=18 for stopping the combination of "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "BAR" symbol on the main line ML in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the pseudo bonus state It is possible to increase the probability that the combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol will stop on the main line ML in the first half of ST4.

If the index value IV = 17 is won, the right reel 32R is first stopped and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop while aiming at the "Red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Even in a game state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. Even if the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the combination of the "Red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML in a gaming state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the player will not receive any profits other than replaying. Not granted. In this case, in the configuration where the first special replay winning data is not set to index value IV = 18, the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol appear on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 7. If you try to make the probability that the combination of symbols will be stopped and displayed the same, it will be necessary to increase the winning probability of index value IV = 17, but if you increase the winning probability of index value IV = 17, the pseudo In a game state other than the bonus state ST4, there is a high probability that a combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol will be stopped and displayed on the main line ML. On the other hand, as mentioned above, not only the second special replay winning data but also the first special replay winning data is set for the index value IV = 18, and in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the index value IV = 18 is won. In this case, by making a notification to stop the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and "Red 7" symbol on the main line ML, the winning probability of index value IV = 17 can be increased. While making sure that the ``Red 7'' symbol does not become too high, we calculated the probability that the combination of ``Red 7'' symbol, ``Red 7'' symbol, and ``Red 7'' symbol will be stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. It becomes possible to set the probability to a predetermined value.

Furthermore, as already explained, on the right reel 32R, there are more symbols than 4 symbols, which is the number of symbols corresponding to the maximum number of slips, between the "Red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. Therefore, when the index value IV=18 is won, the right stop button 44 is operated to stop so that the "Red 7" symbol stops on the main line ML of the right reel 32R with the aim of establishing the first special replay winning. In this case, the "BAR" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the second special replay winning will not be achieved because the "BAR" symbol does not stop. In addition, the right stop button 44 was operated to stop so that the "BAR" symbol stopped on the main line ML of the right reel 32R with the aim of establishing a second special replay win when the index value IV = 18 was won. In this case, the "Red 7" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the first special replay winning will not be achieved because the "Red 7" symbol does not stop. In other words, when the right reel 32R is first stopped when the index value IV=18 is won, each reel 32L, 32M is set so that the first special replay win and the second special replay win have priority over the normal replay win. , 32R, the stop control does not set a priority between the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning, and the player operates the stop buttons 42 to 44. Depending on the timing, it is possible to select which of the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize will be established. As a result, if the index value IV = 18 is won, in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and "Red 7" symbol will be stopped on the main line ML. In the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the index value IV is set to 18 by making a notification to stop the combination of "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. In the configuration in which the first special replay winning data and the second special replay winning data are set, it is possible to stop and display symbol combinations suitable for each situation on the main line ML.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the stop order notification control process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the stop order notification control process is executed in step S412 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13).

First, by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S1401). If the number of bets in the current game is "2" (step S1401: NO), the processes from step S1402 onwards are not executed. If the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S1401: YES), and if the current gaming state is AT state ST5 (step S1402: YES), an information control process for an advantageous state is executed (step S1403). In the advantageous state notification control process, the reel 32L, which enables the establishment of the first bell prize if any of the index values IV=1 to 6 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13); A display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32M and 32R is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66, and the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to win the first bell is announced on the image display device 63. A command is sent to the production side MPU 92 to make it happen. In addition, in the advantageous state notification control process, if the winning combination is won with index value IV = 7 to 9 in the lottery process (FIG. 13), the reel that enables the establishment of the second bell prize is set. A display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on the image display device 63 to enable the establishment of the second bell prize. A command is sent to the production side MPU 92 for making the notification.

If the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1404: YES), and if the index value IV=17 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13) (step S1405: YES), the right A process of setting display data for the first stop is executed (step S1406). As a result, a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the types of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arbitrary is started on the dual-purpose display section 66. . The display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed. be terminated.

Thereafter, a red 7 notification command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1407). FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the notification control process executed by the production side MPU 92. The notification control process is repeatedly executed by the production side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (for example, at a 4 millisecond cycle). When the production side MPU 92 receives the red 7 notification command (step S1501: YES), it reads the red 7 notification table from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 (step S1502). As a result, a display corresponding to a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the types of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arbitrary, and for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. A display indicating that the player should aim for the "Red 7" symbol on the main line ML is started on the image display device 63. The display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed. be terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the stop order notification control process (FIG. 33), the current gaming state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1404: YES), and the index value IV= 18 (step S1408: YES), it is determined whether the current situation is the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1409). As already explained, the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is the situation until half of the initial number of continuous games (20 games or 50 games) is played when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started. Yes, the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 is the situation after half of the initial number of consecutive games have been played.

If it is the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1409: YES), a process for setting display data for the first right stop is executed (step S1410). As a result, a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the types of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arbitrary is started on the dual-purpose display section 66. . The display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed. be terminated.

Thereafter, a red 7 notification command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1411). When the production side MPU 92 receives the red 7 notification command, as already explained, the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the types of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arbitrary. The image display device 63 starts a display corresponding to a certain stopping order and a display indicating that the "red 7" symbol should be aimed at on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed. be terminated.

If the situation is in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1409: NO), a process for setting display data for the first right stop is executed (step S1412). As a result, a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the types of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arbitrary is started on the dual-purpose display section 66. . The display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed. be terminated.

Thereafter, a BAR notification command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1413). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the BAR notification command in the notification control process (FIG. 34) (step S1503: YES), it reads the BAR notification table from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S1504). As a result, a display corresponding to a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the types of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arbitrary, and for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. A display is started on the image display device 63 indicating that the player should aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. The display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed. be terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the stop order notification control process (FIG. 33), the current gaming state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1404: YES), and the index value IV= If neither 17 nor 18 is won (step S1408: NO), other processing is executed (step S1414). In other processes, if the winning combination is won with index value IV=1 to 6 in the lottery process (FIG. 13), reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are selected to make it possible to win the first bell. A display corresponding to the stopping order is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified on the image display device 63, which makes it possible to win the first bell. A command for doing so is sent to the production side MPU 92. In addition, in other processes, if the winning combination is won with index value IV=7 to 9 in the lottery process (FIG. 13), the reels 32L, 32M, which enable the establishment of the second bell prize, A display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32R is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to win the second bell is announced on the image display device 63. A command is sent to the production-side MPU 92 to make it appear.

In other processing, if the index value IV = 16, in which only the normal replay winning data is set, is won in the winning combination lottery process (Figure 13), the notification lottery process is executed, and the notification lottery process 7'' Notification If the winning result is achieved (the probability of winning is, for example, 20%), a red 7 notification command is sent to the production side MPU 92. When the production side MPU 92 receives the red 7 notification command, as already explained, the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the types of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arbitrary. The image display device 63 starts a display corresponding to a certain stopping order and a display indicating that the "red 7" symbol should be aimed at on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed. be terminated. In this case, the display data setting process for the right first stop is not executed, and the first stop is the right reel 32R in the dual-purpose display section 66, and the second and third stop targets are the reels 32L and 32M. , 32R are not displayed in an arbitrary stopping order.

In the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, if the index value IV = 16, in which only the normal replay winning data is set, is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), the notification lottery process is executed, and the notification lottery process is executed. When the "BAR" notification is won (the winning probability is, for example, 10%), a BAR notification command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. When the production side MPU 92 receives the BAR notification command, as already explained, the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the types of the second and third stop reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arbitrary. The image display device 63 starts a display corresponding to the stopping order and a display indicating that the "BAR" symbol should be aimed at on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed. be terminated. In this case, the display data setting process for the right first stop is not executed, and the first stop is the right reel 32R in the dual-purpose display section 66, and the second and third stop targets are the reels 32L and 32M. , 32R are not displayed in an arbitrary stopping order.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing pseudo bonus processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. The pseudo bonus process is executed in step S605 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 18).

First, by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S1601). If the number of bets in the current game is "2" (step S1601: NO), the processes from step S1602 onwards are not executed. As a result, even if a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the remaining number of consecutive games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not subtracted.

Note that in the case of the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), the pseudo bonus process (FIG. 35) itself is not executed, so even if the CB state is started in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the CB state is not executed. The number of games executed in the state is not treated as the number of games played in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Therefore, even if the pseudo-bonus state ST4 shifts to the CB state in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, after the CB state ends, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will restart from the state with the remaining number of consecutive games immediately before shifting to the CB state. .

If the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S1601: YES), the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S1602). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the index value IV=17 has been won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the winning combination in the current game (step S1603). If the index value IV=17 has been won (step S1603: YES), the value of the transition advantageous counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S1604). The transition advantage counter is used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not to transition to the AT state ST5 after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, and the degree of advantage of the AT state ST5 when transitioning to the AT state ST5. It is a counter. The advantageous transition counter is cleared to "0" when the transition is made to the pseudo bonus state ST4. Further, in step S1604, the value of the advantageous transition counter is incremented by 1, and the larger the value of the advantageous transition counter, the larger the number of initial grants of AT state ST5 after the end of pseudo bonus state ST4. Become. Therefore, the more times the index value IV=17 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the more the advantageous AT state ST5 will occur thereafter.

Thereafter, a first advantage generating command including information that the transition advantage counter has been incremented by 1 and the value of the transition advantage counter after the increment by 1 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1605). When the production side MPU 92 receives the first advantage generation command in the production control process (FIG. 34), in other processing (step S1513), it extracts the table corresponding to the information of the first advantage generation command from the production side ROM 93. Read out to the performance side RAM 94. As a result, if the value of the transition advantageous counter becomes "1" after adding 1, an effect indicating that the transition to AT state ST5 is confirmed is displayed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. If the value of the transition advantageous counter becomes 2 or more after being executed and the value of the transition advantageous counter becomes 2 or more, an effect indicating that the AT state ST5, which has already been transitioned to, has become more advantageous, is displayed on the upper lamp 61 and the speaker. 62 and the image display device 63.

Returning to the explanation of the pseudo-bonus processing (FIG. 35), if the index value IV=18 is won in the hand lottery processing (FIG. 13) in the current game (step S1606: YES), the current state is pseudo-bonus state ST4. If the situation is in the first half (step S1607: NO), the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S1608). If 1 is added in step S1608 in a situation where the value of the advantageous transition counter is "0," it means that the transition to AT state ST5 is confirmed, and a situation where the value of the advantageous transition counter is 1 or more. If 1 is added in step S1608, it means that the AT state ST5, to which the transition has already been determined, has become more advantageous.

Thereafter, a first advantage generation command including information that the transition advantage counter has been incremented by 1 and the value of the transition advantage counter after the increment by 1 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1609). When the production side MPU 92 receives the first advantage generation command in the production control process (FIG. 34), in other processing (step S1513), it extracts the table corresponding to the information of the first advantage generation command from the production side ROM 93. Read out to the performance side RAM 94. As a result, if the value of the transition advantageous counter becomes "1" after adding 1, an effect indicating that the transition to AT state ST5 is confirmed is displayed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. If the value of the transition advantageous counter becomes 2 or more after being executed and the value of the transition advantageous counter becomes 2 or more, an effect indicating that the AT state ST5, which has already been transitioned to, has become more advantageous, is displayed on the upper lamp 61 and the speaker. 62 and the image display device 63.

Returning to the explanation of the process for pseudo bonuses (FIG. 35), in the case where the lottery process for the role in this game (FIG. 13) is won with index value IV=18 (step S1606: YES), the current situation is pseudo bonus. If the situation is in the second half of the bonus state ST4 (step S1607: YES), the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 2 (step S1610). If the value of the advantageous transition counter is "0" and 2 is added in step S1610, it means that the transition to the advantageous AT state ST5 is confirmed, and if the value of the advantageous transition counter is 1 or more, If 2 is added in step S1610 in a certain situation, it means that the AT state ST5, to which the transition has already been determined, has become more advantageous.

Thereafter, a second advantage generating command including information that the transition advantage counter has been incremented by 2 and the value of the transition advantage counter after the increment of 2 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1611). When the production-side MPU 92 receives the second advantage generating command in the production control process (FIG. 34), in other processing (step S1513), it extracts the table corresponding to the information of the second advantage generation command from the production-side ROM 93. Read out to the performance side RAM 94. As a result, if the value of the transition advantageous counter becomes "2" after the addition of 2, an effect indicating that the transition to the advantageous AT state ST5 has been established is provided by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. is executed, and if the value of the transition advantageous counter becomes 3 or more after adding 2, the upper lamp 61 will display an effect indicating that the AT state ST5, which has already been determined to transition, has become more advantageous. , is executed by the speaker 62 and the image display device 63.

If the process of step S1605 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S1606, if the process of step S1609 is executed, or if the process of step S1611 is executed, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 is “0”. ” (step S1612). If the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S1612: YES), it is determined whether the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1613).

If the value of the transition advantage counter is 1 or more (step S1613: YES), it means that the conditions for transition to the AT state ST5 are satisfied in the current pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, first, the pseudo bonus state flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1614). Thereafter, a setting process for the AT continuation counter 74e is executed (step S1615). In this setting process, the initial grant number corresponding to the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main side RAM 74 is selected, and the selected initial grant number is set in the AT continuation counter 74e in the main side RAM 74. Specifically, if the value of the advantageous transition counter is “1”, “200” is selected as the initial number of grants, and if the value of the advantageous transition counter is “2”, “300” is selected as the initial number of grants. If the value of the advantageous transition counter is "3", "400" is selected as the initial number of grants, and so on, the value of the advantageous transition counter increases by 1, with "200" as the minimum value of the initial grant number. Increase the initial number of grants by 100 each time you do so. As a result, the larger the value of the transition advantageous counter, the more advantageous AT state ST5 will occur.

Thereafter, the AT status flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1616). Then, an AT transition command indicating that transition to AT state ST5 will occur is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1617). When receiving the AT transition command, the production side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute a production indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 will occur.

On the other hand, if the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main side RAM 74 is "0" (step S1613: NO), a process for setting the termination preparation state ST6 is executed (step S1618). In this setting process, the pseudo bonus state flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In addition, in the setting process, the completion preparation state flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". The termination preparation state flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that the termination preparation state ST6 is set, and when the termination preparation state flag is set to "1", the gaming state becomes the termination preparation state ST6. Further, the termination preparation completion flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1619). Further, a bonus end command indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1620). When receiving the bonus end command, the production side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute a production indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the winning determination process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the winning determination process is executed in step S512 of the reel control process (FIG. 17).

If the first special replay winning (the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol are stopped on the main line ML) is established in this game (step S1701: YES), If the current state is in the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1702: YES), a first special establishment command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1703). When the production side MPU 92 receives the first special establishment command in the production control process (FIG. 34) (step S1505: YES), it reads out the first special establishment table from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 (step S1506). As a result, an effect indicating that the first special replay winning has been established, that is, the combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML is displayed on the upper lamp. 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63.

As already explained, if the index value IV=17 is won in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the pseudo bonus process (FIG. 35 ) Based on the fact that the first advantage generation command is sent from the main side MPU 72 to the performance side MPU 92 in step S1605, if the value of the transition advantage counter becomes "1" after adding 1, the AT state is reached. An effect indicating that the transition to ST5 has been confirmed is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, and if the value of the transition advantageous counter becomes 2 or more after adding 1, the transition has already been made. The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the established AT state ST5 has become more advantageous. In addition, if the index value IV=18 is won in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus process (see Fig. Based on the fact that the first advantage generating command is sent from the main side MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92 in step S1609 of 35), if the value of the transition advantage counter becomes "1" after adding 1, AT An effect indicating that the transition to state ST5 has been confirmed is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, and if the value of the transition advantageous counter becomes 2 or more after adding 1, the transition has already been made. The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the AT state ST5, which has been determined, has become more advantageous. In addition, if the index value IV = 18 is won in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the pseudo bonus processing (see Fig. Based on the fact that the second advantage generation command is sent from the main side MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92 in step S1611 of 35), it is advantageous if the value of the transition advantage counter becomes "2" after adding 2. If the effect indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, and the value of the transition advantageous counter becomes 3 or more after adding 2, The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the AT state ST5 to which the transition has already been determined has become more advantageous.

On the other hand, if the first special replay winning is achieved in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as described above, the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and "Red 7" symbol will stop on the main line ML. The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform a red 7 formation effect indicating that the red 7 is established. In this case, the red 7 establishment effect is executed before the effect indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 is confirmed or the effect indicating that the AT state ST5 has become more advantageous. After the red 7 establishment effect is carried out for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), an effect indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed or that the AT state ST5 has become more advantageous. The effect shown is performed over a specific period (for example, 10 seconds).

Also, in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the index value IV = 17 is won, and the first stop is the right reel 32R, indicating that you should aim for the "Red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. If the notification is executed and the first special replay winning is not achieved, the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol is not stopped and displayed on the main line ML. After the effect indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the effect indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 has become more advantageous, or the effect indicating that the AT state ST5 has become more advantageous. is performed over a specific period (for example, 10 seconds). Also, in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the index value IV = 18 is won, and the first stop is the right reel 32R, and you should aim for the "Red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. If the first special replay winning is not achieved even though the notification indicating this is executed, the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol will be stopped and displayed on the main line ML. After the effect indicating that the AT state ST5 was not present is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the effect indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed or the AT state ST5 has become more advantageous. An effect indicating the following is performed over a specific period (for example, 10 seconds).

Returning to the explanation of the winning determination process (Fig. 36), the second special replay winning (the combination of "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "BAR" symbol are stopped on the main line ML) is established in this game. If there is (Step S1705: YES), and if the current situation is in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 (Step S1706: YES, Step S1708: YES), a second special establishment command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (Step S1709). When the production side MPU 92 receives the second special establishment command in the production control process (FIG. 34) (step S1507: YES), it reads out the second special establishment table from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 (step S1508). As a result, an effect indicating that the second special replay winning has been established, that is, the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML, is displayed on the upper lamp 61 and the speaker. 62 and the image display device 63.

As already explained, when the index value IV = 18 is won in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, regardless of the stopping result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, after the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop spinning, a second advantageous generation command is sent from the main MPU 72 to the presentation side MPU 92 in step S1611 of the pseudo bonus processing (Figure 35), and based on that, if the value of the advantageous counter at the time of transition becomes "2" after adding 2, a presentation indicating that the transition to the advantageous AT state ST5 has been confirmed is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63, and if the value of the advantageous counter at the time of transition becomes 3 or more after adding 2, a presentation indicating that the AT state ST5, which has already been confirmed as a transition, has become even more advantageous is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

In contrast, when the second special replay win is established in the pseudo bonus state ST4 as described above, a BAR establishment effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, indicating that the "BAR" symbol and a combination of "BAR" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. In this case, the BAR establishment effect is executed before the effect indicating that the transition to the favorable AT state ST5 has been confirmed or the effect indicating that the AT state ST5 has become more favorable. After the BAR establishment effect is executed for a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds), the effect indicating that the transition to the favorable AT state ST5 has been confirmed or the effect indicating that the AT state ST5 has become more favorable is executed for a specific period (e.g., 10 seconds).

Also, in the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the index value IV = 18 is won, and the first stop is the right reel 32R, and you should aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In the case that the second special replay winning is not achieved even though the notification indicating that the "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol and the combination of "BAR" symbol are not stopped and displayed on the main line ML. After the effect shown is carried out for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the effect indicating that the transition to the above-mentioned advantageous AT state ST5 has been confirmed, or the effect indicating that the above-mentioned AT state ST5 has become more advantageous. The performance is performed over a specific period (for example, 10 seconds).

Returning to the description of the winning determination process (FIG. 36), if the first special replay winning is achieved in the current game (step S1701: YES), and the current situation is not in the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1702: NO). , transmits the first irregular command to the production side MPU 92 (step S1704). In addition, if the second special replay winning is achieved in this game (step S1705: YES) and the current situation is not in the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1706: NO), the first irregular command is sent to the production side MPU 92. (Step S1707). When the production side MPU 92 receives the first irregular command in the production control process (FIG. 34) (step S1509: YES), it reads the first irregular table from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 (step S1510). When the first irregularity table is read out, the speaker 62 outputs a notification sound as the first irregular notification sound that allows the player to recognize that a replay winning has been achieved. The content of the notification sound is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that a replay winning has been achieved, but for example, a sound saying "It's a replay" is output.

Even if the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and "Red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML in a gaming state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the replay benefit will be granted. No benefits other than replay benefits will be granted. In this case, if the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML in a gaming state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the first irregular notification will be sent. By enabling the sound to be output, even if the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the combination of the "Red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML, benefits other than the replay benefit will be granted. It becomes possible to make the player aware that the game will not be played.

When the first irregularity table is read out, the first irregularity notification sound is output from the speaker 62, but the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 display the main line ML in a gaming state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4. The notification corresponding to the combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol being stopped and displayed is not executed. As a result, the notification corresponding to the stop display of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the combination of the "Red 7" symbol on the main line ML in a gaming state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4 becomes too conspicuous. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening.

Returning to the explanation of the winning determination process (FIG. 36), if the second special replay winning is achieved in the current game (step S1705: YES), and the current situation is the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1706). : YES, step S1708: NO), the second irregular command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1710). When the production side MPU 92 receives the second irregular command in the production control process (FIG. 34) (step S1511: YES), it reads the second irregular table from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 (step S1512). When the second irregular table is read out, the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol stops on the main line ML as a second irregular notification sound from the speaker 62. A notification sound is output that allows the player to recognize that the same profit as that displayed is awarded. The content of the notification sound is to let the player know that the same profit has been awarded as if the combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol were stopped and displayed on the main line ML. This is optional as long as it is recognizable, but for example, a voice saying, "This is the same as the formation of red 7." is output.

Even if the "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and the combination of "BAR" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the replay benefit is granted and the main side RAM 74 is The value of the advantageous transition counter is only incremented by 1, but the value of the advantageous transition counter is not incremented by 2. In this case, if the combination of "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the second irregular notification sound is output. By making it so that the "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and the combination of "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML, the "Red 7" symbol and the "Red 7" symbol are displayed on the main line ML. It is possible to make the player recognize that only the same profit will be awarded when the combination of the symbols and the "red 7" symbol is displayed in a stopped state.

When the second irregularity table is read out, although the second irregularity notification sound is output from the speaker 62, the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 do not display the sound on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4. Notification corresponding to the stop display of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the combination of the "BAR" symbol is not executed. This prevents the notification corresponding to the stop display of the "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and the combination of "BAR" symbols on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 from becoming too conspicuous. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, in the winning determination process (FIG. 36), other processes are executed in addition to the various processes described above (step S1711). In other processing, processing other than steps S1701 to S1710 among the processing corresponding to the winning result in the current game is executed.

Next, the operation contents when the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is achieved in each gaming state will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 37. 37(a) shows the execution period of one game, FIG. 37(b) shows the period in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and FIG. 37(c) shows the period in the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. 37(d) shows the timing when the index value IV=17 was won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), and FIG. 37(e) shows the timing when the index value IV=18 was won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13). Fig. 37(f) shows the timing at which the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the notification (hereinafter referred to as red FIG. 37(g) shows a period in which the first stop is the right reel 32R, and "BAR 7 notification" is performed on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. 37(h) shows a period during which a notification indicating that you should aim for the symbol (hereinafter referred to as BAR notification) is performed on the image display device 63, and FIG. 37(i) shows the timing when the combination of "7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed, and FIG. 37(i) shows the timing when the combination of "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. FIG. 37(j) shows the period during which the first irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, and FIG. 37(k) shows the period during which the second irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62. Indicates the period.

First, the case of the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 will be explained.

In the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 as shown in FIG. 37(b) and FIG. 37(c), a new game is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(d), the index value IV=17 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13), so that the red 7 notification is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 37(f). Then, in accordance with the red 7 notification, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so as to make the right reel 32R the first stop, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, so that the first special replay win is established at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 37(h). That is, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. This allows the player to recognize that the AT state ST5 will be entered after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends.

Thereafter, a new game is started at timing t3 as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(e), the winning combination is won with index value IV=18 in the lottery process (FIG. 13). Since the current situation is the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the red 7 notification is started at the timing t3 as shown in FIG. 37(f). Then, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped so that the right reel 32R is first stopped in accordance with the red 7 notification, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop while aiming at the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML. As a result, the first special replay winning is established at timing t4 as shown in FIG. 37(h). That is, the combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the AT state ST5, to which the transition has already been determined, has become more advantageous.

After that, at the timing of t5, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, the index value IV=18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) as shown in FIG. 37(e). Since the current situation is the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the red 7 notification is started at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 37(f). However, without following the red 7 notification, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so that the right reel 32R is stopped first, but the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, and the second special replay is won at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 37(i). That is, the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol is displayed stopped on the main line ML. In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(k), from timing t6 to timing t7, the speaker 62 outputs a sound saying "It's the same as getting a red 7." as the second irregular notification sound. This allows the player to recognize that although the "BAR" symbol, the combination of "BAR" and "BAR" symbols are statically displayed on the main line ML, only the same benefit will be awarded as if the "red 7" symbol, the combination of "red 7" and "red 7" symbols were statically displayed on the main line ML.

Next, the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 will be described.

In the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 37(b) and 37(c), a new game is started at timing t8 as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(e), the winning combination is won with index value IV=18 in the lottery process (FIG. 13). Since the current situation is in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, BAR notification is started at the timing t8 as shown in FIG. 37(g). Then, in accordance with the BAR notification, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped so that the right reel 32R is first stopped, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop aiming at the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. As a result, the second special replay prize is established at timing t9 as shown in FIG. 37(i). That is, a combination of a "BAR" symbol, a "BAR" symbol, and a "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a more advantageous AT state ST5 will occur.

Next, a case where the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 37(b), in a situation other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a new game is started at timing t10 as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(d), the winning combination is won with index value IV=17 in the lottery process (FIG. 13). However, since the situation is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the red 7 notification is not started as shown in FIG. 37(f). Although the red 7 notification is not being executed, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped so that the right reel 32R is stopped first, and the stop button 42 is pressed while aiming at the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML. 44 is stopped, the first special replay winning is established at timing t11 as shown in FIG. 37(h). That is, a combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. In this case, from the timing t11 to the timing t12, as shown in FIG. 37(j), the speaker 62 outputs the sound "It's a replay." as the first irregular notification sound. As a result, although the combinations of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and "Red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML, the player recognizes that no benefits other than the replay benefit will be granted. It becomes possible to do so.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37(b), in a situation other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a new game is started at timing t13 as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(e), the winning combination is won with index value IV=18 in the lottery process (FIG. 13). However, since the situation is not in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the red 7 notification will not be started as shown in FIG. 37(f), and furthermore, the BAR notification may be started as shown in FIG. 37(g). do not have. Although the BAR notification is not being executed, each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped so that the right reel 32R is stopped first, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are aimed at the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. By performing a stop operation, the second special replay winning is established at timing t14 as shown in FIG. 37(i). That is, a combination of a "BAR" symbol, a "BAR" symbol, and a "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(j) from timing t14 to timing t15, the speaker 62 outputs the sound "It's a replay." as the first irregular notification sound. As a result, although the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the combination of the "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML, the player can be made aware that no benefits other than the replay benefit will be granted. It becomes possible.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

First special replay winning data is set to index value IV=17, and first special replay winning data and second special replay winning data are set to index value IV=18. In the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, if the index value IV = 17 or 18 is won, the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and "Red 7" symbol is stopped on the main line ML. An announcement will be made. On the other hand, in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, if the index value IV = 18 is won, a notification is made on the main line ML to stop the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol. be exposed. As a result, by using the index value IV=18 for stopping the combination of "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "BAR" symbol on the main line ML in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the pseudo bonus state It is possible to increase the probability that the combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol will stop on the main line ML in the first half of ST4.

If the index value IV = 17 is won, the right reel 32R is first stopped and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop while aiming at the "Red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Even in a game state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. Even if the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and "Red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML in a gaming state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the player will be granted benefits other than replaying. Not done. In this case, in the situation where the first special replay winning data is not set to index value IV = 18, the "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and "Red 7. If you try to make the probability that the combination of symbols will be stopped and displayed the same, it will be necessary to increase the winning probability of index value IV = 17, but if you increase the winning probability of index value IV = 17, the pseudo In a game state other than the bonus state ST4, there is a high probability that a combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol will be stopped and displayed on the main line ML. On the other hand, as mentioned above, not only the second special replay winning data but also the first special replay winning data is set for the index value IV = 18, and in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the index value IV = 18 is won. In this case, by making a notification to stop the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and "Red 7" symbol on the main line ML, the winning probability of index value IV = 17 can be increased. While making sure that the ``Red 7'' symbol does not become too high, we calculated the probability that the combination of ``Red 7'' symbol, ``Red 7'' symbol, and ``Red 7'' symbol will be stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. It becomes possible to set the probability to a predetermined value.

On the right reel 32R, between the "Red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol, there are more symbols than 4 symbols, which is the number of symbols corresponding to the maximum number of slips. Therefore, when the index value IV=18 is won, the right stop button 44 is operated to stop so that the "Red 7" symbol stops on the main line ML of the right reel 32R with the aim of establishing the first special replay win. In this case, the "BAR" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the second special replay winning will not be achieved because the "BAR" symbol does not stop. In addition, in order to establish a second special replay winning when the index value IV = 18 is won, the right stop button 44 was operated to stop so that the "BAR" symbol stopped on the main line ML of the right reel 32R. In this case, the "Red 7" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the first special replay winning will not be achieved because the "Red 7" symbol does not stop. In other words, when the right reel 32R is first stopped when the index value IV=18 is won, each reel 32L, 32M is set so that the first special replay win and the second special replay win have priority over the normal replay win. , 32R, the priority between the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning is not set in the stop control, and the player operates the stop buttons 42 to 44. Depending on the timing, it is possible to select which one of the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize will be established. As a result, if the index value IV = 18 is won, in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and "Red 7" symbol will be stopped on the main line ML. In the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the index value IV is set to 18 by making a notification to stop the combination of "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. In the configuration in which the first special replay winning data and the second special replay winning data are set, it is possible to stop and display symbol combinations suitable for each situation on the main line ML.

In a gaming state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, if the index value IV = 17 or 18 is won, a "Red 7" symbol, a combination of a "Red 7" symbol and a "Red 7" symbol, or a "BAR" symbol appears on the main line ML. Even if the combination of the "BAR" symbol and the "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed, a benefit for replaying will be granted, but no benefit other than the benefit for replaying will be granted. In this case, in a gaming state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a combination of a "Red 7" symbol, a "Red 7" symbol and a "Red 7" symbol, a "BAR" symbol, a "BAR" symbol and a "BAR" symbol are displayed on the main line ML. By making the first irregular notification sound output when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and "Red 7" symbol are displayed on the main line ML. It is possible to make the player aware that no benefit other than the privilege of replaying is given even though the combination of , "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed.

In particular, in the first irregular notification sound, a voice saying "It's a replay!" indicating that a replay benefit has been given is output. As a result, in a gaming state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the index value IV = 17 or 18 is won and a combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol or "BAR" appears on the main line ML. Even if the combination of the `` symbol, the ``BAR'' symbol, and the ``BAR'' symbol is displayed in a stopped state, it is possible for the player to recognize that only the privilege for replaying has been granted.

When the index value IV=17 or 18 is won in a gaming state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, even though the right reel 32R is first stopped, a "Red 7" symbol, a "Red 7" symbol and a "Red 7" symbol appear on the main line ML. If the combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol are not stopped and displayed, the first irregular notification sound is not output. This makes it possible to prevent excessive output of the first irregular notification sound.

When the first irregularity table is read out, the first irregularity notification sound is output from the speaker 62, but the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 display the main line ML in the gaming state that is not the pseudo bonus state ST4. The notification corresponding to the stop display of the "Red 7" design, the combination of the "Red 7" design and the "Red 7" design, or the combination of the "BAR" design, the "BAR" design and the "BAR" design is not executed. . As a result, in a gaming state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a combination of a "red 7" symbol, a "red 7" symbol, and a "red 7" symbol, or a "BAR" symbol, a "BAR" symbol, and a "BAR" symbol are displayed on the main line ML. It is possible to prevent the notification corresponding to the stopped display of the symbol combination from becoming too conspicuous.

If the second special replay winning is achieved in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the speaker 62 will issue a second irregular notification sound with a "Red 7" symbol, a "Red 7" symbol, and a "Red 7" on the main line ML. A notification sound is output that allows the player to recognize that the same profit is awarded when the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed. The content of the notification sound is to let the player know that the same profit has been awarded as if the combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol were stopped and displayed on the main line ML. This is optional as long as it is recognizable, but for example, a voice saying, "This is the same as the formation of red 7." is output. Even if the combination of "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the replay benefit is granted and the main side RAM 74 is The value of the advantageous transition counter is only incremented by 1, but the value of the advantageous transition counter is not incremented by 2. In this case, if the combination of "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol and "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the second irregular notification sound is output. By making it so that the "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and the combination of "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML, the "Red 7" symbol and the "Red 7" symbol are displayed on the main line ML. It is possible to make the player recognize that only the same profit will be awarded when the combination of the symbols and the "red 7" symbol is displayed in a stopped state.

When the second irregularity table is read out, although the second irregularity notification sound is output from the speaker 62, the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 do not display the sound on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4. Notification corresponding to the stop display of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the combination of the "BAR" symbol is not executed. This prevents the notification corresponding to the stop display of the "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and the combination of "BAR" symbols on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 from becoming too conspicuous. It becomes possible to do so.

<Third embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the second embodiment in the processing configuration of the winning determination process. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the second embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the second embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the winning determination process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

When the second special replay winning is established (step S1807: YES), the processing contents of steps S1808 to S1812 and the other processing contents of step S1813 are the winning determination processing (FIG. 36) in the second embodiment. This is the same as steps S1706 to S1711. Furthermore, when the first special replay winning is achieved in a situation other than the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1801: YES, step S1802: NO), the processing content of step S1803 is the same as that of the winning determination process in the second embodiment (see Fig. This is the same as step S1704 in 36).

If the first special replay winning (the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol are stopped on the main line ML) is established in pseudo bonus state ST4 (Step S1801: YES, Step S1802: YES), the current situation is the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, and it is determined whether or not the index value IV=18 was won in the lottery process for the role in the current game (FIG. 13) (Step S1804) . If the current situation is in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, or if the index value IV=17 is won in the lottery process of the winning combination in the current game (FIG. 13) (step S1804: NO), the first special establishment command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1805). When the production side MPU 92 receives the first special establishment command in the production control process (FIG. 34) (step S1505: YES), it reads out the first special establishment table from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 (step S1506). As a result, an effect indicating that the first special replay winning has been established, that is, the combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML is displayed on the upper lamp. 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63.

If the current situation is in the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the index value IV = 18 is won in the hand lottery process (FIG. 13) in this game (step S1804: YES), the first stop is the right reel. 32R, and although there is a BAR notification on the main line ML indicating that you should aim for the "BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, the right reel 32R is first stopped and each reel is At 32L, 32M, and 32R, the first special replay winning was established when the stop buttons 42 to 44 were stopped while aiming at the "Red 7" symbol on the main line ML, that is, the "Red 7" symbol appeared on the main line ML. This means that the combinations of the "7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed. In this case, a third irregular command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1806).

When the production side MPU 92 receives the third irregular command, it reads out the third irregular table from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94. When the third irregular table is read out, the combination of "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML as a third irregular notification sound from the speaker 62. A notification sound is output that allows the player to recognize that the same profit as in the previous case has been awarded. The content of the notification sound is such that the player can recognize that the same profit has been awarded when the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the combination of the "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. If there is, it is optional, but for example, a voice saying "This is the same as BAR establishment." is output.

According to the above configuration, in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, even though the index value IV=18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) and the BAR notification is performed, the right reel 32R is When the first special replay winning is achieved by stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and aiming at the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML and stopping the stop buttons 42 to 44, that is, the main line When the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the ML, the combination of "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol and "BAR" symbol is displayed on the main line ML. A third irregular notification sound is output that allows the player to recognize that the same profit as when is displayed in a stopped state is awarded. As a result, although the "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and the combination of "Red 7" symbol were stopped and displayed on the main line ML, the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol were displayed on the main line ML. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the same profit will be awarded when the combination of "BAR" symbols is stopped and displayed.

When the third irregularity table is read out, the third irregularity notification sound is output from the speaker 62, but the index value IV=18 in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 in the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63. Notification corresponding to the fact that the combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML is not executed even though the player has won. As a result, the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and "Red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML even though the index value IV = 18 was won in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4. It is possible to prevent the notification corresponding to the fact from being too conspicuous.

Fourth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the game content in the AT state ST5 is different from that of the first embodiment. Below, the configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing AT state processing at the start of the game in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72. As already explained, the AT state process at the start of the game is executed in step S904 in the advantageous state process at the start of the game (FIG. 22).

Provided that both the first ending flag and the second ending flag of the main side RAM 74 are not set to "1" (step S1901: NO), the value of the additional period counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more. By determining whether this is the case, it is determined whether the current situation is an additional period (step S1902). The add-on period is a period in which the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 is more likely to increase than in a situation where the add-on period is not in the AT state ST5. The add-on period counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the current situation is in the add-on period, and if it is in the add-on period, the number of games remaining in the add-on period.

If the value of the add-on period counter is "0" and it is not the add-on period (step S1902: NO), one of the index values IV = 11 to 15 will be won in the lottery process for the role in this game (FIG. 13). (Step S1903: YES), a lottery process for transition to the additional period is executed (Step S1904). In the lottery process for transition to the additional period, the table for additional transition lottery provided in the main side ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is regularly updated in the main side RAM 74 are used to determine whether or not to transition to the additional period by lottery. decide.

The add-on period includes a first add-on period and a second add-on period. In the second add-on period, the expected value for increasing the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 is set higher than in the first add-on period. Therefore, both the first add-on period and the second add-on period are more advantageous for the player than the situation in AT state ST5, which is not the add-on period, but the second add-on period is more advantageous for the player than the first add-on period. It will be advantageous.

Regarding the lottery process for transition to the additional period, specifically, if you win at index value IV = 11, there is an 8% probability that you will be selected to move to the first additional period, and a 2% probability that you will be selected for the second additional period. There is a 90% probability that you will be unsuccessful. If you win with index value IV = 12, there is a 4% probability that you will be selected to move to the first additional period, a 1% probability that you will be selected to move to the second additional period, and a 95% probability that you will be unsuccessful. becomes. If you win with index value IV = 13, there is a 30% probability that you will be selected to move to the first additional period, a 10% probability that you will be selected to move to the second additional period, and a 60% probability that you will be unsuccessful. becomes. If you win with index value IV = 14, there is a 25% probability that you will be selected to move to the first additional period, a 5% probability that you will be selected to move to the second additional period, and a 70% probability that you will be unsuccessful. becomes. If you win with index value IV = 15, there is an 8% probability that you will be selected to move to the first additional period, a 2% probability that you will be selected to move to the second additional period, and a 90% probability that you will lose. becomes.

If the transition to the first additional period is won in the lottery process for transition to the additional period (step S1905: YES), the first additional winning flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1906). ). The first additional winning flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the winning is to proceed to the first additional period. In addition, a winning command for the first additional period is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1907). When the performance-side MPU 92 receives a winning command for the first additional period, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute a performance indicating that the winning command for moving to the first additional period has been won. do.

If the transition to the second additional period is won in the lottery process for transition to the additional period (step S1905: NO, step S1908: YES), "1" is set in the second additional winning flag provided in the main side RAM 74. Set (step S1909). The second additional winning flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the winning is to proceed to the second additional period. In addition, a winning command for the second additional period is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1910). When the performance-side MPU 92 receives the winning command for the second additional period, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute a performance indicating that the winning command for the second additional period has been won. do.

In addition, if it becomes a loss in the transition lottery process to the additional period (step S1905: NO, step S1908: NO), other processes are executed (step S1911). In other processes, processes corresponding to steps S1103 to S1118 of the AT state process at the start of the game (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment are executed.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing AT processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. The AT process is executed in step S606 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 18). As mentioned above, the corresponding process at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game have stopped, so the AT process also stops the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game. executed later.

If the value of the bet number setting counter in the main side RAM 74 is "3" (step S2001: YES), the current situation is determined by determining whether the value of the add-on period counter in the main side RAM 74 is "0". It is determined whether it is the first additional period or the second additional period (step S2002). If the value of the top-up period counter is "0" and it is neither the first top-up period nor the second top-up period (step S2002: YES), either the first top-up winning flag or the second top-up winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is selected. It is determined whether "1" is set to "1" (step S2003).

If either the first or second added-on winning flag is set to "1" (step S2003: YES), the added-on period counter in the main RAM 74 is set to "10" (step S2004). This will start the added-on period. Also, a start command for the added-on period is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S2005). In this case, if the first added-on winning flag is set to "1", the start command for the added-on period contains information indicating that it is the first added-on period, and if the second added-on winning flag is set to "1", the start command for the added-on period contains information indicating that it is the second added-on period. When the performance side MPU 92 receives a start command for the added-on period containing information on the first added-on period, it causes the performance corresponding to the first added-on period to be executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, and when it receives a start command for the added-on period containing information on the second added-on period, it causes the performance corresponding to the second added-on period to be executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

If the value of the additional period counter in the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S2002: NO), the value of the additional period counter is subtracted by 1 (step S2006). If the value of the add-on period counter after the subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S2007: YES), each of the first add-on winning flag and the second add-on winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" ( Step S2008). Further, an end command for the additional period is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2009). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the command to end the add-on period, the effect corresponding to the end of the add-on period is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2003, if the processing of step S2005 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S2007, or if the processing of step S2009 is executed, other processing is executed (step S2010). In other processing, processing corresponding to steps S1202 to S1215 of the AT processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment is executed. In this case, if the value of the top-up period counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, i.e., if it is the first top-up period or the second top-up period, the subtraction processing of the AT continuation counter 74e in step S1204 is not executed. As a result, the remaining number of awarded game media in the AT state ST5 is not reduced during the first top-up period or the second top-up period.

Returning to the description of the AT state processing at the start of the game (FIG. 39), when the value of the additional period counter in the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more, that is, when it is the first additional period or the second additional period (step S1902: YES), processing for the additional period is executed (step S1912). FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing processing for the additional period.

If the second top-up winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S2101: NO), it means that the current top-up period is the first top-up period, so the first top-up winning flag is set from the main side ROM 73. The lottery table for the period is read out (step S2102). On the other hand, if the second top-up winning flag in the main-side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2101: YES), it means that the current top-up period is the second top-up period. The lottery table for the second additional period is read into the side RAM 74 (step S2103).

When the process of step S2102 or step S2103 is executed, an add-on lottery process for the add-on period is executed (step S2104). In the additional lottery process, numerical value information for lottery is acquired from a lottery counter that is regularly updated in the main side RAM 74, and the acquired numerical information for lottery is written to the lottery table read out to the main side RAM 74 in step S2102 or step S2103. Verify against. In the additional lottery process for the additional period, there will be no losers, and a number of 10 or more will be selected.

Thereafter, the number of grants selected in the additional lottery process for the additional period (step S2104) is added to the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 (step S2105). Further, a command during the additional period including information on the added number of grants is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2106). When receiving a command during the add-on period, the performance side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute a performance that allows the player to recognize the number of awards added this time.

FIG. 42 shows how the number of grants is selected when the additional lottery process for the additional period (step S2104) is executed with reference to the lottery table for the first additional period, and the lottery table for the second additional period. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the number of grants is selected when the additional lottery process for the additional period (step S2104) is executed.

As shown in Figure 42, in each game during the first additional period, 10 coins are selected with a 25% probability, 20 coins are selected with a 25% probability, and 30 coins are selected with a 10% probability. , the number of grants of 40 is selected with a 10% probability, the number of grants of 50 is selected with a 10% probability, the number of grants of 60 is selected with a 10% probability, and the number of grants of 50 is selected with a 10% probability. The number of grants of 80 is selected with a probability of %, and the number of grants of 100 is selected with a probability of 5%. In this case, the lottery table for the first additional period is set so that a higher number of awards is more likely to be selected in a game in which an index value IV with a lower probability of winning is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13). There is. In the first additional period, the number of grants that can be selected are all multiples of "2".

As shown in Figure 42, in each game during the second additional period, 60 coins are selected with a 20% probability, 80 coins are selected with a 20% probability, and 100 coins are selected with a 10% probability. , the number of grants of 120 is selected with a 10% probability, the number of grants of 140 is selected with a 10% probability, the number of grants of 160 is selected with a 10% probability, and the number of grants of 10 is selected. The number of grants of 180 is selected with a probability of %, and the number of grants of 200 is selected with a probability of 10%. In this case, the lottery table for the second additional period is set so that a higher number of awards is more likely to be selected in a game in which an index value IV with a lower probability of winning is won in the lottery process (Figure 13). There is. In the second additional period, the number of grants that can be selected is all a multiple of "4". Further, the expected value of the number of grants selected in each game and the expected value of the number of grants to be awarded during the entire additional period are higher in the second additional period than in the first additional period.

Next, the content of the performance executed by the image display device 63 during the first additional period and the second additional period will be explained.

FIGS. 43(a) to 43(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution contents of the effect executed by the image display device 63 during the first additional period.

In the first addition period, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into two left and right as shown in FIGS. 43(a) to 43(c). These two divided left area A1 and right side area A2 have substantially the same shape and size. In the left area A1 and the right area A2, animation displays G21, G22 for presentation and number of grants notification display G23 are performed, respectively, but the contents of these animation displays G21, G22 and the number of grants notification display G23 are the same as those in the left area A1. and the right area A2 are the same. Specifically, in FIG. 43(a), a moving image display G21 for effect is performed in each of the left area A1 and right area A2, but the contents of these moving image displays G21 are different from the left area A1 and the right area. It is the same as A2. Furthermore, in FIG. 43(b), a moving image display G22 for effect is performed in each of the left area A1 and right area A2, but the contents of these moving image displays G22 are divided between the left area A1 and the right area A2. They are the same. Further, in FIG. 43(c), the number of grants notification display G23 is performed in each of the left area A1 and the right area A2, but the contents of these number of grants notification display G23 are the same in the left area A1 and right area A2. It has become.

In detail, regarding the grant number notification display G23 shown in FIG. 43(c), an image of "+40 pieces" is displayed as the grant number notification display G23 in each of the left side area A1 and right side area A2. This indicates that 80 coins were awarded in the game during the first additional period. As already explained, the number of grants that can be selected in the first additional period is a multiple of "2". Therefore, no matter which number of grants is selected in the first additional period, the number of grants notification display G23 corresponding to the number of grants obtained by dividing the number of grants by "2" is displayed in the left area A1 and the right area A2. It is possible to do this separately.

In the first additional period, in a configuration in which the same effect animation display G21, G22 and the same presentation number notification display G23 are performed in the left side area A1 and the right side area A2 in which the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into two, these Various information displays G31 to G35, which are not images, are displayed with the same content in each of the left area A1 and the right area A2. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 43(a) to 43(c), the remaining number of continued games image G31 for reporting the remaining number of continued games in the first additional period is displayed only in the left area A1. . In addition, the acquired number display image G32 for informing the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5 and the remaining number display image G33 for informing the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 are displayed only in the right area A2. Is displayed.

In the AT state ST5, if one of the index values IV=1 to 9 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are used to establish the first bell winning or the second bell winning. However, as shown in FIG. 43(a), the stop order notification image G34 for notifying the stop order is the left area A1 regardless of the division of the left area A1 and the right area A2. and is displayed across the boundary of the right area A2. In addition, the production operation device 121 (see FIG. 45) may be operated in order to generate an opportunity to change, add, or advance the content of the video display on the image display device 63, but as shown in FIG. 43(b) As such, the operation notification image G35 for prompting the operation of the production operation device 121 is displayed across the boundary between the left side area A1 and the right side area A2, regardless of the division of the left side area A1 and right side area A2. The performance operation device 121 is provided on the front side of the slot machine 10. As shown in FIG. 43(b), the situation in which the operation notification image G35 is displayed is an operation valid period in which the operation of the production operation device 121 is valid, and the production operation device 121 is not operated during the operation validity period. In this case, as shown in FIG. 43(c), a number notification display G23 is displayed in the left area A1 and the right area A2.

FIGS. 44(a) to 44(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the content of the performance executed by the image display device 63 during the second additional period.

In the second addition period, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into four vertically and horizontally as shown in FIGS. 44(a) to 44(c). These four divided upper left area A11, upper right area A12, lower left area A13, and lower right area A14 have substantially the same shape and size. In the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, animation displays G41, G42 and number notification display G43 for presentation are performed, respectively. The contents of G42 and the grant number notification display G43 are the same in the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. Specifically, in FIG. 44(a), a moving image display G41 for presentation is performed in each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. The contents of the moving image display G41 are the same in the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. In addition, in FIG. 44(b), a moving image display G42 for effect is performed in each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. The contents of G42 are the same in the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. In addition, in FIG. 44(c), the number of grants notification display G43 is performed in each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. The contents are the same in the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14.

In detail, regarding the grant number notification display G43 shown in FIG. 44(c), "+50 coins" is displayed as the grant number notification display G43 in each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. image is displayed. This indicates that 200 coins were awarded in the game during the second additional period. As already explained, the number of grants that can be selected in the second additional period is a multiple of "4". Therefore, no matter which number of grants is selected in the second additional period, the number of grants notification display G43 corresponding to the number of grants obtained by dividing the number of grants by "4" is displayed in the upper left area A11 and the upper right area. A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, respectively.

During the second addition period, the display screen of the image display device 63 is divided into four areas: the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, each of which displays the same moving image G41, G42. In the configuration in which the number notification display G43 is performed, various information displays G31 that are not images are displayed with the same content in each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. ～G35 will be held. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 44(a) to 44(c), the remaining number of continued games image G31 for informing the remaining number of continued games in the second additional period is displayed only in the upper left area A11. Ru. In addition, the acquired number display image G32 for informing the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5 and the remaining number display image G33 for informing the remaining number of game media in the AT state ST5 are only in the upper right area A12. will be displayed.

In the AT state ST5, if one of the index values IV=1 to 9 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are used to establish the first bell winning or the second bell winning. As shown in FIG. 44(a), the stop order notification image G34 for notifying the stop order includes the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and Regardless of the division of the lower right area A14, it is displayed across the boundary between the lower left area A13 and the lower right area A14. In addition, the production operation device 121 (see FIG. 45) may be operated in order to generate an opportunity to change, add, or advance the content of the video display on the image display device 63, but as shown in FIG. 44(b) As shown, the operation notification image G35 for prompting the operation of the production operation device 121 is the upper left area A11, the upper right area, regardless of the division of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. It is displayed across the boundaries of the side area A12, lower left area A13, and lower right area A14. The performance operation device 121 is provided on the front side of the slot machine 10. As shown in FIG. 44(b), the situation in which the operation notification image G35 is displayed is an operation valid period in which the operation of the production operation device 121 is valid, and the production operation device 121 is not operated during the operation validity period. In this case, as shown in FIG. 44(c), a number notification display G43 is displayed in the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14.

The electrical configuration for enabling image display in the first additional period and second additional period as described above will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 45.

As shown in FIG. 45, the production control board 91 of the production control device 90 is equipped with a memory module 101, a VRAM 102, and a video display processor (VDP) 103 in addition to the production side MPU 92.

The production side MPU 92 has a function as a main control section in the production control device 90, and reads, interprets, and executes control programs and the like. Specifically, the production side MPU 92 is connected via a bus to an input port 104 mounted on the production control board 91, and various commands sent from the main side MPU 72 are input to the production side MPU 92 through the input port 104. be done. Note that receiving commands from the main MPU 72 in the performance MPU 92 is not limited to a configuration in which commands are directly received from the main MPU 72, but also includes a configuration in which commands are received relayed to a relay board.

The production side MPU 92 is connected to the VDP 103 via a bus, and issues a drawing instruction to cause the image display device 63 to output an image signal based on a command received from the main side MPU 72. The VDP 103 reads the image data stored in the memory module 101 into the VRAM 102 based on a drawing instruction from the production side MPU 92, and uses the read image data to process the image display device 63. It is a type of drawing circuit that operates the image processing device 63b incorporated in the image display device 63 to drive and control the liquid crystal display section 63a. Since the VDP 103 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual form is a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing.

The memory module 101 stores in advance various image data including sprite data such as designs and characters to be displayed on the image display device 63, background data, moving image data, and the like. The memory module 101 includes a nonvolatile semiconductor memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory. Further, the memory module 101 is used as a read-only memory (ROM) when the slot machine 10 is used.

Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the external shape and pattern of the character, and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color of each pixel of the bitmap image. There is. The background data is stored and held as JPEG format data that is compressed still image data. The moving image data is stored and held as MPEG format data obtained by compressing a plurality of still image data.

The VRAM 102 is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the image display device 63. The VRAM 102 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply to retain memory, and specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. Note that the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the production control device 90 is executed satisfactorily. The VRAM 102 is used for both reading and writing purposes when the slot machine 10 is used.

The VRAM 102 includes an expansion buffer 105. Image data is transferred from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 103 to the memory module 101 . Further, the VRAM 102 is provided with a frame buffer 106 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 103. Note that the VRAM 102 may be built in the VDP 103.

The VDP 103 will be explained in detail. The VDP 103 includes a control section 111, a register 112, a video decoder 113, and a display circuit 114. In addition, these circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to an I/F 115 for the production side MPU 92 and an I/F 116 for the VRAM 102.

The VDP 103 causes the register 112 to store the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the production side MPU 92. By storing the drawing list in the register 112, the control unit 111 starts a program according to the drawing list and executes predetermined processing. Note that all of the control programs for the control unit 111 to operate may be provided by a drawing list, and the control unit 111 may have a built-in memory in which the control program is stored in advance, and the control program and the content of the drawing list may be provided. A configuration may also be adopted in which the control unit 111 executes predetermined processing. Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 101 in advance.

As the above process, the control unit 111 reads the image data stored in the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102. Furthermore, the control unit 111 uses (or processes) the image data read into the expansion buffer 105 to create one frame's worth of drawing data in the frame buffer 106 . One frame's worth of drawing data refers to data necessary to display an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display surface of the image display device 63 is updated at a predetermined update timing. .

The frame buffer 106 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 106a and 106b. Specifically, a first frame area 106a and a second frame area 106b are provided. Each of these frame areas 106a and 106b is set to have a capacity capable of storing one frame's worth of drawing data. Specifically, each of the frame regions 106a and 106b includes a large number of unit areas each corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display section 63a (that is, the display surface) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, a full color system is adopted, and each dot can be set to 256 colors for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). Correspondingly, in each unit area, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each color of RGB. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

Since the frame buffer 106 is provided with a first frame area 106a and a second frame area 106b, in a situation where drawing data created in one frame area is used to perform drawing on the image display device 63, , creation of drawing data to be used in the future for other frame areas is executed. That is, a double buffer method is adopted as the frame buffer 106.

In the display circuit 114, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display section 63a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 106a or the second frame area 106b, and the image signal is sent to the display circuit 114. The image is output to the image display device 63 via the connected output port 107. Specifically, drawing data is transferred from the frame areas 106a and 106b to be output to the display circuit 114. The transferred drawing data is subjected to resolution adjustment by a scaler (not shown) and converted into gradation data so that it corresponds to the resolution of the image display device 63. Then, based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the image display device 63 is generated and output. Further, the video decoder 113 executes decoding of the video data transferred to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102.

Next, a processing configuration for enabling image display in the first addition period and the second addition period will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the production side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed by the performance side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds).

First, an effect setting process is executed to set data used to control the light emission of the upper lamp 61, the sound output of the speaker 62, and the display control of the image display device 63 (step S2201). Thereafter, a display control process (step S2202) for outputting a drawing list to the VDP 103 based on the data set in the effect setting process, and a display control process for controlling the light emission of the upper lamp 61 based on the data set in the effect setting process. The light emission control process (step S2203) and the sound output control process (step S2204) for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 based on the data set in the effect setting process are executed. Additionally, pointer update processing is executed (step S2205). In the pointer update process, the pointer information in the table read out to the performance side RAM 94 in the performance setting process is updated to the pointer information of the next order.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process for the additional period for performing processing related to the additional period among the effect setting processes of step S2201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 46).

When the winning command for the first additional period is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2301: YES), the first winning corresponding table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S2302). By controlling the execution of the effect according to the first winning correspondence table, the upper lamp 61 performs a light emitting effect corresponding to winning in the first additional period, and the speaker 62 performs a light emitting effect corresponding to winning in the first additional period. A corresponding sound output effect is performed, and a display effect corresponding to winning the first bonus period is performed on the image display device 63. Thereafter, the first additional effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2303). The first additional effect flag is a flag for specifying on the effect side MPU 92 that the prize has been won during the first additional period.

When the winning command for the second additional period is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S2304: YES), the second winning correspondence table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S2305). By controlling the execution of the effect according to the second winning correspondence table, the upper lamp 61 performs a light emitting effect corresponding to winning in the second bonus period, and the speaker 62 displays a light emission effect corresponding to winning in the second bonus period. A corresponding sound output effect is performed, and a display effect corresponding to winning the second bonus period is performed on the image display device 63. Thereafter, the second additional effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2306). The second additional effect flag is a flag for specifying on the effect side MPU 92 that the prize has been won during the second additional period.

If the command to start the additional period has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2307: YES), the period start table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S2308). In this case, if the first additional period is newly started, the period start table corresponding to the first additional period is read, and if the second additional period is newly started, the period corresponding to the second additional period is read. Read the starting table. By controlling the execution of the effect according to the period start table, the upper lamp 61 performs a light emitting effect corresponding to the first additional period or the second additional period, and the speaker 62 performs the light emitting effect corresponding to the first additional period or the second additional period. A corresponding sound output effect is performed, and a display effect corresponding to the first additional period or the second additional period is performed on the image display device 63. Thereafter, the additional period flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2309). The add-on period flag is a flag for the effect side MPU 92 to specify that the effect corresponding to the first add-on period or the second add-on period is being executed.

If a command during the add-on period is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2310: YES), the currently selected grant number is grasped from the information included in the command during the add-on period (step S2311). After that, if the first additional effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2312: YES), the first additional effect table is read out (step S2313). The performance side ROM 93 stores in advance a plurality of types of first additional performance tables for each of the number of grants (see FIG. 42) that can be selected in the first additional period. In the first additional effect table reading process, the first additional effect table to be used this time is determined by lottery from the first additional effect table group corresponding to the number of additions grasped in step S2311. Then, the first additional effect table of the determined type is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the performance execution according to the first additional effect table, the upper lamp 61 performs a light emitting effect for one game in the first additional period, and the speaker 62 outputs sound for one game in the first additional period. A display effect is performed on the image display device 63 for one game in the first additional period. In this case, when display effects for one game in the first additional period are performed on the image display device 63, image displays as shown in FIGS. 43(a) to 43(c) are performed.

On the other hand, if the first additional effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 is not set to "1", that is, if the second additional effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2312: NO). , reads out the second additional effect table (step S2314). The performance side ROM 93 stores in advance a plurality of types of second additional performance tables for each of the number of grants (see FIG. 42) that can be selected in the second additional period. In the second additional effect table reading process, the second additional effect table to be used this time is determined by lottery from the second additional effect table group corresponding to the number of grants grasped in step S2311. Then, the second additional effect table of the determined type is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the performance execution according to the second additional effect table, the upper lamp 61 performs a light emitting effect for one game in the second additional period, and the speaker 62 outputs sound for one game in the second additional period. A display effect is performed on the image display device 63 for one game in the second additional period. In this case, when display performance for one game in the second additional period is performed on the image display device 63, image displays as shown in FIGS. 44(a) to 44(c) are performed.

In a situation where the additional period flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2315: YES) and the operation validity period of the production operation device 121 is valid (step S2316: YES), the production operation concerned It is determined whether the device 121 has been operated (step S2317). The operational validity period of the production operation device 121 is set as a period in the middle of one game in the first additional period or the second additional period. During the valid operation period, an operation notification image G35 as shown in FIG. 43(b) or FIG. 44(b) is displayed on the image display device 63.

If the production operation device 121 is being operated (step S2317: YES), operation corresponding processing is executed (step S2318). In the operation gymnastics process, the location to be referred to in the first additional performance table or the second additional performance table read out to the performance side RAM 94 is changed to a corresponding location after the performance operation device 121 is operated. As a result, the grant number notification display G23, G43 as shown in FIG. 43(c) or FIG. 44(c) is performed on the image display device 63.

If the command to end the additional period has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2319: YES), the period end table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S2320). By controlling the execution of the effect according to the period end table, the upper lamp 61 performs a light emitting effect corresponding to the end of the first additional period or the second additional period, and the speaker 62 performs a light emitting effect corresponding to the end of the first additional period or the second additional period. A sound output effect corresponding to the end of the second add-on period is performed, and a display effect corresponding to the end of the first add-on period or the second add-on period is performed on the image display device 63. Thereafter, flag clearing processing is executed (step S2321). In the flag clearing process, the additional period flag, the first additional effect flag, and the second additional effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 are cleared to "0".

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing display control processing for an additional period for performing processing related to an additional period among the display control processing in step S2202 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 46).

If the first additional production flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2401: YES), the two-division designation information is stored in the register of the production side MPU 92 (step S2402), and read out to the production side RAM 94. From the data to be referred to in the current processing time in the table to be referred to among the period start table and the first additional effect table, a moving image display G21 for effect is displayed in the left area A1 and right area A2 of the image display device 63. , G22 or the given number notification display G23 is grasped (step S2403), and the parameters to be applied to the divided image data are grasped (step S2404). This parameter includes information on coordinates, magnification, α value, etc. applied to the image data on the division side.

If the game is not currently being executed, the period start table is the table to be referred to, and if the game is currently being executed, the first additional effect table is the table to be referred to. In addition, in the period start table and the first additional effect table, the image data of the divided side corresponding to the left area A1 and the right area A2 are not individually set, but the image data of the divided side corresponding to the left area A1 Only data is set, and in step S2403, the image data on the divided side is grasped. This information on the divided image data that has been grasped is set in a drawing list and sent to the VDP 103. Based on the drawing list, the VDP 103 reads the image data on the divided side from the memory module 101 to the development buffer 105 of the VRAM 102, and uses the read image data on the divided side to display a moving image G21 for effect in the left area A1, The drawing data for displaying G22 or the number-of-applied notification display G23 is created, and the drawing data is further copied as the drawing data on the right side area A2. As a result, it is not necessary to separately set the information of the image data on the divided side corresponding to the left area A1 and the right area A2 in the period start table and the first additional effect table, so these period start tables and the first additional effect table do not need to be individually set. It is possible to reduce the data capacity of the table. Furthermore, since the VDP 103 does not need to create drawing data individually for each of the left area A1 and the right area A2, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the drawing process.

As described above, in the first additional effect table, information on the image data on the division side necessary for performing the grant number notification display G23 is set only for the left side area A1. On the other hand, in the effect setting process for the add-on period (FIG. 47), when a command is received during the add-on period, the number of awards selected in the add-on lottery process for the current add-on period (step S2104) is grasped. This number of grants is the sum of the number of grants notified on the number of grants notification display G23 in the left area A1 and the number of grants notified on the number of grants notification display G23 in the right area A2. Therefore, the information on the image data on the division side necessary for performing the grant number notification display G23 set in the first additional effect table is the grant number set in the command during the add-on period, that is, in step S2311. This is image data information indicating the value of the quotient obtained by dividing the grasped number of grants by "2".

If the first additional effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 is not set to “1” (step S2401: NO), the 4-division designation information is stored in the register of the effect side MPU 92 (step S2405) and read out to the effect side RAM 94. The upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, and the lower left area A13 of the image display device 63 are selected from the data to be referred to in the current processing time in the table to be referred to among the period start table and the second additional effect table. In addition to grasping the image data on the division side necessary for displaying the moving image G41, G42 for effect or the number of grants notification display G43 in the lower right area A14 (step S2406), it is applied to the image data on the division side. The parameters to be used are determined (step S2407). This parameter includes information on coordinates, magnification, α value, etc. applied to the image data on the division side.

If the game is not currently being executed, the period start table is the table to be referred to, and if the game is currently being executed, the second additional effect table is the table to be referred to. In addition, in the period start table and the second additional effect table, image data on the division side corresponding to the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14 are individually set. Instead, only the image data on the division side corresponding to the upper left area A11 is set, and in step S2406, the image data on the division side is grasped. This information on the divided image data that has been grasped is set in a drawing list and sent to the VDP 103. Based on the drawing list, the VDP 103 reads the image data on the divided side from the memory module 101 to the development buffer 105 of the VRAM 102, and uses the read image data on the divided side to display a moving image G41 for effect in the upper left area A11. , G42 or the grant number notification display G43 is created, and the drawing data is further copied as drawing data for the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. . As a result, it is necessary to individually set the information of the image data on the division side corresponding to the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14 in the period start table and the second additional effect table. Since there is no table, it is possible to suppress the data capacity of the period start table and the second additional effect table. Furthermore, since the VDP 103 does not need to create drawing data individually for each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, the processing load of the drawing process can be reduced. becomes possible.

As described above, in the second additional effect table, information on the image data on the division side necessary for performing the grant number notification display G43 is set only for the upper left area A11. On the other hand, in the effect setting process for the add-on period (FIG. 47), when a command is received during the add-on period, the number of awards selected in the add-on lottery process for the current add-on period (step S2104) is grasped. The number of grants is the number of grants notified in the number of grants notification display G43 in the upper left area A11, the number of grants notified in the number of grants notification display G43 in the upper right area A12, and the number of grants in the lower left area A13. This is the total of the number of grants notified on the notification display G43 and the number of grants notified on the number of grants notification display G43 in the lower right area A14. Therefore, the information on the image data on the division side necessary for performing the grant number notification display G43 set in the second additional effect table is the grant number set in the command during the add-on period, that is, in step S2311. This is image data information indicating the value of the quotient obtained by dividing the grasped number of grants by "4".

When the process of step S2404 or step S2407 is executed, history image data corresponding to the game history is grasped (step S2408). The history image data includes image data for displaying the remaining number of continuation games image G31, image data for displaying the number of acquired number display image G32, and image data for displaying the number of remaining grants display image G33. . Based on various commands received from the main MPU 72, the production side MPU 92 determines the remaining number of consecutive games in the first add-on period or the second add-on period, the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5, and the remaining game media in the AT state ST5. The number of additions can be specified, and the history image data corresponding to the specified various information is grasped in step S2408. Furthermore, parameters to be applied to the grasped historical image data are grasped (step S2409). This parameter includes information on coordinates, magnification, α value, etc. applied to historical image data, and is fixed information. This fixed information is set in advance in the performance side ROM93.

After that, if the situation is such that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R should be notified (step S2410: YES), stop order image data for displaying the stop order notification image G34 to be displayed this time is grasped ( Step S2411). Based on various commands received from the main side MPU 72, the performance side MPU 92 determines whether the situation is such that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R should be notified, and if the stop order is to be notified, the stop order is determined. The type can be specified, and the stop order image data is grasped in step S2411 according to the specified various information. Further, parameters to be applied to the determined stop order image data are determined (step S2412). This parameter includes information on coordinates, magnification, α value, etc. applied to the stop order image data, and is fixed information. This fixed information is set in advance in the performance side ROM93.

When a negative determination is made in step S2410 or when the process of step S2412 is executed, it is determined whether or not the production operation device 121 has been operated during the operational validity period of the production operation device 121 (step S2413). Whether or not the operation validity period of the performance operation device 121 is valid is specified from the first additional performance table or the second additional performance table read out to the performance side RAM 94. If the production operation device 121 is operated during the operation validity period (step S2413: YES), the first additional production table or the second additional production table read out to the production side RAM 94 is referenced in the current processing time. From the target data, the operation effect image data for displaying the operation notification image G35 is grasped (step S2414), and the parameters to be applied to the operation effect image data are grasped (step S2415). This parameter includes information on coordinates, magnification, α value, etc. applied to the operation effect image data, and is fixed information.

If a negative determination is made in step S2413 or if the process in step S2415 is executed, a drawing list output process is executed (step S2416). In the drawing list output process, information on the various image data grasped in steps S2401 to S2415, parameters to be applied to the various image data, and other information are set in the drawing list, and the set drawing list is sent to the VDP 103. do. In this case, if the 2-division designation information is stored in the register of the production-side MPU 92 in step S2402, the 2-division designation information is set in the drawing list, and the 4-division designation information is stored in the production-side MPU 92 in step S2405. If stored in the register, the 4-division designation information is set in the drawing list.

The VDP 103 reads the image data from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 according to the received drawing list, and creates drawing data in the frame buffer 106 after applying parameters and various processing to the read image data. It is set in the target frame areas 106a and 106b. As a result, drawing data corresponding to the drawing list is created in the frame areas 106a and 106b, and the created drawing data is set in the image processing device 63b of the image display device 63, so that an image corresponding to the drawing data is created. It is displayed on the image display device 63.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing divided image rendering processing executed by the VDP 103 during the first addition period or the second addition period. 50(a) to 50(d) are explanations for explaining how drawing data is created in the drawing target frame areas 106a and 106b of the frame buffer 106 by executing the drawing process of the divided image. It is a diagram.

If the received drawing list has two-split designation information set (step S2501: YES), the image data on the split side set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102. At the same time (step S2502), the parameters to be applied to the divided image data are grasped from the drawing list (step S2503). Then, with the parameters grasped in step S2503 applied, the image data on the division side read out to the expansion buffer 105 in step S2502 is used as the drawing target among the first and second frame areas 106a and 106b in the frame buffer 106. Drawing is performed in the frame areas 106a and 106b (step S2504). In this case, the coordinates and magnification for drawing the divided image data obtained in step S2502 in the left side area A1 of the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn are set in the parameters obtained in step S2503. ing. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50(a), among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn, the first section area DA1 corresponding to the left side area A1 of the display surface of the image display device 63 when divided into two is The image data D1 is in a drawn state. The image data D1 on the division side is data for displaying the moving image display G22 for effect, but the same applies to the case where the moving image display G21 for effect and the grant number notification display G23 are displayed.

Thereafter, the image data D1 on the divided side drawn in the first section area DA1 when divided into two is divided into two parts corresponding to the right side area A2 of the display surface of the image display device 63 among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. It is copied to the second section area DA2 at (step S2505). As a result, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the same divided side is applied to each of the first divided area DA1 when divided into two and the second divided area DA2 when divided into two in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. The image data D1 is now in a drawn state.

Thereafter, the history image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2506). Then, parameters to be applied to the historical image data are read from the drawing list, and with the read parameters applied, the historical image data read out in step S2506 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn (step S2507). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50(c), the image data D2 corresponding to the remaining number of continued games image G31, the image data D3 corresponding to the number-of-games-obtained display image G32, and the remaining number of games displayed are displayed in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. The image data D4 corresponding to the grant number display image G33 is now drawn. In this case, these image data are displayed so that the remaining continuation game number image G31, the number of acquisitions display image G32, and the remaining number of grants display image G33 are displayed in front of the animation display G21, G22 for effect and the number of grants notification display G23. D2 to D4 are overwritten with an opaque α value applied to the divided image data D1 in the frame regions 106a and 106b to be drawn. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which the images are blended with a translucent α value applied.

After that, if the stop order image data is set in the drawing list (step S2508: YES), the stop order image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2509). Then, parameters to be applied to the stop order image data are read from the drawing list, and with the read parameters applied, the stop order image data read out in step S2509 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. (Step S2510). Therefore, image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. In this case, the image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34 is in the frame area to be drawn so that the stop order notification image G34 is displayed in front of the animation displays G21, G22 for effect and the number of additions notification display G23. At 106a and 106b, the divided image data D1 is overwritten with an opaque α value applied thereto. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which the images are blended with a translucent α value applied.

Thereafter, if the operation effect image data is set in the drawing list (step S2511: YES), the operation effect image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2511: YES). S2512). Then, parameters to be applied to the operation effect image data are read from the drawing list, and with the read parameters applied, the operation effect image data read out in step S2512 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. (Step S2513). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50(d), the image data D5 corresponding to the operation notification image G35 is drawn in the frame regions 106a and 106b to be drawn. In this case, the image data D5 corresponding to the operation notification image G35 is drawn in the frame area 106a to be drawn so that the operation notification image G35 is displayed in front of the animation displays G21, G22 for effect and the number notification display G23. , 106b, the divided image data D1 is overwritten with an opaque α value applied thereto. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which the images are blended with a translucent α value applied.

If 2-split designation information is not set in the received drawing list (step S2501: NO), that is, if 4-split designation information is set, the image data of the split side set in the drawing list is It is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2514), and the parameters to be applied to the divided image data are grasped from the drawing list (step S2515). Then, with the parameters grasped in step S2515 applied, the divided image data read out to the development buffer 105 in step S2514 is used as the drawing target among the first and second frame areas 106a and 106b in the frame buffer 106. Drawing is performed in the frame areas 106a and 106b (step S2516). In this case, the coordinates and magnification for drawing the divided image data obtained in step S2514 in the upper left area A11 of the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn are set in the parameters obtained in step S2515. has been done. Therefore, among the frame regions 106a and 106b to be drawn, the image data on the divided side is drawn in the first section region when dividing into four, which corresponds to the upper left region A11 of the display surface of the image display device 63.

Thereafter, the image data on the divided side drawn in the first section area when divided into four parts is divided into four parts corresponding to the upper right area A12 of the display surface of the image display device 63 among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. , the third divided area when divided into four corresponding to the lower left area A13, and the fourth divided area when divided into four corresponding to the lower right side area A14 (step S2517). As a result, each of the first divided area when divided into four, the second divided area when divided into four, the third divided area when divided into four, and the fourth divided area when divided into four in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. The image data of the same divided side is drawn on the .

Thereafter, the history image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2506). Then, parameters to be applied to the historical image data are read from the drawing list, and with the read parameters applied, the historical image data read out in step S2506 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn (step S2507). Therefore, in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn, image data corresponding to the remaining number of continuous games image G31, image data corresponding to the number of acquired number display image G32, and image data corresponding to the remaining number of grants display image G33 are drawn. The state will be as follows. In this case, these image data are displayed so that the remaining number of continuous games image G31, the number of acquisitions display image G32, and the remaining number of grants display image G33 are displayed in front of the animation display G41, G42 for effect and the number of grants notification display G43. is overwritten with an opaque α value applied to the divided image data in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which the images are blended with a translucent α value applied.

After that, if the stop order image data is set in the drawing list (step S2508: YES), the stop order image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2509). Then, the parameters to be applied to the stop order image data are read from the drawing list, and the stop order image data read in step S2509 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn with the read parameters applied (step S2510). Therefore, the image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. In this case, the image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34 is overwritten in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn with an opaque α value applied to the image data on the divided side so that the stop order notification image G34 is displayed in front of the animation displays G41 and G42 for performance and the award number notification display G43. However, it may be configured to be blended with a semi-transparent α value applied.

Thereafter, if the operation effect image data is set in the drawing list (step S2511: YES), the operation effect image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2511: YES). S2512). Then, parameters to be applied to the operation effect image data are read from the drawing list, and with the read parameters applied, the operation effect image data read out in step S2512 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. (Step S2513). Therefore, the image data corresponding to the operation notification image G35 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. In this case, the image data corresponding to the operation notification image G35 is displayed in the frame area 106a to be drawn, so that the operation notification image G35 is displayed in front of the animation displays G41, G42 for effect and the number notification display G43. In step 106b, the divided image data is overwritten with an opaque α value applied thereto. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which blending is performed with a translucent α value applied.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The image data D1 at the time of division is set in each of the first divided area DA1 when divided into two and the second divided area DA2 when divided into two in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. A moving image display G21, G22 for presentation and a grant number notification display G23 are displayed on the left side area A1 and right side area A2 on the display surface, respectively. As a result, when displaying animation displays G21, G22 for effect and number notification display G23 on the left side area A1 and right side area A2 on the display surface of the image display device 63, the same image data can be used to display two It is only necessary to set the same image data D1 at the time of division to each of the first divided area DA1 at the time of division and the second divided area DA2 at the time of two divisions. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably perform display on the image display device 63.

Image data D1 at the time of division drawn using image data in the first divided area DA1 at the time of division is copied to the second divided area DA2 at the time of division, so that the second divided area DA2 at the time of division is Image data D1 at the time of division is set. This reduces the processing load compared to a configuration in which the image data D1 at the time of division is drawn using image data for each of the first divided area DA1 at the time of division and the second divided area DA2 at the time of division. becomes possible. Further, it is possible to set the image data D1 at the time of division in the second divided area DA2 at the time of division by using the image data D1 at the time of division drawn in the first divided area DA1 at the time of division.

In a state where the same animation display G21, G22 for effect and the grant number notification display G23 are displayed in the left side area A1 and right side area A2 divided on the display surface of the image display device 63, the left side area A1 and the right side area In each of the areas A2, a remaining continuation game number image G31, an acquired number display image G32, a remaining grant number display image G33, a stop order notification image G34, and an operation notification image G35, which are not images displayed with the same content, are displayed. As a result, while drawing attention to the animation display G21, G22 for effect and the number notification display G23 displayed in the left area A1 and right area A2, respectively, the animation display G21, G22 for effect and the number notification display G23 for effect Display contents different from the above are displayed independently of the left side area A1 and the right side area A2, such as a remaining number of continued games image G31, an acquired number display image G32, a remaining number of awarded number display image G33, a stop order notification image G34, and an operation. This can be provided using the notification image G35. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform the display on the image display device 63.

In the left side area A1 and the right side area A2, the animation display G21, G22 for production and the number of grants notification display G23 are displayed, and the remaining number of continuous games image G31, the number of acquisitions display image G32, and the remaining number of grants display image G33 are displayed. , in the configuration in which the stop order notification image G34 and the operation notification image G35 are displayed, the remaining number of continued games image G31, the number of acquisitions display image G32, the remaining number of grants display image G33, the stop order notification image G34, and the operation notification image G35 are displayed on the left side. Since they are displayed as if they exist in front of area A1 and right side area A2, the number of remaining continuation games image G31, the number of acquisitions display image G32, the number of remaining grants display image G33, the stop order notification image G34, and the operation notification image It becomes possible to make the G35 stand out.

The animation displays G21 and G22 for production and the number of grants notification display G23 are displayed within the left area A1 and the right area A2, whereas the stop order notification image G34 and the operation notification image G35 are displayed within the left area A1. and is displayed across the left side area A1 and right side area A2 so as to straddle the boundary of the right side area A2. Thereby, it becomes possible to display the stop order notification image G34 and the operation notification image G35 in a larger size than the animation displays G21, G22 for effect and the number of grants notification display G23.

In the first addition period, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into two areas, the left side area A1 and the right side area A2, whereas in the second addition period, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into the left side area A11, the right side area A11, It is divided into four areas: an upper right area A12, a lower left area A13, and a lower right area A14. This makes it possible to diversify the display contents when displaying the moving image displays G21, G22, G41, G42 for presentation, and the grant number notification displays G23, G43 using a plurality of display areas.

<Fifth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in the processing configuration for rendering processing of divided images. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fourth embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the fourth embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing divided image rendering processing in this embodiment executed by the VDP 103.

If the received drawing list has two-split designation information set (step S2601: YES), the image data of the split side set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102. At the same time (step S2602), parameters to be applied to the divided image data are grasped from the drawing list (step S2603). Then, with the parameters grasped in step S2603 applied, the divided image data read out to the expansion buffer 105 in step S2602 is drawn in the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2604).

Thereafter, magnification setting processing for dividing into two is executed (step S2605). In the magnification setting process when dividing into two, the size of the drawing data drawn in the expansion buffer 105 in step S2604 corresponds to the left side area A1 of the display surface of the image display device 63 among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. The size of the drawing data is changed so that it is the same as the size of the first section area DA1 when dividing into two. Then, the drawing data after changing the size is divided into a first section area DA1 corresponding to the left side area A1 of the display surface of the image display device 63 among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn, and an image display It is copied to each of the second section areas DA2 when divided into two corresponding to the right side area A2 of the display surface of the device 63 (step S2606). As a result, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the same divided side is applied to each of the first divided area DA1 when divided into two and the second divided area DA2 when divided into two in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. The image data D1 is now in a drawn state.

Thereafter, the processes of steps S2607 to S2614 are executed. The processing contents of steps S2607 to S2614 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2506 to S2513 in the divided image drawing process (FIG. 49) in the fourth embodiment.

If 2-split designation information is not set in the received drawing list (step S2601: NO), that is, if 4-split designation information is set, the image data of the split side set in the drawing list is It is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2615), and the parameters to be applied to the divided image data are grasped from the drawing list (step S2616). Then, with the parameters grasped in step S2616 applied, the divided image data read out to the expansion buffer 105 in step S2615 is drawn in the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2617).

Thereafter, magnification setting processing for dividing into four is executed (step S2618). In the magnification setting process when dividing into four, the size of the drawing data drawn in the development buffer 105 in step S2617 is set in the upper left area A11 of the display surface of the image display device 63 among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. The size of the drawing data is changed so that it is the same as the size of the first section area when divided into four corresponding areas. Then, the drawing data after changing the size is displayed as a first section area when divided into four, which corresponds to the upper left area A11 of the display surface of the image display device 63, among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. The second segment area when divided into four, corresponding to the upper right area A12 of the display surface of the device 63, the third segment area when divided into four, corresponding to the lower left area A13 of the display surface of the image display device 63, and the image display device 63. The image data is copied to each of the fourth divided areas corresponding to the lower right area A14 of the display screen (step S2619). As a result, each of the first section area when divided into four, the second section area when divided into four, the third divided area when divided into four, and the fourth divided area when divided into four in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. The image data of the same divided side is drawn on the .

Then, the process of steps S2607 to S2614 is executed. The process of steps S2607 to S2614 is the same as the process of steps S2506 to S2513 in the drawing process of the divided images in the fourth embodiment (Figure 49).

According to the above configuration, the image data on the divided side is once drawn in the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102, and the drawn image data on the divided side is used in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn when performing two-split display. Copy to each of the first section area when divided into two and the second section area when divided into two, and when performing a four-split display, the first section when divided into four in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. The configuration is such that copies are made to each of the areas, the second section area when divided into four, the third divided area when divided into four, and the fourth divided area when divided into four. As a result, if data drawn in a part of the frame areas 106a, 106b to be drawn is to be displayed in two parts without being drawn in other areas of the frame areas 106a, 106b, the image display device It becomes possible to display the same animation display G21, G22 for effect and the number notification display G23 on the left side area A1 and right side area A2 of the image display device 63, respectively. It becomes possible to display the same animation display G41, G42 for effect and the number notification display G43 in the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, respectively.

<Sixth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the display contents of the image display device 63 when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends and the display contents of the image display device 63 when the AT state ST5 ends. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figures 52(a) to 52(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without transition to the AT state ST5.

When a rotation stop operation is performed on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the final game of pseudo bonus state ST4 without transition to AT state ST5, and the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped. As shown in FIG. 52(a), the image display device 63 starts displaying a bonus end image G51 (specifically, a text image of "Bonus End") as a bonus end display. The content of the bonus end display is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends and the transition to the AT state ST5 does not occur, and the content may be different from the character image "Bonus End". It may be a text image, or a text image indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended may be displayed along with the background image or character image.

When a predetermined period of time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed since the start of the bonus end display, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the image display device 63 displays the bonus end image G51. As a warning display, a warning image G52 (specifically, a text image of "Play in moderation") is started to be displayed. The caution display is a display (“addiction prevention display”) for calling attention to the player from becoming absorbed in the game in order to prevent the player from becoming absorbed in the game. In this slot machine 10, a text image saying "Play in moderation" is displayed as the caution image G52, but the specific display content is arbitrary as long as it is possible to encourage people to avoid becoming addicted to the game, and text images with different content may be displayed. There may also be a configuration in which a character image that encourages prevention of immersion is displayed along with the background image or character image.

The warning display is maintained for a predetermined display duration period (specifically, 3 seconds). In this case, if the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5 is completed and a bet setting is made for the game media to start the next game, the state shown in FIG. 52(c) As shown, the bonus end display that had been displayed up to that point on the image display device 63 is ended, and the display of the image G53 of the normal gaming state ST1 is started, but at this point, the display of the caution image G52 is stopped. If the predetermined display duration period has not elapsed since the start of the warning image G52, the display of the caution image G52 is maintained in a situation where the image G53 of the normal gaming state ST1 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 52(c). Ru. The display of the caution image G52 ends when a predetermined display duration period has elapsed since the start of the display of the caution image G52, even in the middle of a newly started game in the normal gaming state ST1.

On the other hand, if no new bet is set between the start of the display of the warning image G52 and the end of a specified display duration in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 that does not involve a transition to the AT state ST5, the display of the warning image G52 ends while the display of the bonus end image G51 continues. In this case, the display content of the image display device 63 becomes the display content shown in FIG. 52(a).

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing pseudo bonus processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the process for the pseudo bonus is executed in step S605 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 18), as in the first embodiment, and the corresponding process at the end of the game is performed for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game. Since the process for the pseudo bonus is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game have stopped.

When the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3" (step S2701: YES), the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2702). Thereafter, by determining whether the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter after subtracting 1 is "0", it is determined whether the game to be ended this time is the final game in the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S2703). If the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is not "0" (step S2703: NO), the present pseudo bonus process is ended without executing the process for ending the pseudo bonus state ST4 after step S2704. If the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S2703: YES), processing for terminating the pseudo-bonus state ST4 from step S2704 onward is executed.

In the process for ending the pseudo-bonus state ST4, first, it is determined whether or not the AT transition confirmation flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". It is determined whether the transition conditions are satisfied (step S2704). If the AT transition confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S2704: YES), it means that the conditions for transition to the AT state ST5 are satisfied in the current pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, first, the pseudo bonus status flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2705). Thereafter, information corresponding to "200", which is the initial number of AT statuses ST5, is set in the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 (step S2706). Furthermore, the AT state flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2707). Then, an AT transition command indicating that transition to AT state ST5 will occur is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2708). When receiving the AT transition command, the production side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute a production indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 will occur.

On the other hand, if the AT transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S2704: NO), it means that the conditions for transition to the AT state ST5 are not satisfied in the current pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, processing for ending the pseudo bonus state ST4 and the second section SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, initialization processing for the second section SC2 is executed (step S2709). In the initialization process for the second section SC2, the second section flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. Further, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, the pseudo bonus state flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Further, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, the AT continuation counter 74e and the AT status flag of the main side RAM 74 are cleared to "0". As a result, the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state ST1. Note that even in the middle of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the second section SC2 is ended by executing the initialization process of the second section SC2. continues without being terminated.

Thereafter, the section display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the unlit state (step S2710). As a result, the notification on the section display section 67 that it is the second section SC2 is ended. Thereafter, a bonus end command indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended without transitioning to the AT state ST5 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2711). When receiving the bonus end command, the production side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute a production indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended.

FIG. 54(a) is a flowchart showing a production control process for a pseudo bonus executed by the production side MPU 92. The performance control process for the pseudo bonus is repeatedly executed by the performance side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (for example, a 4 millisecond cycle).

If an AT transition command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2801: YES), an AT transition display setting process is executed (step S2802). In the AT transition display setting process, data is used to cause the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to execute an effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends and the AT state ST5 begins. Settings are made. Note that the warning display is not executed when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends and the AT state ST5 is entered.

If the bonus end command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2803: YES), a bonus end display setting process is executed (step S2804). In the bonus end display setting process, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended without transitioning to the AT state ST5. Data settings are performed. In this case, as data for controlling the display of the image display device 63, data that enables execution of the bonus end display is set in the production side RAM 94. As a result, the image display device 63 starts displaying a bonus end image G51 as shown in FIG. 52(a).

Thereafter, a process for setting the warning display start timer counter 131 is executed (step S2805). As shown in FIG. 54(b), which is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the performance side RAM 94, a warning display start timer counter 131 is provided in the performance side RAM 94. The warning display start timer counter 131 is a counter used by the production side MPU 92 to measure a predetermined period from the start of the bonus end display to the start of the warning display. In step S2805, information corresponding to a value for measuring one second as the predetermined period is set in the warning display start timer counter 131.

If the process of step S2802 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S2803, or if the process of step S2805 is executed, other processes are executed (step S2806). In other processing, processing for executing effects different from the various effects described above in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing various end display control processes executed by the production side MPU 92. Various end display control processes are repeatedly executed by the performance side MPU 92 at relatively short cycles (for example, 4 millisecond cycles).

If a bonus end display or an AT end display (described later) is being executed on the image display device 63 (step S2901: YES), it is determined whether or not a bet setting for gaming media has been made to start a new game. (Step S2902). When a bet is set for game media by inserting medals into the medal slot 45 or operating the credit insert buttons 47 and 48 in a situation where it is possible to start a new game, the main MPU 72 issues a command corresponding to the bet setting for the game media. is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. The command is sent every time one or more game media are bet, but it may be configured to be sent when the number of bets on the game media that makes it possible to start the game is completed. If the production side MPU 92 has received the command, it determines that a bet setting for game media has been made to start a new game, and makes an affirmative determination in step S2902.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2902, the end processing of the end display being executed is executed (step S2903). In the end processing, if the bonus end display is being executed, the data for executing the bonus end display is erased, and the display of the image G53 (see FIG. 52(c)) of the normal gaming state ST1 is started. Configure the data to make it work. As a result, the state in which the bonus end display is executed on the image display device 63 in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends when a bet setting for starting a new game is made, and the state returns to the normal game state. Display of image G53 of ST1 is started. Note that even if the termination process is executed in a situation where a caution display is being executed on the image display device 63, the caution display continues without being terminated. Furthermore, if the termination processing is executed in a situation where the AT termination indication is being executed, the AT termination indication will be terminated, the details of which will be explained later.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the warning display control process executed by the production side MPU 92. The control process of the warning display is repeatedly executed by the performance side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (for example, a 4 millisecond cycle).

When the value of the warning display start timer counter 131 is 1 or more (step S3001: YES), the value of the warning display start timer counter 131 is subtracted by 1 (step S3002). If the value of the warning display start timer counter 131 after the subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S3003: YES), a warning display setting process is executed (step S3004). In the caution display setting process, data is set so that the image display device 63 executes a caution display to prevent the player from becoming absorbed in the game. As a result, the display of the caution image G52 is started in a situation where the bonus end image G51 is being displayed on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 52(b). On the other hand, in the caution display setting process, data for controlling the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 are not set. As a result, while the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 continue to display the effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended, the caution image G52 is displayed in the situation where the bonus end image G51 is displayed on the image display device 63. This makes it possible to start displaying. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the upper lamp 61 may be configured to emit light when the caution image G52 starts to be displayed. In this case, the speaker 62 may output a corresponding sound.

Thereafter, a process for setting the warning display continuation timer counter 132 is executed (step S3005). As shown in FIG. 54(b), a continuation timer counter 132 for warning display is provided in the performance side RAM 94. The warning display continuation timer counter 132 is a counter used by the production side MPU 92 to measure a predetermined display duration period from the start of the warning display to the end of the warning display. In step S3005, information corresponding to a value for measuring 3 seconds as the predetermined display duration is set in the caution display continuation timer counter 132. The value set in the warning display continuation timer counter 132 is decremented by 1 each time a timer update process that is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) by the production side MPU 92 is executed.

In the warning display control process, if the value of the warning display continuation timer counter 132 is 1 or more (step S3006: YES), the value of the caution display continuation timer counter 132 is subtracted by 1 (step S3007). If the value of the warning display continuation timer counter 132 after the subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S3008: YES), a warning display termination process is executed (step S3009). In the termination process, data for executing the warning display is erased. As a result, the state in which the warning display is executed on the image display device 63 in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is independent of whether or not the bet setting for the game media to start a new game has been executed. The warning display ends when a predetermined display duration period has elapsed since the warning display started.

FIG. 57 is a time chart showing how the bonus end display and caution display are executed when the pseudo bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5 ends. FIG. 57(a) shows the period during which the game is being executed, FIG. 57(b) shows the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating, and FIG. 57(c) shows the bet settings for the game media. FIG. 57(d) shows the period during which the section display section 67 is in the lit state, FIG. 57(e) shows the period during which the bonus end display is executed, and FIG. f) indicates the period during which the caution display is executed.

First, a case will be described in which the warning display ends before the next game starts for the final game in the pseudo bonus state ST4.

At timing t1, as shown in FIG. 57(a), the final game in the pseudo bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5 is started. Thereafter, at timing t2, as shown in FIG. 57(b), the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game is stopped. At the timing of t2, the section display section 67 changes from the lit state to the unlit state as shown in FIG. 57(d). This completes the notification on the section display section 67 that it is the second section SC2. Further, at the timing t2, a bonus end display is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 57(e).

Thereafter, a warning display is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 57(f) at timing t3, which is a timing when a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed from timing t2. In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying the warning in a situation where the bonus end display is being executed. Note that the timing t3 is a situation in which the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended and it is possible to start a new game. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and caution should be taken before the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, that is, before the situation becomes such that it is possible to start a new game next to the final game. The configuration may be such that the display starts.

Thereafter, when a predetermined display duration period (specifically, 3 seconds) passes from the timing t3 at the timing t4, the warning display on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 57(f). In this case, since the bet setting for starting a new game has not been made yet, the bonus end display on the image display device 63 continues as shown in FIG. 57(e).

Thereafter, at timing t5, bet setting for game media is performed as shown in FIG. 57(c). The bet setting may be a bet setting of "1" game medium due to one medal being inserted into the medal slot 45, and may be a bet setting of "1" game medium due to one medal being inserted into the medal slot 45. The bet setting for "3" game media may be due to the operation of the 1 credit input button 47, and the second credit input button 48 is operated in a situation where two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. It may also be a bet setting of "2" game media. At the timing t5, the bonus end display on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 57(e). In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying the image G53 in the normal gaming state ST1. Thereafter, by operating the start lever 41 at timing t6, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 57(a).

Next, we will explain the case where the warning display continues even after the next game has started following the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4.

At timing t7, as shown in FIG. 57(a), the final game in the pseudo bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5 is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(b) at timing t8, the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game is stopped. At the timing of t8, the section display section 67 changes from the lit state to the unlit state as shown in FIG. 57(d). This completes the notification on the section display section 67 that it is the second section SC2. Further, at the timing t8, a bonus end display is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 57(e).

Thereafter, a warning display is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 57(f) at timing t9, which is a timing when a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed from timing t8. In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying the warning in a situation where the bonus end display is being executed. Note that the timing of t9 is a situation in which the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended and it is possible to start a new game. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and caution should be taken before the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, that is, before the situation becomes such that it is possible to start a new game next to the final game. The configuration may be such that the display starts.

Thereafter, bet setting for the game media is performed as shown in FIG. 57(c) at timing t10, which is before a predetermined display duration period (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed from timing t9. . The bet setting may be a bet setting of "1" game medium due to one medal being inserted into the medal slot 45, and may be a bet setting of "1" game medium due to one medal being inserted into the medal slot 45. The bet setting for "3" game media may be due to the operation of the 1 credit input button 47, and the second credit input button 48 is operated in a situation where two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. It may also be a bet setting of "2" game media. At the timing t10, the bonus end display on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 57(e). In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying the image G53 in the normal gaming state ST1. However, since the predetermined display duration period has not yet elapsed, the warning display on the image display device 63 continues as shown in FIG. 57(f). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52(c), the image display device 63 starts displaying the image G53 of the normal gaming state ST1 while the caution image G52 continues to be displayed.

Thereafter, by operating the start lever 41 at timing t11, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 57(a). Even in this case, since the predetermined display duration period has not yet elapsed, the warning display on the image display device 63 continues as shown in FIG. 57(f). Thereafter, at timing t12, which is a timing in the middle of the game started at timing t11, a predetermined display duration period elapses from timing t9, and as shown in FIG. The warning display ends.

With the above configuration, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5 ends, a warning is displayed on the image display device 63, so that the player does not become absorbed in the game. It becomes possible to call for attention. In this case, this warning display continues for a predetermined display duration period (specifically, 3 seconds) regardless of whether the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended and a new game has started. Ru. This makes it possible to ensure that the player has an opportunity to check the warning display.

The warning display is started when the bonus end display is being executed on the image display device 63. This makes it possible to start the warning display after making the player aware that the pseudo bonus state ST4, which does not involve a transition to the AT state ST5, is ending.

Even in a situation where the bonus end display continues on the image display device 63, the warning display ends when a predetermined display continuation period has elapsed. This makes it possible to prevent the warning display from continuing for an unnecessarily long period of time.

FIGS. 58(a) and 58(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the AT state ST5 ends.

When the rotation stop operation is performed on all reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the final game of the AT state ST5 and the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, the image display device 63 starts displaying the AT end as shown in FIG. 58(a), an end indication image G61 (specifically, a text image of "RUSH END") to enable the player to recognize that the AT state ST5 is ending, a total number of games image G62 (specifically, a text image of "680G") indicating the total number of games played in the current AT state ST5, and a total number of acquisitions image G63 (specifically, a text image of "TOTAL 1800") indicating the total number of game media granted to the player in the current AT state ST5. The content of the AT end indication is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that the AT state ST5 is ending. For example, the end indication image G61 may be displayed, but at least one of the total number of games image G62 and the total number of acquisitions image G63 may not be displayed.

Note that when AT state ST5 is started, as already explained, information corresponding to "200", which is the initial number of grants for AT state ST5, is set in the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74, and the number of grants is added. If this occurs, the number of awards subject to addition is added to the value of the AT continuation counter 74e, and a game with a bet number of "3" is executed as in the first embodiment, and a game with a bet number of 4 or more is executed. When a medium is awarded, the number exceeding the bet number "3" is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e, and when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e after the subtraction becomes "0" AT state ST5 ends. In this case, in the AT state ST5, a number corresponding to the remaining grant number stored in the AT continuation counter 74e is displayed on the image display device 63. Further, in the AT state ST5, the total number of games played in the AT state ST5 and the total number of game media given to the player in the AT state ST5 are displayed on the image display device 63. The display of the total number of games is incremented by 1 each time a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, but the addition is not performed when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed. When displaying the total number of game media, if more game media are awarded than the number of bets, the amount exceeding the number of bets is added.

When a predetermined period of time (specifically, 1 second) has passed since the AT end display started, as shown in FIG. In the displayed situation, the image display device 63 starts displaying a caution image G52 (specifically, a text image of "Play in moderation") as a caution display. This caution image G52 is the same as the caution image G52 displayed on the image display device 63 in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5. More specifically, the performance side ROM 93 stores in advance caution image data used to display the caution image G52, and the caution image data used for displaying the caution image G52 is stored in advance in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 that does not involve transition to the AT state ST5. The same caution image data is used both when displaying the image G52 and when displaying the caution image G52 in the final game in the AT state ST5. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity compared to a configuration in which caution image data corresponding to each situation is prepared. Further, the position and size at which the caution image G52 is displayed on the image display device 63 are also changed when the caution image G52 is displayed in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5, and when the caution image G52 is displayed in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5. The same applies regardless of whether the caution image G52 is displayed in the game. This makes it possible to standardize the processing configuration for displaying the caution image G52.

Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the case where the caution image G52 is displayed in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5, and the case where the caution image G52 is displayed in the final game of the AT state ST5. A configuration may also be adopted in which different caution image data are used. In this case, it is possible to display a caution image G52 with content corresponding to each situation. In addition, the same caution image data is used when displaying the caution image G52 in the final game of pseudo-bonus state ST4 that does not involve a transition to AT state ST5, and when displaying the caution image G52 in the final game of AT state ST5. However, at least one of the position and size at which the caution image G52 is displayed on the image display device 63 may be different. In this case, it becomes possible to display the caution image G52 at a position or size suitable for each situation.

As already explained, the warning display is a display (``addiction prevention display'') to warn the player against becoming absorbed in the game in order to prevent the player from becoming absorbed in the game. In this slot machine 10, a text image saying "Play in moderation" is displayed as the caution image G52, but the specific display content is arbitrary as long as it is possible to encourage people to avoid becoming addicted to the game, and text images with different content may be displayed. There may also be a configuration in which a character image that encourages prevention of immersion is displayed along with the background image or character image.

The caution display that started to be displayed in the final game of AT state ST5 is similar to the case where the caution display is started in the final game of pseudo-bonus state ST4 that does not involve transition to AT state ST5. The display is maintained over the display duration period (specifically, 3 seconds). In this case, in the final game in the AT state ST5, a freeze period (specifically, 5 seconds) occurs that prevents the start of a new game after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating. Then, the warning display starts in a situation where the freeze period is present, and a predetermined display duration period elapses after the warning display starts in a situation where the freeze period continues, so the freeze period continues. The warning display ends depending on the situation. Therefore, the warning display will definitely end before the next game starts for the final game in the AT state ST5.

On the other hand, the AT end display ends when the final game in AT state ST5 ends and a bet setting for game media is made to start the next game. Therefore, in the final game of AT state ST5, the AT end display is displayed as shown in FIG. 58(a), but the caution display is not performed → the AT end display and The display contents of the image display device 63 are changed so that the situation where both warning displays are displayed → the AT end display is displayed but the caution display is not displayed as shown in FIG. 58(a). Be changed.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing AT processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the AT processing is executed in step S606 in the processing at the end of the game (FIG. 18), as in the first embodiment, and the processing at the end of the game is performed on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game. Since it is executed after all the rotations have stopped, the AT process is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game have stopped.

First, by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S3101). If the number of bets in the current game is "2" (step S3101: NO), the processes from step S3202 onwards are not executed. As a result, even if a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in AT state ST5, the remaining number of bets in AT state ST5 is not subtracted, and furthermore, in AT state ST5, the real precursor state or false precursor state If a condition has occurred, the number of standby games for the precursor condition is not subtracted.

Note that when in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), the AT process (FIG. 59) itself is not executed as in the first embodiment. Even if the game is started, the game executed in the CB state is not treated as a game that has been completed in the AT state ST5. Therefore, even if the AT state ST5 transitions to the CB state in the middle, after the CB state ends, the AT state ST5 will be restarted from the state with the remaining number of grants immediately before the transition to the CB state.

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S3101: YES), the process of adding the number of games during AT is executed (step S3102), and the process of updating the net increase during AT is executed (step S3103). In the process of adding up the number of games during AT, the value of the number of games during AT counter provided in the main RAM 74 is incremented by one. The AT game number counter is a counter for measuring the total number of games executed in the AT state ST5, and is cleared to "0" when the AT state ST5 ends. In the process of updating the number of net increases during AT, if neither a replay win nor a small win corresponding to the provision of game media has been achieved in the current game, the number of net increases during AT is updated in the AT net increase counter provided in the main side RAM 74. Subtract "3" from the value, and if a replay winning is achieved in this game, maintain the value of the AT net increase counter, and if a small role winning is achieved in this game, this time The value obtained by subtracting "3" from the number of game media awarded in the game is added to the value of the net increase counter during AT. The AT net increase counter is a counter for measuring the increase/decrease in game media owned by the player in the AT state ST5, and is cleared to "0" when the AT state ST5 ends. A command including the value of the game number counter during AT and the value of the net increase number counter during AT is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92 every time a game is executed. Based on receiving the command, the production side MPU 92 updates the display of the total number of games and the total number of game media displayed on the image display device 63 in the AT state ST5.

After that, it is determined whether or not a small winning combination has been achieved in the current game, and a number of game media exceeding the number of bets "3" has been awarded (step S3104). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the first bell winning, second bell winning, first watermelon winning, second watermelon winning, and cherry winning has been achieved. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3104, on the condition that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S3105: YES), the process of subtracting the AT continuation counter 74e is executed (step S3106). . In the subtraction process, the bet number "3" is subtracted from the number of game media awarded in the current game, and the value after the subtraction is subtracted from the AT continuation counter 74e. In step S3106, if the value after the subtraction is less than "0" and the borrow flag is set to "1", the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is cleared to "0".

Note that the configuration is not limited to the above, and if the award of game media occurs in a situation where the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more, the number of awards itself is counted as the number of credits provided to the AT continuation counter without subtracting the number of bets. A configuration may be adopted in which the value is subtracted from the value of 74e. In this case, the AT state ST5 ends when the total number of game media paid out reaches the end reference number or more. Further, if the award of game media exceeding the number of bets or the replay winning is not achieved, the player's number of game media decreased by the execution of the game may be added to the AT continuation counter 74e. In this case, the AT state ST5 ends when the total net addition of game media becomes equal to or greater than the end reference number.

If a negative determination is made in step S3104, if a negative determination is made in step S3105, or if the process in step S3106 is executed, the condition is that the value of the standby counter 74g of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S3107 :YES), the value of the standby counter 74g is subtracted by 1 (step S3108). If the value of the standby counter 74g after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S3109: YES), it is determined whether the main sign flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3110). ).

When the present precursor flag is set to "1" (step S3110: YES), it means that the precursor state to be ended this time is the present precursor state. In this case, the process of adding the remaining number of grants is executed (step S3111). In this addition process, the value set in the scheduled number counter 74f of the main side RAM 74 is added to the AT continuation counter 74e. As a result, when the final game of this precursor state ends, the number of game media to be awarded in this precursor state is added to the remaining number of game media to be awarded in AT state ST5.

If a negative determination is made in step S3110 or if the process in step S3111 is executed, each of the real precursor flag and false precursor flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3112). As a result, if the current state is the actual precursor state, the actual precursor state ends, and if the current state is the false precursor state, the false precursor state ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S3107, if a negative determination is made in step S3109, or if the process of step S3112 is executed, it is determined whether the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is "0". (Step S3113). If the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0" (step S3113: YES), it means that the remaining number of game media provided in the current AT state ST5 is "0". In this case, by determining whether the value of the standby counter 74g of the main side RAM 74 is "0", it is determined whether the current state is a real precursor state or a false precursor state (step S3114).

If the current state is neither the real precursor state nor the false precursor state, and the value of the standby counter 74g of the main side RAM 74 is "0" (step S3114: YES), the process for terminating the AT state ST5 and the second section SC2 is performed. Execute processing. Specifically, first, an AT end command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S3115). The AT end command includes the value of the game number counter during AT and the value of the net increase number counter during AT in the main side RAM 74. When the production side MPU 92 receives the AT end command, it executes processing for starting an AT end display on the image display device 63.

Thereafter, a setting process for the freeze counter is executed (step S3116). In the setting process, information corresponding to a freeze period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in a freeze counter provided in the main side RAM 74. The value set in the freeze counter is subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S208) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the freeze counter in the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S3117). If the value of the freeze counter is 1 or more (step S3117: YES), the process remains on standby. As a result, progress of the AT process (FIG. 59) is waited until the freeze period has elapsed, and by waiting for the AT process (FIG. 59) to progress, the progress of the normal process (FIG. 12) is waited. It turns out.

If the value of the freeze counter is "0" (step S3117: NO), initialization processing for the second section SC2 is executed (step S3118). The contents of the initialization process for the second section SC2 are the same as the initialization process for the second section SC2 (step S814) in the first embodiment. Specifically, the second section flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In addition, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the user stays in the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 must be maintained, including the counter for storing the remaining number of game media given in the AT state ST5. By clearing various data (including the AT status flag) indicating the status, the gaming status is shifted to the normal gaming status ST1. Note that even in the middle of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the second section SC2 is ended by executing the initialization process of the second section SC2. continues without being terminated.

Thereafter, when the section display section 67 is in the lit state, the section display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the unlit state (step S3119). As a result, the notification on the section display section 67 that it is the second section SC2 is ended. Thereafter, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S3120). This makes it possible for the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the second section SC2 has ended.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the second control process of the game section in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the second control process for the game section is executed in step S607 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 18) in the same way as in the first embodiment, and the corresponding process at the end of the game is the reel 32L, Since it is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32M and 32R have stopped, the second control process of the game section is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in one game have stopped.

If the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S3201: YES), add 1 to the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main side RAM 74. (Step S3202). As in the first embodiment, the continuous game number counter 74c indicates the number of times the game has been executed since the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between. This is a counter for specifying by the main MPU 72.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the continuous game number counter 74c after being incremented by 1 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games, 1500 (step S3203). When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is 1500 or more, it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S3203, and processing for ending the second section SC2 in steps S3211 to S3216 is executed.

If the value of the number of consecutive games counter 74c is less than 1500 (step S3203: NO), in this game, has a replay prize of any one of a first chance replay prize, a second chance replay prize, or a normal replay prize been established? It is determined whether or not (step S3204). In this case, whether the number of bets in the current game is "2" or "3" is subject to the determination in step S3204, and the current game is in the normal gaming state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state. Any gaming state among state ST3, pseudo-bonus state ST4, and AT state ST5 is subject to the determination in step S3204.

If no replay winnings have been achieved (step S3204: NO), the number of bets for the current game (i.e., the value of the number of bets setting counter 74a) is subtracted from the total number of wins counter 74d in the main side RAM 74 (step S3205). . In this case, even if a replay prize was established in the previous game and the current game is a game that corresponds to replaying due to the establishment of the replay prize, the number of bets for the current game (i.e., the number of bets setting counter 74a) ) is subtracted from the total acquisition number counter 74d.

As in the first embodiment, the total number of acquisitions counter 74d has a limit on gaming media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between. This counter is used by the main MPU 72 to specify the total number of net additional sheets. Note that the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media refers to the "total number of gaming media (gaming media The total number of gaming media used to play the game in a situation where the second period SC2 continues (in a situation where the game is not being executed) When the value obtained by subtracting "0") is set as the predetermined difference number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets is taken as the predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets is the increase in the above-mentioned predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value. .

After that, in this game, any of the minor prizes for which game media will be awarded (1st to 9th supplementary prizes, 1st bell prize, 2nd bell prize, 1st watermelon prize, 2nd watermelon prize, and cherry prize) ) is established (step S3206). In this case, whether the number of bets in the current game is "2" or "3" is subject to the determination in step S3206, and the current game is in the normal gaming state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state. Any gaming state among state ST3, pseudo-bonus state ST4, and AT state ST5 is subject to the determination in step S3206. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3206, the number of game media awarded in the current game is added to the total acquisition counter 74d of the main side RAM 74 (step S3207).

If a negative determination is made in step S3206, or if the process in step S3207 is executed, it is determined whether the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main side RAM 74 is 0 or more (step S3208). If the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is less than 0 (step S3208: NO), the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" (step S3209).

As described above, since the number of bets for the current number of games is subtracted from the total number of wins counter 74d in step S3205, for example, any small winnings can be achieved in the game in the normal gaming state ST1 immediately after moving to the second section SC2. If not, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d will be less than zero. In this case, by making a negative determination in step S3208, the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" in step S3209. As a result, the "total number of game media awarded by games executed while the second section SC2 continues ("0" in a situation where no game media is given)" to "the total number of game media awarded in the second section SC2" If the predetermined difference number is the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media used to execute the game in a situation where SC2 is continued (“0” in a situation where the game is not being executed), Using the minimum value of the predetermined difference number as a predetermined reference value, a limited total net increase in the number of game media, which is the number of sheets increased by the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value, is measured using the total acquisition number counter 74d. becomes possible.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3204, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3208, or if the process in step S3209 is executed, does the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceed the upper limit net increase number "2400"? It is determined whether or not (step S3210). If the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d does not exceed "2400" (step S3210: NO), ending handling processing is executed (step S3217). The contents of the ending handling process are the same as the ending handling process (step S817) of the second control process of the game section (FIG. 21) in the first embodiment. If the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds "2400", it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S3210, and processing for ending the second section SC2 in steps S3211 to S3216 is executed.

Here, if any replay winning is established, an affirmative determination is made in step S3204, so that the processing in steps S3205 to S3209 is not executed. In a game where a replay win is achieved, the gaming media owned by the player at the start of the game is used to set bets, but as a profit from the replay win, the same number of bets as the number of bets in the game where the replay win was achieved is It becomes possible to replay a new game depending on the number of bets. In other words, in a game in which a replay prize is achieved, the number of game media owned by the player does not change. In this case, by not executing the processes of steps S3205 to S3209 in a game in which a replay winning is achieved, the value of the total acquisition counter 74d in a game in which the number of game media owned by the player does not change. It becomes possible to omit the execution of processing for changing the , and it becomes possible to omit the execution of wasteful processing.

On the other hand, even in a game in which a replay prize has been won, it is determined in step S3210 whether the value of the total number of winnings counter 74d exceeds "2400" which is the upper limit net increase number. As a result, even though the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d had already exceeded the upper limit net increase number "2400" in the game before the game in which the replay winning was established, due to noise etc. Even if the initialization process of section SC2 has not been executed, it is specified that the value of the total number of winnings counter 74d exceeds "2400", which is the upper limit net increase number, in subsequent games in which replay winnings were achieved. This makes it possible to perform the initialization process of the second section SC2.

In detail, regarding the process for ending the second section SC2 in steps S3211 to S3216, first, an AT end command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S3211). The AT end command includes the value of the game number counter during AT and the value of the net increase number counter during AT in the main side RAM 74. When the production side MPU 92 receives the AT end command, it executes processing for starting an AT end display on the image display device 63.

Thereafter, a setting process for the freeze counter is executed (step S3212). In the setting process, information corresponding to a freeze period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in a freeze counter provided in the main side RAM 74. The value set in the freeze counter is subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S208) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the freeze counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or greater (step S3213). If the value of the freeze counter is 1 or greater (step S3213: YES), the process waits as is. As a result, the progress of the second control process (Figure 60) for the game area is put on hold until the freeze period has elapsed, and the progress of the second control process (Figure 60) for the game area is put on hold, which puts the progress of the normal process (Figure 12) on hold.

If the value of the freeze counter is "0" (step S3213: NO), the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed (step S3214). The process contents of the initialization process of the second section SC2 are the same as the initialization process of the second section SC2 in the first embodiment (step S814). Specifically, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In addition, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the player is in the AT state ST5, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data (including the AT state flag) indicating that the game state is the AT state ST5, including the counter for storing the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5. Note that even if the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are in the middle of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed, and the second section SC2 is terminated, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are not terminated and are continued as they are.

Thereafter, when the section display section 67 is in the lit state, the section display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the unlit state (step S3215). As a result, the notification on the section display section 67 that it is the second section SC2 is ended. Thereafter, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S3216). This makes it possible for the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the second section SC2 has ended.

The process for terminating the second section SC2 in steps S3211 to S3216 described above is the same as the process for terminating the AT state ST5 in steps S3115 to S3120 of the AT process (FIG. 59). Therefore, when the remaining number of grants in AT state ST5 becomes "0" and the AT state ST5 ends, and when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied in AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 ends. In either case, a freeze period is set, and an AT end display and a caution display are performed on the image display device 63 during the freeze period, and when the freeze period is completed, the section display section 67 is turned off. The contents of the state are the same.

Figure 61 is a flowchart showing the performance control process for AT executed by the performance side MPU 92. The performance control process for AT is repeatedly executed by the performance side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (e.g., 4 millisecond cycle).

In step S3301, it is determined whether a false precursor command has been received from the main MPU 72. Similar to the first embodiment, the false omen command was won in a situation where the value of the standby counter 74g was "0" in the AT state processing (FIG. 24) at the start of the game in the main MPU 72. (step S1114: YES, step S1115: NO), it is transmitted in step S1117. If a false omen command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3301: YES), the false omen table is read from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 (step S3302). By controlling the execution of the effect according to the false omen table, the upper lamp 61 performs a light emitting effect corresponding to the false omen state, the speaker 62 performs a sound output effect corresponding to the false omen state, and displays an image. In the device 63, a display effect corresponding to the false precursor state is performed.

In step S3303, it is determined whether or not a real premonition command has been received from the master MPU 72. As in the first embodiment above, this premonition command is transmitted in step S1112 when a real premonition is won in the AT state processing (Figure 24) at the start of the game in the master MPU 72 (step S1107: YES). If a real premonition command has been received from the master MPU 72 (step S3303: YES), the number of awards selected due to the real premonition state winning that triggered the transmission of this real premonition command is determined from the information contained in the real premonition command, and the determined planned number is added to the planned award number counter provided in the presentation RAM 94 (step S3304). It is then determined whether or not a false premonition state presentation is currently being executed (step S3305).

If the performance of the false precursor state is not being executed (step S3305: NO), the actual precursor table corresponding to the remaining number of games of the precursor performance is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S3306). Specifically, in a situation where neither the false precursor state production nor the real precursor state production is executed, the real precursor state production is executed for 10 games, which is the initial number of games of the precursor production. Reads the table for this sign so that it will be executed. On the other hand, in the case where the performance of the present precursor state is being executed, the performance of the present precursor state corresponding to the number of scheduled additions added by executing the process of step S3304 is the precursor production at that point. Read the current precursor table to be executed over the remaining number of games. By controlling the execution of the effect according to the present omen table, the upper lamp 61 performs a light emitting effect corresponding to this omen state, the speaker 62 performs a sound output effect corresponding to this omen state, and the image display device At 63, a display effect corresponding to this precursory state is performed. In the final game of this premonitory state, an image is displayed to notify the number of grants corresponding to the value of the scheduled number of grants counter in the production side RAM 94, and after this display is performed, the remaining number of grants is displayed in the remaining number of grants display image G12. Display will be added to the number. In the remaining number of grants display image G12, a number resulting from adding the number of grants at the end of the current precursor state to the remaining number of grants up to that point is displayed. This allows the player to understand that the remaining award number has increased due to this precursory state.

If the production of the false omen state is being executed (step S3305: YES), a process for reading out the actual omen change table from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 is executed (step S3307). Specifically, the performance of the real precursor state corresponding to the number of scheduled grants added by executing the process of step S3304 is executed for the remaining number of games in the production of the previous false precursor state. Read out the table for changing the sign to make the change. By controlling the performance according to the table for changing the main omen, the upper lamp 61 performs a light emitting effect corresponding to the change of the main omen, the speaker 62 performs a sound output effect corresponding to the change of the main omen, and the image A display effect corresponding to this precursor change is performed on the display device 63.

In this case, in the final game of the actual precursor state that corresponds to the actual precursor change, an effect is initially executed that indicates that the current precursor state was a false precursor state, and then a presentation is performed that indicates that the current precursor state was actually the actual precursor state. A performance indicating this is executed. In detail, regarding the display effect of the image display device 63 in the final game of this omen state corresponding to this omen change, until the final game of the omen state, a confrontation effect between an ally character and an enemy character is developed, and in the final game, the initial In order to show that the current omen state was a false omen state, a display effect is performed in which the ally character appears to have been defeated by the enemy character, and then an ally character is displayed as an effect to show that the current omen state was actually a real omen state. A display effect is performed in which the character revives and defeats the enemy character. Then, when the effect indicating that the present precursor state is present is executed, an image for notifying the number of grants corresponding to the value of the scheduled number of grants counter in the performance side RAM 94 is displayed, and the display is performed. After that, a display is performed in which the number of grants is added to the number of the remaining number of grants display image G12. In the remaining number of grants display image G12, a number resulting from adding the number of grants at the end of the current precursor state to the remaining number of grants up to that point is displayed. This allows the player to understand that the remaining number of awards has increased due to this precursory state.

Here, if the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is "0" in the final game of the relevant precursor performance in a situation where the execution control of the precursor performance is performed according to the present precursor change table, then the final game At this point, a revival corresponding effect is executed as a different effect from the case where the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more. The revival response performance will be explained with reference to FIG. 58(c) in addition to FIGS. 58(a) and 58(b). FIG. 58(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the revival effect.

If the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is "0" in the final game of the relevant precursor performance in a situation where the execution control of the precursor performance is performed using this precursor change table, the final game Now, in a situation where the AT state ST5 actually continues, after performing a performance that makes the player recognize that the AT state ST5 has ended, a revival performance that makes the player recognize that the AT state ST5 continues is executed. A revival response performance will be executed. Specifically, in a game in which the revival compatible effect is executed, if a rotation stop operation is performed on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, the image The display device 63 starts displaying an AT end display as shown in FIG. 58(a). Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed since the AT end display was started, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the image display device 63 A warning display will start. After that, when it is time to execute the revival effect or when a bet is set to start the next game, the AT end display and the caution display are ended and the revival effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 58(c). As a resurrection display in , a resurrection image G64 (specifically, a character image of "Not yet") is displayed on the image display device 63. The image content of the resurrection image G64 is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that the AT state ST5 continues. As a result, it is possible to provide a surprise that the AT state ST5 continues to the player who thought that the AT state ST5 has ended, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, even if the revival effect is executed, not only the AT end display but also a caution display is displayed before the revival effect, so that the AT state is displayed before the revival effect is executed. Once ST5 has ended, it will be easier to make the player think.

In step S3308 in the AT production control process (FIG. 61), it is determined whether an AT end command has been received from the main MPU 72. As already explained, the AT end command is transmitted in step S3115 in the AT process (FIG. 59) or in step S3211 in the second control process (FIG. 60) of the game section. That is, in the final game in AT state ST5, after the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped and before the freeze period is set, the AT end command is sent from the main side MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92. Ru.

If an AT end command has been received (step S3308: YES), the AT end display setting process is executed (step S3309). In the AT end display setting process, data is set so that a presentation indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. In this case, data enabling the execution of the AT end display is set in the presentation side RAM 94 as data for display control of the image display device 63. As a result, the display of the end indication image G61, total number of games played image G62, and total number of wins image G63 as shown in FIG. 58(a) is started on the image display device 63.

If the AT end display is being executed, in the various end display control processes (FIG. 55), an affirmative determination is made in step S2901 to determine whether or not bet settings for gaming media to start a new game have been made. is determined (step S2902). When a bet is set for game media by inserting medals into the medal slot 45 or operating the credit insert buttons 47 and 48 in a situation where it is possible to start a new game, the main MPU 72 issues a command corresponding to the bet setting for the game media. is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. The command is sent every time one or more game media are bet, but it may be configured to be sent when the number of bets on the game media that makes it possible to start the game is completed. If the production side MPU 92 has received the command, it determines that a bet setting for game media has been made to start a new game, and makes an affirmative determination in step S2902.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2902, the data for executing the AT end display is erased in the end process of the end display being executed (step S2903), and the image G53 of the normal gaming state ST1 (see FIG. 52(c)) ) to start displaying the data. As a result, the state in which the AT end display is executed on the image display device 63 in the final game of the AT state ST5 ends when a bet setting for starting a new game is made, and the state ends in the normal game state ST1. The display of image G53 starts.

In the AT production control process (FIG. 61), after executing the process of step S3309, a setting process of the start timer counter 131 for warning display is executed (step S3310). The contents of the setting process are the same as step S2805 in the pseudo bonus performance control process (FIG. 54). Specifically, information corresponding to a value for measuring a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) from the start of the AT end display to the start of the caution display is stored in the production side RAM 94 at the start of the caution display. Set in timer counter 131.

If the value of the caution display start timer counter 131 is 1 or more, as already explained, an affirmative determination is made in step S3001 in the caution display control process (FIG. 56), thereby changing the value of the caution display start timer counter 131. 1 is subtracted (step S3002), and if the value of the caution display start timer counter 131 after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S3003: YES), a caution display setting process is executed (step S3004). As a result, the display of the caution image G52 is started in a situation where the end clear image G61, the total number of games image G62, and the total number of acquisitions image G63 are displayed on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 58(b). . As described above, in the caution display setting process, data for controlling the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 are not set. Thereafter, information corresponding to a value for measuring 3 seconds as a predetermined display duration period is set in the caution display continuation timer counter 132 (step S3005).

If the value of the caution display continuation timer counter 132 is 1 or more, the value of the caution display continuation timer counter 132 is changed by making an affirmative determination in step S3006 in the caution display control process (FIG. 56) as described above. If the value of the warning display continuation timer counter 132 after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S3008: YES), a warning display termination process is executed (step S3009). In the termination process, data for executing the warning display is erased. As a result, the state in which the caution display is executed on the image display device 63 in the final game of AT state ST5 is the state in which the caution display is executed on the image display device 63, regardless of whether or not the bet setting of the game media to start a new game has been executed. The display ends when a predetermined display duration period has elapsed since the display started.

In the AT production control process (FIG. 61), when the performance execution control is performed using this omen change table (step S3311: YES), a revival compatible production process is executed (step S3312). FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating a process for a revival response effect.

First, it is determined whether or not the current game is the final game of the portent effect corresponding to the present portent change table, and the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is "0" (step S3401). ). When starting a new game, the main MPU 72 sends a game start command to the production side MPU 92 with information corresponding to the value of the AT continuation counter 74e set, so the production side MPU 92 starts the AT continuation counter from the command. It is possible to determine whether the value of 74e is "0" or not.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3401, it is determined whether or not a stop command corresponding to the third stop command has been received from the main MPU 72 in the current game (step S3402). The stop command command corresponding to the third stop command is issued when the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that are currently rotating are operated and This is a command sent from the main MPU 72 when a stop command is issued.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3402, AT end display setting processing is executed (step S3403). The content of the AT end display setting process is the same as the AT end display setting process executed in step S3309 when an AT end command is received in the AT production control process (FIG. 61). As a result, the image display device 63 starts displaying an end clearing image G61, a total number of games image G62, and a total number of acquisitions image G63 as shown in FIG. 58(a).

Thereafter, a process for setting the warning display start timer counter 131 is executed (step S3404). The processing contents of the setting process are the same as the setting process of the warning display start timer counter 131 executed in step S3310 in the AT production control process (FIG. 61). As a result, information corresponding to a value for measuring a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) from the start of the AT end display to the start of the caution display is stored in the caution display start timer counter in the production side RAM 94. It is set to 131.

If the value of the warning display start timer counter 131 is greater than or equal to 1, the value of the warning display start timer counter 131 is set by making an affirmative determination in step S3001 in the warning display control process (FIG. 56) as described above. If the value of the warning display start timer counter 131 after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S3003: YES), a warning display setting process is executed (step S3004). As a result, the display of the caution image G52 is started in a situation where the end clear image G61, the total number of games image G62, and the total number of acquisitions image G63 are displayed on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 58(b). . As described above, in the caution display setting process, data for controlling the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 are not set. Thereafter, information corresponding to a value for measuring 3 seconds as a predetermined display duration period is set in the caution display continuation timer counter 132 (step S3005).

If the value of the caution display continuation timer counter 132 is 1 or more, the value of the caution display continuation timer counter 132 is changed by making an affirmative determination in step S3006 in the caution display control process (FIG. 56) as described above. If the value of the warning display continuation timer counter 132 after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S3008: YES), a warning display termination process is executed (step S3009). In the termination process, data for executing the warning display is erased. As a result, the state in which the caution display is executed on the image display device 63 in the final game of AT state ST5 is the state in which the caution display is executed on the image display device 63, regardless of whether or not the bet setting of the game media to start a new game has been executed. The display ends when a predetermined display duration period has elapsed since the display started.

In the process for restoration compatible production (FIG. 62), if an affirmative determination is made in step S3401 and a negative determination is made in step S3402, the current reference data set in this omen change table is restored. It is determined whether the timing corresponds to the generation timing of the effect or whether bet settings for game media to start a new game have been made (step S3405).

As already explained, if the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the main side RAM 74 is "0" in the final game of the foreshadowing effect in a situation where the execution of the omen effect is being controlled according to the present omen change table, the last game of the omen effect is "0". In the game, a revival effect is executed that causes the player to recognize that the AT state ST5 will continue after executing an effect that causes the player to recognize that the AT state ST5 has ended in a situation where the AT state ST5 actually continues. A revival response effect will be executed. Specifically, in a game in which the revival compatible effect is executed, if a rotation stop operation is performed on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, the image The display device 63 starts displaying an AT end display as shown in FIG. 58(a). Further, when a predetermined period of time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed since the AT end display was started, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the image display device 63 The warning display will start. In this case, the timing at which the revival effect occurs is the timing at which a predetermined pre-revival period (specifically, 4.5 seconds) has elapsed since the AT end display was started. The pre-recovery period is the period from the start of the AT end display until the end of the caution display (i.e., predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) + predetermined display duration period (specifically, 3 seconds)) It is set as a period longer than the freeze period (specifically, 5 seconds) that occurs in the final game of AT state ST5. As a result, unless a new bet is set in a game where a revival compatible effect is executed, the AT end display and caution display will be displayed in the same manner as the freeze period is set in the final game of AT state ST5. will be executed.

In addition, the main MPU 72 responds to the situation in which a bet on game media is set by inserting medals into the medal slot 45 or operating the credit insert buttons 47 and 48 in a situation where it is possible to start a new game. A command to do this is sent to the production side MPU 92. The command is sent each time one or more game media are bet, but it may be configured to be sent when the number of bets on the game media that makes it possible to start the game is completed. If the production side MPU 92 has received the command, it determines that a bet setting for game media has been made to start a new game, and makes an affirmative determination in step S3405.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3405, the data to be referred to in the present omen change table is set as resurrection effect data (step S3406). Further, in step S3407, the data for executing the AT end display is erased by executing the end process of the AT end display, and at the same time, the caution display is executed by executing the end process of the caution display in step S3408. Erase data for. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58(c), the AT end display and the caution display are ended, and a resurrection image G64 (specifically, a text image of "Not yet") is displayed on the image display device 63 as a resurrection display. Ru. The display ends when a new game is started in response to the operation of the start lever 41.

Thereafter, counter clearing processing is executed (step S3409). In the clearing process, if the value of the warning display start timer counter 131 is 1 or more, the warning display start timer counter 131 is cleared to "0", and if the warning display continuation timer counter 132 has a value of 1 or more, the warning display start timer counter 131 is cleared to "0". The continuation timer counter 132 of the warning display is cleared to "0".

In the AT presentation control process (Figure 61), in addition to the above processes, other processes are also executed (step S3313). In the other processes, a process is executed to update the data to be referenced in various tables as the game progresses, and to update the presentation content. In addition, when game media is awarded, a process is executed to update the display content of the remaining award number display image G12 and the acquisition number display image G13 accordingly. In addition, when a first ending command or a second ending command is received from the main MPU 72, a process is executed to perform an ending presentation.

FIG. 63 is a time chart showing how the AT end display and caution display are executed in the AT state ST5. FIG. 63(a) shows the period during which the game is being executed, FIG. 63(b) shows the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating, and FIG. 63(c) shows the bet settings for the game media. 63(d) shows the period in which the freeze period is occurring, FIG. 63(e) shows the period in which the section display section 67 is lit, and FIG. ) indicates a period during which the AT end display is being executed, FIG. 63(g) indicates a period during which the caution display is being executed, and FIG. 63(h) indicates a period during which the resurrection display is being executed.

First, a case where an AT end display and a caution display are executed in the final game in AT state ST5 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 63(a) at timing t1, the final game in AT state ST5 is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63(b) at timing t2, the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game is stopped. At the timing t2, a freeze period is set as shown in FIG. 63(d), and AT end display is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 63(f). Here, in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5, the section display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the unlit state at the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating. In the final game in AT state ST5, at the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating, the section display section 67 is maintained in a lit state as shown in FIG. 63(e).

Thereafter, a warning display is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 63(g) at timing t3, which is a timing when a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed from timing t2. In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying the caution in a situation where the AT end display is being executed. At the timing of t3, the freeze period is still set as shown in FIG. Even if a medal is inserted, the medal is ejected without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the operations of the first credit input button 47 and the second credit input button 48 are disabled. In other words, the situation is such that new bet settings cannot be made.

Thereafter, when a predetermined display duration period (specifically, 3 seconds) passes from the timing t3 at the timing t4, the warning display on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 63(g). In this case, since the bet setting for starting a new game has not been made yet, the AT end display on the image display device 63 continues as shown in FIG. 63(e). At the timing of t4, the freeze period is still set as shown in FIG. Even if a medal is inserted, the medal is ejected without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the operations of the first credit input button 47 and the second credit input button 48 are disabled. In other words, the situation is such that new bet settings cannot be made.

Thereafter, at timing t5, a freeze period elapses as shown in FIG. 63(d). As a result, in the normal process (FIG. 12), the acceptance permission process (step S312) is executed, so that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the first credit input button 47 and The operation of the second credit input button 48 is also enabled. Furthermore, at the timing t5, the section display section 67 changes from the lit state to the unlit state, as shown in FIG. 63(e). This completes the notification on the section display section 67 that it is the second section SC2. In other words, in the final game in the AT state ST5, the second section SC2 in the section display section 67 is reached at the timing after the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating, and the freeze period has elapsed. The notification ends.

After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 63(c), a bet is set for the gaming medium. The bet may be a bet of "1" gaming medium by inserting one medal into the medal insertion slot 45, a bet of "3" gaming medium by operating the first credit insertion button 47 in a situation where three or more virtual medals are stored, or a bet of "2" gaming medium by operating the second credit insertion button 48 in a situation where two or more virtual medals are stored. At the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 63(f), the AT end display on the image display device 63 ends. In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying the image G53 of the normal gaming state ST1.

Next, a case will be described in which the resurrection display is performed in the middle of the AT state ST5, and the resurrection display is started based on a new bet setting being made after the warning display ends.

As shown in FIG. 63(a) at timing t7, in AT state ST5, in a situation where the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is "0", the final omen performance using this omen change table is executed. The game begins. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63(b) at timing t8, the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game is stopped. Since this game is not the final game in AT state ST5, no freeze period is set as shown in FIG. 63(d). On the other hand, at the timing t8, AT end display is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 63(f).

Thereafter, a warning display is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 63(g) at timing t9, which is a timing when a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed from timing t8. In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying the caution in a situation where the AT end display is being executed.

Thereafter, when a predetermined display duration period (specifically, 3 seconds) passes from the timing t9 at the timing t10, the warning display on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 63(g). In this case, the AT end display on the image display device 63 continues as shown in FIG. 63(f).

Thereafter, a pre-resurrection period (specifically, 4.5 seconds) elapses from the timing t8 at the timing t11, which becomes the timing at which the resurrection effect occurs. In this case, at the timing t11, the AT end display on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 63(f), and the recovery display on the image display device 63 starts as shown in FIG. 63(h). Ru. The revival display ends when a new game is started in response to the operation of the start lever 41.

Next, a case will be described in which the resurrection display is performed in the middle of the AT state ST5 and the resurrection display is started based on a new bet setting being made before the caution display ends.

As shown in FIG. 63(a) at timing t12, in AT state ST5, in a situation where the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is "0", the final omen effect using this omen change table is The game begins. Thereafter, at timing t13, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game is stopped. Since this game is not the final game in AT state ST5, no freeze period is set as shown in FIG. 63(d). On the other hand, at the timing t13, AT end display is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 63(f).

Thereafter, a warning display is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 63(g) at timing t14, which is a timing when a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed from timing t13. In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying the caution in a situation where the AT end display is being executed.

Thereafter, at timing t15, which is before the timing at which a predetermined display duration period (specifically 3 seconds) has elapsed from timing t14, bet settings for gaming media are performed as shown in FIG. 63(c). be exposed. The bet setting may be a bet setting of "1" game medium due to one medal being inserted into the medal slot 45, and may be a bet setting of "1" game medium due to one medal being inserted into the medal slot 45. The bet setting for "3" game media may be due to the operation of the 1 credit input button 47, and the second credit input button 48 is operated in a situation where two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. It may also be a bet setting of "2" game media. At the timing t15, the AT end display on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 63(f), and the caution display on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. ), the restoration display on the image display device 63 is started. The revival display ends when a new game is started in response to the operation of the start lever 41.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

When the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5 ends, a warning display is executed on the image display device 63, so that it is possible to urge the player to be careful not to become absorbed in the game. becomes. In this case, this warning display may be continued even when the next game is started with respect to the last game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to create a situation in which execution of the caution display is continued without being terminated when a new game is executed, and it is possible to ensure an opportunity for the player to recognize the caution display.

The warning display that is started in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5 may end before the next game starts. As a result, the warning display is not only continued in the next game after the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, but also ends before the next game starts for the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. It becomes possible to generate a situation. This makes it possible to diversify the relationship between the execution of the warning display and the game.

The warning display continues for a predetermined display duration period (specifically, 3 seconds) regardless of whether the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended and a new game has started. This makes it possible to ensure that the period during which the player confirms the warning display is over the predetermined display duration period, and it is also possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the trigger for ending the warning display. becomes.

The warning display is started in a situation where the bonus end display is being executed on the image display device 63. This makes it possible to start the warning display after the player is made aware that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5 ends.

Even in a situation where the bonus end display continues on the image display device 63, the warning display ends when a predetermined display continuation period has elapsed. This makes it possible to prevent the warning display from continuing for an unnecessarily long period of time.

When the AT state ST5 ends, a warning display is executed on the image display device 63, making it possible to warn the player not to become absorbed in the game. In this case, in the final game of the AT state ST5, when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stops, a freeze period occurs that prevents the start of a new game, and the warning display is executed during this freeze period. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the warning display.

The warning display starts after the freeze period starts. As a result, it is possible to start the warning display in a situation where the player is paying attention to the image display device 63 during the freeze period, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the warning display.

The warning display ends before the freeze period ends. This makes it possible to prevent a new game from being started during the warning display.

Similar to the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, even in the final game in the AT state ST5, the caution display continues for a predetermined display duration period (specifically, 3 seconds). This makes it possible to ensure that the period during which the player confirms the warning display is over the predetermined display duration period, and it is also possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the trigger for ending the warning display. becomes.

In the final game of the AT state ST5, an AT end display is executed on the image display device 63, so that the player can clearly recognize that the AT state ST5 has ended. In this case, since the caution display is started in a situation where the AT end display is being executed, it is possible to start the caution display after the player is made aware that the AT state ST5 is ending. Become.

While the caution display ends within the freeze period, the AT end display may continue even after the freeze period ends. This makes it possible to ensure a long period during which the AT end display continues, and it becomes possible to make the player clearly recognize that the AT state ST5 has ended.

A revival in which, after a performance that allows the player to recognize that the AT state ST5 ends, a revival performance that allows the player to recognize that the AT state ST5 actually continues is executed. Even in a game where a corresponding effect occurs, a caution display is executed on the image display device 63. As a result, it is possible to display a warning even in a game other than the game in which the AT state ST5 ends, and it is possible to increase the frequency at which the warning is displayed. In addition, in a configuration where a caution display is executed in a game where AT state ST5 ends, even in a game where a resurrection response effect is executed, the caution display is executed to confirm that the resurrection response effect has started. It is possible to make the player who has played the game think that there is a possibility that the AT state ST5 will end in the game.

In a game where AT state ST5 ends, the caution display ends after a predetermined display duration period has elapsed, whereas in a game where a revival response effect occurs in AT state ST5, the caution display is based on the bet setting of the gaming medium. Terminates if this occurs. As a result, the conditions for ending the warning display will be different for a game in which the AT state ST5 ends and a game in which a revival response effect occurs, and it is possible to set the conditions for ending the warning display to be appropriate for each game. .

In a game in which a revival response effect occurs in AT state ST5, the warning display ends not only when a bet is set for game media but also when a predetermined display duration period has elapsed. As a result, the warning display in the game where the resurrection support effect occurs will be ended at the same trigger as the warning display in the game where the AT state ST5 ends, but it can also be ended at a different trigger. becomes possible.

In a game where the AT state ST5 ends, a caution display is executed during the freeze period, whereas in a game where a revival response effect occurs, a caution display is executed in a situation other than the freeze period. Thereby, it is possible to start a new game even while the warning display corresponding to the resurrection support performance is being executed.

If the second section SC2 is in the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5, the section display section 67 will be in a lit state. It becomes possible to grasp whether it is ST5 or not. In this case, the second section SC2 ends when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 that does not involve transition to the AT state ST5 ends, and the second section SC2 ends when the AT state ST5 ends. Among the various triggers that occur in the game, the trigger for ending the lighting state of the section display section 67 differs depending on the case. This makes it possible to set the timing at which the lighting state of the section display section 67 ends to be an appropriate timing that corresponds to the type of opportunity for ending the second section SC2.

When the second section SC2 ends with the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as a trigger, and when the second section SC2 ends with the end of the AT state ST5 as a trigger, the section display section 67 In the configuration in which the timing at which the lighting state ends is different, in any case, the lighting state of the section display section 67 ends at a timing after the timing at which all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating. As a result, even in a configuration in which the timing at which the lighting state of the section display section 67 ends is different depending on each occasion, the section display section 67 is turned on while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating. It becomes possible to prevent the lighting state from being terminated.

When the second section SC2 ends with the end of the AT state ST5 as a trigger, it occurs at a later timing within the range of one game than when the second section SC2 ends with the end of the pseudo bonus state ST4 as a trigger. The lighting state of the section display section 67 ends based on the occurrence of the trigger. This makes it possible to vary the period during which the lighting state of the section display section 67 continues in a game where the lighting state of the section display section 67 ends, depending on the type of opportunity for the end of the second section SC2. Furthermore, it is possible to ensure a longer period in which the section display section 67 is maintained in the lit state in the AT state ST5, which has a relatively high degree of advantage, than in the pseudo bonus state ST4, which has a relatively low degree of advantage.

In the final game in AT state ST5, a freeze period that prevents the start of a new game will occur after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating, but when the freeze period is released, the section The lighting state of the display section 67 ends. This makes it possible to reliably secure a period in which the section display section 67 is maintained in the lit state in the final game in the AT state ST5.

In a game in which a revival response effect occurs in the AT state ST5, the timing at which the revival display starts after the AT end display is executed on the image display device 63 is based on the lighting state of the section display section 67 in the final game in the AT state ST5. This is the timing before the end timing. As a result, even if the section display section 67 is checked in a situation where an AT end display is being executed in a game in which a revival compatible effect occurs in AT state ST5, the AT end display will not be executed in the final game of AT state ST5. It is possible to make it possible for the player to be unable to distinguish whether the game is being executed in connection with a revival response performance or whether the game is being executed in connection with a revival response performance. Therefore, in a situation where the AT end display is being executed, it is possible to make the player expect that a resurrection display will occur afterwards, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In a game where the AT state ST5 ends, a freeze period occurs when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating, and when the freeze period has elapsed, the lighting state of the section display section 67 ends. In this case, in a game in which a revival-related effect occurs, the revival display is started before a period corresponding to the freeze period has elapsed after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has stopped. As a result, even if the section display section 67 is checked in a situation where an AT end display is being executed in a game in which a revival compatible effect occurs in AT state ST5, the AT end display will not be executed in the final game of AT state ST5. It is possible to make it possible for the player to be unable to distinguish whether the game is being executed in connection with a revival response performance or whether the game is being executed in connection with a revival response performance.

In a game where a resurrection response effect occurs in AT state ST5, a resurrection display will be displayed if a bet setting for a gaming medium occurs even before the pre-revival period has elapsed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating. is started. This makes it possible to diversify the timing at which the revival display is started.

<Another form of the sixth embodiment>
- The configuration is not limited to the bonus end display starting when the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, and the stop button 42 corresponding to the last spinning reel 32L, 32M, 32R It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the bonus end display is started when the operations in steps 44 to 44 are performed and a stop command is issued. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the AT end display starts when the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, and the stop button corresponding to the last rotating reel 32L, 32M, and 32R The AT end display may be configured to start when the operations 42 to 44 are performed and a stop command is issued.

- If the display of the caution image G52 is started on the image display device 63 in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5, a new game will not be played until a predetermined display duration period has elapsed. Even if a new game is started, the warning image G52 continues to be displayed, and even if a predetermined display duration period has elapsed, if a new game is not started, the warning image G52 continues to be displayed until a bet is set for the game media or a new game is started. A configuration may be adopted in which the warning image G52 continues to be displayed until the start of the warning image G52. In this case, it is possible to continue displaying the caution image G52 in a situation where the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5 ends and a new game is left without starting. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to have more opportunities to check the caution image G52.

- When the display of the warning image G52 is started on the image display device 63 in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 that does not involve a transition to the AT state ST5, instead of continuing to display the warning image G52 until a predetermined display duration period has elapsed, the warning image G52 may be continued to be displayed until a bet is set on the gaming medium, or until a new game is started, or until the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the new game is completed, or until the first stop occurs in the new game, or until the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the new game is stopped, or until the new game is completed.

- The display of the caution image G52 may be started before the bonus end display starts on the image display device 63 in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5, and the bonus end display may be started. The display of the caution image G52 may be started when the warning image G52 is started. Further, the display of the caution image G52 may be terminated when the bonus end display ends, or the display of the caution image G52 may be ended after the bonus end display ends. If the display of the caution image G52 is started when the bonus end display is started and the display of the caution image G52 is ended when the bonus end display is ended, the display period of the caution image G52 is the entire period. will match the display period of the bonus end display.

- When the display of the caution image G52 is started on the image display device 63 in the final game of the AT state ST5, instead of a configuration in which the display of the caution image G52 is continued until a predetermined display duration period has elapsed. , the caution image G52 may continue to be displayed until a bet is set for the game media, or the caution image G52 may continue to be displayed until a new game is started. It may be configured such that the display of the caution image G52 is continued until the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed in the game, and the display of the caution image G52 is continued until the first stop occurs in a new game. The caution image G52 may continue to be displayed until the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stops in a new game, and the caution image G52 may continue to be displayed until the new game ends. It may be configured such that the display continues.

- In the final game of AT state ST5, the display of the caution image G52 may be started before the AT end display is started on the image display device 63, and when the AT end display is started, the caution image G52 may be displayed. The display may start, the display of the caution image G52 may start before the freeze period starts, or the display of the caution image G52 may start when the freeze period starts. You can also use it as Further, the display of the caution image G52 may be configured to end when the AT end display ends, or the display of the caution image G52 may end after the AT end display ends, and the display of the caution image G52 may end when the AT end display ends. A configuration may be adopted in which the display of the caution image G52 ends. If the display of the caution image G52 is configured such that the display of the caution image G52 is started when the AT end display is started and the display of the caution image G52 is ended when the AT end display is finished, the entire display period of the caution image G52 is the AT end display. This will match the display period of the end display. Furthermore, if the display of the caution image G52 is configured to start when the freeze period starts and end when the freeze period ends, the entire display period of the caution image G52 is frozen. It will match the period.

- If the display of the caution image G52 is started on the image display device 63 in the final game in the AT state ST5, even after the freeze period has passed, the game will not be played until a bet is set for the game media or a new game is started. A configuration may be adopted in which the display of the caution image G52 is continued until the start of the warning image G52. This makes it possible to continue displaying the caution image G52 for a long time.

- In a game where a resurrection response effect is executed in AT state ST5, the timing of occurrence of the resurrection effect is longer than the predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) from the start of the AT end display until the start of the caution display. period, which is less than the period from the start of the AT end display to the end of the caution display (i.e., the predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) + the predetermined display duration period (specifically, 3 seconds)) It may be configured as a period. As a result, in a game in which a revival-compatible performance is executed, the resurrection performance is executed at a timing after the warning display is started and before the predetermined display duration period of the warning display has elapsed.

- In addition to or in place of the configuration in which an image is displayed as the caution image G52 to warn the player against becoming absorbed in the game, the amount of money available to the player or the amount available to the player is displayed. An image is displayed that warns the player against leaving a storage medium capable of storing the number of game media in the lending medal device installed in parallel with the slot machine 10. Alternatively, an image may be displayed to warn the player not to commit fraudulent acts against the slot machine 10.

・The period required from the start of the AT end display to the start of the caution display in a game where a revival compatible effect is executed in AT state ST5 is such that a new game can be started after the AT end display starts. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the period required to complete the process is shorter than the required period. In this case, a new bet can be set after the AT end display and the caution display are started, so the caution display will be reliably executed in a game in which a revival compatible effect is executed.

・In a game where a resurrection response effect is executed in AT state ST5, the resurrection display is configured to start when a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the AT end display, but the resurrection is triggered by the passage of the period. A configuration may also be adopted in which the start of display is not set. In this case, in the game, the resurrection display will start when a new bet setting is made.

- Even for a game in which a revival compatible effect is executed in AT state ST5, a freeze period may be set to prevent the start of a new game, similar to the final game in AT state ST5. In this case, in the game where the revival compatible effect is executed, it is possible to have the same mode as the final game in AT state ST5, including not only the display mode of the AT end display and the caution display, but also the mode of preventing the start of a new game. It becomes possible.

In addition, in this configuration, the revival display may be started when the freeze period is released in a game in which the revival-responsive performance is executed. In the final game of the AT state ST5, the illuminated state of the interval display unit 67 ends when the freeze period is released, so in a game in which the revival-responsive performance is executed, the revival display will start at the timing when the illuminated state of the interval display unit 67 ends in the final game of the AT state ST5.

- When the second section SC2 ends in response to the end of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the lighting state of the section display section 67 ends when the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stops, and the AT Although the lighting state of the section display section 67 is ended when the freeze period ends when the second section SC2 ends in response to the end of the state ST5, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, in a configuration in which a freeze period occurs even in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when the second section SC2 ends and the AT state ST5 ends in response to the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Correspondingly, when the second section SC2 ends, on the one hand, the lighting state of the section display section 67 is ended when the freeze period starts, and on the other hand, when the freeze period ends, the lighting state of the section display section 67 is changed. It may be configured such that the process is terminated. Furthermore, a freeze period is started when the second section SC2 ends in response to the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and when the second section SC2 ends in response to the end of the AT state ST5. The lighting state of the section display section 67 may be terminated when the freeze period occurs, and on the other hand, the lighting state of the section display section 67 may be terminated in the middle of the freeze period. Furthermore, in the case where the second section SC2 ends in response to the end of the pseudo bonus state ST4, and in the case where the second section SC2 ends in response to the end of the AT state ST5, on the other hand, in the middle of the freeze period. A configuration may also be adopted in which the lighting state of the section display section 67 is ended and, on the other hand, the lighting state of the section display section 67 is ended when the freeze period ends. Furthermore, when the second section SC2 ends in response to the end of the pseudo bonus state ST4, and when the second section SC2 ends in response to the end of the AT state ST5, all the reels 32L, When the rotation of reels 32M and 32R has stopped, the lighting state of the section display section 67 is ended, and on the other hand, when the bet setting of the game media is made after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R has stopped, or when a new bet is set. The lighting state of the section display section 67 may be terminated when a game starts.

- The end timing of the illuminated state of the section display unit 67 is not limited to the same when the second section SC2 ends in response to the end condition of the AT state ST5 being satisfied and when the second section SC2 ends in response to the ending condition being satisfied, and these end timings may be different.

For example, a freeze period is started in one case where the second section SC2 ends in response to the satisfaction of the ending condition of AT state ST5 and in the case where the second section SC2 ends in response to the fulfillment of the ending condition. In this case, the lighting state of the section display section 67 is ended, and on the other hand, the lighting state of the section display section 67 may be ended when the freeze period ends. Furthermore, a freeze period is started in one of the cases where the second section SC2 ends in response to the satisfaction of the end condition of AT state ST5 and the second section SC2 ends in response to the fulfillment of the ending condition. In some cases, the lighting state of the section display section 67 is ended, and on the other hand, the lighting state of the section display section 67 may be ended in the middle of the freeze period. In addition, in the case where the second section SC2 ends in response to the fulfillment of the ending condition of AT state ST5, and in the case where the second section SC2 ends in response to the fulfillment of the ending condition, the section The lighting state of the section display section 67 may be ended when the lighting state of the display section 67 is ended and, on the other hand, the freeze period ends. In addition, in the case where the second section SC2 ends in response to the fulfillment of the ending condition of AT state ST5, and in the case where the second section SC2 ends in response to the fulfillment of the ending condition, all the reels 32L, 32M , 32R stops rotating, the lighting state of the section display section 67 ends, and on the other hand, if a bet setting for gaming media is made after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop rotating, or a new A configuration may also be adopted in which the lighting state of the section display section 67 is ended when the game is started.

- Although the section display unit 67 may be turned off in the second section SC2 when the situation is neither pseudo bonus state ST4 nor AT state ST5, this is not limited to the above, and the section display unit 67 may be turned on when the second section SC2 is neither pseudo bonus state ST4 nor AT state ST5, and may also be turned on when the situation is neither pseudo bonus state ST4 nor AT state ST5.

- The light emitting section provided in the section display section 67 is not limited to a single color light emitting type, but may be a multicolor light emitting type. In this case, although the section display section 67 is in a lit state in the second section SC2, the emitted light color may be different depending on the situation. For example, in a situation where the second section SC2 is neither the pseudo-bonus state ST4 nor the AT state ST5, the section display section 67 lights up in green, and when the second section SC2 is in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the section display section 67 is lit in green. The section 67 lights up in blue, and the section display section 67 lights up in red in the second section SC2 and the AT state ST5. As a result, by checking the section display section 67, it becomes possible to specify not only whether or not the vehicle is in the second section SC2, but also which situation in the second section SC2.

- In addition to or in place of the configuration in which the caution image G52 is displayed on the image display device 63 to warn the player against getting addicted to the game, a sound is provided to warn the player against getting addicted to the game. A configuration may also be adopted in which the sound and sound are output from the speaker 62.

- In the final game of AT state ST5, a freeze period may occur when one reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops spinning but two reels 32L, 32M, 32R continue spinning, or a freeze period may occur when two reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop spinning but one reel 32L, 32M, 32R continues spinning. In this case, a warning display may be displayed on the image display device 63 during the freeze period.

<Seventh embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the sixth embodiment in the processing configuration of the revival compatible production process executed by the production side MPU 92. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the sixth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the sixth embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating the revival compatible production processing in this embodiment executed by the production side MPU 92.

In steps S3501 to S3504, the same processes as steps S3401 to S3404 of the resurrection corresponding production process (FIG. 62) in the sixth embodiment are executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3501 and a negative determination is made in step S3502, whether or not the current reference data set in this omen change table corresponds to the timing of occurrence of the revival effect. Or, it is determined whether a bet setting for game media to start a new game has been made (step S3505). The content of the generation timing of the revival effect is the same as that of the sixth embodiment, and the content of the bet setting of the game medium for starting a new game is also the same as that of the sixth embodiment.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3505, the data to be referred to in the present omen change table is set as the data for revival effect (step S3506), and the end processing of the AT end display is executed (step S3507). Thereafter, if the value of the warning display start timer counter 131 is 1 or more, the warning display start timer counter 131 is cleared to "0" (step S3508). However, in step S3508, the warning display continuation timer counter 132 is not cleared to "0".

FIGS. 65(a) to 65(c) are for explaining the content of execution of a revival response effect when a bet setting for a game medium is made to start a new game before the revival effect occurs. It is an explanatory diagram.

In a game in which the revival-responsive performance is executed, when the rotation stop operation is performed on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped by performing a rotation stop operation on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the image display device 63 starts displaying the AT end display as shown in FIG. 65(a). In addition, when a predetermined period (specifically, one second) has elapsed since the AT end display started, the image display device 63 starts displaying a warning display in a situation in which the AT end display is being performed as shown in FIG. 65(b). After that, when a bet is set to start the next game before the timing of the revival performance execution and before a predetermined display duration period has elapsed since the warning display started, as already explained, in the revival-responsive performance processing (FIG. 64), the processing for setting the revival performance data (step S3506) and the processing for ending the AT end display (step S3507) are executed, but the processing for clearing the continuation timer counter 132 of the warning display to "0" is not executed. In addition, the processing for ending the warning display is not executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65(c), the AT end display is terminated and a revival image G64 (specifically, a text image of "Not yet") is displayed on the image display device 63 as a revival display, but the warning image G52, which is displayed as a warning display, continues to be displayed.

The caution image G52 is displayed only when the value of the caution display continuation timer counter 132 reaches "0" after a predetermined display duration period (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the display of the caution image G52. This is specified in the caution display control process (FIG. 56), and continues until the caution display termination process is executed in step S3009. Therefore, if the start timing of the next game is later than the timing at which the predetermined display continuation period has elapsed, the caution display is ended in a situation where the resurrection display is being performed. Additionally, if the start timing of the next game is before the timing when the predetermined display duration period has elapsed, a warning will be displayed even in a situation where the resurrection display has ended and the display of the normal image in AT state ST5 has started. will continue.

According to the above configuration, even if a caution display is executed as a revival response effect, if the caution display is executed, the warning display will not be displayed until the predetermined display duration period has elapsed after the start of the caution display. , the caution display continues regardless of whether the revival display is started in the middle or when the revival display ends. This makes it possible to ensure that the caution display continues for a predetermined display duration period when the caution display starts, while limiting the opportunity for the warning display to start to some extent. When a warning display is executed, it is possible to ensure a period during which the player confirms the warning display.

In addition, in a game in which a revival compatible effect occurs in AT state ST5, if a bet is set for a game medium to start the next game of the game before the warning image G52 starts to be displayed, the resurrection compatible effect occurs. The configuration is such that when the value of the warning display start timer counter 131 is cleared to "0" in step S3508 in the production process (FIG. 64), the revival display is started without starting the display of the caution image G52. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and by not setting the process of step S3508 in the process for revival compatible effects, in a game where a revive compatible effect occurs, the next game of the game can be started. The display of the caution image G52 may be started regardless of the timing at which the bet setting for the game media is made. This makes it possible to increase the chances of displaying the caution image G52.

Furthermore, in the game in which a revival response effect occurs in the AT state ST5, the display of the caution image G52 is started after the AT end display is started, but the AT end display is not limited to this. The display of the caution image G52 may be started when the warning image G52 is displayed.

<Eighth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the content displayed on the image display device 63 in the AT state ST5 is different from the sixth embodiment, and the trigger for ending the AT state ST5 is different from the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the sixth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the sixth embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 66(A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in accordance with the stop order notified by the image display device 63. FIG. 66(B) is a diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a stop order different from the stop order notified by the image display device 63. It is an explanatory diagram.

First, with reference to FIG. 66(A), the display contents of the image display device 63 when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in accordance with the stop order notified by the image display device 63 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 66(a1), in the AT state ST5, the image display device 63 displays the remaining number display image G12 indicating the remaining number of game media in the current AT state ST5, and also displays the remaining number display image G12 in the current AT state ST5. An acquired number display image G13 showing the total number of game media acquired in state ST5 is displayed.

The value of the remaining number display image G12 matches the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the main side RAM 74, and if the value of the AT continuation counter 74e changes based on the game being executed, the value of the remaining number of grants is changed accordingly. The value displayed in the grant number display image G12 also changes. Note that even if a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in AT state ST5 or a game in CB states ST2 and ST3 is executed, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e does not change, so the number of bets is "2" in AT state ST5. Even if a game or a game in CB state ST2 or ST3 is executed, the display content of the remaining grant number display image G12 is not changed.

In the acquired number display image G13, if more game media are awarded than the number of bets for one game in the AT state ST5, the value exceeding the number of bets for one game is displayed in the acquired number display image G13 until then. It is updated so that it is added to the value that was previously set. In addition, in the AT state ST5, if the number of bets for one game is greater than the number of game media awarded, the number of acquisition display image G13 displays the amount of the number of bets that exceeds the number of game media that are subject to grant. The value is updated so as to be subtracted from the value displayed up to that time in the acquired number display image G13. Further, in the acquisition number display image G13, when a replay winning is established in the AT state ST5, the value displayed until then is maintained as it is. In addition, in the acquired number display image G13, if neither a small prize winning nor a replay winning is established in the AT state ST5, the value of the bet number of the game is displayed in the acquired number display image G13 until then. Updated to be subtracted from the value.

In the AT state ST5, if one of the index values IV=1 to 9 is won in the hand lottery process (FIG. 13) in a game where the number of bets is "3" as in the first embodiment, the image The display device 63 notifies the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables a bell win (first bell win or second bell win). In FIG. 66(a1), the index value IV=4 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel. 32L is displayed on the image display device 63. By stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R according to the stop order notified in the stop order image G65, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. As shown in (a2), the first bell prize is established on the main line ML.

When the first bell is won, game media of "15", which is larger than the bet number "3", is awarded to the player. Therefore, the value displayed in the remaining number of grants display image G12 becomes "88" by subtracting "12" from "100" that was displayed when the current game was started. Further, the value displayed in the acquired number display image G13 becomes "812" by adding "12" to "800" that was displayed when the current game was started. In this case, the respective values of the remaining grant number display image G12 and the acquired number display image G13 are not updated at once, but are changed from the pre-update values at the start of the game to the updated values that reflect the game results. will be updated gradually. Specifically, the remaining number display image G12 is updated so that its value decreases by 1 every time a predetermined update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds) elapses, and the obtained number display image G13 is updated to a predetermined value. The update is performed so that the value is increased by 1 every time the update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds) elapses. FIG. 66(a3) shows an image displayed on the image display device 63 when the first bell is won and a predetermined update period has passed, and the value of the remaining award number display image G12 is the value at the start of the game. 1 is subtracted from "100" to become "99", and the value of the acquired number display image G13 is "801" by adding 1 from "800" at the start of the game. Thereafter, each time a predetermined update period elapses, the value of the remaining grant number display image G12 is subtracted by 1, and the value of the acquired number display image G13 is added by 1, so that at the timing shown in FIG. The value of the grant number display image G12 becomes "94", the value of the acquisition number display image G13 becomes "806", and finally the value of the remaining grant number display image G12 becomes "88" as shown in FIG. 66 (a5). ” and the value of the acquired number display image G13 becomes “812”. This makes it possible for the player to clearly understand that the remaining number of awarded game media in AT state ST5 has decreased, although the number of acquired game media has increased.

In addition, as mentioned above, the values of the remaining award number display image G12 and the acquisition number display image G13 are updated every time a predetermined update period elapses when the index value IV=1 to If you win one of 3, 5, 6, or 10 and get the first bell prize, if you win one of index value IV=7 to 9 and get the second bell prize, index value IV= The same applies to cases where the first watermelon prize is achieved by winning 11, the second watermelon prize is achieved by winning the index value IV = 12, and the case where the cherry prize is achieved by winning the index value IV = 13. It is. Further, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, neither the value of the remaining awarded number display image G12 nor the obtained number display image G13 is updated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66(B), we will explain the display contents of the image display device 63 when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a stopping order different from the stopping order notified by the image display device 63.

As shown in FIG. 66(b1), the stop order is displayed on the image display device 63 to notify that the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. Although the image G65 is displayed, if the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in a stop order different from the stop order notified in the stop order image G65, the notified stop order At the timing when it is specified that the stop order is different from the above, the visibility reducing effect G66 is displayed on the entire image display device 63. Specifically, the entire image display device 63 is displayed darker than before. However, even if the visibility reduction effect G66 is displayed, the remaining number display image G12 and the acquired number display image G13 will continue to be displayed, although the visibility will be reduced, and although it is not clear, the player will be able to see the remaining number displayed. It becomes possible to grasp the values displayed in each of the image G12 and the acquired number display image G13.

By stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in a stop order different from the stop order notified in the stop order image G65, the sixth supplementary prize is placed on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 66(b2). holds true. Note that, depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, any winnings including the 6th supplementary winning may not be achieved.

When the sixth supplementary prize is established, "1" game media, which is a smaller number than the bet number "3", is awarded to the player. Therefore, the value displayed in the acquisition number display image G13 becomes "798" by subtracting "2" from "800" that was displayed when the current game was started.

On the other hand, in AT state ST5, if an index value IV corresponding to a small winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), the maximum number of game media set for that index value IV will be awarded. Regardless of whether the corresponding prize is won or not, the value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from the maximum number of gaming media is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the main side RAM 74, so the remaining amount is Similar subtraction is performed for the value displayed in the grant number display image G12. Specifically, if the game has a winning index value IV = 1 to 6 or 10, the bet will be made from "15" corresponding to the first bell winning, regardless of whether the first bell winning is achieved or not. The value obtained by subtracting the number "3" is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e, and is also subtracted from the value displayed on the remaining grant number display image G12. In addition, if the game has a winning index value IV = 7 to 9, regardless of whether or not the second bell prize is established, the number of bets from "15" corresponding to the second bell prize to "3" is the number of bets. '' is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e and also subtracted from the value displayed on the remaining grant number display image G12. In addition, in the case of a game where the index value IV = 11 or 12 is won, regardless of whether the first watermelon prize or the second watermelon prize is established, from "5" corresponding to the first watermelon prize and the second watermelon prize. The value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e, and is also subtracted from the value displayed on the remaining award amount display image G12. In addition, in the case of a game in which the index value IV=13 is won, the value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from "4" corresponding to the cherry win is the value of the AT continuation counter 74e, regardless of whether the cherry win is established or not. It is subtracted from the value displayed in the remaining grant number display image G12. Furthermore, if the index value IV=11 or 12 is won but the corresponding watermelon prize is not achieved, and if the index value IV=13 is won but the cherry prize is not achieved, the visibility reduction effect G66 is applied. is not displayed. This time, if the index value IV = 4 is won in the hand lottery process (Fig. 13) and the 6th supplementary prize is established, the value displayed in the remaining award number display image G12 is "12" is subtracted from "100" that was displayed when the program was started, resulting in "88".

If the sixth supplementary prize is established even though the index value IV=4 is won, the value of the remaining number display image G12 is updated from "100" to "88" as described above, and the value of the number obtained display image G13 is updated. will be updated from "800" to "798", but these updates will be performed in a shorter period than when the first bell is won. Specifically, in one predetermined update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds), the pre-update value at the start of the game is updated to the post-update value that reflects the game result. In this case, as shown in FIG. 66(b1), the value displayed in the remaining grant number display image G12 is "100" and the value displayed in the acquired number display image G13 is "800". Therefore, in one predetermined update period, as shown in FIG. 66(b3), the value displayed in the remaining grant number display image G12 is "88" and the value displayed in the acquisition number display image G13 is "88". 798''. As a result, even though the first bell prize was not achieved due to an incorrect stop operation, the remaining number of awards in AT state ST5 was subtracted in the same way as when the first bell prize was established. This makes it possible to make it less noticeable to the players. Further, the above update is performed in a situation where the visibility reduction effect G66 is displayed on the entire image display device 63. From this point of view, even though the first bell prize was not achieved due to an incorrect stop operation, the remaining number of awards in AT state ST5 is subtracted in the same way as when the first bell prize was established. This makes it possible to make it less noticeable to the player.

After the update of the value displayed in the remaining number display image G12 and the value displayed in the acquisition number display image G13 are completed, as shown in FIG. 66(b4), the visibility reduction effect G66 is Display ends. In addition, due to the incorrect stop operation as described above, the values of the remaining number display image G12 and the number obtained display image G13 will change from the values before updating at the start of the game to the values after updating reflecting the game results. What is done in one predetermined update period for the value is that if you win one of the index values IV = 1 to 3, 5, or 6 and the first bell prize is not established, the index value IV = 7 to 9 and the second bell prize is not achieved, if the index value IV = 11 is won and the first watermelon prize is not achieved, the index value IV = 12 is won and the second bell prize is not achieved. The same applies to the case where the watermelon prize is not achieved and the case where the index value IV=13 is won and the cherry prize is not achieved.

Figure 67 is a flowchart showing the stop order monitoring process executed by the production side MPU 92. The stop order monitoring process is repeatedly executed by the production side MPU 92 at relatively short intervals (e.g., every 4 milliseconds).

In step S3601, it is determined whether a stop order instruction command has been received from the main MPU 72. Similarly to the first embodiment, the main MPU 72 determines when the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5 in the stop order notification control process of step S412 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13). In this case, if one of the index values IV = 1 to 6 is won in the hand lottery process (Figure 13), the first bell will be won on the condition that the number of bets in this game is "3". A display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to win a prize is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that make it possible to make a first bell win. A stop order instruction command is sent to the production side MPU 92 so that the stop order is notified on the image display device 63. In addition, if you win the index value IV = 7 to 9 in the lottery process (Figure 13), the second bell will be won on the condition that the number of bets in this game is "3". A display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second bell prize is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66, and a display of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second bell prize. A stop order instruction command is sent to the production side MPU 92 so that the stop order is notified on the image display device 63.

If the stop order instruction command has been received (step S3601: YES), storage processing of the stop order data is executed (step S3602). In the stop order data storage process, stop order data corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R set in the stop order instruction command received this time is stored in the production side RAM 94. Furthermore, a process for setting stop order display data is executed (step S3603). In the stop order display data setting process, the image display device 63 is controlled to display a stop order image G65 for notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the stop order instruction command received this time. do. In addition, if the number of bets in this game is "2", it is assumed that one of the index values IV = 1 to 9 is won in the winning combination lottery process (Fig. 13) in the pseudo bonus state ST4 or AT state ST5. In this case, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified on the image display device 63 and the dual-purpose display unit 66, but the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified as in the case where the bet number is "3". It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is executed.

In step S3604, it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the master MPU 72. As in the first embodiment, when a valid stop command is generated by operating the stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to the spinning reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the master MPU 72 transmits a stop command to the performance MPU 92 in step S504 of the reel control process (FIG. 17) that contains information corresponding to the type of reel 32L, 32M, 32R that is the target of the stop command, and information indicating whether the current stop command corresponds to the first stop, second stop, or third stop in the current game.

If the stop command command has been received (step S3604: YES), and if the stop order data corresponding to the current game is stored in the production side RAM 94 (step S3605: YES), the stop command command received this time Information corresponding to the types of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that were subject to the stop command set in , and whether the current stop command corresponds to the first stop, second stop, or third stop. It is determined whether the indicated information matches the stop order data stored in the performance side RAM 94 (step S3606). For example, if the index value IV=4 is won in this game, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. This means that the stop order data is stored in the performance side RAM 94. In this case, if information indicating that the target of the stop command is the middle reel 32M and the first stop is set in the stop command command received this time, and if the target of the stop command is set in the stop command command received this time, If the information indicating that the right reel 32R is the second stop is set, it is determined in step S3606 that the stop order matches. On the other hand, if information indicating that the target of the stop command is the left reel 32L or right reel 32R and the first stop is set in the stop command command received this time, or if the stop command command received this time is set, the stop command is set in the stop command command received this time. If the target is the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M and information indicating that it is the second stop is set, it is determined in step S3606 that the stop order does not match.

If it is determined that the stop orders match, an affirmative determination is made in step S3606, and thus the stop order monitoring process ends without executing the process in step S3607. If it is determined that the stop orders do not match, a negative determination is made in step S3606, and therefore, a process for setting mismatch display data is executed in step S3607. In the mismatch display data setting process, mismatch display data for displaying the visibility reduction effect G66 on the entire image display device 63 is set in the production side RAM 94. As a result, the visibility reduction effect G66 is displayed on the entire image display device 63. Specifically, the entire image display device 63 is displayed darker than before. Therefore, the visibility of the values displayed in each of the remaining grant number display image G12 and the acquired number display image G13 displayed on the image display device 63 is reduced.

The mismatch display data is erased from the presentation side RAM 94 when a bet is set to start a new game, and the display of the visibility reducing effect G66 on the image display device 63 is terminated by erasing the mismatch display data from the presentation side RAM 94. The bet setting is either a bet setting of "1" gaming medium by inserting one medal into the medal insertion slot 45, a bet setting of one or more gaming media by operating the first credit insertion button 47 when one or more virtual medals are stored, or a bet setting of one or more gaming media by operating the second credit insertion button 48 when one or more virtual medals are stored.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the medium provisioning process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the medium attachment process is executed in step S309 in the normal process (FIG. 12).

When a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in AT state ST5 (step S3701: YES), it is determined whether or not one of the index values IV=1 to 10 has been won in the current game. (Step S3702). In this game, if the index value IV = 1 to 10 is won (step S3702: YES), if the first bell prize or the second bell prize is established (step S3703: YES) ), sends a matching command when the bell is won to the production side MPU 92 (step S3704), and if the first bell winning and the second bell winning have not been established (step S3703: NO), a matching command when the bell is winning is sent. is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S3705). Information indicating whether any of the first to ninth supplementary winnings has been established is set in the disagreement command when the bell is won.

When a game in which the number of bets is “3” is executed in AT state ST5 (step S3701: YES), it is determined whether or not one of the index values IV=11 to 13 has been won in the current game. (Step S3706). If any of index value IV = 11 to 13 is won in this game (step S3706: YES), the winning index value IV of the 1st watermelon prize, 2nd watermelon prize, and cherry prize is selected. If the corresponding winning has been achieved (step S3707: YES), an establishment command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S3708), and the winning among the first watermelon winning, second watermelon winning, and cherry winning is determined. If the winning corresponding to the index value IV is not established (step S3707: NO), a failure command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S3709). For both the established command and the unestablished command, not only information that allows identification of the command type of the command itself but also information corresponding to the index value IV that was won this time is set.

In the medium provisioning process, other processes are executed in addition to the various processes described above (step S3710). In other processing, when a small winning combination is achieved in the current game, a process for awarding the player with the number of game media corresponding to the small winning combination is executed. Specifically, when awarding virtual medals, a value corresponding to the current minor prize winning is added to the credit counter 74b of the main side RAM 74, and when the value of the credit counter 74b has reached the upper limit storage memory number, drives and controls the hopper device 53 so that the number of medals exceeding the upper limit stored storage number is dispensed to the medal receiving tray 59. In this case, if the first bell prize or the second bell prize is achieved, "15" game media will be awarded, and if the first watermelon prize or the second watermelon prize is achieved, "5" game media are awarded, and when a cherry winning is established, "4" game media are awarded. In addition, in the media awarding process, the dual-purpose display unit 66 is display-controlled so that a display corresponding to the number of game media that is currently subject to awarding is displayed. The display corresponding to the number of gaming media on the dual-purpose display section 66 continues until a new bet on gaming media is placed.

FIG. 69(a) is a flowchart showing display information update processing executed by the production side MPU 92. The display information update process is repeatedly executed by the performance side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (eg, 4 millisecond cycle).

If a matching command for winning the bell has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3801: YES), a process for setting sequential update data for winning the bell is executed (step S3802). In this setting process, the values of the remaining number display image G12 and the number obtained display image G13 on the image display device 63 are changed from the values before updating at the start of the game to the values after updating reflecting the game results. Configure data settings for gradual updates.

FIG. 69(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the storage area of the production side RAM 94. As shown in FIG. 69(b), the production side RAM 94 is provided with a counter 135 for the number of remaining grants during AT and a net increase counter 136 for the number of net increases during AT on the production side. The remaining number of grants during AT counter 135 is a counter for measuring the number of remaining grants of game media in the current AT state ST5, and its value matches the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74. . The AT net increase counter 136 on the production side is a counter for measuring the increase/decrease in the AT state ST5 of gaming media owned by the player, and its value is calculated from the AT net increase counter provided in the main side RAM 74. It will match the value of .

In the setting process of step S3802, from the state where the value of the remaining bonus number counter 135 during AT at that time is displayed as the value of the remaining bonus number display image G12, the increase in the number of game media owned by the player at the time of winning the bell is determined. (The value obtained by subtracting the number of bets "3" from the number of media awarded at the time of winning the bell "15") is subtracted from the value of the remaining number of awards during AT at that time counter 135 is displayed. Toward this end, display data is set in the effect-side RAM 94 so that "1" is subtracted every time a predetermined update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds) elapses. In addition, after setting the display data, the increase in the number of game media owned by the player at the time of winning the bell (the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets "3" from the number of media awarded at the time of winning the bell ("15") ) is subtracted from the value of the AT remaining grant counter 135 at that time.

In addition, in the setting process of step S3802, the value of the acquired number display image G13 is determined from the value of the AT net increase counter 136 on the performance side at that time, and the game media owned by the player at the time of winning the bell. Displays the value obtained by adding the number of increases (the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets, "3" from the number of media awarded at the time of winning the bell, "15", to the value of the net increase counter 136 during AT on the production side at that time). Display data is set in the effect-side RAM 94 so that "1" is added every time a predetermined update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds) passes. In addition, after setting the display data, the increase in the number of gaming media owned by the player at the time of winning the bell (the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets "3" from the number of media awarded at the time of winning the bell ("15") ) is added to the value of the AT net increase counter 136 on the performance side at that time.

If the mismatch command at the time of winning the bell has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3803: YES), a setting process for batch update data at the time of winning the bell is executed (step S3804). In this setting process, each of the value of the remaining number of grants display image G12 and the value of the number of acquisitions display image G13 on the image display device 63 is changed by 1 from the value before updating at the start of the game to the value after updating reflecting the game result. Data settings are made for updating at a predetermined update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds).

Specifically, in the setting process of step S3804, display data is set in the presentation side RAM 94 so that the value of the remaining awards display image G12 is updated in a predetermined update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds) from the value of the remaining awards counter 135 during the AT at that time, to the value obtained by subtracting the increase in the number of gaming media owned by the player at the time of winning the bell (the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets "3" from the number of media awarded at the time of winning the bell from "15", the number of media awarded at the time of winning the bell) from the value of the remaining awards counter 135 during the AT at that time. Also, after setting the display data, the increase in the number of gaming media owned by the player at the time of winning the bell (the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets "3" from the number of media awarded at the time of winning the bell) is subtracted from the value of the remaining awards counter 135 during the AT at that time.

In addition, in the setting process of step S3804, display data is set in the presentation side RAM 94 so that the value of the winning number display image G13 is updated at a specified update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds) from the value of the presentation side's net increase in AT counter 136 at that time to the value displayed by subtracting the number of gaming media owned by the player in the current game (if any compensatory win is made, this is the number of bets ``3'' minus the number of media awarded at the time of the compensatory win ``1'', and if no compensatory win is made, the number of bets ``3'') from the value of the presentation side's net increase in AT counter 136 at that time. In addition, after the display data is set, the number of game media owned by the player that has been reduced in the current game (if any of the compensatory wins are achieved, this is the number of bets "3" minus the number of media awarded at the time of the compensatory win, "1"; if no compensatory win is achieved, this is the number of bets "3") is subtracted from the value of the production side's AT net increase counter 136 at that time.

If the establishment command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3805: YES), a setting process of sequential update data at the time of winning the missed target is executed (step S3806). In this setting process, the values of the remaining number display image G12 and the number obtained display image G13 on the image display device 63 are changed from the values before updating at the start of the game to the values after updating reflecting the game results. Configure data settings for gradual updates.

In the setting process of step S3806, the value of the remaining award number display image G12 at that time is displayed as the value of the remaining award number counter 135 during AT, and the amount of game media owned by the player at the time of winning this time is increased. number (if you win a watermelon, it is the value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from "5", which is the number of media awarded when you win a watermelon; if you win a cherry, it is the number of media awarded when you win a cherry, "4") ” minus the number of bets “3”) from the value of the AT remaining award counter 135 at that time. Display data is set in the performance side RAM 94 so that "1" is subtracted every time (0.5 seconds) elapses. In addition, after setting the display data, the increase in the number of game media owned by the player at the time of winning this time (in the case of winning a watermelon, it is the number of bets from "5", which is the number of media awarded at the time of winning a watermelon) The value obtained by subtracting "3" (or the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets "3" from the number of media awarded at the time of cherry winning from "4" which is the number of media awarded at the time of cherry winning) is calculated as the remaining award number counter 135 during AT at that point. Subtract from the value.

In addition, in the setting process of step S3806, from the state where the value of the AT net increase counter 136 on the presentation side at that time is displayed as the value of the number of wins display image G13, the value of the game owned by the player at the time of winning this time is Increased number of media (if you win a watermelon, the number of media awarded at the time of winning a watermelon is "5" minus the number of bets "3"), if you win a cherry, it is the number of media awarded at the time of winning a cherry. For a predetermined update period, a value obtained by subtracting the number of bets "3" from a certain "4") is added to the value of the AT net increase counter 136 on the production side at that time. Display data is set in the effect-side RAM 94 so that "1" is added every time (specifically, 0.5 seconds) elapses. In addition, after setting the display data, the increase in the number of game media owned by the player at the time of winning this time (in the case of winning a watermelon, it is the number of bets from "5", which is the number of media awarded at the time of winning a watermelon) The value obtained by subtracting "3", or in the case of a cherry winning, the value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from the number of media awarded at the time of cherry winning "4") is the net increase during AT on the production side at that time It is added to the value of counter 136.

If a failure command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3807: YES), a process for setting batch update data at the time of winning a missed target is executed (step S3808). In this setting process, each of the value of the remaining number of grants display image G12 and the value of the number of acquisitions display image G13 on the image display device 63 is changed by 1 from the value before updating at the start of the game to the value after updating reflecting the game result. Data settings are made for updating at a predetermined update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds).

Specifically, in the setting process of step S3808, the current winning combination (first watermelon The number of game media owned by the player increases when the player wins a watermelon win, the second watermelon win, or the cherry win. The value obtained by subtracting the number of bets "3", or in the case of cherry winning, the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets "3" from the number of media awarded at the time of cherry winning "4") is the remaining award during AT at that point. Display data is stored in the production-side RAM 94 so that the value subtracted from the value of the number counter 135 is updated in one predetermined update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds). Set. In addition, after setting the display data, if the current winning combination (first watermelon combination, second watermelon combination, or cherry combination) wins, the increase in the number of game media owned by the player (first watermelon combination or cherry combination) If it is the second watermelon win, it is the value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from "5", which is the number of media awarded when the watermelon is won, and if it is the cherry prize, it is the value obtained by subtracting "3", which is the number of media awarded when the cherry is won. The value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3") is subtracted from the value of the AT remaining award counter 135 at that time.

In addition, in the setting process of step S3808, the value of the acquired number display image G13 is the value of the AT net increase counter 136 on the production side at that time, and the game media owned by the player in the current game are The value obtained by subtracting the number of decreases (bet number "3") from the value of the AT net increase counter 136 on the performance side at that time is displayed, and the value is displayed for one predetermined update period (specifically Display data is set in the performance side RAM 94 so that the display data is updated every 0.5 seconds). In addition, after setting the display data, the number of decreased game media owned by the player in the current game (the number of bets "3") is calculated from the value of the net increase counter 136 during AT on the performance side at that time. Subtract.

In the display information update process (FIG. 69(a)), other processes are executed in addition to the various processes described above (step S3809). In other processes, if a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the AT state ST5 and the result is a loss in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), the value of the acquired number display image G13 From the state where the value of the AT net increase counter 136 on the production side at that time is displayed, the number of decreased game media owned by the player in the current game (the number of bets "3") is calculated at that time. A display for updating the value subtracted from the value of the AT net increase counter 136 on the production side in one predetermined update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds). The data is set in the performance side RAM 94. In addition, after setting the display data, the number of decreased game media owned by the player in the current game (the number of bets "3") is calculated from the value of the net increase counter 136 during AT on the performance side at that time. Subtract. On the other hand, the display content of the remaining grant number display image G12 is maintained without change, and the value of the remaining grant number counter 135 during AT is not updated.

When a game with a bet of "3" is executed in the AT state ST5 and a replay win is established, the display contents of the remaining award number display image G12 and the acquisition number display image G13 are maintained without change, and the values of the remaining award number counter 135 during the AT and the performance side's net increase number counter 136 are also maintained without change. When a game with a bet of "2" is executed in the AT state ST5, the display contents of the remaining award number display image G12 and the acquisition number display image G13 are maintained without change, regardless of the winning result of that game, and the values of the remaining award number counter 135 during the AT and the performance side's net increase number counter 136 are also maintained without change.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing AT processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

First, by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S3901). If the number of bets in the current game is "2" (step S3901: NO), the processes from step S3902 onwards are not executed. As a result, even if a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in AT state ST5, the remaining number of bets in AT state ST5 will not be subtracted, and the remaining number of bets in AT state ST5 will be "0". ”, the remaining one game will not be subtracted.

Note that when in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), the AT process (FIG. 59) itself is not executed as in the first embodiment. Even if the game is started, the game executed in the CB state is not treated as a game that has been completed in the AT state ST5. Therefore, even if the AT state ST5 transitions to the CB state in the middle, after the CB state ends, the AT state ST5 will be restarted from the state with the remaining number of grants immediately before the transition to the CB state.

If the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S3901: YES), it is determined whether the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is "0" (step S3902). If the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more (step S3902: NO), the process of adding the number of games during AT is executed (step S3903), and the process of updating the number of net increases during AT is executed (step S3904). In the process of adding up the number of games during AT, the value of the number of games during AT counter provided in the main RAM 74 is incremented by one. The AT game number counter is a counter for measuring the total number of games executed in the AT state ST5, and is cleared to "0" when the AT state ST5 ends. In the process of updating the number of net increases during AT, if neither a replay win nor a small win corresponding to the provision of game media has been achieved in the current game, the value of the net increase number during AT counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is updated. Subtract "3" from the current game, and if a replay win is established in this game, maintain the value of the net increase counter during AT, and if a small role win is established in this game, the value of this time's net increase counter is maintained. The value obtained by subtracting "3" from the number of game media awarded in the game is added to the value of the net increase counter during AT. The AT net increase counter is a counter for measuring the increase/decrease in game media owned by the player in the AT state ST5, and is cleared to "0" when the AT state ST5 ends.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the index value IV set with a winning combination that allows the award of game media exceeding the bet number "3" has been won in the current game (step S3905). Specifically, it is determined whether one of the index values IV=1 to 13 has been won. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3905, the AT continuation counter 74e is subtracted (step S3906). In this subtraction process, the value obtained by subtracting "3", which is the number of bets, from the number of awarded game media that is the maximum number of awarded game media at the time of winning in the index value IV won this time, regardless of the winning result of the current game, is AT. It is subtracted from the value of the continuation counter 74e.

Specifically, in a game in which an index value IV of 1 to 6 or 10 is won, the value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is subtracted regardless of whether the first bell win is achieved or not, from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e. In addition, in a game in which an index value IV of 7 to 9 is won, the value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is subtracted regardless of whether the second bell win is achieved or not, from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e. In addition, in a game in which an index value IV of 11 or 12 is won, the value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is subtracted regardless of whether the first watermelon win or the second watermelon win is achieved or not, from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e. Also, in the case of a game in which the index value IV=13 is won, regardless of whether or not a cherry win is achieved, the value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from the "4" corresponding to the cherry win is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e. Note that in step S3905, if the value after subtraction falls below "0" and the borrow flag is set to "1", the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is cleared to "0".

When the AT continuation counter 74e is subtracted in step S3906, it is determined whether the value of the AT continuation counter 74e after the subtraction is "0" (step S3907). When the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0" (step S3907: YES), an AT end command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S3908). The AT end command includes the value of the game number counter during AT and the value of the net increase number counter during AT in the main side RAM 74. When the production side MPU 92 receives the AT end command, it executes processing for starting an AT end display on the image display device 63.

Thereafter, the end standby counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3909). In this embodiment, the AT state ST5 ends when the number of games waiting to be completed starting from the game in which the remaining number of game media given in the AT state ST5 is "0" has been played. In this embodiment, one game is set as the number of games waiting to be completed, but a predetermined plurality of games such as two, three, or four or more games may be set. The completion standby counter is a counter for the main side MPU 72 to measure whether or not the number of games waiting for completion has been completed starting from the game in which the remaining number of game media given in the AT state ST5 is "0".

When a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in AT state ST5 (step S3901: YES) and the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is "0" (step S3902: YES) ), the remaining number of grants in AT state ST5 in the previous game is "0", which means that the current game is a game subject to completion waiting. In this case, the value of the end standby counter in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S3910). Note that even if the remaining number of bets in the AT state ST5 in the previous game is "0", if a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the next game, the result is negative in step S3901. Since the process of step S3910 is not executed by making the determination, the AT state ST5 continues even after the game is executed.

When the value of the end standby counter in the main side RAM 74 is decremented by 1 in step S3910, on condition that the value of the end standby counter is "0" (step S3911: YES), AT state ST5 and second Processing for ending section SC2 is executed. Specifically, first, initialization processing for the second section SC2 is executed (step S3912). The contents of the initialization process for the second section SC2 are the same as the initialization process for the second section SC2 (step S814) in the first embodiment. Specifically, the second section flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In addition, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the user stays in the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 must be maintained, including the counter for storing the remaining number of game media given in the AT state ST5. By clearing various data (including the AT status flag) indicating the status, the gaming status is shifted to the normal gaming status ST1. It should be noted that even in the middle of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the second section SC2 is ended by executing the initialization process of the second section SC2. continues without being terminated. Thereafter, when the section display section 67 is in the lit state, the section display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the unlit state (step S3913). As a result, the notification on the section display section 67 that it is the second section SC2 is ended. Thereafter, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S3914). This makes it possible for the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the second section SC2 has ended.

Figure 71 is a flowchart showing the AT state processing at the start of a game in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72.

In the case where both the first ending flag and the second ending flag of the main side RAM 74 are not set to "1" (step S4001: NO), the index is determined in the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the winning combination in the current game. If one of the values IV=11 to 15 has been won (step S4002: YES), it is determined whether the value of the completion standby counter in the main side RAM 74 is "0". If the value of the end standby counter is 1 or more (step S4003: NO), processing for adding the remaining number of game media in AT state ST5 after step S4004 is not executed.

In other words, the AT state ST5 ends when the number of games waiting to end has been played since the game in which the remaining number of game media awarded in that AT state ST5 became "0." However, even if one of the index values IV = 11 to 15 is won in that waiting-to-end game, no opportunity to increase the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the AT state ST5 from continuing excessively.

If the value of the end waiting counter is "0" (step S4003: YES), an add-on lottery process is executed (step S4004). In the add-on lottery process, a lottery is used to determine whether or not to generate an add-on that will increase the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5, using an add-on lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. Specifically, if the index value IV = 11 is selected, there is a 10% probability that an add-on win with the number of award targets being 30 is selected, there is a 10% probability that an add-on win with the number of award targets being 50 is selected, and there is an 80% probability that it will be a miss. If the index value IV = 12 is selected, there is a 10% probability that an add-on win with the number of award targets being 20 is selected, there is a 10% probability that an add-on win with the number of award targets being 40 is selected, and there is an 80% probability that it will be a miss. When the index value IV=13 is selected, there is a 20% probability that an additional win with 30 coins will be selected, a 20% probability that an additional win with 50 coins will be selected, a 20% probability that an additional win with 100 coins will be selected, and a 40% probability that the result is a miss. When the index value IV=14 is selected, there is a 20% probability that an additional win with 20 coins will be selected, a 20% probability that an additional win with 40 coins will be selected, a 20% probability that an additional win with 90 coins will be selected, and a 40% probability that the result is a miss. When the index value IV=15 is selected, there is a 10% probability that an additional win with 30 coins will be selected, a 10% probability that an additional win with 50 coins will be selected, and a 80% probability that the result is a miss.

If an additional lottery win is obtained in the additional lottery process (step S4004) (step S4005: YES), the value of the number of awards selected in the current additional lottery process (step S4004) is stored in the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74. Add (step S4006). After that, an additional command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S4007). The add-on command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that an add-on win has been achieved in the add-on lottery process (step S4004) and the number of awards selected as the add-on win. When the production-side MPU 92 receives the addition command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute a production indicating that the addition of the remaining number of game media in the AT state ST5 has occurred. do.

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the AT production control process in this embodiment executed by the production side MPU 92.

In step S4101, it is determined whether an AT end command has been received from the main MPU 72. The AT termination command is transmitted in step S3908 in the AT process (FIG. 70), as described above. In other words, in the AT state ST5, a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, one of the index values IV=1 to 13 is won, and the subtraction process of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is executed. When the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0", an AT termination command is transmitted. Further, the AT end command is transmitted in step S3211 in the second control process (FIG. 60) of the game section, similarly to the sixth embodiment. In other words, if the AT state ST5 ends because the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, the AT state ST5 will end without the number of games waiting to end being played. The AT end command is sent before the freeze period occurs.

If an AT termination command has been received (step S4101: YES), an AT termination display setting process is executed (step S4102), and a caution display setting process is executed (step S4103). In the AT end display setting process, data is set so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended. In this case, as data for controlling the display of the image display device 63, data that enables execution of the AT end display is set in the effect-side RAM 94. Further, in the caution display setting process, data is set so that the image display device 63 executes a caution display to prevent the player from becoming absorbed in the game. As a result, the image display device 63 starts displaying an end clear image G61, a total number of games image G62, a total number of wins image G63, and a caution image G52 as shown in FIG. 58(b).

In other words, the AT state ST5 ends when the number of games waiting to end from the game in which the remaining number of game media given in the AT state ST5 becomes "0" is exhausted, but the remaining number of game media given is "0". When the game in which the number of grants is "0" ends, that is, before the end waiting game starts, an AT end display and a caution display are started on the image display device 63. Additionally, if the AT state ST5 ends when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is met, the AT end command will be sent before the freeze period occurs in the game where the ending condition is met. However, in this case, the AT end display and caution display are started on the image display device 63 before the freeze period occurs.

Here, the AT end command includes the value of the game number counter during AT and the value of the net increase number counter during AT in the main side RAM 74. The number addition process (step S3903) and the update process for the number of net additions during AT (step S3904), which is a process for updating the value of the number counter for the number of net additions during AT, are performed when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more. It is executed in a game executed in a certain situation, but it is not executed in a game waiting for completion when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0", and information that determines the display content of the AT completion display is not executed. The set AT end command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 in a game in which the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0", but is not transmitted in a game in which the AT continuation counter 74e is on standby. Therefore, the number of games displayed in the total number of games image G62 in the AT end display is the total number of games played until the remaining number of game media provided becomes "0" in the AT state ST5, and the number of games displayed is the total number of games played until the remaining number of game media provided becomes "0" in the AT state ST5. This does not include the number of games played as games. In addition, the number of game media displayed in the total acquisition number image G63 in the AT end display is the total number of game media acquired in the games played until the remaining number of game media given becomes "0" in AT state ST5. , and does not include the number of game media acquired in games that are waiting for completion.

In step S4104, it is determined whether or not a second interval initialization command has been received from the main MPU 72. The second interval initialization command is transmitted in step S3914 in the AT processing (FIG. 70) as already described. That is, when the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 becomes "0" and the number of games waiting for the end is played, the second interval initialization command is transmitted. Also, the second interval initialization command is transmitted in step S3216 in the second control processing (FIG. 60) of the game interval, as in the sixth embodiment. That is, when the AT state ST5 ends due to the ending condition of the second interval SC2 being satisfied, the AT state ST5 ends without playing the number of games waiting for the end, but in this case, the second interval initialization command is transmitted when the freeze period has elapsed.

If the second section initialization command has been received (step S4104: YES), the initialization command received flag provided in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4105). The initialization command received flag is a flag for specifying on the production side MPU 92 that the second section initialization command has already been received in the AT state ST5.

If the initialization command received flag is set to "1" (step S4106: YES), it is determined whether or not a bet has been set for gaming media to start a new game (step S4107). When a bet is set for game media by inserting medals into the medal slot 45 or operating the credit insert buttons 47 and 48 in a situation where it is possible to start a new game, the main MPU 72 issues a command corresponding to the bet setting for the game media. is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. The command is sent every time one or more game media are bet, but it may be configured to be sent when the number of bets on the game media that makes it possible to start the game is completed. If the production side MPU 92 has received the command, it determines that a bet has been set for game media to start a new game, and makes an affirmative determination in step S4107.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4107, the process for ending the AT end display is executed (step S4108), and the process for ending the warning display is executed (step S4109). In the end processing of the AT end display, the data for executing the AT end display is erased, and the data is set so that the display of the image G53 (see FIG. 52(c)) of the normal gaming state ST1 is started. In the warning display termination process, data for executing the warning display is erased. As a result, the state in which the AT end display and caution display are executed on the image display device 63 in the final game of the AT state ST5 ends when a bet is set to start a new game, and the state ends normally. Display of image G53 in gaming state ST1 is started. Note that when an affirmative determination is made in step S4107, the initialization command received flag is cleared to "0".

In the AT production control process (FIG. 72), other processes are executed in addition to the above-mentioned processes (step S4110). In other processes, as the game progresses, data to be referenced in various tables is updated, and the performance contents are updated. Furthermore, when the first ending command or the second ending command is received from the main MPU 72, a process for performing an ending effect is executed.

FIG. 73 is a time chart showing how the AT end display and caution display are executed in the AT state ST5. FIG. 73(a) shows the period in which the game is being executed, and FIG. 73(b) shows the period in which the game is being executed for the number of games waiting to be completed after the remaining number of game media in AT state ST5 becomes "0". 73(c) shows the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating, and FIG. FIG. 74(e) shows the timing when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, FIG. 74(g) shows a period during which the section display section 67 is in a lit state, FIG. 74(h) shows a period during which an AT end display is being executed, and FIG. 74(i) shows a period when a caution display is being executed. Indicates the period of time.

First, a case will be described in which the AT state ST5 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 being satisfied.

At timing t1, a new game is started in AT state ST5, as shown in FIG. 73(a). Then, at timing t2, as shown in FIG. 73(c), the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game is stopped. In this game, one of the index values IV = 1 to 13 is won, and the maximum number of game media awarded at the winning index value IV is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e, regardless of whether or not the winning is established. As a result, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0". Therefore, at timing t2, the AT end display and caution display are started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIGS. 73(h) and 73(i).

Thereafter, the current game ends at timing t3 as shown in FIG. 73(a). As a result, as shown in FIG. 73(b), an end waiting period is set in which the end of the AT state ST5 is waited until the number of end waiting games (specifically, one game) is executed.

Thereafter, after a new bet setting is made at timing t4 as shown in FIG. 73(e), the start lever 41 is operated at timing t5, as shown in FIG. 73(a) at timing t5. A new game is started in AT state ST5. Then, at timing t6, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game is stopped. By executing the process for ending the AT state ST5 at the timing t6, the section display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the unlit state as shown in FIG. 73(g).

Thereafter, at timing t7, the current game ends as shown in FIG. 73(a), and the end waiting period ends as shown in FIG. 73(b). In this case, since the acceptance permission process (step S312) is executed in the normal process (FIG. 12), the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the first credit input button 47 and The operation of the second credit input button 48 is also enabled. Then, at timing t8, bet setting for game media is performed as shown in FIG. 73(e). The bet setting may be a bet setting of "1" game medium due to one medal being inserted into the medal slot 45, and may be a bet setting of "1" game medium due to one medal being inserted into the medal slot 45. The bet setting for "3" game media may be due to the operation of the 1 credit input button 47, and the second credit input button 48 is operated in a situation where two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. It may also be a bet setting of "2" game media. At the timing t8, as shown in FIGS. 73(h) and 73(i), the AT end display and the caution display on the image display device 63 end. In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying the image G53 in the normal gaming state ST1.

Next, a case where the AT state ST5 ends when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied will be described.

At timing t9, a new game is started in AT state ST5, as shown in FIG. 73(a). Then, at timing t10, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game is stopped. In this game, as shown in FIG. 73(d), the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. Therefore, a freeze period is set at the timing t10 as shown in FIG. 73(f). Further, at timing t10, AT end display and caution display are started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIGS. 73(h) and 73(i).

Thereafter, at timing t11, a freeze period elapses as shown in FIG. 73(f). As a result, the current game ends as shown in FIG. 73(a), and the acceptance permission process (step S312) is executed in the normal process (FIG. 12), so the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are not inserted. It is detected by the medal detection sensor 45a, and the operations of the first credit input button 47 and the second credit input button 48 are also enabled. Furthermore, at the timing of t11, the section display section 67 changes from the lit state to the unlit state, as shown in FIG. 73(g). This completes the notification on the section display section 67 that it is the second section SC2.

Thereafter, at timing t12, bet setting for game media is performed as shown in FIG. 73(e). The bet setting may be a bet setting of "1" game medium due to one medal being inserted into the medal slot 45, and may be a bet setting of "1" game medium due to one medal being inserted into the medal slot 45. The bet setting for "3" game media may be due to the operation of the 1 credit input button 47, and the second credit input button 48 is operated in a situation where two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. It may also be a bet setting of "2" game media. At the timing t12, as shown in FIGS. 73(h) and 73(i), the AT end display and the caution display on the image display device 63 end. In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying the image G53 in the normal gaming state ST1.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

When the remaining number of grants becomes "0" in the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 does not end, but instead enters an end waiting period and one game is executed in the AT state ST5. In other words, in AT state ST5, the player pays attention to the number of game media given in each game until the remaining number given becomes "0", and when the remaining number given becomes "0", one game is played. The player pays attention to the fact that is being digested. Therefore, the object to be focused on in order to identify the trigger for ending the AT state ST5 is changed midway through, making it possible to increase the player's attention to the AT state ST5.

The waiting period for completion does not continue over a plurality of games, but ends after one game. This makes it possible to prevent the termination waiting period from continuing excessively.

In a game in which the remaining number of grants becomes "0" in AT state ST5, an AT end display indicating that AT state ST5 ends is started. This allows the player to have more opportunities to check the AT end display compared to a configuration in which the AT end display is started when one game in the end waiting period is executed.

Since the AT end display includes the total number of games played image G62 and the total number of wins image G63, a player who checks the AT end display can understand not only that the AT state ST5 has ended, but also the results of each game played in that AT state ST5. In this case, the result of one game during the end waiting period is not reflected in the contents of the total number of games played image G62 and the total number of wins image G63 in the AT end display. This makes it possible to prevent the contents of the total number of games played image G62 and the total number of wins image G63 that have started to be displayed from being changed midway in a configuration that ensures a long display period for the AT end display that includes the total number of games played image G62 and the total number of wins image G63.

If the AT state ST5 ends when the ending condition is satisfied and the second section SC2 ends, the end waiting period will not be applied even if the remaining number of grants in the AT state ST5 is not "0". The AT state ST5 ends without one game being executed. This makes it possible to prevent the AT state ST5 from continuing even though the second section SC2 has ended in a configuration in which there is a waiting period for one game to end when the AT state ST5 ends. It becomes possible.

In AT state ST5, when the number of game media is awarded in excess of the number of bets, the excess value is subtracted from the remaining number of grants counted in the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74, and the remaining amount is When the number of grants becomes "0", there is an end waiting period in which only one game is executed, and when the one game is executed, the AT state ST5 ends. In this case, if one of the index values IV=1 to 9 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13), the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in the correct stopping order. In this case, a game medium of "15", which is more than the bet number "3", is awarded, but the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in a stop order different from the stop order of the correct answer. In this configuration, the award of gaming media exceeding the bet number of "3" does not occur, and if any of the index values IV = 1 to 9 is won, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will rotate in the correct stopping order. Even if the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in a different stopping order from the correct stopping order, the bet number "3" is subtracted from "15". The result "12" is subtracted from the remaining number of grants. As a result, if one of the index values IV = 1 to 9 is won, "12" will be subtracted from the remaining number of awarded games, regardless of whether "15" gaming media are awarded or not. It becomes possible to prevent the end timing of the AT state ST5 from being delayed depending on the stop operation mode of the user.

In the AT state ST5, the image display device 63 displays the remaining award number display image G12 corresponding to the remaining award number, so the player can check the remaining award number display image G12 to determine when the AT state ST5 will end. It becomes possible to predict. In this case, if you win one of the index values IV = 1 to 9 and the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in the correct stop order, the remaining award will be given according to the subtraction of the remaining number of awards. While the number display image G12 is updated sequentially, if the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in a stopping order different from the correct stopping order, the remaining number is updated according to the subtraction of the remaining awarded number. The grant number display image G12 is updated all at once. As a result, in a configuration in which when winning one of the index values IV = 1 to 9, the remaining number of awarded games is subtracted by ``12'' regardless of whether ``15'' game media are awarded or not, The value of the remaining number display image G12 is updated regardless of whether "15" game media have been awarded. It becomes possible to set an appropriate display mode corresponding to whether or not the image is displayed.

Updated display of the value of the remaining award number display image G12 when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in a stopping order different from the correct stopping order in the case where one of the index values IV = 1 to 9 is won. This display mode is more difficult for the player to recognize than the display mode of updating the value of the remaining award number display image G12 when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in the correct stop order. . As a result, the player is made aware that even though he won one of the index values IV = 1 to 9 but was not awarded "15" gaming media, the remaining number of awards was subtracted by "12". It is possible to make it more difficult.

Updated display of the value of the remaining award number display image G12 when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in a stopping order different from the correct stopping order in the case where one of the index values IV = 1 to 9 is won. The period required for this is shorter than the period required for updating and displaying the value of the remaining award number display image G12 when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in the correct stopping order. As a result, the player can avoid the situation where the remaining number of awards is subtracted by "12" even though "15" gaming media were not awarded even though the player won one of the index values IV = 1 to 9. It becomes possible to reduce the possibility of confirmation.

If the winning index value IV is one of 1 to 9, and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in a stopping order different from the correct stopping order, the visibility to the image display device 63 is reduced. By applying the effect G66, the visibility of the content displayed on the image display device 63 becomes lower than before. Then, in a situation where the visibility reduction effect G66 is applied, the value of the remaining number display image G12 is updated and displayed. As a result, the player is made aware that even though he won one of the index values IV = 1 to 9 but was not awarded "15" gaming media, the remaining number of awards was subtracted by "12". It is possible to make it more difficult.

If you win one of the index values IV = 1 to 9 and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in a stopping order different from the correct stopping order, the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped. Even in a situation where the vehicle is not stopped, the visibility reducing effect G66 is applied when it is specified that the stopping order is different from the correct stopping order. In this situation, when the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, the value of the remaining number display image G12 is updated and displayed. As a result, in a situation where the visibility of the image display device 63 is reduced due to the visibility reduction effect G66 being applied, the value of the remaining number display image G12 can be updated and displayed. It becomes possible.

<Another form of the eighth embodiment>
- When the AT state ST5 is started, the initial award number is set in the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74, and when the award of game media exceeding the bet number "3" is made, the bet number is set. The value exceeding the AT continuation counter 74e is subtracted from the remaining number of grants in the AT continuation counter 74e, and when the remaining number of grants becomes "0", an end waiting period that lasts for one game occurs, and 1 Although the AT state ST5 is configured to end when the game is executed and the end waiting period ends, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the AT state ST5 is started, the initial number of games is set in the AT continuation counter 74e, and each time a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, the remaining number of games in the AT continuation counter 74e is 1" is subtracted and the remaining number of games becomes "0", the number of grants for waiting for completion is set in the AT continuation counter 74e, and it becomes a waiting period for finishing, and the number of bets during the waiting period for finishing. If more than "3" game media are awarded, the value exceeding the bet number is subtracted from the remaining number of grants in the AT continuation counter 74e, and the remaining number of grants becomes "0". Therefore, the AT state ST5 may be configured to end when the end waiting period ends. The above-mentioned number of grants for waiting for completion may be configured to be less than or equal to the expected net increase number of game media in one game in the AT state ST5 (a value obtained by subtracting "3" from the expected number of grants). In this case, the end waiting period basically ends after one game, and may continue over multiple games depending on the situation. Further, the above-mentioned number of grants for waiting for completion may be configured to be a value exceeding the expected net increase number of game media (a value obtained by subtracting "3" from the expected number of grants) of game media in one game in the AT state ST5. In this case, the end waiting period continues over multiple games.

Furthermore, when the AT state ST5 is started, the initial number of winnings is set in the AT continuation counter 74e, and the AT is continued every time the first bell winning or the second bell winning is achieved in a game where the number of bets is "3". When "1" is subtracted from the remaining number of successes on the counter 74e and the remaining number of successes becomes "0", an end waiting period that continues for a predetermined number of games occurs, and a predetermined number of games are executed. The AT state ST5 may be configured to end when the end waiting period ends. The predetermined number of games may be one game, or may be a plurality of games such as two games, three games, or four or more games.

In a configuration in which the initial number of occurrences is set in this manner, if any of index values IV = 1 to 9 is won in the role selection process (Figure 13), then "1" may be subtracted from the remaining number of occurrences in the AT continuation counter 74e, regardless of whether the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is the correct stopping sequence corresponding to the occurrence of a bell winning or is a stopping sequence different from the correct stopping sequence. In this case, the remaining number of times the winning combination is achieved is displayed in the remaining number of winning combinations display image G12 on the image display device 63, but if the index value IV = 1 to 9 is selected in the lottery process for the winning combination (Figure 13) and the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in a stopping order that results in a bell winning combination, the value of the remaining number of winning combinations display image G12 is subtracted in a display manner that is easy for the player to recognize, such as the sequential update mode in the above embodiment, and if the index value IV = 1 to 9 is selected in the lottery process for the winning combination (Figure 13) and the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in a stopping order that does not result in a bell winning combination, the value of the remaining number of winning combinations display image G12 is subtracted in a display manner that is difficult for the player to recognize, such as the batch update mode in the above embodiment.

In addition, in the configuration in which the initial number of wins is set as described above at the beginning of the AT state ST5, the number of grants for the end standby is set in the AT continuation counter 74e during the end standby period, and the number of bets is set in the end standby period. If more than "3" game media are awarded, the value exceeding the number of bets is subtracted from the remaining number of grants in the AT continuation counter 74e, and the remaining number of grants becomes "0". Therefore, the AT state ST5 may be configured to end when the end waiting period ends. The above-mentioned number of grants for waiting for completion may be configured to be less than or equal to the expected net increase number of gaming media in one game in AT state ST5 (the value obtained by subtracting "3" from the expected number of grants), and It may be configured such that the value exceeds the expected net increase in the number of game media (the value obtained by subtracting "3" from the expected number of grants).

In addition, in the configuration where the initial number of grants or the initial number of games is set at the beginning of the AT state ST5, the number of times the AT continuation counter 74e is established for the end standby is set in the end standby period, and the number of bets during the end standby period is " 3", each time a first bell winning or a second bell winning is achieved, "1" is subtracted from the remaining number of winnings in the AT continuation counter 74e, and the remaining number of winnings becomes "0". The AT state ST5 may be configured to end when the end waiting period ends. The number of times the above-mentioned wait for completion is established may be one time, or may be a plurality of times, such as two times, three times, or four or more times.

- If a number of game media exceeding the number of bets "3" is awarded in AT state ST5, the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets "3" from the number of awarded gaming media is stored in the main side RAM 74. Although the configuration is such that the value is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the provision of game media occurs in the AT state ST5, the number of provided game media is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e. The configuration may be such that the value is subtracted from the value of .

・The end waiting period after the remaining number of grants becomes "0" in AT state ST5 is not limited to a configuration in which it ends with the execution of one game, but the end waiting period is 2 games, 3 games, or 4 games. It may be configured such that the process ends after the number of games waiting for completion has been completed. In this case, after the remaining number of grants reaches "0", the AT state ST5 continues over multiple games.

・No matter what the result of the game is during the waiting period for the end of AT state ST5, the remaining number of grants will not become 1 or more again. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of grants can be 1 or more again. For example, if the result of the winning combination lottery process (Fig. 13) during the waiting period for completion is a predetermined result or if the winning result is a predetermined winning result, the additional lottery process is executed, and in the additional lottery process, one or more When the number of grants is selected, the selected number of grants is added to the AT continuation counter 74e, so that the remaining number of grants becomes 1 or more again. In this case, the AT state ST5 continues until the remaining number of grants reaches "0", and when the remaining number of grants reaches "0", the end waiting period may occur again. A configuration may be adopted in which the period does not occur again.

- In the AT state ST5, if one of the index values IV=1 to 9 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), the remaining number of awards on the image display device 63 regardless of whether the bell winning is established or not. A configuration may be adopted in which the values of the display image G12 are subtracted in the same display mode.

- When a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the AT state ST5, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is maintained without being subtracted, and the value of the remaining award number display image G12 is also subtracted. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even if a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in AT state ST5, if the number of game media exceeding the number of bets is awarded, the amount exceeding the number of bets is the remaining amount of the AT continuation counter 74e. It is good also as a structure where it is subtracted from the number of grants and also subtracted from the value of the remaining number of grants display image G12.

- A configuration may be adopted in which the end waiting period does not exist in the AT state ST5. In this case, the AT state ST5 ends in a game where the remaining number of grants is "0". Even with this configuration, if one of the index values IV=1 to 9 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) in the AT state ST5, the bell prize is won regardless of whether the bell prize is established or not. The value obtained by subtracting the number of bets "3" from the number of game media awarded due to the winning is subtracted from the remaining number of grants in the AT continuation counter 74e, and is also subtracted from the value of the remaining number of grants display image G12. preferable. Further, it is preferable that the display mode when subtracting the value of the remaining grant number display image G12 is also the display mode described in the above embodiment.

- In the AT state ST5, if one of the index values IV=1 to 9 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13), the reel 32L is placed in a stop order that is different from the stop order that allows the establishment of a bell prize. , 32M, and 32R, only one of the batch display of the remaining number display image G12 and the application of the visibility reduction effect G66 to the image display device 63 may be configured.

<Ninth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the eighth embodiment in the types of games that are reflected in the total number of games image G62 and total number of acquisitions image G63 in the AT end display. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the eighth embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the eighth embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing AT processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

If the number of bets for this game is "3" (step S4201: YES), regardless of the value of the AT continuation counter 74e, the process of adding the number of games during AT is executed (step S4202), and the net increase number during AT is executed (step S4202). The update process is executed (step S4203). The processing content of the addition process of the number of games during AT is the same as step S3903 of the AT processing (FIG. 70) in the eighth embodiment, and the processing content of the update process of the net increase number during AT is the same as that of the eighth embodiment. This is the same as step S3904 of the AT process (FIG. 70). As a result, the content of not only the game started when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more, but also the game started when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0", that is, the game waiting for completion. This will also be reflected in the values of the game number counter during AT and the net increase number counter during AT in the main side RAM 74. That is, when a game waiting for completion is executed, the value of the game number counter during AT is incremented by 1, and the value of the net increase number counter during AT is updated according to the winning result in the game waiting for completion.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is "0" (step S4204). If the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more (step S4204: NO), the processes of steps S4205 to S4209 are executed. The processing contents of steps S4205 to S4209 are the same as steps S3905 to S3909 of the AT processing (FIG. 70) in the eighth embodiment. In this case, in step S4208, an AT end command is sent to the production side MPU 92, but the AT end command does not include the value of the game number counter during AT and the value of the net increase number counter during AT in the main side RAM 74.

If the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0" (step S4204: YES), the remaining number of grants in AT state ST5 in the previous game is "0", and the current game is a game that is subject to completion waiting. It means that. In this case, the value of the end standby counter in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S4210). Note that even if the remaining number of bets in AT state ST5 in the previous game is "0", if a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the next game, the result is negative in step S4201. Since the process of step S4210 is not executed by making the determination, the AT state ST5 continues even after the game is executed.

When the value of the end standby counter in the main side RAM 74 is decremented by 1 in step S4210, on condition that the value of the end standby counter is "0" (step S4211: YES), AT state ST5 and second Processing for ending section SC2 is executed. Specifically, first, initialization processing for the second section SC2 is executed (step S4212). The contents of the initialization process for the second section SC2 are the same as the initialization process for the second section SC2 (step S814) in the first embodiment. Specifically, the second section flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In addition, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the user stays in the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 must be maintained, including the counter for storing the remaining number of game media given in the AT state ST5. By clearing various data (including the AT status flag) indicating the status, the gaming status is shifted to the normal gaming status ST1. It should be noted that even in the middle of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the second section SC2 is ended by executing the initialization process of the second section SC2. continues without being terminated. Thereafter, when the section display section 67 is in the lit state, the section display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the unlit state (step S4213). As a result, the notification on the section display section 67 that it is the second section SC2 is ended.

Thereafter, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S4214). The second section initialization command includes the value of the game number counter during AT and the value of the net increase number counter during AT in the main side RAM 74. In addition, even in this embodiment, the second section initialization command is transmitted in step S3216 in the second control process (FIG. 60) of the game section, as in the sixth embodiment, but the second section initialization command is The initialization command also includes the value of the game number counter during AT and the value of the net increase number counter during AT in the main side RAM 74.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the AT production control process in this embodiment executed by the production side MPU 92.

In step S4301, it is determined whether an AT end command has been received from the main MPU 72. The AT termination command is transmitted in step S4208 in the AT process (FIG. 74), as described above. In other words, in the AT state ST5, a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, one of the index values IV=1 to 13 is won, and the subtraction process of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is executed. When the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0", an AT termination command is transmitted. Further, the AT end command is transmitted in step S3211 in the second control process (FIG. 60) of the game section, similarly to the sixth embodiment. In other words, if the AT state ST5 ends because the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, the AT state ST5 will end without the number of games waiting to end being played. The AT end command is sent before the freeze period occurs.

If an AT end command has been received (step S4301: YES), a setting process for clear end display is executed (step S4302). In the end clear display setting process, data settings are performed so that the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 perform an effect that allows the player to recognize that the AT state ST5 has ended. be exposed. In this case, as data for controlling the display of the image display device 63, an end clear image G61 (specifically, a text image of "RUSH END") is used to make it possible for the player to recognize that the AT state ST5 ends. Data that enables the display of is set in the performance side RAM 94. On the other hand, in this embodiment, at the stage when the AT end command is received, data settings for displaying the total number of games image G62, total number of acquisitions image G63, and caution image G52 on the image display device 63 are not performed.

Figure 76 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the setting process for the end indication display is executed. As shown in Figure 76 (a), the end indication image G61 (specifically, the text image "RUSH END") is displayed on the image display device 63, while the total number of games image G62, the total number of wins image G63, and the warning image G52 are not displayed.

In step S4303, it is determined whether the second section initialization command has been received from the main MPU 72. The second section initialization command is transmitted in step S4214 in the AT process (FIG. 74), as described above. That is, in the AT state ST5, when the remaining number of game media to be given becomes "0" and the number of games waiting to be completed have been executed, the second section initialization command is transmitted. Further, the second section initialization command is transmitted in step S3216 in the second control process (FIG. 60) of the game section, similarly to the sixth embodiment. In other words, if the AT state ST5 ends because the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, the AT state ST5 will end without the number of games waiting to end being played. A second section initialization command is transmitted when the freeze period has elapsed.

If the second section initialization command has been received (step S4303: YES), a result display setting process is executed (step S4304), and a caution display setting process is executed (step S4305). In the result display setting process, the value of the number of games during AT counter in the main side RAM 74 set in the second section initialization command is grasped, and the data of the total number of games image G62 corresponding to the grasped value is sent to the production side. Set in RAM94. In addition, in the result display setting process, the value of the AT net increase counter of the main side RAM 74 set in the second section initialization command is grasped, and the data of the total acquisition number image G63 corresponding to the grasped value is Set in the performance side RAM 94. In addition, in the warning display setting process, data is set in the effect-side RAM 94 so that the image display device 63 executes a warning display to prevent the player from getting absorbed in the game.

FIG. 76(b) shows that after the end explicit display setting process is executed, the result display setting process (step S4304) and the caution display setting process (step S4305) are executed upon reception of the second section initialization command. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the image display device 63 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 76(b), the image display device 63 displays, in addition to an end clearing image G61 (specifically, a text image of "RUSH END"), a total number of games image G62, a total number of acquisitions image G63, and a warning. Image G52 is displayed.

In other words, the AT state ST5 ends when the number of games waiting to end from the game in which the remaining number of game media given in the AT state ST5 is "0" is exhausted, but the remaining number of game media given is "0". When a game in which the number of grants is "0" is not played, but a game that is waiting for completion, is played, the image display device 63 starts displaying the results and warnings. Furthermore, if the AT state ST5 ends when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is met, the second section initialization command will be sent after the freeze period has elapsed in the game where the ending condition was met. However, in this case, when the freeze period has elapsed, the image display device 63 starts displaying the results and warnings.

Here, the second section initialization command includes the value of the game number counter during AT and the value of the net increase number counter during AT in the main side RAM 74, but this is a process for updating the value of the number of games during AT counter. The process of adding the number of games during AT (step S4202) and the process of updating the number of net increases during AT (step S4203), which is a process for updating the value of the net increase counter during AT, are performed when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is It is executed not only in a game executed in a situation where the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more, but also in a game that is waiting for completion when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0". Then, the second section initialization command is transmitted with the value of the game number counter during AT and the value of the net increase number counter during AT, which reflect the contents of the game waiting for completion, set. Therefore, the number of games displayed in the total number of games image G62 in the result display is the number of games played until the remaining number of game media given in AT state ST5 becomes "0" and the number of games played during the end waiting period. This is the total number of games. In addition, the number of game media displayed in the total acquisition number image G63 in the result display is the number of game media acquired in the games played until the remaining number of game media given in AT state ST5 becomes "0"; This is the total number of game media acquired in the games that have been completed during the waiting period.

After executing the processing of steps S4304 and S4305, the initialization command received flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4306). The initialization command received flag is a flag for specifying on the production side MPU 92 that the second section initialization command has already been received in the AT state ST5.

If the initialization command received flag is set to "1" (step S4307: YES), it is determined whether or not a bet has been set for gaming media to start a new game (step S4308). When a bet is set for game media by inserting medals into the medal slot 45 or operating the credit insert buttons 47 and 48 in a situation where it is possible to start a new game, the main MPU 72 issues a command corresponding to the bet setting. is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. The command is sent each time one or more game media are bet, but it may be configured to be sent when the number of bets on the game media that makes it possible to start the game is completed. If the production side MPU 92 has received the command, it determines that a bet setting for game media has been made to start a new game, and makes an affirmative determination in step S4308.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4308, processing for terminating clear end display (step S4309), end processing for result display (step S4310), and end processing for caution display (step S4311) is executed. In the termination processing of the explicit end display, data for executing the clear end display is erased, and data is set so that the display of the image G53 (see FIG. 52(c)) of the normal gaming state ST1 is started. . Further, in the result display termination process, data for executing the result display is erased, and in the caution display termination process, data for executing the caution display is erased. As a result, the state in which the end clear image G61, the total number of games image G62, the total number of acquisitions image G63, and the caution image G52 are displayed on the image display device 63 in the final game in the AT state ST5 is a state in which the end clear image G61, the total number of games image G62, the total number of acquisitions image G63, and the caution image G52 are displayed on the image display device 63. When the bet setting has been made, the process ends and the display of the image G53 in the normal gaming state ST1 is started. Note that when an affirmative determination is made in step S4308, the initialization command received flag is cleared to "0".

In the AT production control process (FIG. 75), other processes are executed in addition to the above-mentioned processes (step S4312). In other processing, data to be referred to in various tables is updated as the game progresses, and processing is executed to update the performance contents. Furthermore, when the first ending command or the second ending command is received from the main MPU 72, processing is executed to perform the ending effect.

According to the above configuration, when the remaining number of awards becomes "0" in the AT state ST5, the image display device 63 starts displaying the end indicating image G61, but does not start displaying the total number of games played image G62 and the total number of wins image G63. Then, when one game of the end waiting period is played, the display of the total number of games played image G62 and the total number of wins image G63 starts, including the result of that one game. This makes it possible to display the total number of games played image G62 and the total number of wins image G63 corresponding to the overall result of the AT state ST5 in a configuration that ensures a long display period for the end indicating image G61.

When all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating in one game during the end waiting period, the display of the total number of games image G62 and the total number of acquisitions image G63 is started. This makes it possible to start displaying the total number of games image G62 and the total number of acquisitions image G63 based on the result of the one game.

Note that when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating in one game during the end waiting period, the image display device 63 starts displaying the total number of games image G62 and the total number of acquisitions image G63, and also displays the caution image. Although the configuration is such that the display of G52 is started, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the display of the caution image G52 is started after the display of the total number of games image G62 and the total number of acquisitions image G63 is started. Alternatively, the display of the caution image G52 may be started before the display of the total number of games image G62 and the total number of acquisitions image G63 is started.

<Tenth embodiment>
In the slot machine 10 of this embodiment, the control manner of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is different from that of the first embodiment. This different configuration will be explained below. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 77 is an assembled perspective view of the left reel 32L. Note that the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R have the same configuration as the left reel 32L.

The left reel 32L includes a cylindrical skeleton member 141 forming a cylindrical cage, and a belt-shaped belt (not shown in FIG. 77) wound endlessly around the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical skeleton member 141. Then, the belt is attached to the cylindrical frame member 141 via a pair of seals formed along both long sides of the belt so as to maintain the wound state. A large number of patterns serving as identification information are printed at equal intervals on the outer peripheral surface of the band-shaped belt. The center of the cylindrical frame member 141 is attached to the drive shaft of a stepping motor 142. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the stepping motor 142 rotates, the cylindrical frame member 141 rotates about the drive shaft, and the left reel 32L rotates.

The stepping motor 142 is screwed to the side surface of a motor plate 143 that is arranged in an upright position within the reel unit 31. A reel index sensor 144 in which a light emitting element 144a and a light receiving element 144b are held at a predetermined interval is installed on the motor plate 143. On the other hand, a sensor cut bang 145 extending in the radial direction is fixed to the cylindrical frame member 141 with screws. The tip end 145a of the sensor cut bun 145 is bent at a substantially right angle and positioned so that it can pass between both elements 144a and 144b of the reel index sensor 144. Each time the left reel 32L rotates once, the reel index sensor 144 detects passage of the tip end 145a of the sensor cut bun 145, and a detection signal is output to the main MPU 72 each time the detection is made. Therefore, the main MPU 72 can check and correct the angular position of the left reel 32L every rotation based on this detection signal.

For example, the stepping motor 142 is set to rotate once by advancing 504 steps by applying an excitation signal of 504 pulses, and the rotational position of the stepping motor 142, that is, the rotational position of the left reel 32L, is controlled by this number of steps. be done. On each belt of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols, specifically 21 symbols, are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction). Therefore, it takes 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) to switch from one symbol to the next at a predetermined position. Then, depending on the number of pulses from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor 144 is output, it is possible to recognize which symbol is visible from the display window 21L, or to select an arbitrary symbol from the display window 21L. Control can be performed to make it visible.

<Operating principle of stepping motor 142>
78(a) is a connection diagram showing the drive system of the stepping motor 142, and FIG. 78(b) is a diagram showing the drive characteristics of the stepping motor 142.

As the stepping motor 142, a hybrid (HB) type two-phase stepping motor is used. Note that the stepping motor 142 is not limited to a hybrid type, and various stepping motors can be used.

As shown in FIG. 78(a), the hybrid stepping motor 142 includes a rotor 151 disposed at the center and a stator 152 disposed around the rotor 151 and having first to fourth poles 153 to 156. It is equipped with The rotor 151 is composed of a front rotor 151a magnetized to the N pole and a back rotor 151b magnetized to the S pole. The rear rotor 151b is attached to the rotating shaft with a relative shift of 1/2 pitch so that the teeth provided around the rear rotor 151b are positioned between the rotors 151b and 151b. A cylindrical magnet (not shown) is attached between the front rotor 151a and the rear rotor 151b.

As shown in FIG. 78(b), the first pole 153 and the third pole 155 are bifilar-wound with an excitation coil L0 and an excitation coil L2. is connected, and a predetermined DC power supply +B (for example, +24 volts) is applied here. Similarly, the excitation coil L1 and the excitation coil L3 are bifilar-wound around the second pole 154 and the fourth pole 156, and the winding end of the excitation coil L1 and the winding start end of the excitation coil L3 are connected, and the above-mentioned DC is connected here. Power supply +B is applied.

An excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L0 of the first pole 153 to excite the first pole 153 to the S pole and the third pole 155 to the N pole. The phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L2 of 155 to excite the first pole 153 to the north pole and the third pole 155 to the south pole is referred to as an inverted A phase. Similarly, an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L1 of the second pole 154, and the phase in which the second pole 154 is excited to the S pole and the fourth pole 156 is excited to the N pole is defined as the B phase. The phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L3 of the fourth pole 156 to excite the second pole 154 to the north pole and the fourth pole 156 to the south pole is referred to as a reverse B phase.

An excitation signal for the stepping motor 142 is given as excitation data to a motor driver 157 shown in FIG. 78(b). This excitation data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and appropriate excitation data is output by timer interrupt processing. This excitation data determines the excitation phase for the stepping motor 142, and an excitation signal (current) is applied to the excitation phase.

When the stepping motor 142 is of the one-phase excitation drive type, the rotor 151 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by sequentially applying excitation signals to phase A, phase B, reverse phase A, and reverse phase B. That is, for example, when current is first applied to phase A, the protrusion of the first pole 153, which has become an S pole, and the teeth of the front rotor 151a, and the protrusion of the third pole 155, which has become an N pole, and the teeth of the rear rotor 151b face each other due to attraction, and then when current is applied to phase B, the protrusion of the second pole 154, which has become an S pole, and the teeth of the front rotor 151a, and the protrusion of the fourth pole 156, which has become an N pole, and the teeth of the rear rotor 151b face each other due to attraction. When current is applied to the reverse A phase, the protrusion of the first pole 153, which has become an N pole, faces the tooth of the rear rotor 151b, and the protrusion of the third pole 155, which has become an S pole, faces the tooth of the front rotor 151a, due to their respective attractive forces. When current is applied to the reverse B phase, the protrusion of the second pole 154, which has become an N pole, faces the tooth of the rear rotor 151b, and the protrusion of the fourth pole 156, which has become an S pole, faces the tooth of the front rotor 151a, due to their respective attractive forces. By exciting in this order, the rotor 151 rotates clockwise in FIG. 78(a).

In this slot machine 10, during the acceleration period from when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating to constant speed rotation, and during the constant speed period for maintaining constant speed rotation, one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are used. A 1-2 phase excitation drive is adopted that alternately performs the following. An excitation order table exists as a table referred to by the main MPU 72 in order to perform 1-2 phase excitation drive during these acceleration periods and constant speed periods. The excitation order table is stored in advance in the main side ROM 73 during the manufacturing stage of the slot machine 10. FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the excitation order table.

As shown in FIG. 79, in the excitation order table, excitation order pointers "0" to "7" are set, and the type of excitation phase is set for each excitation order pointer. The excitation order pointer "0" is set to 1-phase excitation, which energizes the A phase, and the excitation order pointer "1" is set to 2-phase excitation, which energizes both the A and B phases. , the excitation order pointer "2" is set to 1-phase excitation that energizes the B phase, and the excitation order pointer "3" is set to 2-phase excitation that energizes both the B phase and the reverse A phase. The excitation order pointer "4" is set to 1-phase excitation that energizes the reverse A phase, and the excitation order pointer "5" is set to 2-phase excitation that energizes both the reverse A phase and reverse B phase. Excitation is set, and the excitation order pointer "6" is set to 1-phase excitation to energize the reverse B phase, and the excitation order pointer "7" is set to energize both the reverse B phase and A phase. Two-phase excitation is set. If the acceleration period or constant speed period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R continues in a situation where the excitation order pointer is "7", the excitation order pointer to be controlled returns to "0" and the excitation order pointer becomes "0". Drive control will be performed using the excitation order pointer. In addition, in the slot machine 10 of this embodiment, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are configured to rotate once by the excitation signal of 504 pulses, so the angle change based on the excitation signal of one pulse, that is, the angle change per step is approximately It becomes 0.714°.

When using the stepping motor 142 having the above configuration, the period can be roughly divided into an acceleration period and a constant speed period from when the start lever 41 is operated until the stepping motor 142 starts rotating and reaches a constant rotation speed. Further, the constant speed period is divided into a maintenance period in which the rotational speed is maintained until the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated, and a stop period in which the rotation speed is stopped with a predetermined slippage based on the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. It will be done. Regarding the stop period, it is necessary to stop the stepping motor 142 within a maximum of 190 milliseconds after operating the stop buttons 42 to 44.

Figure 80 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the acceleration table 158 in which the excitation pattern is set when starting the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

As the initial excitation phase during acceleration, in addition to one-phase excitation in which only a specific excitation phase is driven, two-phase excitation in which two specific excitation phases are simultaneously driven can be considered. Although it varies depending on the size and inertia of the reels, in a normal slot machine, it is possible to accelerate the reels from an initial speed of zero even with one-phase excitation. However, since the rotational torque of two-phase excitation is larger than that of one-phase excitation, two-phase excitation is preferable for initial excitation in order to obtain a sufficient initial speed.

In the excitation pattern shown in FIG. 80(a), after two-phase excitation is set in synchronization with the interrupt timing every 1.49 milliseconds, this excitation state is maintained for 130 interrupts. After the state of 2-phase excitation is maintained for 130 interrupts of the timer interrupt processing (Fig. 11), 1-2 phase excitation is alternately repeated, but the holding period of phase excitation is as shown in Fig. 80(a). The excitation holding period of one-phase excitation and the excitation holding period of two-phase excitation are finely controlled. Specifically, 1-phase excitation following 2-phase excitation, which is initial excitation, is performed for 8 interrupts of timer interrupt processing (Figure 11), and the next 2-phase excitation is performed for 7 interrupts of timer interrupt processing (Figure 11). The retention period is set to gradually become shorter. Finally, 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation are repeated alternately at intervals of 2 interrupts in the timer interrupt process (Figure 11), and finally 1-phase excitation occurs in the 2-interrupt interval in the timer interrupt process (Figure 11). It is set to take place across the board. As described above, since the last part of the acceleration table 158 is one-phase excitation, the first type of phase excitation in the constant speed rotation period is two-phase excitation. By sequentially shortening the holding period in each phase excitation as it approaches constant speed rotation, high-speed acceleration processing can be achieved in a short time, and a smooth transition to constant speed rotation can be achieved. During constant speed rotation, one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternately repeated at intervals of one interrupt of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

Four-phase excitation is used to stop the stepping motor 142. In four-phase excitation, all of the A phase, reverse A phase, B phase, and reverse B phase are excited. When two opposing phases are excited, the magnetic fluxes cancel each other out, but while the stepping motor 142 is rotating, a back electromotive force is generated due to the induced voltage, and for example, the torque of the difference between the current flowing in the A phase and the opposite A phase is generated. occurs. In the case of four-phase excitation, the torque is generated between two opposing phases. Therefore, it is possible to generate a braking force even with four-phase excitation. However, the braking force in the case of four-phase excitation is smaller than in the case of one-phase excitation.

A case where the stepping motor 142 is stopped using four-phase excitation will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 80(b). FIG. 80(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stop table 159 in which excitation patterns are set when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped.

When the stepping motor 142 is stopped, four-phase excitation is started by generating a stop command in a situation where one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternately repeated, as shown in FIG. 80(b). . In this case, the timing at which four-phase excitation is started is determined to be the timing after two-phase excitation has been executed for one interrupt. This four-phase excitation continues for 100 interrupts (149 milliseconds). After 4-phase excitation is performed for 100 interrupts, 1-phase excitation is performed for 34 interrupts (50.7 milliseconds), and then the 1-phase excitation is ended. The target phase of this one-phase excitation is one phase corresponding to the position of the target stop angle.

As described above, by using four-phase excitation, which has the weakest braking force, at the start of braking, it is possible to smoothly stop the rotor 151 of the stepping motor 142. However, if four-phase excitation is performed due to weak braking force, the rotor 151 will advance to some extent due to inertia from the timing when four-phase excitation is started. The number of steps advanced by this inertia differs depending on the specifications of the reel unit 31, and although it is possible to grasp the number of steps to some extent at the design stage through experiments using the reel unit 31, it is not constant. Some variation may occur. On the other hand, by performing four-phase excitation for a predetermined period of time and then performing one-phase excitation for a predetermined period of time for one phase corresponding to the target stop angle position, the stop position can be adjusted. It becomes possible to set the position to the designed position.

When determining the rotational position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the number of steps of the stepping motor 142 is used. Specifically, as already explained, in this slot machine 10, 21 symbols are drawn on each belt of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the number of steps required for one rotation is 504 steps. There is. In this case, the number of steps (i.e., The number of steps assigned to each symbol is constant at 24 steps. Therefore, the number of steps from the time when the sensor cut bang 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144 corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, the number of times one pulse of excitation signal is output (that is, the number of times the excitation phase is switched) Based on this, the rotational position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is grasped.

Figure 81 is a flowchart showing the reel control process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

In the reel control process, it is first determined whether a predetermined starting wait period (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R started in the previous game (step S4401). ). If the start wait period has not elapsed, the process waits in step S4401 until the start wait period elapses. If the start wait period has elapsed, the start wait period for the next game is reset (step S4402), and the rotation start flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4403). . As a result, acceleration processing of the stepping motor 142 is started in the stepping motor control processing of step S206 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts rotating.

Thereafter, it is determined whether any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S4404). If none of the stop buttons 42-44 has been operated, the process of step S4404 is repeatedly executed until one of the stop buttons 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, the stop button 42 to 44 that was operated this time among the validity period flags 162a to 162c (see FIG. 82) provided in the main side RAM 74 is set. It is determined whether the corresponding validity period flags 162a to 162c are set to "1" (step S4405). Validity period flags 162a to 162c are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each stop button 42 to 44 (ie, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R). Each valid period flag 162a to 162c is set to "1" when the rotation of the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, the acceleration period is completed, and the rotation becomes constant speed, and the corresponding reel 32L, 32M , 32R is stopped, the flag is cleared to "0". That is, a situation in which the valid period flags 162a to 162c are set to "1" corresponds to a situation in which the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 for the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are enabled.

If the validity period flags 162a to 162c corresponding to the stop buttons 42 to 44 determined to have been operated in step S4404 are not set to "1" (step S4405: NO), the process returns to step S4404. Therefore, even if the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the validity period flags 162a to 162c that are not set to "1" are operated, the operation is treated as invalid. If the validity period flags 162a to 162c corresponding to the stop buttons 42 to 44 determined to be operated in step S4404 are set to "1" (step S4405: YES), the current stop buttons 42 to 44 means that the operation is valid. Therefore, processing is executed to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the stop buttons 42 to 44 operated this time.

Specifically, first, button extinguishing processing is executed (step S4406). A light emitting section (not shown) is provided on the back side of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, respectively. The light emitting section turns on at the timing when the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating at a constant speed and the operation of the corresponding stop button 42 to 44 is enabled, and when the corresponding stop button 42 to 44 is operated. When the control for stopping the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started based on this, the light goes out. In the button extinguishing process, the light emitting parts corresponding to all the stop buttons 42 to 44, including the stop buttons 42 to 44 operated this time, are turned off. When stop control is started for one reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the other reels 32L, 32M, 32R The operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to are disabled. In this case, if the stop control is started for one reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the button extinguishing process (step S4406) is executed and the stop button 42 corresponding to the rotating reel 32L, 32M, 32R is pressed. By turning off all the stop buttons 42 to 44, including the stop buttons 42 to 44, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are disabled. Furthermore, at the timing when the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which the stop command has been generated this time is completed, if there are reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which the stop command has not yet been generated, the stop command is not yet issued. The light emitting portions of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are not generating are turned on.

Thereafter, a stop command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S4407). The stop command command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize which stop button 42 to 44 has been operated to generate a stop command. After that, on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are to be stopped this time, check the symbol number of the reached symbol that reached the base position (specifically, the lower row) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 were operated. (Step S4408). Specifically, the number of pulses of the excitation signal output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor 144 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are currently subject to stop is input (that is, the number of times the excitation phase is switched) Check the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position. After that, based on the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped this time is calculated (step S4409).

In this slot machine 10, as a stopping mode in which each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, there is a stopping mode in which the reached symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. A stopping mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped after sliding for 1 symbol, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding for 2 symbols, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding for 3 symbols, and a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding for 4 symbols. Five patterns of stopping are available, including a stopping mode in which the slide is stopped after sliding. Therefore, in step S4409, a value between "0" and "4" is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74.

Thereafter, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stopped symbol to be actually stopped at the base position is determined (step S4410). Then, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stopped symbol are equal (step S4411), and if they are equal, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R A reel stop process is performed to stop the rotation of the reel (step S4412). The main side RAM 74 is provided with stop instruction flags 163a to 163c in one-to-one correspondence with the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and in the reel stop process, which of these stop instruction flags 163a to 163c is currently to be stopped. The stop instruction flags 163a to 163c corresponding to the present reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to "1". As a result, control is started to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which are currently subject to stop, in a stop control process (FIG. 85) to be described later.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are currently subject to stop have been stopped (step S4413). The main side RAM 74 is provided with stop completion flags 164a to 164c (see FIG. 82) in one-to-one correspondence with the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and in step S4413, the reels 32L, 32M that are to be stopped this time are , 32R is set to "1" in the stop completion flags 164a to 164c. If the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are to be stopped this time have not been completely stopped, the process waits in step S4413. If the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that are to be stopped this time have been stopped (step S4413: YES), it is determined whether all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (step S4414). If all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped, the process returns to step S4404 after performing the second stop information setting process (step S4415).

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), and by using the stop information, , it becomes possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") for the reached symbol that has reached the base position when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to stop. As the stop information, slip number data indicating the correspondence between each symbol and the slip number is stored in advance in the main side ROM 73 in correspondence with each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the sliding number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is derived while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating. .

As the process for setting the above stop information, the stop information first setting process is executed in step S409 of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), and the process is executed in step S4415 of the reel control process (FIG. 81). There is a second stop information setting process. In the stop information first setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the winning combination lottery process. The second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74 in the first stop information setting process or the previous second stop information setting process after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the stop numbers of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. .

If it is determined in step S4414 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a winning determination process is executed in step S4416. In the winning determination process, the type of symbol stopped on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is grasped. Then, based on the contents of the winning data stored in the main side RAM 74, the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on any of the main lines ML on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is won in the winning combination processing. It is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponds to the winning combination, and if the combination of symbols corresponds to the winning combination, winning corresponding processing is executed as a winning of the winning combination has been established.

In the winning response process, if the winning is a small winning, information on the number of gaming media to be awarded is set in the main RAM 74 so that gaming media can be awarded in the media awarding process. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed so that the replay setting process can be executed.

After executing the winning determination process, a winning result command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S4417). The winning result command contains data indicating whether or not a win has been achieved this time, and if a win has been achieved, contains data indicating the type of win.

Next, a configuration for controlling the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will be described. FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area of the main side RAM 74 used to execute rotation control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

As shown in FIG. 82, the main side RAM 74 is provided with acceleration completion flags 161a to 161c. As the acceleration completion flags 161a to 161c, a left acceleration completion flag 161a corresponds to the left reel 32L, a middle acceleration completion flag 161b corresponds to the middle reel 32M, and a right acceleration completion flag 161c corresponds to the right reel 32R. is provided. After the rotation of the left reel 32L has started, when the acceleration period of the left reel 32L is completed and constant speed rotation is started, the left acceleration completion flag 161a is set to "1", and the left reel 32L is When the stop is completed, the left acceleration completion flag 161a is cleared to "0". After the rotation of the middle reel 32M has started, when the acceleration period of the middle reel 32M is completed and constant speed rotation is started, the middle acceleration completion flag 161b is set to "1", and the middle reel 32M is set to "1". When the stop is completed, the intermediate acceleration completion flag 161b is cleared to "0". After the rotation of the right reel 32R has started, when the acceleration period of the right reel 32R is completed and constant speed rotation is started, the right acceleration completion flag 161c is set to "1", and the right reel 32R is set to "1". When stopping is completed, the right acceleration completion flag 161c is cleared to "0".

The main side RAM 74 is provided with valid period flags 162a to 162c. As the validity period flags 162a to 162c, a left validity period flag 162a corresponds to the left reel 32L, a middle validity period flag 162b corresponds to the middle reel 32M, and a right validity period flag 162c corresponds to the right reel 32R. is provided. If the sensor cut bang 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144 corresponding to the left reel 32L after the left reel 32L has started rotating at a constant speed, the left valid period flag 162a is set to "1", and the left reel 32L is set to "1". When the stop of the reel 32L is completed, the left valid period flag 162a is cleared to "0". When the sensor cut bang 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144 corresponding to the middle reel 32M after the constant speed rotation of the middle reel 32M has started, "1" is set to the middle use validity period flag 162b, When the stoppage of the middle reel 32M is completed, the middle use validity period flag 162b is cleared to "0". If the sensor cut bang 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144 corresponding to the right reel 32R after the right reel 32R has started rotating at a constant speed, the right valid period flag 162c is set to "1", When the stop of the right reel 32R is completed, the right valid period flag 162c is cleared to "0".

The main side RAM 74 is provided with stop instruction flags 163a to 163c. As the stop instruction flags 163a to 163c, a left stop instruction flag 163a corresponds to the left reel 32L, a middle stop instruction flag 163b corresponds to the middle reel 32M, and a right stop instruction flag 163c corresponds to the right reel 32R. and is provided. When the reel stop process (step S4412) of the reel control process (FIG. 81) is executed based on the operation of the left stop button 42 in a situation where the left-hand valid period flag 162a is set to "1", the left-hand stop is performed. The instruction flag 163a is set to "1", and when the left reel 32L stops, the left stop instruction flag 163a is cleared to "0". When the reel stop process (step S4412) of the reel control process (FIG. 81) is executed based on the operation of the medium stop button 43 in a situation where the medium validity period flag 162b is set to "1", the medium The middle use stop instruction flag 163b is set to "1", and when the middle reel 32M is completely stopped, the middle use stop instruction flag 163b is cleared to "0". When the reel stop process (step S4412) of the reel control process (FIG. 81) is executed based on the right stop button 44 being operated in a situation where the right valid period flag 162c is set to "1", the right valid period flag 162c is set to "1". The right stop instruction flag 163c is set to "1", and when the right reel 32R has stopped, the right stop instruction flag 163c is cleared to "0".

The main side RAM 74 is provided with stop completion flags 164a to 164c. As the stop completion flags 164a to 164c, a left stop completion flag 164a corresponds to the left reel 32L, a middle stop completion flag 164b corresponds to the middle reel 32M, and a right stop completion flag 164c corresponds to the right reel 32R. is provided. When the stop of the left reel 32L is completed, the left stop completion flag 164a is set to "1", the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, and an affirmative determination is made in step S4414 of the reel control process (FIG. 81). When this is done, the left-hand stop completion flag 164a is cleared to "0". When the stop of the middle reel 32M is completed, the middle use stop completion flag 164b is set to "1", the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, and the result is affirmed in step S4414 of the reel control process (FIG. 81). When the determination is made, the intermediate use stop completion flag 164b is cleared to "0". When the stop of the right reel 32R is completed, the right stop completion flag 164c is set to "1", the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, and the result is affirmed in step S4414 of the reel control process (FIG. 81). When the determination is made, the right stop completion flag 164c is cleared to "0".

The main side RAM 74 is provided with acceleration counters 165a to 165c. As the acceleration counters 165a to 165c, a left acceleration counter 165a corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle acceleration counter 165b corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right acceleration counter 165c corresponding to the right reel 32R are provided. ing. Each of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c indicates whether or not acceleration control using the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)) is being executed for the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and whether the acceleration control is being executed. This is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify which acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 corresponds to the acceleration control being executed.

When acceleration control of the left reel 32L is newly started, the left acceleration counter 165a is set to "24", and the value of the left acceleration counter 165a is decremented by one each time the acceleration order data to be referenced for acceleration control of the left reel 32L is changed in the acceleration table 158. If the value of the left acceleration counter 165a becomes "0" after the decrement, it is determined that the acceleration of the left reel 32L is completed. When acceleration control of the center reel 32M is newly started, the center acceleration counter 165b is set to "24", and the value of the center acceleration counter 165b is decremented by one each time the acceleration order data to be referenced for acceleration control of the center reel 32M is changed in the acceleration table 158. If the value of the center acceleration counter 165b becomes "0" after the decrement, it is determined that the acceleration of the center reel 32M is completed. When acceleration control of the right reel 32R is newly started, the right acceleration counter 165c is set to "24", and the value of the right acceleration counter 165c is decremented by 1 each time the acceleration order data to be referenced for acceleration control of the right reel 32R is changed in the acceleration table 158. If the value of the right acceleration counter 165c becomes "0" after the decrement, it is determined that the acceleration of the right reel 32R has been completed.

The main RAM 74 is provided with excitation counters 166a to 166c. As the excitation counters 166a to 166c, a left excitation counter 166a corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle excitation counter 166b corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right excitation counter 166c corresponding to the right reel 32R are provided. ing. Each of the excitation counters 166a to 166c is subject to current acceleration control when the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are subjected to acceleration control using the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)). This counter is used by the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining excitation period in the current acceleration order.

When excitation of a predetermined acceleration sequence is started in the acceleration control of the left reel 32L, the data of the switching interval set in the acceleration table 158 (Fig. 80 (a)) corresponding to the predetermined acceleration sequence is set in the left excitation counter 166a. The value set in the left excitation counter 166a is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Fig. 11) is executed, and if the value of the left excitation counter 166a after the decrement is "0", the value of the left acceleration counter 165a is decremented by 1, and if the value of the left acceleration counter 165a after the decrement is 1 or more, the data of the switching interval set in the acceleration table 158 (Fig. 80 (a)) corresponding to the acceleration sequence corresponding to the value of the left acceleration counter 165a is set in the left excitation counter 166a. When excitation of a predetermined acceleration sequence is started in the acceleration control of the center reel 32M, the data of the switching interval set in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)) corresponding to the predetermined acceleration sequence is set in the center excitation counter 166b. The value set in the center excitation counter 166b is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed, and if the value of the center excitation counter 166b after the subtraction becomes "0", the value of the center acceleration counter 165b is subtracted by 1, and if the value of the center acceleration counter 165b after the subtraction is 1 or more, the data of the switching interval set in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)) corresponding to the acceleration sequence corresponding to the value of the center acceleration counter 165b is set in the center excitation counter 166b. When the right reel 32R starts to be excited in a predetermined acceleration order in the acceleration control, the data of the switching interval set in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)) corresponding to the predetermined acceleration order is set in the right excitation counter 166c. The value set in the right excitation counter 166c is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed, and if the value of the right excitation counter 166c after the subtraction becomes "0", the value of the right acceleration counter 165c is subtracted by 1, and if the value of the right acceleration counter 165c after the subtraction is 1 or more, the data of the switching interval set in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)) corresponding to the acceleration order corresponding to the value of the right acceleration counter 165c is set in the right excitation counter 166c.

The main side RAM 74 is provided with stop position areas 167a to 167c. The stop position areas 167a to 167c include a left stop position area 167a corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle stop position area 167b corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right stop position area 167c corresponding to the right reel 32R. is provided. Each of the stop position areas 167a to 167c is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the stop position of the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop of the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R is completed. When the rotating left reel 32L stops, data corresponding to the stop position of the left reel 32L is stored in the left stop position area 167a. When the rotating middle reel 32M stops, data corresponding to the stop position of the middle reel 32M is stored in the middle stop position area 167b. When the rotating right reel 32R stops, data corresponding to the stop position of the right reel 32R is stored in the right stop position area 167c.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the stepping motor control process executed in step S206 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

First, it is determined whether the spinning flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4501). The spinning flag is set to "1" when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to spin, and is cleared to "0" when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If the spinning flag is not set to "1" (step S4501: NO), it is determined whether the spin start flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4502). As already explained, if it is determined in the reel control process (Figure 81) that the start wait period has elapsed (step S4401: YES), the spin start flag is set to "1" in step S4403.

If the rotation start flag is set to "1" (step S4502: YES), the acceleration table 158 shown in FIG. 80(a) is read from the main side ROM 73 to the main side RAM 74 (step S4503). Then, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed (step S4504). In the rotation start process, two-phase excitation is started for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R according to the data set in the initial acceleration order of the acceleration table 158. Thereafter, the rotating flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4505). Further, the left acceleration counter 165a is set to "24" corresponding to the initial value at the start of acceleration (step S4506), and the left excitation counter 166a is set to correspond to the first acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)). "130" which is the data of the switching interval to be performed is set (step S4507). In addition, "24" corresponding to the initial value at the start of acceleration is set in the intermediate acceleration counter 165b (step S4508), and the initial acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)) is set in the intermediate excitation counter 166b. The switching interval data corresponding to "130" is set (step S4509). Further, the right acceleration counter 165c is set to "24" corresponding to the initial value at the start of acceleration (step S4510), and the right excitation counter 166c is set to the first acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)). The switching interval data corresponding to "130" is set (step S4511). Furthermore, the rotation start flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S4512).

If the spinning flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4501: YES), the target reel counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4513). The target reel counter is a counter that the main MPU 72 uses to identify the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are the targets of steps S4514 to S4525. If the target reel counter value is "1", the left reel 32L is the target of steps S4514 to S4525, if the target reel counter value is "2", the center reel 32M is the target of steps S4514 to S4525, and if the target reel counter value is "3", the right reel 32R is the target of steps S4514 to S4525.

After that, it is determined whether the stop completion flags 164a to 164c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter are set to "1" (step S4514). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4514, this means that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter have already been stopped, so the processes of steps S4515 to S4525 are executed. The process proceeds to step S4526 without any exception.

If a negative determination is made in step S4514, if the stop instruction flags 163a to 163c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are set to "1" (step S4515: YES) ), executes the stop control process (step S4516), and sets the valid period flags of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that correspond to the current target reel counter value even though the stop instruction flags 163a to 163c are not set to "1". If "1" is set in 162a to 162c (step S4517: YES), constant speed control processing is executed (step S4518). These constant speed control processes and stop control processes will be explained later.

If the valid period flags 162a to 162c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are not set to "1" (step S4517: NO), the valid period flags 162a to 162c corresponding to the current target reel counter value are not set to "1". It is determined whether the acceleration completion flags 161a to 161c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to "1" (step S4519). If a negative determination is made in step S4519, acceleration control processing is executed (step S4520).

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing acceleration control processing.

First, the values of the excitation counters 166a to 166c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter are subtracted by 1 (step S4601). If the value of the excitation counters 166a to 166c after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S4602: YES), the acceleration counters 165a to 165c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value The value of is subtracted by 1 (step S4603). Thereafter, it is determined whether the values of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c after being subtracted by 1 are "0" (step S4604).

If a negative determination is made in step S4604, excitation switching processing is executed (step S4605). In the excitation switching process, the excitation of the stepping motors 142 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter is switched in accordance with the order set in the excitation order table shown in FIG. 79. In this case, if the current state is one-phase excitation, it is switched to two-phase excitation, and if the current state is two-phase excitation, it is switched to one-phase excitation. Thereafter, setting processing for the corresponding excitation counters 166a to 166c is executed (step S4606). Specifically, the switching interval data corresponding to the values of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c that are currently being controlled is read from the acceleration table (FIG. 80(a)), and the read switching interval data is used as the current control target. is set in the excitation counters 166a to 166c that are controlled by the controller. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4604, the acceleration completion flags 161a to 161c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are set to "1" (step S4607).

Returning to the explanation of the stepping motor control process (FIG. 83), if the corresponding acceleration completion flags 161a to 161c are set to "1" (step S4519: YES), the constant speed control process is executed (step S4521). . In the constant speed control process, a one-pulse excitation signal is output to switch the excitation phase so that one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternately repeated at intervals of one interrupt of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). After that, it is determined whether the sensor cut bang 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value (step S4522). When the sensor cut ban 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144 (step S4522: YES), "1" is set to the valid period flags 162a to 162c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value. (Step S4523). As a result, the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter are enabled.

Here, the timing at which the sensor cut bang 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144 after the constant speed rotation has started is such that the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is simultaneously started, and the same acceleration table 158 is Even if acceleration control is performed using this, it will differ depending on the previous stop position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. On the other hand, the process of steps S4522 and S4523, that is, the process of setting the validity period flags 162a to 162c to "1" when the sensor cut bang 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144, is for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R separately. Therefore, the timing at which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated differs for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated simultaneously for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, it is possible to start the stopping operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R earlier.

After that, it is determined whether the stop buttons 42 to 44 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter are already lit (step S4524). Since the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are in the off state, basically the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 are in an off state. Therefore, basically, a negative determination is made in step S4524, and the button lighting process is executed (step S4525). In the button lighting process, the stop buttons 42 to 44 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are switched from an unlit state to a lit state. As a result, the stop buttons 42 to 44 whose operation is enabled are switched from the unlit state to the lit state in order, making it easier for the player to recognize the stop buttons 42 to 44 whose operation is enabled.

On the other hand, if the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not performed normally due to step-out or the like, the step-out handling process (step S4528), which will be described later, is executed to detect the abnormal rotation of the reel 32L. , 32M, and 32R are re-accelerated. In this case, the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will not respond until the acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed and constant speed rotation is started, and the sensor cut bang 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144 corresponding to the reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. The operations of stop buttons 42 to 44 are not enabled. On the other hand, in the step-out handling process (step S4528), which will be described later, the process for turning off the stop buttons 42 to 44 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are subject to reacceleration is not executed. Therefore, in a situation where the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has already been enabled and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are in a light emitting state, re-acceleration is performed due to abnormal rotation occurring in the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In this case, the lighting state of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is maintained even before the operation is activated. Therefore, when the process of step S4523 is executed based on such re-acceleration, since the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 are already in the lit state, an affirmative determination is made in step S4524 and the process is executed in step S4525. processing is not executed.

If the valid period flags 162a to 162c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are set to "1" (step S4517: YES), constant speed control processing is executed (step S4518). In the constant speed control process, like the constant speed control process in step S4521, one pulse is generated so that one phase excitation and two phase excitation are alternately repeated at intervals of one interrupt in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). The excitation signal is output to switch the excitation phase. As a result, constant speed rotation of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is maintained while the operations of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 are enabled. In this situation, if the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are operated, the reel stop process is executed in step S4412 of the reel control process (FIG. 81), and the corresponding stop button is "1" is set in the instruction flags 163a to 163c.

In the stepping motor control process (FIG. 83), if the stop instruction flags 163a to 163c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are set to "1" (step S4515: YES), A stop control process is executed (step S4516).

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the stop control process.

First, it is determined whether "1" is set in the stop control flag provided in the main side RAM 74 in association with the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value (step S4701). . The stop control flag is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and allows the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not stop control has been started for the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. used to do. If the corresponding stop control flag is not set to "1" (step S4701: NO), the stop table 159 shown in FIG. 80(b) is read from the main side ROM 73 to the main side RAM 74 (step S4702). This read stop table 159 is used to stop the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value, and when starting stop control for other reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop table 159 is newly read out from the main side ROM 73 to the main side RAM 74. Thereafter, "1" is set to the stop control flag of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter (step S4703).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4701, or if the process in step S4703 is executed, a stop control execution process is executed (step S4704). In the stop control execution process, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are stopped according to the stop table 159 shown in FIG. 80(b).

Then, it is determined whether the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value has been stopped (step S4705). Specifically, it is determined whether the last excitation order, 1-phase excitation, has been maintained over 34 interrupts in the stop table 159 read out corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. If the stopping has been completed (step S4705: YES), various flag clearing processes are executed (step S4706). In the various flag clearing processes, the acceleration completion flags 161a to 161c, valid period flags 162a to 162c, stop instruction flags 163a to 163c, and stop control in progress flags of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are cleared to "0". Then, the stop completion flags 164a to 164c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are set to "1" (step S4707). As a result, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in question become the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be controlled in the stepping motor control process (Figure 83), a positive determination is made in step S4514, and the processes in steps S4515 to S4525 are not executed.

Then, data corresponding to the stop positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stored in the stop position areas 167a to 167c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that correspond to the current target reel counter value (step S4708). Specifically, data on the number of steps of the stepping motor 142 since the sensor cut band 145 was last detected by the reel index sensor 144 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stored in the stop position areas 167a to 167c. Note that in the winning determination process (step S4416) of the reel control process (FIG. 81), the combination of symbols that stopped on the main line ML in the current game is determined based on the data stored in the stop position areas 167a to 167c.

Thereafter, by determining whether all of the stop completion flags 164a to 164c are set to "1", it is determined whether the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has stopped (step S4709). . If a negative determination is made in step S4709, the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R whose valid period flags 162a to 162c are set to "1" are switched from the unlit state to the lit state ( Step S4710). As already explained, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are turned on at the timing when the operation is enabled, but when the stop control for one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, the reel control process (FIG. 81) By executing the button light-off process in step S4406, even the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are turned off. On the other hand, by executing the button lighting process in step S4710, the rotation of one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is completed and the stop operation of the remaining reels 32L, 32M, 32R is enabled. In this case, the stop buttons 42 to 44 whose stop operation is enabled can be turned on correspondingly. On the other hand, if the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has stopped (step S4709: YES), the rotating flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S4711).

Returning to the description of the stepping motor control process (FIG. 83), if an affirmative determination is made in step S4514, if the process of step S4516 is executed, if the process of step S4518 is executed, if the process of step S4520 is executed, If a negative determination is made in step S4522, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4524, or if the process of step S4525 is executed, the value of the target reel counter in the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S4526). If the value of the target reel counter after adding 1 is 3 or less (step S4527: NO), the process returns to step S4514. As a result, the processes of steps S4514 to S4525 are executed for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R whose rotational control is to be executed in the next order. If the value of the target reel counter after adding 1 is "4" (step S4527: YES), step-out handling processing is executed in step S4528, and then the present stepping motor control processing is ended.

In the step-out response process, the number of steps measured since the sensor cut bang 145 was last detected by the reel index sensor 144 for each rotating reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is set as a larger number than the number of steps for one revolution. It is determined whether the number of steps is greater than or equal to the reference step number. If the number of steps is equal to or greater than the standard number of steps, there is a high possibility that a rotational abnormality such as step-out has occurred on the reel 32L, 32M, 32R, so the acceleration completion flag corresponding to the reel 32L, 32M, 32R is set. 161a to 161c, valid period flags 162a to 162c, stop instruction flags 163a to 163c, and stop control flags are cleared to "0", and processes corresponding to the relevant reels 32L, 32M, and 32R among steps S4503 to S4511 are executed. to start accelerating again. In this case, re-acceleration processing is not executed for reels 32L, 32M, and 32R other than the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which abnormal rotation has been identified. Furthermore, in the step-out handling process, the process to turn off the lights of the stop buttons 42 to 44, including the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are the targets of the re-acceleration process, is not executed. Therefore, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the stop buttons 42 to 44 that are in the lit state become targets for re-acceleration, the lighted states of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are maintained.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the main processing is executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started, similarly to the first embodiment.

In the main processing, initialization processing is first performed (step S4801). In the initialization process, interrupts by timer interrupt processing are permitted, and various initial settings are made for the register group, I/O device, etc. in the main MPU 72. Thereafter, it is determined whether the power is turned on with the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on (step S4802). If the power is turned on with the ON operation performed using the setting key (step S4802: YES), if the reset button 56 is not pressed when the power is turned on (step S4803: NO), After executing the partial clearing process (step S4804), the setting value updating process is executed (step S4806). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is pressed when the power is turned on (step S4803: YES), after performing all clear processing (step S4805), setting value updating processing is performed (step S4806). The contents of the partial clear process (step S4804), all clear process (step S4805), and setting value update process (step S4806) are the same as those in the first embodiment. Thereafter, after executing the setting value update process, the process shifts to normal processing (FIG. 12) (step S4807).

If the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S4802: NO), the power recovery process from step S4808 onwards is executed. The power restoration process is a process for restoring the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power was shut off. In the power restoration process, it is determined whether the setting values of the slot machine 10 are normal by checking the main side RAM 74 (step S4808). Specifically, the setting value is determined to be normal if it is any one of "1" to "6", and it is determined to be abnormal if it is equal to or greater than "0" or "7". If the set value is normal, it is determined whether the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S4809). A power outage flag is provided in the main side RAM 74, and when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped and a predetermined power outage process is normally executed, the power outage flag is set to "1". is set. If the power outage flag is set to "1", it is checked whether the RAM determination value is normal (step S4810). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked to see if the value is normal.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps S4808 to S4810, operation prohibition processing is executed. In the operation prohibition process, the execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S4811), and by clearing all output ports of the main MPU 72 to "0", all actuators connected to the relevant output ports are disabled. is turned off (step S4812), and an error notification process is executed to notify the hall manager, etc. of the occurrence of an error (step S4813). And it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing a partial clear process (step S4804) or a complete clear process (step S4805).

If a positive determination is made in all of steps S4808 to S4810, it means that the power outage processing at the previous power outage was executed normally. In this case, by writing the value of the stack pointer saved in the main side RAM 74 to the stack pointer of the main side MPU 72 and restoring the data saved in the main side RAM 74 to the register of the main side MPU 72, the register of the main side MPU 72 can be changed. The state is restored to the state before the power was cut off (step S4814). Furthermore, the power failure flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S4815). Thereafter, after transmitting a power restoration command for recognizing the execution of the power restoration process to the production side MPU 92 (step S4816), the restoration process is executed (step S4817).

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the return process.

First, it is determined whether the rotating flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4901). The rotating flag is set to "1" when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating, and is cleared to "0" when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. In other words, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not the situation is such that the supply of operating power is started after the supply of operating power was stopped while at least one reel 32L, 32M, 32R was rotating, and the recovery process was executed. Determine whether If the rotating flag is not set to "1" (step S4901: NO), the process returns to the address processing before the power was shut off.

When the rotating flag is set to "1" (step S4901: YES), by determining whether the left stop completion flag 164a of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", the left reel 32L It is determined whether the supply of operating power has been stopped in a situation where the stopping has not been completed (step S4903). If the left stop completion flag 164a is not set to "1" (step S4903: NO), it means that the supply of operating power has been stopped in a situation where the left reel 32L has not completely stopped. In this case, a process for newly starting rotation of the left reel 32L is executed.

Specifically, first, clearing processing of the left flag is executed (step S4904). In the left flag clearing process, each of the left acceleration completion flag 161a, left valid period flag 162a, and left stop instruction flag 163a is cleared to "0". Thereafter, the left acceleration counter 165a is set to "24" corresponding to the initial value at the start of acceleration (step S4905), and the left excitation counter 166a is set to correspond to the first acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)). "130" which is the data of the switching interval to be performed is set (step S4906).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4903 or if the process of step S4906 is executed, by determining whether or not the medium stop completion flag 164b of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power has been stopped in a situation where the stopping of the operating power has not been completed (step S4907). If the medium stop completion flag 164b is not set to "1" (step S4907: NO), it means that the supply of operating power has been stopped in a situation where the medium reel 32M has not completely stopped. In this case, a process for newly starting the rotation of the middle reel 32M is executed.

Specifically, first, clearing processing of the intermediate use flag is executed (step S4908). In the intermediate use flag clearing process, each of the intermediate use acceleration completion flag 161b, the intermediate use effective period flag 162b, and the intermediate use stop instruction flag 163b is cleared to "0". Thereafter, "24" corresponding to the initial value at the start of acceleration is set in the intermediate acceleration counter 165b (step S4909), and the initial acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)) is set in the intermediate excitation counter 166b. "130" which is the data of the switching interval corresponding to is set (step S4910).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4907, or when the process in step S4910 is executed, the right reel 32R is It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power has been stopped in a situation where the stopping of the operating power has not been completed (step S4911). If the right stop completion flag 164c is not set to "1" (step S4911: NO), it means that the supply of operating power has been stopped in a situation where the right reel 32R has not completely stopped. In this case, a process for newly starting the rotation of the right reel 32R is executed.

Specifically, first, clearing processing of the right flag is executed (step S4912). In the right flag clearing process, the right acceleration completion flag 161c, the right valid period flag 162c, and the right stop instruction flag 163c are each cleared to "0". Thereafter, the right acceleration counter 165c is set to "24" corresponding to the initial value at the start of acceleration (step S4913), and the right excitation counter 166c is set to the first acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)). "130", which is the switching interval data corresponding to , is set (step S4914).

If a positive determination is made in step S4911, or if the processing of step S4914 is executed, the process proceeds to the address processing at the time of midway stop. Specifically, the processing of step S4404 in the reel control processing (FIG. 81) is executed. Also, if the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is interrupted and started in a situation where the reel control processing (FIG. 81) is being executed, the processing in a situation where the rotating flag is set to "1" in the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 83), that is, the processing of steps S4513 to S4528, is executed. In this case, since the processing for starting a new rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that have not yet stopped when the supply of operating power is stopped is executed in steps S4903 to S4914, a new acceleration control is started, and when the acceleration is completed, a constant speed control is started, and when the sensor cut band 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144 in a situation where the constant speed control is being executed, the stop operation is enabled.

With the above configuration, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped in a certain situation before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is When the rotation is restarted, the acceleration control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R whose rotations have not yet been stopped is newly started. As a result, when the supply of operating power is resumed, there is no need to wait until abnormal rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is detected in step S4528 in the stepping motor control process (FIG. 83). It becomes possible to start new acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which had not yet stopped their rotation, and after the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R It becomes possible to complete acceleration control and start constant speed control early.

The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which have completely stopped rotating when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped, do not resume rotation when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed. As a result, while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that have already stopped are prevented from rotating again, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32M that have not yet been stopped are prevented from rotating again when the supply of operating power is stopped. It is possible to quickly achieve constant speed rotation only for 32R.

In the main process (FIG. 86), for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R whose rotation had not been completely stopped when the supply of operating power was stopped last time, information is set to newly start acceleration control regardless of their rotation status. I do. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while reducing the processing load at the time of starting the supply of operating power.

Note that, for reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that have not yet stopped spinning when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped, the acceleration control is newly started when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed, but this is not limited to this. For example, when a stop command is generated and the number of slips is calculated (step S4409) in the reel control process (FIG. 81), and the stop symbol is determined (step S4410), the stop completion flags 164a to 164c corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be set to "1". In this case, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped, the acceleration control is newly started for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which the determination of the stop pattern has not been completed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed, and for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which the determination of the stop pattern has been completed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped, the acceleration control is not newly started for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which the determination of the stop pattern has been completed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped, even if the stop has not been completed at that time. Incidentally, in this configuration, the winning determination is made using the information on the stop pattern determined in step S4410, rather than the position of each pattern when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are actually stopped.

Also, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped, some reels 32L, 32M, 32R have been stopped but other reels 32L, 32M, 32R have not been stopped. In the above, the acceleration control is newly started when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed for only the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that have not been stopped completely, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped and the stopping of even one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not completed, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped. A configuration may also be adopted in which acceleration control is newly started for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when restarted.

<Eleventh embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the tenth embodiment in the manner in which the control processing of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed. This different configuration will be explained below. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the tenth embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 88 is a flowchart showing the reel control process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

If the start wait period has elapsed (step S5001: YES), the start wait period for the next game is reset (step S5002). Thereafter, on the condition that the current game is the start game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S5003: YES), the left pseudo bonus start flag, the middle pseudo bonus start flag, and the right pseudo bonus provided in the main RAM 74 are Each of the start flags is set to "1" (step S5004). The left pseudo bonus start flag is provided to correspond to the left reel 32L, the middle pseudo bonus start flag is provided to correspond to the middle reel 32M, and the right pseudo bonus start flag is provided to correspond to the right reel 32R. It is provided. Each pseudo-bonus start flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that, in the start game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a reel effect corresponding to the start game should be executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S5003 or if the process in step S5004 is executed, the rotation start flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S5005). As a result, acceleration processing of the stepping motor 142 is started in the stepping motor control processing of step S206 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts rotating. In steps S5006 to S5019, the same processes as steps S4404 to S4417 of the reel control process (FIG. 81) in the tenth embodiment are executed.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing acceleration control processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the acceleration control process is executed in step S4520 in the stepping motor control process (FIG. 83), similarly to the tenth embodiment.

First, it is determined whether the pseudo stop control flags of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter are set to "1" (step S5101). The pseudo stop control flags are provided in the main side RAM 74, and a left pseudo stop control flag is provided corresponding to the left reel 32L, and a middle pseudo stop control flag is provided corresponding to the middle reel 32M. , a right pseudo stop control flag is provided corresponding to the right reel 32R. In the starting game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, after the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is started and acceleration is completed, each reel 32L, 32L, 32M, and 32R are moved in a state where a combination of pseudo-stop symbols exists on the main line ML. A pseudo-stop occurs in which small vertical movements of 32M and 32R are performed. Each pseudo-stop control flag specifies in the main MPU 72 that the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R is placed in a pseudo-stop position after the acceleration of the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R is completed. This is a flag for

If a negative determination is made in step S5101, the values of the excitation counters 166a to 166c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are subtracted by 1 (step S5106). If the value of the excitation counters 166a to 166c after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S5107: YES), the acceleration counters 165a to 165c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value The value of is subtracted by 1 (step S5108). Thereafter, it is determined whether the values of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c after being subtracted by 1 are "0" (step S5109).

If a negative determination is made in step S5109, excitation switching processing is executed (step S5110). Here, in the starting game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, as a reel effect corresponding to the starting game, the combination of pseudo-stopping symbols exists on the main line ML, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is moved up and down in small increments. A pseudo-stop occurs in which a movement occurs. In the starting game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R first start rotating and after the acceleration is completed, the stopping table 159 is used so that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R remain at the pseudo-stop rotational position. However, when the stop table 159 is used, the acceleration counters 165a to 165c and the excitation counter 166a are ~166c is used. Furthermore, in a situation where a pseudo-stop is being performed, the pseudo-stop table 171 (see FIG. 91) provided in the main side ROM 73 is used; however, when using the pseudo-stop table 171, As in the case where acceleration control is performed using the acceleration table 158, acceleration counters 165a to 165c and excitation counters 166a to 166c are used.

In the excitation switching process of step S5110, the process contents differ depending on whether the table to be used is the acceleration table 158, the stop table 159, or the pseudo-stopped table 171. If it is a game other than the start game of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the stop table 159 and the pseudo-stopped table 171 are not the table to be used, and the acceleration table 158 is the table to be used. On the other hand, if it is the start game of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the acceleration table 158 is the table to be used from the first start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R until the acceleration is completed and until the acceleration is completed again after the pseudo stop is completed, and when the stop control is performed to keep the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the pseudo-stopped rotation position after the first acceleration is completed, the stop table 159 is the table to be used, and in a situation where a pseudo stop is being performed, the pseudo-stopped table 171 is the table to be used. First, we will explain the case where the acceleration table 158 is to be used, and later we will explain the case where the stop table 159 or the pseudo-stopped table 171 is to be used.

In the excitation switching process when the acceleration table 158 is used, the excitation for the stepping motor 142 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter is changed to the excitation order table shown in FIG. Switch according to the set order. In this case, if the current state is one-phase excitation, it is switched to two-phase excitation, and if the current state is two-phase excitation, it is switched to one-phase excitation. Thereafter, setting processing for the corresponding excitation counters 166a to 166c is executed (step S5111). Specifically, the switching interval data corresponding to the values of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c that are currently being controlled is read from the acceleration table (FIG. 80(a)), and the read switching interval data is used as the current control target. is set in the excitation counters 166a to 166c that are controlled by the controller.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5109, it is determined whether the pseudo bonus start flags of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are set to "1" (step S5112). If the game is different from the starting game of the pseudo bonus state ST4, a negative determination is made in step S5112. Further, even if it is the starting game of the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the situation is such that acceleration is performed again after the pseudo stop is completed, a negative determination is made in step S5112. If a negative determination is made in step S5112, the acceleration completion flags 161a to 161c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter are set to "1" (step S5113).

Since the pseudo bonus start flag is set to "1" before the acceleration period after the pseudo stop starts in the starting game of the pseudo bonus state ST4, an affirmative determination is made in step S5112. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5112, it is determined whether the initial acceleration completion flags of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter are set to "1" (step S5114). The initial acceleration completion flag is provided in the main side RAM 74, and a left initial acceleration completion flag is provided corresponding to the left reel 32L, and a middle initial acceleration completion flag is provided corresponding to the middle reel 32M. , a right initial acceleration completion flag is provided corresponding to the right reel 32R.

If the initial acceleration completion flag of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value is not set to "1" (step S5114: NO), "1" is set to the corresponding initial acceleration completion flag. Set (step S5115). Thereafter, the pseudo stop control flags of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter are set to "1" (step S5116).

If the corresponding pseudo stop control flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S5101 and the process proceeds to step S5102. In step S5102, constant speed control processing is executed (step S5102). In the constant speed control process, similar to steps S4518 and S4521 in the stepping motor control process (FIG. 83), one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternately repeated at intervals of one interrupt in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). The excitation phase is switched by outputting a one-pulse excitation signal so that the After that, the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter become the stop start positions where the positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become pseudo-stop positions after the stop control is performed. It is determined whether or not (step S5103).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, the pseudo stop control flags of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter are cleared to "0" (step S5104). Thereafter, processing is executed to start stop control using the stop table 159 for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value (step S5105).

Specifically, the stop table 159 is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74. In addition, the acceleration counters 165a to 165c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are set to "2", which corresponds to the number of excitation sequences set in the stop table 159, and the excitation counters 166a to 166c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to "100", which is the switching interval data set in the data of the first excitation sequence in the stop table 159. In addition, four-phase excitation is started for the stepping motors 142 of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

The data set in the excitation counters 166a to 166c is decremented by 1 each time the process of step S5106 is executed, and if the value of the excitation counters 166a to 166c after being subtracted by 1 becomes "0" (step S5107: (YES), the values of the corresponding acceleration counters 165a to 165c are subtracted by 1 (step S5108). If the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c after subtraction by 1 is "1" (step S5109: NO), in the excitation switching process (step S5110), the stepping motor 142 of the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R is Start 1-phase excitation. Further, in step S5111, "34", which is data of the switching interval set in the second excitation order of the stop table 159, is set in the excitation counters 166a to 166c of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. On the other hand, if the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S5109: YES), the pseudo bonus start flag and initial Since both acceleration completion flags are set to "1", affirmative determinations are made in steps S5112 and S5114, and the process advances to step S5117.

In step S5117, it is determined whether the pseudo stop completion flags of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter are set to "1". The pseudo stop completion flag is provided in the main side RAM 74, and a left pseudo stop completion flag is provided corresponding to the left reel 32L, and a middle pseudo stop completion flag is provided corresponding to the middle reel 32M. , a right pseudo stop completion flag is provided corresponding to the right reel 32R.

If a negative determination is made in step S5117, the pseudo stop completion flags of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter are set to "1" (step S5118). Thereafter, pseudo-stop start processing is executed (step S5119).

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the pseudo-stop start process.

First, the pseudo stop table 171 stored in the main side ROM 73 in advance is read out to the main side RAM 74 (step S5201). The pseudo-stopping table 171 contains data for performing small vertical movements of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R while a combination of pseudo-stopping symbols exists on the main line ML as a pseudo-stopping. is set.

FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pseudo-stopping table 171.

In the pseudo-stop table 171, A-phase excitation is set as 1-phase excitation as the first excitation order, and the excitation holding period of the A-phase is set as 167 interrupts in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11). ing. The second excitation order is set to non-excitation, in which no excitation is performed, and the non-excitation holding period is equivalent to the 167th interrupt of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 11), similar to the A-phase excitation holding period. It is set. In the third excitation order, B-phase excitation is set as 1-phase excitation, and the B-phase excitation holding period is similar to the A-phase excitation holding period and non-excitation holding period, and the timer interrupt processing (Fig. 11) is set as 167 interrupts. The fourth excitation order is set to non-excitation, in which no excitation is performed, and the non-excitation holding period is the excitation holding period of the A phase, the second non-excitation holding period, and the excitation holding period of the B phase. Similarly, it is set as 167 interrupts of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11). Thereafter, the contents of the first to fourth excitation orders are repeated three times.

That is, during the pseudo-stop, A-phase excitation and B-phase excitation are alternately repeated for the stepping motor 142 with a non-excitation period in between. When A-phase excitation and B-phase excitation are alternately repeated, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R do not rotate in the same direction, but repeatedly move up and down at predetermined rotational positions. 92(a) to 92(c) show that each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is moved up and down in small increments while the pseudo-stop symbol combination is present on the main line ML during the pseudo-stop. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the situation.

As shown in FIG. 92(a), in the starting game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, acceleration is completed, and the stop is stopped using the stop table 159 at a predetermined stop start position. By executing the control, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R remain in a state where a combination of pseudo-stopping symbols exists on the main line ML. As a combination of pseudo-stopping symbols, from the left, the combinations of "White 7" symbol, "White 7" symbol, and "White 7" symbol are used, but the combination of the pseudo-stopping symbols is arbitrary, and the same Other combinations of the same symbols, such as a combination of "Red 7" symbols, may be used, or combinations of different types of symbols may be used.

By executing the control using the pseudo-stopping table 171 in the above state, when a combination of pseudo-stopping symbols exists on the main line ML, these pseudo-stopping symbols are displayed as shown in FIG. 92(b). The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate so that the combination of symbols for use moves slightly downward, and then the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate so that the combination of pseudo-stop symbols moves slightly upward as shown in FIG. 92(c). 32M and 32R rotate, and thereafter the reels 32L, 32M and 32R repeat vertical movement between the rotational position shown in FIG. 92(b) and the rotational position shown in FIG. 92(c). This makes it possible for the player to recognize that an effect is being performed that causes a combination of pseudo-stop symbols to pseudo-stop on the main line ML in a situation where the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not completely stopped. .

In the pseudo-stop, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are moved up and down in small increments, thereby allowing the player to recognize that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not in a stopped state. In particular, excitation of phase B starts before 500 milliseconds have elapsed after excitation of phase A has started, and excitation of phase A has started before 500 milliseconds have elapsed since excitation of phase B has started. In addition, by continuing each of the A-phase excitation and B-phase excitation for 200 milliseconds or more, it becomes possible for the player to recognize the vertical movement of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. , 32M, and 32R are likely to give the impression to the player that they are not actually stopped. However, in the case of such a configuration in which only the A-phase and B-phase excitation is repeatedly continued, there is a risk that the temperature of the stepping motor 142 may rise. On the other hand, non-excitation periods are set between the excitation of the A phase and the excitation of the B phase, and between the excitation of the B phase and the excitation of the A phase. This makes it possible to suppress the temperature rise of the stepping motor 142.

In the pseudo-stop start process (FIG. 90), after reading the pseudo-stop table 171 to the main RAM 74 in step S5201, the acceleration counters of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values are read out. 165a to 165c are set to "16", which is the initial value of the excitation order in the pseudo-stop table 171 (step S5202). After that, "167", which is the switching interval data corresponding to the first excitation order in the pseudo-stop table 171, is set to the excitation counters 166a to 166c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value. (Step S5203).

The data set in the excitation counters 166a to 166c are decremented by 1 each time the process of step S5106 in the acceleration control process (FIG. 89) is executed, and the value of the excitation counters 166a to 166c after being subtracted by 1 is "0". If so (step S5107: YES), the values of the corresponding acceleration counters 165a to 165c are subtracted by 1 (step S5108). If the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c after subtraction by 1 is 1 or more (step S5109: NO), in the excitation switching process (step S5110), the values of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c correspond to the values of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c in the pseudo-stop table 171. The excitation content to be set is set. In other words, when the values of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c correspond to an even number of excitation orders, it is determined that there is no excitation, and the values of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c correspond to "3", "7", "11", and "15". If any of the values is ``5'', ``9'', or ``13'', the excitation of the A phase is started. Thereafter, the switching interval data set for the excitation order corresponding to the values of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c in the pseudo-stopping table 171 is set in the corresponding excitation counters 166a to 166c (step S5111).

On the other hand, if the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S5109: YES), the pseudo bonus start flag of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value, the initial Since the acceleration completion flag and the pseudo-stop completion flag are each set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in each of steps S5112, S5114, and S5117, and the process proceeds to step S5120. In step S5120, clear processing for pseudo-stopping is executed for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value. In the clearing process, each of the pseudo bonus start flag, initial acceleration completion flag, and pseudo stop completion flag of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, as a re-acceleration process, a process for starting re-acceleration after the pseudo-stop is executed (step S5121). Specifically, "24" corresponding to the initial value at the start of acceleration is set in the acceleration counters 165a to 165c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R's excitation counters 166a to 166c are set to "130", which is switching interval data corresponding to the first acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)).

The data set in the excitation counters 166a to 166c is subtracted by 1 each time the process of step S5106 in the acceleration control process (FIG. 89) is executed, and the value of the excitation counters 166a to 166c after subtraction by 1 is "0". If so (step S5107: YES), the values of the corresponding acceleration counters 165a to 165c are subtracted by 1 (step S5108). If the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c after subtraction by 1 is 1 or more (step S5109: NO), the excitation of the stepping motor 142 of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter is performed as shown in FIG. Switching is performed according to the order set in the excitation order table shown. In this case, if the current state is one-phase excitation, it is switched to two-phase excitation, and if the current state is two-phase excitation, it is switched to one-phase excitation. Thereafter, setting processing for the corresponding excitation counters 166a to 166c is executed (step S5111). Specifically, the switching interval data corresponding to the values of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c that are currently being controlled is read from the acceleration table (FIG. 80(a)), and the read switching interval data is used as the current control target. is set in the excitation counters 166a to 166c, which are controlled by.

On the other hand, if the value of the acceleration counter 165a to 165c after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S5109: YES), in step S5112, it is determined whether the pseudo bonus start flag of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value is set to "1". When the second acceleration is completed after the pseudo stop ends, the pseudo bonus start flag is not set to "1", so a negative determination is made in step S5109. In this case, the acceleration completion flag 161a to 161c of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value is set to "1" (step S5113).

FIG. 93 is a time chart showing how a pseudo stop is performed in the starting game of the pseudo bonus state ST4. 93(a) shows a period in which the game is being executed, FIG. 93(b) shows a period in which acceleration control is being executed, FIG. 93(c) shows a period in which stop control is being executed, FIG. 93(d) shows a period during which pseudo-stopping is performed, FIG. 93(e) shows a period during which A-phase excitation is performed, and FIG. 93(f) shows a period during which B-phase excitation is performed. FIG. 93(g) shows a period of non-excitation. Note that the acceleration control, stop control, and pseudo-stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are performed individually, but these controls are executed at the same or approximately the same timing on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In the following description, it will be assumed that each control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed at the same time.

At timing t1, the start game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 is started as shown in FIG. 93(a). At the timing t1, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started and acceleration is performed as shown in FIG. 93(b), and the acceleration is completed at the timing t2. When the acceleration is completed and the rotational position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes the stop start position, stop control using the stop table 159 is started as shown in FIG. 93(c), and at timing t3. The stop control is completed. In this case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R remains at a position where a combination of pseudo-stopping symbols exists on the main line ML.

At timing t3, pseudo-stopping is started on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R as shown in FIG. 93(d). In this case, the A phase is first excited as shown in FIG. 93(e) from timing t3 to timing t4, and then de-energized as shown in FIG. 93(g) from timing t4 to timing t5. period, after which B-phase excitation is performed as shown in FIG. 93(f) from timing t5 to timing t6, and then no excitation occurs as shown in FIG. 93(g) from timing t6 to timing t7. This is the excitation period. Then, control similar to the timing from t3 to t7 is performed from timing t7 to timing t11, from timing t11 to timing t15, and from timing t15 to timing t19. As a result, A-phase excitation and B-phase excitation are alternately repeated with non-excitation periods in between. Further, the excitation period of the A phase, the non-excitation period, and the excitation period of the B phase are all approximately 249 milliseconds, which are the same periods. Further, the total period of the A-phase excitation period and the following non-excitation period is less than 500 milliseconds, and the total period of the B-phase excitation period and the subsequent non-excitation period is less than 500 milliseconds. .

The last non-excitation period occurs from timing t18 to timing t19 as shown in FIG. 93(g), and at timing t19 when the non-excitation period ends, a pseudo stop occurs as shown in FIG. 93(d). finish. Then, at the timing t19, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are accelerated again as shown in FIG. 93(b), and the acceleration period ends at the timing t20. When the sensor cut bang 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144 after the acceleration period ends, the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is enabled.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which excitation of the A phase and excitation of the B phase are alternately repeated during the pseudo stop period, the stepping motor 142 is not excited between the excitation of the A phase and the excitation of the B phase. The excitation period is set. This makes it possible to perform effects using the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R while suppressing the temperature rise of the stepping motor 142.

The non-excitation period is shorter than the period during which phase A is excited and shorter than the period during which phase B is excited. This makes it possible to prevent the period in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped from becoming excessively long during the pseudo-stop period in which an effect using the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed. .

In a pseudo-stop period, in a configuration in which A-phase excitation and B-phase excitation are alternately repeated, not only is a non-excitation period set between A-phase excitation and B-phase excitation, but also a non-excitation period is set between A-phase excitation and B-phase excitation. A non-excitation period is also set between excitation and A-phase excitation. This makes it possible to more reliably suppress the temperature rise of the stepping motor 142.

The non-excitation period that occurs between the excitation of the A phase and the excitation of the B phase and the non-excitation period that occurs between the excitation of the B phase and the excitation of the A phase are the same period. Thereby, there is no need to separately prepare a configuration for controlling the non-excitation period, so it is possible to simplify the configuration for the control.

<Another form of the eleventh embodiment>
・The non-excitation period that exists between the excitation of the A phase and the excitation of the B phase during the pseudo stop period is the same as the non-excitation period that exists between the excitation of the B phase and the excitation of the A phase. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the non-excitation periods may be slightly different but substantially the same, or the non-excitation periods may be significantly different.

- Although the non-excitation period in the pseudo-stop period is the same as the A-phase excitation period, the configuration is not limited to this, and although the non-excitation period and the A-phase excitation period are slightly different, they are substantially the same. It may be a certain configuration, or it may be a configuration in which the non-excitation period and the A-phase excitation period are significantly different. In addition, although the non-excitation period in the pseudo-stop period was configured to be the same as the B-phase excitation period, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the non-excitation period and the B-phase excitation period are slightly different, they are approximately the same. Alternatively, the non-excitation period and the B-phase excitation period may be significantly different from each other.

・Although the configuration is such that the A-phase excitation period and the B-phase excitation period during the pseudo-stop period are the same, the present invention is not limited to this, and the A-phase excitation period and the B-phase excitation period may be slightly different. However, the excitation period of the A phase and the excitation period of the B phase may be significantly different from each other.

- During the pseudo stop period, there is a non-excitation period between the excitation of phase A and the excitation of phase B, and there is a non-excitation period between the excitation of phase B and the excitation of phase A, but it is also possible for one of these non-excitation periods to not exist.

<Twelfth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the manner in which a predetermined lottery process is executed by the main MPU 72. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing advantageous state processing at the start of the game in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the advantageous state processing at the start of the game is executed as a part of the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game (step S410) in the winning combination lottery processing (FIG. 13).

If the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S5301: YES), and the current gaming state is not the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S5302: NO), the main side RAM 74 By determining whether the pseudo bonus state flag is set to "1", it is determined whether the current gaming state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S5303). If the current gaming state is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S5303: NO), it means that the current gaming state is the AT state ST5, so the process for the AT state at the start of the game is executed (step S5304). . The contents of the AT state processing at the start of the game are the same as in the first embodiment.

If the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S5303: YES), a random number for lottery is obtained from a lottery counter that is updated periodically (specifically, every 1.49 milliseconds) in the main side RAM 74. (Step S5305). The lottery counter is configured as a loop counter whose numerical value is sequentially updated in the numerical range of "0" to "255". Note that a configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated circuit for updating random numbers for lottery is provided. Further, the AT migration lottery table 172 stored in advance in the main side ROM 73 is read out to the main side RAM 74 (step S5306).

FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the AT transition lottery table 172. In the AT migration lottery table 172, lottery determination values are set in one-to-one correspondence with addresses that are sequential numbers from "k" to "k+7". The addresses "k", "k+6" and "k+7" are set to "0" as a lottery determination value, and the addresses "k+1" and "k+5" are set to "80" as a lottery determination value. ``70'' is set as the lottery judgment value for the address ``k+2'', ``128'' is set as the lottery judgment value for the address ``k+3'', and ``128'' is set as the lottery judgment value for the address ``k+4''. "110" is set as the determination value.

After reading the AT transition lottery table 172 in step S5306, in steps S5307 and S5308, a process for calculating an offset value used to read the lottery determination value from the AT transition lottery table 172 is executed. . Specifically, first, the value of the AT transition confirmation flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is read into the general-purpose register of the main side MPU 72, and a process of inverting the read value is executed (step S5307). Similar to the first embodiment, the AT transition confirmation flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the conditions for transition to the AT state ST5 have already been met in the pseudo bonus state ST4. Since the AT transition confirmation flag takes a binary value of "0" or "1", "0" or "1" is read into the general-purpose register of the main MPU 72, and processing to invert it is executed. By doing so, when the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", "1" is stored as the inverted value in the general-purpose register, and when the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "1", "0" is stored in the general-purpose register as an inverted value.

After that, the value of the index value IV selected in the lottery process of the current winning combination (Figure 13) is added to the value of the result of multiplying the inverted value calculated in step S5307 by "7", and then from the result The result of subtracting "17", which is the maximum value of the index value IV, is calculated as an offset value (step S5308). In addition, if no index value IV is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), the index value IV is set to "0". Furthermore, if the result of subtracting "17" is less than "0", the offset value is set to "0" by clearing the calculation result to "0".

Specifically, as the offset value, in a situation where the AT transition confirmation flag is set to "1", the inverted value is "0", so the result of multiplying it by "7" is also "0". In this case, the offset value is the result of subtracting "17" from the index value IV selected in the lottery process (Figure 13), but since "17" is the maximum value of the index value IV, the offset value becomes "0" or less than "0", and as a result, the offset value becomes "0". On the other hand, in a situation where the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", the inverted value is "1", so the result of multiplying it by "7" is "7". In this case, the offset value is the result of subtracting "17" from the result of adding the index value IV selected in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13) to "7". Therefore, if you lose in the winning combination lottery process (Figure 13) or if you win at index value IV = "1" to "10", the offset value will be "0", and the winning combination lottery process (Figure 13), if you win with index value IV = "11", the offset value will be "1", and if you win with index value IV = "12" in the lottery process (Figure 13), the offset value will be "1". The offset value will be "2", and if you win the index value IV = "13" in the winning combination lottery process (Figure 13), the offset value will be "3", and the index value will be set as "3" in the winning combination lottery process (Figure 13). If you win the value IV = "14", the offset value will be "4", and if you win the index value IV = "15" in the lottery process (Figure 13), the offset value will be "5". , if the winning combination is won with index value IV=“16” in the winning combination lottery process (Fig. 13), the offset value becomes “6”, and the index value becomes “17” in the winning combination lottery process (Fig. 13). In the case of winning, the offset value will be "7".

Thereafter, the offset value calculated in step S5308 is added to "k" which is the start address of the AT transition lottery table 172 (step S5309). In this case, in a situation where the AT transition confirmation flag is set to "1", the offset value is "0" regardless of which value the index value IV selected in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13) is. Therefore, the address calculated in step S5309 remains "k". In addition, in a situation where the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", if the winning combination is lost in the winning lottery process (Figure 13) or if the winning combination is won with index value IV = "1" to "10". In this case, the offset value is "0", so the address calculated in step S5309 remains "k". In addition, in a situation where the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", if the index value IV = "11" is won in the winning combination lottery process (Figure 13), the offset value will be "1", so step The address calculated in S5309 is "k+1", and if the index value IV = "12" is won, the offset value will be "2", so the address calculated in step S5309 is "k+2". , if the index value IV = "13" is won, the offset value will be "3", so the address calculated in step S5309 will be "k+3", and if the index value IV = "14" is won, the offset value will be "3". Since the offset value is "4", the address calculated in step S5309 is "k+4", and if the index value IV = "15" is won, the offset value is "5", so the address calculated in step S5309 is "k+4". The address calculated in step S5309 is "k+5", and if the index value IV = "16" is won, the offset value is "6", so the address calculated in step S5309 is "k+6", and the address calculated in step S5309 is "k+6", If the value IV=“17” is won, the offset value will be “7” and therefore the address calculated in step S5309 will be “k+7”.

After that, the lottery determination value set in the AT transition lottery table 172 in correspondence with the address calculated in step S5309 is acquired (step S5310), and the lottery determination value is set for the random number for lottery acquired in step S5305. The result of adding is stored as a lottery target value (step S5311). Then, it is determined whether the lottery target value exceeds "255", which is the maximum value of random numbers for lottery (step S5312). If the lottery target value exceeds "255", it means that you have won in the current AT migration lottery process.

As already explained, "0" is set as the lottery determination value for the addresses "k", "k+6", and "k+7" in the AT transition lottery table 172, and "0" is set as the lottery determination value for the addresses "k+1" and "k+5". "80" is set as the judgment value, "70" is set as the lottery judgment value for the address "k+2", and "128" is set as the lottery judgment value for the address "k+3". In addition, "110" is set as the lottery determination value for the address "k+4". When the lottery determination value is "0", the lottery target value will not exceed "255" regardless of the value of the random number for lottery. Therefore, in a situation where the AT transition confirmation flag is set to "1", the current AT transition lottery process will definitely result in a loss. This makes it possible to prevent duplicate winnings of transition to the AT state ST5 from occurring. Even if the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", if the result is a loss in the winning combination lottery process (Figure 13) or the index value IV = "1" to "10", "16" , "17", you will definitely lose in this AT transition lottery process.

In a situation where the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", if the index value IV = "11" is won in the winning combination lottery process (Figure 13), the lottery judgment value will be "80", so approximately There is a 31% probability that AT will be selected. In a situation where the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", if the index value IV = "12" is won in the winning combination lottery process (Figure 13), the lottery judgment value will be "70", so approximately There is a 27% probability of winning the AT transition. In a situation where the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", if the index value IV = "13" is won in the winning combination lottery process (Figure 13), the lottery judgment value will be "128", so approximately There is a 50% chance of winning the AT transition. In a situation where the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", if the index value IV = "14" is won in the winning combination lottery process (Figure 13), the lottery judgment value will be "110", so approximately There is a 43% probability of winning the AT transition. In a situation where the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", if the index value IV = "15" is won in the winning combination lottery process (Figure 13), the lottery judgment value will be "80", so approximately There is a 31% probability that AT will be selected.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5312, the AT transition confirmation flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S5313). Furthermore, an AT transition winning command indicating that the AT transition has been won is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S5314). When the performance-side MPU 92 receives the AT transition winning command, it causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute a performance indicating that the AT transition has been won.

According to the above configuration, the AT transition lottery table 172 is set with selection targets (specifically, addresses) having lottery determination values that will definitely be determined to be losers in the AT transition lottery. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which a winner is not won in the AT transition lottery without preparing a program for determining whether or not to execute the AT transition lottery.

By the way, 6 bytes of data capacity is required in order to prepare a determination process in the program to determine whether or not to execute the AT transition lottery depending on whether or not the AT transition confirmation flag is set to "1". It happens. On the other hand, in order to add a selection target whose lottery determination value is "0" to the AT migration lottery table 172 as a selection target selected when the AT migration confirmation flag is set to "1", The data capacity is 2 bytes, and the data capacity of the processing program added in conjunction with adding the selection target to the AT transition lottery table 172 is 2 bytes. Therefore, by adding a selection target whose lottery determination value is "0" to the AT migration lottery table 172 as a selection target selected when the AT migration confirmation flag is set to "1", the AT migration lottery is performed. Compared to the case where a program prepares a determination process for distributing execution or not, the required data capacity can be reduced by 2 bytes.

In a configuration where the AT transition lottery table 172 has a plurality of selection targets (addresses in detail) set with lottery determination values that can be determined as winning in the AT transition lottery, it is certain that the selection target is a loser in the AT transition lottery. A selection target (more specifically, an address) to which a lottery determination value is set is set in the AT transition lottery table 172. As a result, the above-mentioned excellent effects can be achieved simply by additionally setting a selection object that will definitely be a loser in the AT transition lottery table 172, which is prepared for setting a plurality of selection objects that can be a win. It becomes possible.

In the advantageous state processing at the start of the game (FIG. 94), the step An offset value is calculated by executing a predetermined calculation process in S5308, and a lottery determination value corresponding to the selection target is specified by adding the calculated offset value to the start address of the AT transition lottery table 172. In this case, by setting in the AT transition lottery table 172 a selection target (address in detail) set with a lottery determination value that will definitely be determined as a loss in the AT transition lottery, a predetermined The above-mentioned excellent effects can be achieved by using a configuration in which the offset value is calculated by performing the calculation process, and the calculated offset value is added to the start address to specify the lottery judgment value corresponding to the selection target. It becomes possible to play.

It should be noted that a configuration may also be adopted in which the index values IV=16 and 17 do not exist, and a configuration in which the AT transfer win can be achieved even if the index values IV=16 and 17 are won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13). good. In these cases, in the AT transition lottery table 172, one or more lottery determination values are set for addresses other than the address “k”.

Further, a configuration in which selection targets that are definitely lost may be set in the lottery table may be applied to lottery processes other than the AT migration lottery. For example, the above configuration may be applied to the transition lottery process to the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the above configuration may be applied to the additional lottery process for the remaining number of awards in the AT state ST5.

Thirteenth embodiment
In this embodiment, the execution mode of a predetermined lottery process executed by the main MPU 72 is different from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 96 is a flowchart illustrating the initial award number lottery process executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the lottery process for the initial award number is executed when the transition to the AT state ST5 is won in the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends and the AT state ST5 starts. In the initial award number lottery process, the initial award number of game media in the AT state ST5 is determined by lottery.

First, a random number for lottery is acquired as a lottery target value from a lottery counter that is updated periodically (specifically, every 1.49 milliseconds) in the main side RAM 74 to a general-purpose register of the main side MPU 72 (step S5401). The lottery counter is configured as a loop counter whose numerical value is sequentially updated in the numerical range of "0" to "255". Note that a configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated circuit for updating random numbers for lottery is provided.

Then, the lottery number counter in the main RAM 74 is set to "7", which is the maximum number of lottery draws (step S5402). The lottery number counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to identify the type of object for which the lottery draws in steps S5406 to S5408, which will be described later, are to be performed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the AT state ST5 started this time is a special AT (step S5403). In this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, an AT transition lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to transition from the pseudo bonus state ST4 to the AT state ST5. If the ST5 transition is won, it will be determined by lottery whether the AT will be a regular AT or a special AT. Special AT is an AT state ST5 in which the initial number of game media provided is likely to be larger than normal AT. Further, the selection probability between normal AT and special AT is arbitrary, but for example, in the case of winning the transition to AT state ST5, 70% will be normal AT and 30% will be special AT.

If the AT state ST5 to be started this time is a normal AT (step S5403: NO), the first initial award number lottery table 173 is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 (step S5404). On the other hand, if the AT state ST5 to be started this time is a special AT (step S5403: YES), the second initial award number lottery table 174 is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 (step S5405).

FIG. 97(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first initial award number lottery table 173, and FIG. 97(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second initial award number lottery table 174.

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the first initial award number lottery table 173 and the second initial award number lottery table 174 include data on lottery numbers in which numerical information of serial numbers is set. , data of a lottery determination value that corresponds one-to-one to the data of the number of lottery tickets are set. In the first initial award number lottery table 173, data from "1" to "7" is set as the data of the number of draws, and a lottery determination which is numerical information of 1 or more is set in correspondence with the data of each number of draws. Value data is set. The total number of these lottery determination values is "256", which is "1" larger than "255", which is the maximum value of the numerical information of the lottery counter. In addition, in the second initial award number lottery table 174, data of "4" to "7" is set as the data of the number of draws, and numerical information of 1 or more corresponds to the data of each number of draws. Lottery determination value data is set. The total number of these lottery determination values is "256".

When drawing the initial allocation number, a lottery judgment value corresponding to a lottery number of "7" is first added to the lottery random number obtained from the lottery counter, and if the lottery target value, which is the value after the addition, exceeds "255", which is the maximum value of the numerical information of the lottery counter, it is determined that the lottery number has been won. If the lottery target value does not exceed "255", the lottery number to be drawn is changed to "6" by subtracting 1 from the lottery number counter value, and a new lottery target value is derived by adding the lottery judgment value corresponding to the lottery number of "6" to the lottery target value, and if the lottery target value exceeds "255", it is determined that the lottery number has been won, and if it does not exceed "255", a lottery target value for the next lottery number is derived using the lottery judgment value, and it is determined whether the lottery target value after derivation exceeds "255". In this case, as described above, the total number of lottery judgment values is "256" in either the first initial award number lottery table 173 or the second initial award number lottery table 174, so that the lottery target value at that time will exceed "255" in a situation where either of the lottery numbers is the target of the lottery, regardless of whether the first initial award number lottery table 173 or the second initial award number lottery table 174 is referenced. In other words, regardless of whether the first initial award number lottery table 173 or the second initial award number lottery table 174 is referenced, one of the lottery numbers will definitely be won.

In the initial award number lottery process (FIG. 96), when the process of step S5404 or step S5405 is executed, the lottery determination value corresponding to the value of the lottery number counter in the main side RAM 74 is used in the first initial award number lottery table 173 and the second initial award number lottery table 173. The initial award number lottery table 174 is read out from the table read out in the main side RAM 74 (step S5406). For example, if the value of the lottery number counter is "7" and the first initial award number lottery table 173 has been read into the main side RAM 74, "10" is read as the lottery determination value. Further, when the value of the lottery number counter is "4" and the second initial award number lottery table 174 has been read out to the main side RAM 74, "64" is read out as the lottery determination value.

Thereafter, the current lottery target value is derived by adding the lottery determination value read in step S5406 to the current lottery target value (step S5407). If the value of the lottery number counter is "7", the current lottery target value is the random number for lottery of the lottery counter acquired in step S5401, so the first initial award number lottery table 173 is read into the main side RAM 74. If it has been issued, the result of adding "10" to the random number for the lottery becomes the target value for this lottery, and if the second initial award number lottery table 174 has been read out to the main side RAM 74, the value for that lottery The result of adding "64" to the random number will be the target value for this lottery. Further, when the value of the lottery number counter is 6 or less, the result of adding the lottery determination value corresponding to the current lottery number counter value to the previously calculated lottery target value becomes the current lottery target value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the lottery target value calculated in step S5407 exceeds "255" (step S5408). If it does not exceed "255" (step S5408: NO), after subtracting 1 from the value of the lottery number counter in the main side RAM 74 (step S5409), the value of the lottery number counter after the 1 subtraction is determined from step S5406 to The process of step S5408 is executed.

If it exceeds "255" (step S5408: YES), the initial grant number table 175 is read from the main side ROM 73 to the main side RAM 74 (step S5410). FIG. 97(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the initial grant number table 175. In the initial grant number table 175, data from "1" to "7" is set as the data of the number of drawings, and the initial number of grants, which is numerical information of 1 or more, is set in correspondence with the data of each lottery number. Data is set. In this case, the larger the number of drawings, the larger the number of initial grants, and the smaller the number of drawings, the smaller the number of initial grants.

After reading the initial award number table 175 to the main side RAM 74 in step S5410, the value of the current lottery number counter, that is, the initial award number corresponding to the current lottery number is read from the initial award number table 175 (step S5411). . In this case, regardless of which of the first initial grant number lottery table 173 and the second initial grant number lottery table 174 is read as the initial grant number lottery table, the common initial grant number table 175 is read out. .

In detail about reading the initial number of grants from the initial number of grants table 175, for example, if the value of the lottery number counter is "7", the initial number of grants read from the initial number of grants table 175 is "300". The initial number of game media awarded in AT state ST5 is "300". Furthermore, if the value of the lottery number counter is "4", the initial number of awards read from the initial award number table 175 is "150", so the initial number of game media in AT state ST5 to start this time is "150". becomes. Furthermore, if the value of the lottery number counter is "1", the initial number of awards read from the initial award number table 175 is "50", so the initial number of game media awarded in AT state ST5 to start this time is "50". becomes.

According to the above configuration, even when the second initial award number lottery table 174 is referred to, the number of types of lottery numbers to be drawn is "4", which is less than the maximum number of "7" types. In the second initial award number lottery table 174, the lottery numbers are set in consecutive numbers such that the maximum value of the lottery numbers is "7" and the minimum value of the lottery numbers is "4". As a result, regardless of whether the first initial award number lottery table 173 or the second initial award number lottery table 174 is referred to, the common maximum value of "7" is set as the lottery number at the start of the lottery. Therefore, it is possible to standardize the processing configuration when performing a lottery.

The total number of lottery determination values set for each lottery number in the second initial award number lottery table 174 exceeds "255", which is the maximum value of the random number for lottery updated in the lottery counter. As a result, even if the minimum value of the lottery number set in the second initial award number lottery table 174 is "4", the number of lottery numbers set in the second initial award number lottery table 174 is "4"~ Since any one of "7" will be a winning result, a lottery number of "3" or less will not become a lottery target.

In addition, in the first initial number lottery table 173, in the configuration where the number of types of lottery numbers to be drawn is "7" and the number of lottery numbers are set as consecutive numbers from "1" to "7", the second initial number lottery table 173 In the award number lottery table 174, the type of lottery number to be drawn is "4", so if the configuration is such that the lottery numbers are set as consecutive numbers from "1" to "4", the second initial award number lottery table If you try to make the initial award number corresponding to the lottery number of "4" in 174 the same as the initial award number corresponding to the lottery number of "7" in the first initial award number lottery table 173, the first initial award number lottery table A plurality of initial grant number tables 175 are provided corresponding to each of the initial grant number lottery table 173 and the second initial grant number lottery table 174, or the lottery number determined with reference to the second initial grant number lottery table 174 is used as the first initial grant number lottery. It becomes necessary to perform a conversion process for associating it with the number of lottery numbers in the table 173. In the former case, the storage capacity increases accordingly, and in the latter case, the processing load increases accordingly. On the other hand, as described above, in the case where the second initial award number lottery table 174 is referred to, the number of types of lottery numbers to be drawn is "4", which is smaller than the maximum number of "7". However, in the second initial award number lottery table 174, the lottery numbers are set in consecutive numbers such that the maximum number of lottery numbers is "7" and the minimum value of the lottery numbers is "4". Therefore, while it is not necessary to execute a conversion process for associating the lottery number determined with reference to the second initial grant number lottery table 174 with the lottery number in the first initial grant number lottery table 173, the first initial grant number lottery The initial grant number table 175 used when the table 173 is referred to can be used as is.

<Another form of the thirteenth embodiment>
- In addition to the first initial grant number lottery table 173 and the second initial grant number lottery table 174, a third initial grant number lottery table may be provided as a lottery table for performing the initial grant number lottery table. . In this case, the maximum value of the lottery number in the third initial grant number lottery table is set to be the same as the maximum value of the first initial grant number lottery table 173 and the second initial grant number lottery table 174, and the third initial grant number lottery By setting the number of drawings in the table as consecutive numbers, it becomes possible to standardize the processing configuration for performing the drawing of the initial number of grants, and it becomes possible to commonly use the initial number of grants table 175. .

- For some of the lottery numbers set in the first initial award number lottery table 173, the lottery determination value may be set to "0". In this case, if the number of draws whose lottery determination value is set to "0" is determined to be a loss. In this configuration, while setting the lottery number in the first initial award number lottery table 173 as a consecutive number following the maximum value of the second initial award number lottery table 174, the lottery number that should be an outlier in the first initial award number lottery table 173 is set. It is possible to set the number.

- For some of the lottery numbers set in the second initial award number lottery table 174, the lottery determination value may be set to "0". In this case, if the number of draws whose lottery determination value is set to "0" is determined to be a loss. In this configuration, while setting the lottery number in the second initial award number lottery table 174 as a consecutive number following the maximum value of the first initial award number lottery table 173, the lottery number that should be an outlier in the second initial award number lottery table 174 It becomes possible to set the number.

- The data structure of the first initial award number lottery table 173 and the second initial award number lottery table 174 may be applied to a lottery table used in a lottery process different from the initial award number lottery process.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the content of an instruction for calling a subroutine when processing using a program is executed in the main MPU 72. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 98(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the programs stored in the main ROM 73 and the addresses of the main ROM 73.

As shown in FIG. 98(a), the main ROM 73 is provided with a large number of 1-byte storage areas, and each storage area is associated with a 2-byte address. By providing this 2-byte address to the management controller of the main ROM 73, the management controller reads the program or data from the storage area corresponding to the address. This read program or data is stored in the register of the main MPU 72 or the main RAM 74.

The main side ROM 73 is assigned 2-byte addresses "8000h" to "93FFh". Note that "h" indicates that the numerical value is a hexadecimal number. In this case, the program necessary to execute the timer subtraction process (step S5608) is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 so that its start address is "8000h", which is the start address of the main ROM 73. Further, following the timer subtraction process (step S5608), the in/out counter process for the number of bets (step S5609), the command output process (step S5610), the port output process (step S5611), the management process (step S5613), Start waiting processing (step S5702), reception prohibition processing (step S5705), start setting processing (step S5706), and external output setting processing (step S5711) are stored in advance in the main side ROM 73 in this order. Programs for these various processes are stored in the address range of "8000h" to "8BFFh" which is the start address of the main side ROM 73, and the external output setting process (step S5711) which is stored in the last order among these various processes ) is stored in the storage area at address "8BFFh". In the main MPU 72, programs for processes other than the above-mentioned processes (partial clear process (step S5504), all clear process (step S5505), setting value update process (step S5506), etc.) are from "8C00h" to "93FFh". It is stored in advance in a storage area that is an address range.

When calling the above various processes, the main MPU 72 executes a CALLS instruction. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main MPU 72. The processing contents of steps S5501 to S5517 are the same as steps S101 to S117 of the main processing (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment. In this case, in the partial clearing process of step S5504, the all clearing process of step S5505, the setting value update process of step S5506, and the normal process of step S5507, by specifying the address with the CALLS instruction, the The program is read from the main ROM 73.

Figure 100 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72. The processing contents of steps S5601 to S5614 are the same as steps S201 to S214 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 11) in the first embodiment described above. In this case, in the power failure processing of step S5603, the stepping motor control processing of step S5606, the sensor monitoring processing of step S5607, the timer subtraction processing of step S5608, the in/out counter processing of the number of bets of step S5609, the command output processing of step S5610, the port output processing of step S5611, and the management processing of step S5613, the programs for executing these processes are read from the main ROM 73 by specifying an address using the CALLS command.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU 72. The processing contents of steps S5701 to S5712 are the same as steps S301 to S312 of the normal processing (FIG. 12) in the first embodiment. In this case, the start waiting process of step S5702, the reception prohibition process of step S5705, the setting process at the start of step S5706, the lottery process of step S5707, the reel control process of step S5708, the medium provision process of step S5709, and the step S5710 In the corresponding process at the end of the game and the external output setting process in step S5711, a program for executing these processes is read from the main ROM 73 by specifying an address using the CALLS command.

The CALLS command is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in association with each type of process to be called. The CALLS instruction has instruction identification data that indicates that it is a CALLS instruction, and address data that allows the management controller of the main ROM 73 to grasp the start address of the program of the process to be called. There is. In this case, the number of bytes of the CALLS instruction differs depending on whether the start address specified as address data is included in the 2-byte addresses "8000h" to "8BFFh" in the main ROM 73. Specifically, if the start address specified as address data is not included in "8000h" to "8BFFh", that is, if it is included in "8C00h" to "93FFh", it will be a 3-byte CALLS instruction and will be used as address data. If the specified start address is included in "8000h" to "8BFFh", it becomes a 2-byte CALLS instruction.

FIG. 98(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of a 3-byte CALLS instruction. The 3-byte CALLS instruction has 1 byte each of an upper byte UB11, an intermediate byte UB12, and a lower byte UB13. The upper byte UB11 is set with instruction identification data indicating that it is a CALLS instruction, and the middle byte UB12 and lower byte UB13 contain 2-byte data, which is the start address of the program to be read, as address data. It is set. Any 2-byte address in the range of "8C00h" to "93FFh" in the main side ROM 73 is set in the address data. For example, "8C00h" is set as address data in a 3-byte CALLS instruction for reading a program for partial clear processing. When the main MPU 72 executes a 3-byte CALLS instruction, it can directly read the 2-byte address that is the start address of the program to be read from the address data of the CALLS instruction.

FIG. 98(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of a 2-byte CALLS instruction. Each 2-byte CALLS instruction has 1 byte of upper byte UB21 and lower byte UB22. Instruction identification data indicating that the instruction itself is a CALLS instruction is set in the four bits from the most significant bit D7 in the upper byte UB21 to the bit D4 following the most significant bit D7, and the lower side in the upper byte UB21 The 12 bits consisting of the 4 bits from bit D3 to the least significant bit D0 and the 8 bits of the lower byte UB22 contain the 4 bits following the most significant bit of the 2-byte data that is the start address of the program to be read. The 12-bit data of the removed portion is set as address data.

FIG. 98(d) shows a circuit configuration provided in the main MPU 72 to provide the 2-byte start address of the program to be read to the management controller of the main ROM 73 when a 2-byte CALLS instruction is executed. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining. The main MPU 72 is provided with a mask circuit 181 and an adder circuit 182. When a 2-byte CALLS instruction is executed by the main MPU 72, 16-bit data of the CALLS instruction is provided to the mask circuit 181. The mask circuit 181 clears 4 bits of the 16-bit data of the CALLS command from the most significant bit D7 in the upper byte UB21 to the bit D4 following the most significant bit D7 to "0". Executes mask control. For example, when a CALLS instruction for reading a program for timer subtraction processing is executed, the data after mask control by the mask circuit 181 is executed becomes "0000h".

The data after mask control by the mask circuit 181 is performed is provided to the adder circuit 182. The addition circuit 182 performs addition control so that "8000h" is added to the data after the masking control by the masking circuit 181 has been performed. The data after the addition control is executed becomes the start address of the program of the process read by the CALLS instruction. For example, when a CALLS instruction is executed to read a program for timer subtraction processing, the data after the mask control by the mask circuit 181 is executed as described above becomes "0000h", so the addition circuit 182 adds The data after the control is executed becomes "8000h". This data is the start address of a program for executing timer interrupt processing. The data after the addition control by the addition circuit 182 has been executed is provided as address data to the management controller of the main ROM 73, so that the program of the process to be read by the CALLS command is read from the main ROM 73.

As mentioned above, the address in which the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte address are fixed as "8" in hexadecimal number is specified in the CALLS instruction by using the mask circuit 181 and adder circuit 182 provided in the main MPU 72. By compressing the address data to 12 bits and reading it with a 2-byte CALLS instruction, compared to a configuration in which the program is read using only a 3-byte CALLS instruction, the program can be read in the main ROM 73. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store the information.

Here, addresses whose upper 4 bits are fixed to hexadecimal "8" include not only "8000h" to "8BFFh" but also "8C00h" to "8FFFh". Therefore, in theory, it is possible to read out programs for processes included in the address range of "8C00h" to "8FFFh" using a 2-byte CALLS command. However, in the slot machine 10 of this embodiment, if a 2-byte CALLS command is used to read out programs for processes included in the address range of "8C00h" to "8FFFh", the data structure of the CALLS command for some addresses in that address range will match the data structure of the other 2-byte commands. Therefore, in the slot machine 10 of this embodiment, a 3-byte CALLS command is used to read out programs for the address range of "8C00h" to "8FFFh". However, if there is no occurrence of an event in which the data structure of the instruction matches that of another 2-byte instruction, a 2-byte CALLS instruction can be executed when reading a program address included in the address range of "8000h" to "8FFFh", which includes "8C00h" to "8FFFh", and a 3-byte CALLS instruction can be executed when reading a program address included in the address range of "9000h" to "93FFh".

As already explained, the processing to be read by the program using the 2-byte CALLS command includes timer subtraction processing (step S5608), in/out counter processing for the number of bets (step S5609), and command output processing (step S5610). , port output processing (step S5611), management processing (step S5613), start waiting processing (step S5702), reception prohibition processing (step S5705), setting processing at start (step S5706), and external output setting processing (step S5711). The program capacity of each process targeted by these 2-byte CALLS instructions includes partial clear processing (step S5504) and full clear processing (step The capacity is smaller than each program capacity of processing such as S5505) and setting value update processing (Step S5506). This makes it possible to secure a large number of types of processing that allow programs to be read using a 2-byte CALLS instruction.

<Another form of the fourteenth embodiment>
- The address range to be read by the 2-byte CALLS instruction is not limited to "8000h" to "8BFFh", and may be "8000h" to "8FFFh". Even in this case, the upper 4 bits are fixed at hexadecimal "8", so the mask circuit 181 and adder circuit 182 are used for the 12-bit address data specified by the 2-byte CALLS instruction. By adding the upper 4 bits of hexadecimal number "8" to the address, the address to be read can be derived.

・The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which a 2-byte CALLS instruction is applied to an address range where the upper 4 bits are fixed as hexadecimal ``8'', and the upper 4 bits are hexadecimal ``9''. A 2-byte CALLS command may be applied to an address range fixed to a number other than "8".

- Multiple 2-byte CALLS instructions may be prepared, and one 2-byte CALLS instruction may read programs in an address range where the upper 4 bits are fixed to hexadecimal "8", and the other 2-byte CALLS instruction may read programs in an address range where the upper 4 bits are fixed to hexadecimal "9".

<Fifteenth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the fourteenth embodiment in the type of processing that is the target of program reading by the 2-byte CALLS instruction. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the fourteenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the fourteenth embodiment is basically omitted. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the content of execution of various processes in the main MPU 72 is based on the above-described sixth embodiment.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing pseudo bonus processing executed by the main MPU 72. The processing contents of steps S5801 to S5811 are the same as steps S2701 to S2711 of the pseudo bonus processing (FIG. 53) in the sixth embodiment. In this case, in the initialization process of the second section SC2 in step S5809 and the process of turning off the section display section 67 in step S5810, the program for executing these processes is transferred from the main side ROM 73 by specifying the address with the CALLS instruction. Read out.

FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing AT processing executed by the main MPU 72. The processing contents of steps S5901 to S5920 are the same as steps S3101 to S3120 of the AT processing (FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment. In this case, the process of adding the number of games during AT in step S5902, the process of updating the net increase during AT in step S5903, the process of adding the remaining number of grants in step S5911, the process of setting the freeze counter in step S5916, and the process of adding the number of games during AT in step S5918, In the initialization process of the section SC2 and the setting process of the section display section 67 in step S5919, a program for executing these processes is read from the main ROM 73 by specifying an address using the CALLS command.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the second control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72. The processing contents of steps S6001 to S6017 are the same as steps S3201 to S3217 of the normal processing (FIG. 12) in the sixth embodiment. In this case, in the setting process for the freeze counter in step S6012, the initialization process for the second section SC2 in step S6014, the process to turn off the section display section 67 in step S6015, and the ending support process in step S6017, the address is specified by the CALLS command. As a result, a program for executing these processes is read from the main ROM 73.

Figure 105 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the programs stored in the main ROM 73 and the addresses of the main ROM 73 in this embodiment.

Even in this embodiment, as in the fourteenth embodiment, when reading a program included in the address range of "8000h" to "8BFFh" in the main ROM 73, a 2-byte CALLS instruction is executed and "8C00h" is read. ” to “93FFh”, a 3-byte CALLS instruction is executed. In this case, the program to be read by the 2-byte CALLS instruction is a program that is read more frequently than the program to be read by the 3-byte CALLS instruction. In detail, partial clear processing, all clear processing, setting value update processing, addition processing of the number of games during AT, update processing of net increase during AT, subtraction processing of the AT continuation counter, addition processing of remaining number of grants, and ending support. A process such as a process whose program is included in the address range of "8C00h" to "93FFh" is read out only in one process. Since the processing program to be read in only one of these processes is set in the address range of "8C00h" to "93FFh", a 3-byte CALLS instruction is executed when reading it.

On the other hand, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is read out in each of the pseudo bonus process (FIG. 102), the AT process (FIG. 103), and the second control process of the game section (FIG. 104). . Further, the turning off process of the section display section 67 is read out in each of the pseudo bonus process (FIG. 102), the AT process (FIG. 103), and the second control process of the game section (FIG. 104). Further, the setting process for the freeze counter is read in each of the AT process (FIG. 103) and the second control process of the game section (FIG. 104). In addition to these processes, a lottery process and an add-on process for the number of portent games are also read out in a plurality of processes. Since the program of the process to be read in these plural processes is set in the address range of "8000h" to "8BFFh", a 2-byte CALLS instruction is executed when reading the program.

With the above configuration, a 3-byte CALLS instruction is executed when reading a program with a relatively low reading frequency, and a 2-byte CALLS instruction is executed when reading a program with a relatively high reading frequency. The command is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main ROM 73 required to store the CALLS command.

<Sixteenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fourteenth embodiment described above in the content of an instruction for calling a subroutine when processing using a program is executed in the main MPU 72. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the fourteenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the fourteenth embodiment will be basically omitted. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the content of execution of various processes in the main MPU 72 is based on the above-described sixth embodiment.

FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the programs stored in the main ROM 73 and the addresses of the main ROM 73 in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, as in the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, not only a 3-byte CALLS instruction but also a 2-byte CALLS instruction is set. When reading a program stored in the address range of "8000h" to "8BFFh", a 2-byte CALLS instruction is executed. Also, when reading a program stored in the address range of "8C00h" to "900Fh", a 3-byte CALLS instruction is executed. The data structure of these 2-byte CALLS instructions and 3-byte CALLS instructions is the same as in the above-mentioned 14th embodiment.

In this embodiment, when reading a program stored in the address range of "9010h" to "93FFh", a CALLV instruction is executed instead of a 3-byte CALLS instruction. The CALLV command is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in association with each type of process to be called.

Figure 107(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of a CALLV instruction. A CALLV instruction is one byte, and instruction identification data indicating that it is a CALLV instruction is set in the upper four bits D4 to D7 following the most significant bit D7, and index data is set in the lower four bits D0 to D3 following the least significant bit D0. The index data is used when identifying the address of the program to be read this time from the index table 183 stored in advance in the main ROM 73.

Figure 107 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the index table 183. In the index table 183, index data that is a consecutive number from "1h" to "Fh" in hexadecimal is set, and address data that is the start addresses of multiple programs set in the address range of "9010h" to "93FFh" in one-to-one correspondence with the index data is set. Each index data is 4 bits, and each address data is 2 bytes. Sixteen index data are set in the index table 183, and the address data that is associated with each of these index data is the start addresses of the 16 programs set in the address range of "9010h" to "93FFh".

FIG. 107(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a circuit configuration for providing a 2-byte start address of a program to be read to the management controller of the main ROM 73 when a CALLV instruction is executed. The main MPU 72 is provided with an index grasping circuit 184 and an address reading circuit 185. When a CALLV instruction is executed by the main MPU 72, 8-bit data of the CALLV instruction is provided to the index understanding circuit 184. The index understanding circuit 184 extracts the lower 4 bits D0 to D3 of the 8 bit data of the CALLV command provided. The extracted data of the lower four bits D0 to D3 is provided to the address read circuit 185. The address reading circuit 185 identifies index data that matches the provided lower 4 bits D0 to D3 of each index data of the index table 183 read from the main ROM 73, and stores the index data in the index table 183. Read the address data corresponding to. This read address data corresponds to any one of "9010h" to "9315h" and becomes the start address of the program of the process read by the CALLV instruction. By providing the address data read by the address reading circuit 185 to the management controller of the main ROM 73, the program of the process to be read by the CALLV command is read from the main ROM 73.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing pseudo bonus processing executed by the main MPU 72. The processing contents of steps S6101 to S6111 are the same as steps S2701 to S2711 of the pseudo bonus processing (FIG. 53) in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing AT processing executed by the main MPU 72. The processing contents of steps S6201 to S6220 are the same as steps S3101 to S3120 of the AT processing (FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the second control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72. The processing contents of steps S6301 to S6317 are the same as steps S3201 to S3217 of the second control process of the game section (FIG. 60) in the sixth embodiment.

Among the above processes, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is read out in each of the pseudo bonus process (FIG. 108), the AT process (FIG. 109), and the second control process of the game section (FIG. 110). . Further, the light-off process of the section display section 67 is read out in each of the pseudo bonus process (FIG. 108), the AT process (FIG. 109), and the second control process of the game section (FIG. 110). Further, the setting process for the freeze counter is read in each of the AT process (FIG. 109) and the second control process of the game section (FIG. 110). In addition to these processes, a lottery process and an add-on process for the number of portent games are also read out in a plurality of processes. As mentioned above, the processes to be read in the plurality of processes include the initialization process of the second section SC2, the lighting process of the section display section 67, the setting process for the freeze counter, the lottery process of the number of portent games, and the addition process. There are 16 of them. This number of processes matches the number of index data set in the index table 183, that is, the number of processes that can be read by the program by the CALLV instruction.

As shown in FIG. 106, the processing program to be read in multiple processes is stored in the address range of "8C00h" to "93FFh", which cannot be read by the 2-byte CALLS command. Specifically, it is stored in the address range of "9010h" to "93FFh". As already explained, the address data associated with each of the 16 pieces of index data in the index table 183 are the start addresses of 16 programs set in the address range of "9010h" to "93FFh". . That is, a program for a process to be read in a plurality of processes is read by a CALLV instruction, which is a 1-byte instruction. This makes it possible to use the CALLV instruction, which has a smaller data capacity than the CALLS instruction, when reading a program for a process that has a relatively high reading frequency. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of

The addresses that are read by the 1-byte CALLV instruction are set to an address range that cannot be read by the 2-byte CALLS instruction, making it possible to minimize the number of addresses that are read by the 3-byte CALLS instruction. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of memory required to prepare read instructions.

The processes to be read by the program using the 2-byte CALLS command are the same as in the fourteenth embodiment described above, including timer subtraction processing (step S5608), in/out counter processing for the number of bets (step S5609), and command output processing (step S5609). S5610), port output processing (step S5611), management processing (step S5613), start waiting processing (step S5702), reception prohibition processing (step S5705), start setting processing (step S5706), and external output setting processing (Step S5711). The capacity of each program for the process targeted by these 2-byte CALLS commands is a portion of the memory area stored in the address range of "8C00h" to "900Fh" from which the program is read by the 3-byte CALLS command. The capacity is smaller than each program capacity for processes such as clear processing (step S5504), all clear processing (step S5505), and setting value update processing (step S5506). This makes it possible to secure a large number of types of processing that allow programs to be read using a 2-byte CALLS instruction.

Note that the data capacity of index data that can be set with the CALLV instruction is not limited to 4 bits, and may be any other number of bits that is less than 8 bits, such as 7 bits, 6 bits, 5 bits, 3 bits, or 2 bits. It may be.

Furthermore, the address to be read by the CALLV instruction is not limited to an address outside the address range to be read by the 2-byte CALLS command, but the address range to be read by the 2-byte CALLS instruction. The configuration may be such that the address is .

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each embodiment described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following changes may be made. Incidentally, the configurations of the following alternative embodiments may be applied individually to the configurations of each of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination. Further, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following different embodiments may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration in which the configurations of the above embodiments are combined with each other. good.

(1) In the first embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the AT state ST5 ends based on the remaining number of game media provided in the AT state ST5 becoming "0"; The AT state ST5 may be configured to end based on the number of remaining consecutive games in ST5 becoming "0", or based on the fact that the number of predetermined winnings achieved in the AT state ST5 has reached the upper limit number. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the AT state ST5 ends. Even in this case, if it is a false precursor state or a real precursor state, the remaining number of consecutive games in AT state ST5 will be "0" or the number of winnings established in AT state ST5 will be the upper limit number of times. Even if this happens, the AT state ST5 may continue.

(2) In the first embodiment, in the false precursor state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 becomes "0" and the AT state ST5 continues, and in the additional lottery process (step S1103), a direct hit occurs. If you win, the number of awards selected in the direct win is not limited to the structure where it is immediately awarded, but the number of awards is not limited to the structure where the number of awards is awarded when the false precursor state in the middle of execution ends. Good too. In this case, in a situation where the false precursor state continues, even if game media are awarded, the remaining number of game media awarded in AT state ST5 is maintained at "0", and the false precursor state ends and the AT state is reached. Due to the awarding of game media that occurs in a situation where ST5 continues, the number of awards given due to the above-mentioned direct winning becomes subject to subtraction. Therefore, it becomes easier for the AT state ST5 to continue for a longer period of time.

(3) In the first embodiment, if a false omen is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103) in the false omen state, the number of remaining consecutive games in the false omen state may be increased. good. For example, if a false omen is won while in a false omen state, the initial number of continuous games of 10 games will be reset as the remaining number of continuous games in the false omen state, and the remaining number of continuous games will increase. Alternatively, the remaining number of continuous games may be increased by adding 10 games, which is the initial number of continuous games, to the remaining number of continuous games in the false precursor state. If the event occurs in a false precursor state and the remaining number of game media given in AT state ST5 is "0", the number of games required until the continued AT state ST5 ends is substantially As a result, the player expects a false omen to win.

Furthermore, even if a false omen is won in a false omen state in a situation where the remaining number of game media awarded in AT state ST5 is not "0," the AT In a situation where the remaining number of game media to be awarded in state ST5 is "0", if a false omen win occurs in a false omen state, the remaining number of consecutive games in the false omen state may be increased. As a result, in a situation where the false omen state is provided as a mere performance, even if a false omen win occurs, the AT state ST5 continues due to the false omen state while preventing the number of remaining games of the false omen state from increasing. In such a situation, the occurrence of a false precursor winning can substantially increase the number of games required until the continuing AT state ST5 ends.

(4) In the first embodiment, if the real omen is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103) in the false omen state, the omen is promoted to the real omen state and the remaining omen state is continued. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of games is greater than the remaining number of consecutive games in the previous false omen state. For example, if you are in a false omen state and win the main omen, the initial number of continuous games of 10 games will be reset as the remaining number of continuous games in this omen state, and the remaining number of continuous games will increase. Alternatively, the remaining number of continuous games may be increased by adding 10 games, which is the initial number of continuous games, to the remaining number of continuous games in the false precursor state. If the event occurs in a false precursor state and the remaining number of game media given in AT state ST5 is "0", the number of games required until the continued AT state ST5 ends is substantially As a result, the player expects to win the real omen.

In addition, even if the real omen is won in the false omen state in a situation where the remaining number of game media given in AT state ST5 is not "0", the remaining false omen state will continue in the subsequent real omen state. Inherit the number of games, and in the case where the remaining number of game media given in AT state ST5 is "0", if the main sign is won in the false sign state, the remaining number of consecutive games in the subsequent main sign state will be changed to that number. It may be configured to increase the number of consecutive games remaining in the false omen state up to this point. As a result, in a situation where a false precursor state is provided as a mere performance, even if a real precursor win occurs, the number of remaining consecutive games of the actual precursor state after that is not increased, and the false precursor state can be used to maintain the AT state ST5. In a situation where the AT state ST5 continues, the occurrence of this precursory victory makes it possible to substantially increase the number of games required until the continued AT state ST5 ends.

(5) In the first embodiment described above, if a false omen win or a real omen win occurs in the additional lottery process (step S1103) in the real omen state, the number of remaining continuation games in this omen state increases. It is also possible to have a configuration in which For example, in the case of a false omen win or a real omen win while in the real omen state, the initial number of continuous games of 10 games is reset as the remaining number of continuation games in this omen state, so that the remaining continuation is possible. The number of games may increase, or the initial number of continuous games, 10 games, may be added to the remaining number of continuous games in this precursor state, thereby increasing the remaining number of continuous games. If the event occurs in this precursor state and the remaining number of game media given in AT state ST5 is "0", the number of games required until the continued AT state ST5 ends is substantially Therefore, the player expects a false omen winning or a real omen winning.

In addition, even if a false omen win or a real omen win occurs in this omen state in a situation where the remaining number of game media given in AT state ST5 is not "0", the remaining number of consecutive games in this omen state is increased. In the case where the remaining number of game media awarded in AT state ST5 is "0", if a false omen win or a real omen win occurs in this omen state, the remaining number of consecutive games in this omen state. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number is increased. As a result, in a situation where this precursory state is provided as a mere performance, even if a false precursory win or a real precursory win occurs, the number of remaining consecutive games of this precursory state will not increase, and the AT by this precursory state will not increase. In a situation where the state ST5 continues, the occurrence of a false precursor winning or a real precursor winning can substantially increase the number of games required until the continuing AT state ST5 ends.

(6) In the above first embodiment, in the false precursor state or the real precursor state and in the situation where the remaining number of game media to be awarded in AT state ST5 is “0”, a direct win in the additional lottery process (step S1103) In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a larger number of awards is likely to be awarded than when a direct win is achieved in the additional lottery process (step S1103) under other circumstances. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning directly in a situation where the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 is "0" in the false precursor state or the real precursor state.

(7) In the second and third embodiments described above, even if the winning combination is won with the index value IV=17 in the lottery process (FIG. 13) in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, if the right reel 32R is not stopped first or the main It may be configured such that unless the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and "Red 7" symbol is stopped on the line ML, the benefit of adding 1 to the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main side RAM 74 is not granted. . In addition, even if the index value IV=18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) of the winning combination in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, if the right reel 32R is not stopped first or "Red 7" appears on the main line ML. It may be configured such that the benefit of adding 1 to the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main side RAM 74 is not provided unless the combination of the symbols, "Red 7" symbols, and "Red 7" symbols is stopped. In addition, even if the index value IV=18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the winning combination in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, if the right reel 32R is not stopped first or the "BAR" symbol appears on the main line ML. , a configuration may be adopted in which the benefit of adding 2 to the value of the shift advantageous counter in the main side RAM 74 is not provided unless the combination of the "BAR" symbol and the "BAR" symbol is stopped.

(8) In the second and third embodiments above, if you win the index value IV=17 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), you will win the first special replay prize only if you make the first stop of the right reel 32R. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the first special replay prize can be realized only when the middle reel 32M is first stopped, and the middle reel 32M or the right reel A configuration may be adopted in which the first special replay winning can be achieved when 32R is first stopped.

(9) In the second and third embodiments above, if you win the index value IV=18 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), you will win the first special replay prize only when the right reel 32R is stopped first. Alternatively, the configuration is such that a second special replay winning can be achieved, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning can be achieved only when the middle reel 32M is first stopped. Alternatively, the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning may be achieved when the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped.

(10) In the second and third embodiments above, if you win the index value IV = 18 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), if you make the first stop of the right reel 32R, you will win the first special replay prize. can be realized, but the second special replay winning cannot be realized, and if the middle reel 32M is stopped first, the second special replay winning can be realized, but the first special replay winning can be realized. It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is not possible. In this case, if the index value IV = 17 or 18 is won in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, and if the index value IV = 17 is won in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the first stop is the right reel. 32R and the Red 7 notification that allows the player to recognize that they should aim for the "Red 7" symbol on the main line ML is executed, and in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the index value IV = 18 is won. In order to create a pseudo bonus state ST4, a BAR notification is executed that allows the player to recognize that the first stop is the middle reel 32M and that he should aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. The second special replay prize is established if the index value IV=18 is won in the first half of the situation, and the first special replay prize is established if the index value IV=18 is won in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to reduce the probability of this happening.

(11) In the second and third embodiments above, when the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is achieved in a situation other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the replay winning is achieved as the first irregular notification sound. Although the configuration is such that a notification sound is output to make the player aware of the fact, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a notification sound that clearly indicates that the transition to the AT state ST5 is not triggered as the first irregular notification sound is output, and a notification sound that clearly indicates that the current state is not in the pseudo bonus state ST4 may be output. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

(12) In the second and third embodiments, when the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is achieved in a situation other than the pseudo bonus state ST4, the first irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62. On the other hand, although the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 have a configuration in which irregular notification is not performed, the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the configuration in which the first irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62 or Alternatively, the upper lamp 61 may emit light corresponding to the first irregularity, and the image display device 63 may display an image corresponding to the first irregularity.

(13) In the second and third embodiments described above, when the second special replay winning is achieved in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the second irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, and the upper lamp 61 Although the configuration is such that the irregular notification is not performed in the image display device 63, the configuration is not limited to this, and in addition to or in place of the configuration in which the second irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, the upper lamp 61 The configuration may be such that light emission corresponding to the second irregularity is performed in the image display device 63, or the image corresponding to the second irregularity may be displayed on the image display device 63.

(14) In the third embodiment, if the index value IV=18 is won in the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, but the first special replay winning is established, the third irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62. On the other hand, although the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 have a configuration in which irregular notification is not performed, the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the configuration in which the third irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62 or Alternatively, the upper lamp 61 may emit light corresponding to the third irregularity, and the image display device 63 may display an image corresponding to the third irregularity.

(15) In the second and third embodiments described above, if the index value IV=18 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), the red 7 notification is executed in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, Although the configuration is such that BAR notification is executed in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the index value IV = 18 is won in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the player is urged to realize the first special replay prize by executing the red 7 notification, and the index value IV = 18 is won in the AT state ST5. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the player is prompted to realize the second special replay winning by executing BAR notification. In this case, if the first special replay winning is achieved by winning the index value IV=18 in a state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4, the corresponding irregular notification is executed, and the index value If the second special replay prize is established by winning IV=18, the corresponding irregular notification may be executed.

(16) In the second and third embodiments, if the winning combination is won with the index value IV=17 in the lottery process (FIG. 13) in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the transition advantageous counter in the main side RAM 74 is surely set. Although the configuration is such that the value is incremented by 1, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the index value IV=17 is won, a lottery process is executed, and if the lottery process results in a win, the main side RAM 74 The value of the transition advantageous counter may be incremented by 1. In this case, if a winner is won in the lottery process, the first stop is the right reel 32R, and a red 7 notification is executed indicating that the player should aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, and the winning lottery process is executed. It is preferable that the red 7 notification is not executed when the error occurs.

(17) In the second and third embodiments described above, if the winning combination is won with the index value IV=18 in the lottery process (FIG. 13) in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the transition time in the main side RAM 74 is ensured. Although the configuration is such that the value of the advantageous counter is incremented by 1, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the lottery process is executed when the index value IV=18 is won, and the lottery process results in a win. A configuration may also be adopted in which the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main side RAM 74 is incremented by one. In this case, if a winner is won in the lottery process, the first stop is the right reel 32R, and a red 7 notification is executed indicating that the player should aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, and the winning lottery process is executed. It is preferable that the red 7 notification is not executed when the error occurs.

(18) In the second and third embodiments, if the index value IV = 18 is selected in the lottery process (FIG. 13) in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the value of the advantageous counter at the transition in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 2 without fail. However, this is not limited to the above, and if the lottery process is executed when the index value IV = 18 is selected, and if the lottery process is a win, the value of the advantageous counter at the transition in the main RAM 74 may be incremented by 2. In this case, if the lottery process is a win, a BAR notification is executed to indicate that the first stop is the right reel 32R and that the "BAR" symbol should be aimed for on the main line ML, and if the winning lottery process is a miss, the BAR notification is preferably not executed.

(19) In the fourth and fifth embodiments described above, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into two in the horizontal direction during the first additional period, thereby partitioning it into the left side area A1 and the right side area A2. However, the display surface of the image display device 63 may be divided into two in the vertical direction during the first addition period to be divided into an upper region and a lower region. In addition, in the second addition period, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into two in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, so that it is divided into an upper left area A11, an upper right area A12, a lower left area A13, and a lower right area A14. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display surface of the image display device 63 may be divided into four vertically in the second additional period into four display areas. It is also possible to divide the area into four display areas by dividing the area into four in the direction.

(20) In the fourth and fifth embodiments described above, the effect of dividing the display surface of the image display device 63 into a plurality of display areas occurs in the first additional period or the second additional period, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the configuration to occur in other situations. Furthermore, as the effect of dividing the display surface of the image display device 63 into a plurality of display areas, a two-division effect and a four-division effect have been set. It is also possible to have a configuration in which there are effects such as a presentation divided into five parts, a presentation divided into eight parts, a presentation divided into nine parts, and the like.

(21) In the fourth and fifth embodiments described above, the image data D1 at the time of division is copied to at least the second divided area DA2 at the time of division into two of the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. The image data D1 at the time of division is drawn using the image data for the first divided area DA1 at the time of dividing into two, and the image data D1 at the time of division is drawn on the second divided area DA2 at the time of division into two. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the image data D1 at the time of division is drawn using image data. Even in this case, the image data used for drawing the image data D1 at the time of division into the first divided area DA1 when divided into two, and the image data used for drawing the image data D1 at the time of division into two, and the image data used for drawing the image data D1 when divided into two, Since the image data used for drawing the image data D1 at the time is the same, it is possible to suppress the amount of image data read from the memory module 101 in order to draw the image data D1 at the time of division. Become.

(22) In the fourth and fifth embodiments described above, the left area A1 and the right area A2 on the display surface of the image display device 63 have the same image as the animation display G21, G22 for presentation or the number notification display G23, respectively. Although the configuration is such that a different image is displayed, a configuration may be adopted in which a different image can be displayed. Even in this case, by displaying the stop order notification image G34 or the operation notification image G35 so as to straddle the left side area A1 and the right side area A2, it is possible to make the stop order notification image G34 and the operation notification image G35 stand out. It becomes possible.

(23) The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the number of effective lines is only one main line ML, and may be a configuration in which there are two, three, or four or more effective lines. In this case, it may be configured such that the number of active lines increases as the number of game media bet is large, or the maximum number of active lines may be set regardless of the number of game media bet.

(24) The type of information transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the performance side MPU 92 is not limited to that in each of the above embodiments, and for example, if a winning corresponding to the award of game media is achieved, the winning will be awarded as a result of the winning. Information on the number of game media played may be transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the performance MPU 92. In this case, it becomes possible to notify information on the number of game media awarded by winning a prize on the image display device 63 or the like. In addition, even if all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped, if the rotation of some of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped or stopped, the corresponding information will be sent to the main side. It may also be configured to be transmitted from the MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92. In this case, it becomes possible to perform effects corresponding to the rotational conditions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display device 63 or the like.

(25) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that the privilege of paying out medals is given when a small win is achieved, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and the configuration is such that some kind of benefit is granted to the player. That's fine. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which prizes other than medals are paid out when a small winning combination is achieved. Furthermore, in a slot machine that does not have an actual medal insertion or medal payout function and manages credit for medals owned by a player, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the granting of a benefit.

(26) The present invention may be applied to so-called B type slot machines, C type, combination type A and C type, combination type B and C type, furthermore, RT game, CT game or ART. The present invention may be applied to any type of slot machine, such as a type equipped with a game. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a bonus state advantageous to the player exists.

(27) The symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, letters, etc., but may also be geometric lines, figures, etc. Further, it is possible to form a pattern using light, color, etc., a pattern may be formed using a three-dimensional shape, or a combination of these may form a pattern. In other words, the pattern may be any pattern as long as it has a function as information with distinctiveness.

(28) In each of the above embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 was shown, but it may also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a game is played using game balls as a game medium, and the slot machine and pachinko The present invention may also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of the above and the other machines.

(29) The characteristic configurations of the first to sixteenth embodiments may be applied to each other in any combination. For example, the characteristic configurations of the first embodiment, the second embodiment, the fourth embodiment, the sixth embodiment, and the fourteenth embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configurations of the third embodiment, the fifth embodiment, the eighth embodiment, the tenth embodiment, the thirteenth embodiment, and the sixteenth embodiment may be combined. In addition, the configurations of the other embodiments may be applied in any combination to a configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to sixteenth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<About inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. Note that, in the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. The continuation criterion storage means (AT continuation counter 74e in the first embodiment) is based on the fact that the game is executed in an advantageous gaming state (AT state ST5) that is advantageous to the player and an update opportunity (assignment of game media) occurs. an information update unit (a function that executes the process of step S1204 of the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment) for updating the continuation reference information stored in the memory to bring it closer to the end information (“0”);
A termination means for terminating the advantageous gaming state based on the continuation reference information becoming the termination information (a function of executing the processing of steps S1213 to S1215 of the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment);
Even if the continuation reference information becomes the end information when the advantageous gaming state is in a predetermined effect execution state (false precursor state), the advantageous gaming state can be continued without terminating the advantageous gaming state by the ending means. A state continuation means (a function of making a negative determination in step S1212 of the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature A1, in the case of a predetermined performance execution situation, even if the continuation reference information becomes end information, the advantageous gaming state is continued without ending. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the advantageous gaming state can continue even if the continuation reference information becomes end information. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined performance execution situation from ending midway due to the end of the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A2. The terminating means is configured to provide, in a situation where the continuation reference information becomes the end information and the advantageous gaming state is continued when the predetermined effect execution situation is in the advantageous gaming state, the continuation reference information is the end information. The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized in that the advantageous gaming state is ended when the predetermined performance execution situation ends.

According to feature A2, if the advantageous gaming state is continued even if the continuation reference information is the end information due to the predetermined production execution status, or if the predetermined production execution status ends while the continuation reference information is the termination information. The advantageous gaming state also ends. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous gaming state from continuing excessively.

Feature A3. A predetermined updating means (a first (a function of executing the process of step S1105 of the main MPU 72 in the embodiment),
The predetermined updating means updates the continuation reference information to a side that moves it away from the end information based on the occurrence of the predetermined opportunity in a situation where the advantageous gaming state is being continued by the state continuation means. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2.

According to feature A3, the continuation reference information is updated to move away from the end information based on the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity in the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, the player expects a predetermined opportunity to occur in an advantageous gaming state. In this case, if the advantageous gaming state continues even if the continuation standard information is end information due to the predetermined performance execution status, if a predetermined opportunity occurs in this continued situation, the continuation standard information is updated to move away from the end information. This makes it possible for the player to expect the predetermined opportunity to occur even in the ongoing situation.

Feature A4. The predetermined effect execution situation continues for a predetermined number of games, which is a plurality of games, and in each game in the predetermined effect execution situation, the execution content of the effect is determined in a manner corresponding to the predetermined effect execution situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3.

According to feature A4, the predetermined performance execution status continues for a predetermined number of games, which is the number of games, and in each game in the predetermined performance execution status, the execution content of the performance is determined in a manner corresponding to the predetermined performance execution status. Therefore, it is possible to provide a series of effects over a plurality of games in a predetermined effect execution situation. In this case, with the configuration of feature A1 above, in the case of the predetermined performance execution situation, even if the continuation reference information becomes the end information, the advantageous gaming state is continued without ending. It is possible to prevent a series of performances over a plurality of games from ending midway due to the end of an advantageous gaming state.

Feature A5. A predetermined performance start means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1116 to S1118 of the main side MPU 72 in the first embodiment) that starts the predetermined performance execution status based on the occurrence of a performance start opportunity,
The predetermined performance starting means is characterized in that even if the performance start opportunity occurs in the predetermined performance execution situation, the predetermined performance execution situation that is currently being executed is continued instead of starting the predetermined performance execution situation anew. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4.

According to feature A5, even if an opportunity to start a performance occurs in a predetermined performance execution situation, the predetermined performance execution situation that is currently being executed is continued without being newly started. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the predetermined performance execution situation from continuing excessively.

Feature A6. The predetermined performance execution status continues for a predetermined number of games, which is a plurality of games,
The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the predetermined performance starting means does not increase the remaining number of consecutive games in the predetermined performance execution situation even if the performance start opportunity occurs in the predetermined performance execution situation.

According to feature A6, even if an opportunity to start a performance occurs in a predetermined performance execution situation, the number of remaining games to continue in the predetermined performance execution situation is not increased, so that the predetermined performance execution situation is prevented from continuing excessively. becomes possible.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, wherein the predetermined performance execution status does not become an opportunity to update the continuation reference information to a side that moves away from the end information.

According to feature A7, even though the predetermined performance execution status does not provide an opportunity to update the continuation reference information to move away from the end information, if the predetermined performance execution status is the same, the continuation reference information becomes the termination information. Also, the advantageous gaming state continues without ending. As a result, in a situation where the continuation standard information is not end information, a predetermined performance execution situation that only serves as a performance that does not change the player's profit can be changed to an advantageous gaming state in a situation where the continuation standard information is end information. It becomes possible to create a situation in which the execution of the predetermined effect is continued, and it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention of the players to the predetermined performance execution situation.

Feature A8. The state continuation means is configured to terminate the advantageous gaming state by the terminating means even if the continuation reference information becomes the end information when the advantageous gaming state is in a specific production execution state (this precursor state). to continue the advantageous gaming state without
The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the specific performance execution status serves as an opportunity to update the continuation reference information to a side that moves away from the end information.

According to feature A8, even if the continuation standard information becomes end information in the case of a specific performance execution situation, the advantageous gaming state continues, and furthermore, the specific performance execution situation is updated to move the continuation standard information away from the end information. It becomes an opportunity. As a result, even if the continuation standard information becomes end information, if the advantageous gaming state continues due to the predetermined performance execution status or specific performance execution status, the player expects that the specific performance execution status is I will do it.

Feature A9. The information updating means is a side that, when the continuation reference information is not the end information in the predetermined performance execution situation, brings the continuation reference information closer to the end information based on the fact that the update opportunity occurs when the game is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that the gaming machine is updated to.

According to feature A9, if the continuation reference information is not the end information even in the predetermined performance execution situation, the continuation reference information is updated to the side closer to the end information based on the fact that the game has been executed and an update opportunity has occurred. be done. This makes it possible to prevent the advantage of being in the predetermined performance execution situation from becoming too high.

Note that for the configuration of features A1 to A9, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M5, Features N1 to N4, Features O1 to O5, Features P1 to P5, Features Q1 to Q13, Features R1 to Any one or more configurations among R5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

The invention of feature A group described above can solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a storage section that stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball firing device and directed toward the gaming area according to the player's firing operation. is fired. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or a process for increasing the number of game balls available to the player is executed. Ru.

In a slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game in a situation where gaming value such as medals is being bet, a lottery process is executed by a control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that variably displays the pattern;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture on the picture display means;
A game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that determines the game execution status based on the operation of the start operation means;
A winning combination lottery means (a function of executing the winning combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) that performs a winning combination lottery process when the game is in the execution status;
a stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the fluctuating display of the picture on the picture display means;
A pattern display that controls the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is being executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation device. A control means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
If a stop result corresponding to a winning role is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the fluctuation display of the symbols under the control of the symbol display control means, the winning combination is considered to have been won corresponding to the winning combination. A winning response control means (a function of executing the medium provision process and the response process at the end of the game in the main MPU 72) for executing the corresponding control;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A special role (index value IV=17 or 18 in the second and third embodiments) is set as a role to be won in the lottery process of the role,
The symbol display control means, when winning the special winning combination, operates in a predetermined stop mode (a stop operation mode in which the right reel 32R is first stopped and a "red 7" symbol is aimed at the main line ML, or the right reel 32R is stopped in the first stop mode). The predetermined stop result (the "red 7" symbol in the second and third embodiments) is determined based on the operation of the stop operation means in the stop operation mode in which the stop operation mode aims at the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML while stopping at the same time. or a combination of "BAR" symbols) can be displayed,
This gaming machine is
Predetermined notification target situation (pseudo-bonus state ST4 if the predetermined stop result is a combination of "Red 7"symbols; second half of pseudo-bonus state ST4 if the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols) If the special prize is won in the game, a special notification is given to the player to make the player aware that the stop operation means should be operated in the predetermined stop mode (if the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols) Special notification control means (BAR notification when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "Red 7" symbols) to be executed (Red 7 notification, BAR notification when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "Red 7" symbols) A combination of the function of the main side MPU 72 to execute the processes of steps S1406 to S1408 and steps S1410 to S1411 in the second embodiment, the function of the performance side MPU 92 to execute the process of step S1502, and the predetermined stop result is a "BAR" symbol. If so: the function of the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment to execute the process of steps S1412 to S1413, the function of the production side MPU 92 to execute the process of step S1504),
A predetermined non-notification situation in which the special prize has been won but the special notification has not been executed (if the predetermined stop result is a combination of "Red 7" symbols, the situation is not a pseudo bonus state ST4, the predetermined stop result is "BAR" symbol combination, a predetermined display notification is made based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated in the predetermined stop mode and the predetermined stop result is displayed in a situation that is not the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4). (If the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols, the first irregular notification sound in the second and third embodiments or the third irregular notification sound in the third embodiment, the predetermined stop result is A predetermined display notification control means (if the predetermined stop result is a combination of "Red 7" symbols) that causes the first irregular notification sound or second irregular notification sound to be executed if the combination is a combination of "BAR" symbols. If yes: the function of the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment to execute the process of step S1704 and the function of the production side MPU 92 to execute the process of step S1510, the main side MPU 72 in the third embodiment in step S1803 or step S1806 When the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols: Function to execute the process of step S1707 or step S1710 of the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment and step S1510 or of the production side MPU 92 a function of executing the process of step S1512, a function of executing the process of step S1809 or step S1812 of the main MPU 72 in the third embodiment),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B1, when a special winning combination is won in a predetermined notification target situation, a special notification is executed that allows the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in a predetermined stop mode. By operating the stop operation means in a predetermined stop mode according to the notification, it is possible to display a predetermined stop result. In this case, the predetermined display notification is executed based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated in the predetermined stop mode and the predetermined stop result is displayed in a predetermined non-notification situation where the special prize is won but the special notification is not executed. be done. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the predetermined stop result was displayed in a situation where the predetermined stop result should not have been displayed, and prevents the player from being confused by the display of the predetermined stop result. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening. Therefore, the game can be played suitably.

Feature B2: The symbol display means includes a plurality of symbol display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that variably display the symbols;
The predetermined stop mode includes a mode in which the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order (the right reel 32R is stopped first),
When the special combination is won, even if the stop operation means is operated so that the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas stops in the predetermined stop order, the predetermined stop result may not be displayed,
The gaming machine described in feature B1, characterized in that the specified display notification control means does not execute the specified display notification if the specified stop result is not displayed even if the stop operation means is operated so that the varying display of the patterns in the multiple pattern display areas stops in the specified stop order in the specified non-notification situation.

According to feature B2, even if the variable display of the symbols is stopped in a predetermined stop order in a predetermined non-notification situation, the predetermined display notification is not executed if the predetermined stop result is not displayed. This makes it possible to limit the situation in which the predetermined display notification is executed to a situation where the predetermined stop result is displayed in a predetermined non-notification situation, and prevents the predetermined display notification from being executed excessively. becomes possible.

Feature B3. A gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, characterized in that no penalty is given to the player even if the specified stop result is displayed in the specified non-alarm situation.

According to feature B3, when a predetermined stop result is displayed in a predetermined non-notification situation, a predetermined display notification is executed, but no penalty is given to the player. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage from occurring to a player who causes a predetermined stop result to be displayed in a predetermined non-notification situation due to an operational error.

Feature B4. A predetermined profit is given to the player when a predetermined event that is either winning the special prize or displaying the predetermined stop result occurs in the predetermined notification target situation; Predetermined profit giving means that does not give the predetermined profit to the player even if the predetermined event occurs in the notification situation (when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols: the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment) The function of executing the process of step S1604 or step S1608, when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols: the function of executing the process of step S1610 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3.

According to feature B4, when a predetermined event occurs in a predetermined notification target situation, which is either winning a special winning combination or displaying a predetermined stop result, a predetermined profit is given to the player. In the configuration in which the predetermined profit is not given even if the predetermined event occurs in the non-notification situation, when the predetermined stop result is displayed in the predetermined non-notification situation, the predetermined display notification is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being confused by the fact that a predetermined profit is not awarded even though a predetermined stop result is displayed in a predetermined non-notification situation.

Feature B5. A specific profit giving means (predetermined profit giving means) for giving the player a specific profit that is less advantageous to the player than the predetermined profit when the special prize is won in the predetermined non-notification situation and the predetermined stop result is displayed. When the stop result is a combination of "Red 7" symbols: the function of executing the re-gaming profit of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment; when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols: the second In the embodiment, the main MPU 72 has a function of executing the re-gaming profit and the main MPU 72 has a function of executing the process of step S1604 or step S1608),
The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the predetermined display notification is executed in a manner that allows the player to recognize that the specific profit has been awarded.

According to feature B5, if a specific winning combination is won in a predetermined non-announcement situation and a predetermined stop result is displayed, a special win is won in a predetermined notification target situation and a predetermined stop result is displayed. In a configuration in which a specific profit that is less advantageous to the player than the predetermined profit that would be given to the player when a certain predetermined event occurs, the specific profit is awarded to the player in a predetermined non-announcement situation. When a player wins and a predetermined stop result is displayed, a predetermined display notification is executed so that the player can recognize that a specific profit has been awarded. Thereby, when a specific combination is won in a predetermined non-notification situation and a predetermined stop result is displayed, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that a specific profit has been awarded instead of a predetermined profit.

Feature B6. The specific profit granting means is characterized in that, if the special prize is won in the predetermined non-notification situation, the specific profit is awarded to the player regardless of the stop result. Game machine.

According to feature B6, in a configuration in which a specific profit is given to a player regardless of the stop result if a player wins a special winning combination in a predetermined non-reporting situation, When a player wins and a predetermined stop result is displayed, a predetermined display notification is executed so that the player can recognize that a specific profit has been awarded, so the predetermined stop result is displayed in a predetermined non-notification situation. It becomes possible to make the player aware that what is done will not affect profits.

Feature B7. The gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6, wherein the specific profit is a profit from replaying.

According to feature B7, in a configuration in which a re-gaming profit is given as a specific profit, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects.

Feature B8. The symbol display control means controls a specific stopping mode (a stopping operation mode in which the right reel 32R is first stopped and a "Red 7" symbol is aimed at the "Red 7" symbol on the main line ML, in this case, a predetermined stopping mode) when the special winning combination is won. is a specific stop result (a combination of "Red 7" symbols, In this case, the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols) that can be displayed,
If this gaming machine wins the special winning combination in a specific notification target situation (the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, in this case, the predetermined notification target situation is the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4), the gaming machine is configured in the specific stop mode. Predetermined notification control means (in the second embodiment) that makes it possible to execute a predetermined notification (red 7 notification, in this case, special notification BAR notification) that allows the player to recognize that the stop operation device should be operated The function of executing the process of steps S1410 to S1411 of the main side MPU 72, the function of executing the process of step S1502 of the production side MPU 92, in this case, the special notification control means is the function of executing the process of step S1410 of the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment. - a function to execute the process of step S1413, a function to execute the process of step S1504 of the production side MPU 92),
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the predetermined non-notification situation is a situation in which the special prize is won and the predetermined notification is executed.

According to feature B8, when winning a special prize, a predetermined stop result is displayed based on the fact that the stop operation means was operated in a predetermined stop mode, and a specified stop result is displayed based on the fact that the stop operation means was operated in a specific stop mode. In a configuration in which a stop result is displayed, a special notification is executed that allows the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in a predetermined stop mode if a special winning combination is won in a predetermined notification target situation. If a special winning combination is won in a specific notification target situation, a predetermined notification is performed that allows the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in a specific stop mode. This makes it possible to vary the type of stop result that prompts the stop display depending on the situation when the special prize is won. In this case, a stop operation is performed in a predetermined stop mode in a situation where a predetermined notification is being executed that allows the player to recognize that he has won a special prize in a specific notification target situation and should operate the stop operation means in a specific stop mode. When the means is operated and a predetermined stop result is displayed, a predetermined display notification is executed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a stop result different from the stop result that was the subject of notification has been displayed.

Feature B9. a predetermined benefit granting means that grants a predetermined profit to the player when a predetermined event occurs that is either the winning of the special prize or the display of the predetermined stop result in the predetermined notification target situation; A function of executing the process of step S1610 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment);
A specific benefit granting means ( A function of executing the process of step S1608 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein the predetermined profit is more advantageous to the player than the specific profit.

According to feature B9, when a predetermined stop result corresponding to the provision of a predetermined profit with a relatively high degree of advantage is displayed in a specific notification target situation in which a specific profit with a relatively low degree of advantage can be provided, the predetermined stop result is displayed. Display notification is executed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the target of profit provision is not the predetermined profit.

Feature B10. A specific display notification based on the fact that the special prize is won in the predetermined notification target situation and the special notification is executed, but the stop operation means is operated in the specific stop mode and the specific stop result is displayed. (the third irregular notification sound in the third embodiment) is provided with a means (a function for executing the process of step S1806 of the main MPU 72 in the third embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature B8 or B9.

According to feature B10, in a situation where a special notification is being executed to enable a player to recognize that a special role has been won in a specific notification situation and that the stop operation means should be operated in a specific stop mode, a specific display notification is executed if the stop operation means is operated in a specific stop mode and a specific stop result is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a stop result different from the stop result that was the subject of the notification has been displayed.

Note that for the configuration of features B1 to B10, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M5, Features N1 to N4, Features O1 to O5, Features P1 to P5, Features Q1 to Q13, Features R1 to Any one or more configurations among R5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. a pattern display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of pattern display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that variably display patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture on the picture display means;
A game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that determines the game execution status based on the operation of the start operation means;
A winning combination lottery means (a function of executing the winning combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) that performs a winning combination lottery process when the game is in the execution status;
a stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the fluctuating display of the picture on the picture display means;
A pattern display that controls the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is being executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation device. A control means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
If a stop result corresponding to a winning role is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the fluctuation display of the symbols under the control of the symbol display control means, the winning combination is considered to have been won corresponding to the winning combination. A winning response control means (a function of executing the medium provision process and the response process at the end of the game in the main MPU 72) for executing the corresponding control;
In a gaming machine equipped with
As the winning role in the lottery process of the above-mentioned role,
A first stop result (a combination of "red 7" symbols in the second and third embodiments) can be displayed when the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order. 1 role (index value IV=17 in the second and third embodiments),
When the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas is stopped in the predetermined stopping order, the first stopping result can be displayed, and when the first stopping result is not displayed, the second stopping result (second stopping result) is displayed. 2, a combination of "BAR" symbols in the third embodiment) can be displayed (index value IV = 18 in the second and third embodiments);
A gaming machine characterized by being set.

According to feature C1, when the first role is won, the first stop result can be displayed when the changing display of the patterns in the multiple pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order, and when the second role is won, the first stop result can be displayed when the changing display of the patterns in the multiple pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order, and the second stop result can be displayed when the first stop result is not displayed. This makes it possible to increase the probability that the first stop result can be displayed when the changing display of the patterns in the multiple pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order in a situation different from the above-mentioned predetermined situation by using the second role for enabling the second stop result to be displayed when the changing display of the patterns in the multiple pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order in a predetermined situation. If the probability of the first role is set to a predetermined probability in order to set the probability that the first stop result can be displayed to a predetermined probability, the first role will be won with the predetermined probability even in the above-mentioned predetermined situation. However, since the first stop result can be displayed even when the second role is won as described above, it is possible to set the probability that the first stop result can be displayed in the above-mentioned predetermined situation to a predetermined probability, while setting the probability that the first stop result can be displayed in the above-mentioned predetermined situation to a lower probability than the predetermined probability. This effect can be achieved by using the second role that allows the second stop result to be displayed. This makes it possible to play the game in an optimal manner.

Feature C2. The symbol display control means is configured to stop the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas in the predetermined stop order when the first prize is won or the second prize is won. When the stop operation means is operated at the first operation timing (timing when aiming at the "Red 7" symbol on the main line ML), the first stop result can be displayed, and the second combination In the case of winning, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas is stopped in the predetermined stop order, and at the second operation timing (the timing when the "BAR" symbol is aimed at the main line ML). The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that the second stop result can be displayed when the stop operation means is operated.

According to feature C2, when the first winning combination or the second winning combination is won, the fluctuating display of symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas is stopped in a predetermined stopping order, and the stopping operation means is activated at the first operation timing. When the operation is performed, the first stop result is displayed, and when the second winning combination is won, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order, and the stop operation means is operated at the second operation timing. The second stop result is displayed if the stop result is found. As a result, when the second winning combination is won and the fluctuating display of symbols in multiple symbol display areas is stopped in a predetermined stopping order, the first stopping result can be displayed, but the first stopping result is not displayed. In the configuration in which the second stop result can be displayed at the same time, the stop result to be displayed can be made different between the first stop result and the second stop result depending on the operation timing of the stop operation means.

Feature C3. Regardless of whether the first winning combination is won in the first notification target situation (the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4) or the second winning combination is won in the first notification target situation, a plurality of the symbols A first notification is executed that causes the player to recognize that the variable display of the symbols in the display area should be stopped in the predetermined stop order and the stop operation means should be operated at the first operation timing. 1 notification control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1406 to S1408 and steps S1410 to S1411 of the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S1502 of the production side MPU 92),
If the second winning combination is won in the second notification target situation (second half situation of pseudo-bonus state ST4), the fluctuating display of the symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas is stopped in the predetermined stopping order, and at the second operation timing. A second notification control unit that executes a second notification that allows the player to recognize that the stop operation unit should be operated (processing of steps S1412 to S1413 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment) (a function to execute the process of step S1504 of the production side MPU 92),
The gaming machine according to feature C2, comprising:

According to feature C3, in the first notification target situation, whether the first winning combination is won or the second winning combination is won, the fluctuating display of symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas is stopped in a predetermined stopping order. At the same time, a first notification is executed to enable the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated at the first operation timing. Thereby, in the first notification target situation, it is possible to display the first stop result regardless of whether the first winning combination is won or the second winning combination is won. On the other hand, in the second notification target situation, if the second winning combination is won, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order, and the game player is informed that the stop operation means should be operated at the second operation timing. A second notification that allows the person to recognize the information is executed. Thereby, in the second notification target situation, it is possible to display the second stop result when the second winning combination is won.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the first notification control means causes the first notification to be executed when the first winning combination is won in the second notification target situation.

According to feature C4, the first notification is executed if the first winning combination is won not only in the first notification target situation but also in the second notification target situation, so the first notification is won in the first notification target situation. It is possible to display the first stop result when the first stop result occurs. In other words, in the first notification target situation, the probability that the first stop result can be displayed is the sum of the winning probabilities of the first and second winning combinations, whereas in the second notification target situation, the first stop result can be displayed. The probability that the result can be displayed corresponds to the winning probability of the first winning combination, and the probability that the second stop result can be displayed corresponds to the winning probability of the second winning combination.

Feature C5. In the first notification target situation, either a case where the first winning combination is won and the first stopping result is displayed, or a case where the second winning combination is winning and the first stopping result is displayed. The gaming machine according to feature C3 or C4, wherein the same first profit (adding 1 to the value of the transition advantage counter in the main side RAM 74) is given to the player.

According to feature C5, in the first notification target situation, either when the first winning combination is won and the first stop result is displayed, or when the second winning combination is won and the first stopping result is displayed. Since the same first profit is given to the player, the first stop result will be displayed regardless of whether the first prize is won or the second prize is won in the first notification target situation. In a configuration in which the player performs a stop operation in such a manner that the player performs a stop operation, it is possible to make the degree of advantage of displaying the first stop result in the first notification target situation constant.

Feature C6. A first profit giving means (a second implementation method) for giving a first profit to a player in either case of winning the first winning combination or winning the second winning combination in the first notification target situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C5, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of step S1604 and step S1608 of the main MPU 72 in the above embodiment.

According to feature C6, if the first prize or the second prize is won in the first notification target situation, the first profit is given to the player regardless of the stop result after the symbol fluctuation display. This makes it possible to prevent the first benefit from being lost due to an error in the stop operation.

Feature C7. When a second target event occurs in the second notification target situation, which is either winning the second winning combination or displaying the second stop result, the second profit (transition in the main RAM 74) occurs. A feature characterized in that the player is provided with a second benefit granting means (a function of executing the process of step S1610 of the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment) for granting the player a profit (by adding 2 to the value of the time advantage counter) to the player. The gaming machine described in C5 or C6.

According to feature C7, when the second target event occurs, which is either winning the second winning combination or displaying the second stop result in the second notification target situation, the second profit is awarded to the player. Therefore, in the second notification target situation, the player expects the second target event to occur.

Feature C8. The gaming machine according to feature C7, wherein the second profit is more advantageous to the player than the first profit.

According to feature C8, since the second profit is more advantageous to the player than the first profit, it is possible to win the first prize or the second prize in the first notification target situation or to win the first prize in the first notification target situation. Rather than displaying the first stop result, the player expects the second target event to occur in the second notification target situation.

Feature C9. The plurality of symbol display areas include a left symbol display region (left reel 32L), a middle symbol display region (middle reel 32M), and a right symbol display region (right reel 32R),
Features C1 to 3 are characterized in that the symbol display area in which the variable display of the symbols is to be stopped first in the predetermined stop order is a predetermined symbol display area (right reel 32R) other than the left symbol display area. The gaming machine according to any one of C8.

According to feature C9, even if the first winning combination is won, the first stop result will not be displayed unless the fluctuating display of symbols in a predetermined symbol display area other than the left symbol display area is stopped first, and the second winning combination will not be displayed. Even if the player wins, the first stop result and the second stop result will not be displayed unless the fluctuating display of the symbols in the predetermined symbol display area other than the left symbol display area is first stopped. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the first stop result and the second stop result will be displayed in a situation where the stop order of the variable display of symbols is not notified.

Note that for the configuration of features C1 to C9, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M5, Features N1 to N4, Features O1 to O5, Features P1 to P5, Features Q1 to Q13, Features R1 to Any one or more configurations among R5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

Each invention of the feature B group and the feature C group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a storage section that stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball firing device and directed toward the gaming area according to the player's firing operation. is fired. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a lottery process is executed, for example, or a process for increasing the number of game balls available to the player is executed. Ru.

In a slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game in a situation where gaming value such as medals is being bet, a lottery process is executed by a control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the one exemplified above, it is necessary to play the game in a suitable manner, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A display unit (image display device 63 in the fourth and fifth embodiments) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 63a in the fourth and fifth embodiments);
Display storage means (memory module 101 in the fourth and fifth embodiments) that stores image data in advance;
Using the image data, drawing data is set in the setting storage area (first frame area 106a and second frame area 106b in the fourth and fifth embodiments), and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is sent to the setting storage area (first frame area 106a and second frame area 106b in the fourth and fifth embodiments). Display control means (production side MPU 92 and VDP 103 in the fourth and fifth embodiments) that displays an image on the display section based on output to the display means;
Equipped with
The display control means includes a first setting area (first divided area DA1 when divided into two) corresponding to a first display area (left side area A1) in the display section in the setting storage area, and a first setting area (first divided area DA1 when divided into two), and the setting storage area. , a predetermined corresponding image (video display G21, G22 for presentation, etc. Predetermined drawing execution means (executes the processing of steps S2502 to S2505 of the VDP 103 in the fourth embodiment) that sets predetermined drawing data (image data D1 at the time of division) that enables display of the number notification display G23) A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing the processing of steps S2602 to S2606 of the VDP 103 in the fifth embodiment.

According to feature D1, by setting predetermined drawing data in each of the first setting area and the second setting area in the setting storage area, a predetermined correspondence is created in each of the first display area and second display area in the display section. The image is displayed. As a result, when displaying predetermined corresponding images in each of the first display area and second display area of the display section, the same predetermined image data is used to display the same predetermined corresponding image in each of the first setting area and second setting area. All you need to do is set the drawing data. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably perform the display on the display means.

Feature D2. The gaming machine described in Feature D1, characterized in that the predetermined drawing execution means includes copy execution means (a function for executing the process of step S2505 of VDP103 in the fourth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2606 of VDP103 in the fifth embodiment) that copies the predetermined drawing data to the second setting area.

According to feature D2, the predetermined drawing data is set in the second setting area by copying the predetermined drawing data to the second setting area. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load compared to a configuration in which predetermined drawing data is set for each of the first setting area and the second setting area using image data.

Feature D3. The predetermined drawing execution means includes means for setting the predetermined drawing data in the first setting area using the image data (a function of executing the process of step S2504 of the VDP 103 in the fourth embodiment),
The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the copy execution means copies the predetermined drawing data set in the first setting area to the second setting area.

According to feature D3, by copying the predetermined drawing data set in the first setting area using image data to the second setting area, the predetermined drawing data is set in the second setting area. This makes it possible to set the predetermined drawing data in the second setting process using the predetermined drawing data set in the first setting area.

Feature D4. The predetermined drawing execution means is a means for setting the predetermined drawing data using the image data in a storage area (expansion buffer 105) different from the setting storage area (step S2604 of the VDP 103 in the fifth embodiment). function),
The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the copy execution means copies the predetermined drawing data set in the different storage areas to each of the first setting area and the second setting area.

According to feature D4, predetermined drawing data is set using image data in a storage area different from the setting storage area, and the set predetermined drawing data is copied to each of the first setting area and the second setting area. be done. This makes it possible to create the predetermined drawing data to be copied to the first setting area and the second setting area without performing drawing processing to the setting storage area.

Feature D5. In addition to displaying the predetermined corresponding image in each of the first display area and the second display area, the display control means displays the same content in each of the first display area and the second display area. Another corresponding drawing that makes it possible to display other corresponding images (remaining number of continued games image G31, number of acquired number display image G32, remaining number of grants display image G33, stop order notification image G34, and operation notification image G35) Data (image data D2 corresponding to the remaining number of continuation games image G31, image data D3 corresponding to the acquired number display image G32, image data D4 corresponding to the remaining number of games to be awarded image G33, image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34 and image data D5 corresponding to the operation notification image G35) in the setting storage area (a function of executing the processing of steps S2506 to S2513 of the VDP 103 in the fourth embodiment, the fifth embodiment) The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of steps S2607 to S2614 of the VDP 103 in the above-mentioned mode.

According to feature D5, while displaying a predetermined corresponding image in each of the first display area and the second display area, another corresponding image that is not an image with the same content is displayed in each of the first display area and the second display area. It becomes possible to display images.

Feature D6. The different correspondence setting means sets a setting area including the first setting area and the second setting area so that the different corresponding image is displayed in a display area including the first display area and the second display area. The gaming machine according to feature D5, characterized in that the separate corresponding drawing data is set.

According to feature D6, since the separate corresponding image is displayed in the display area including the first display area and the second display area, the display is not limited to the partitions even though the first display area and the second display area are partitioned. It becomes possible to do this.

Feature D7. The separate correspondence setting means sets the separate correspondence in a setting area including the first setting area and the second setting area after the predetermined drawing data is set in each of the first setting area and the second setting area. The gaming machine according to feature D6, characterized in that drawing data is set.

According to feature D7, after the predetermined drawing data is set in each of the first setting area and the second setting area, separate corresponding drawing data is set in the setting area including the first setting area and the second setting area. Therefore, in front of the predetermined corresponding image being displayed in each section of the first display area and the second display area, another corresponding image is displayed without being restricted by the sections of the first display area and the second display area. . As a result, the player can see each of the predetermined corresponding images displayed in each of the first display area and the second display area, and the different corresponding images displayed without being restricted by the partitions of the first display area and the second display area. It is possible to draw attention to the

Feature D8. The display control means includes specific drawing data that allows a specific corresponding image to be displayed in a display area that includes the first display area and the second display area that includes the first setting area and the second setting area. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with means for setting in the setting area (a function for causing the display shown in FIGS. 27(a) to 27(c) in the VDP 103 to be performed). .

According to feature D8, it is also possible to generate a display period in which a specific corresponding image is displayed in a situation where the first display area and the second display area are not partitioned.

Note that for the configuration of features D1 to D8, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M5, Features N1 to N4, Features O1 to O5, Features P1 to P5, Features Q1 to Q13, Features R1 to Any one or more configurations among R5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. A display unit (image display device 63 in the fourth and fifth embodiments) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 63a in the fourth and fifth embodiments);
Display control means (the production side MPU 92 and VDP 103 in the fourth and fifth embodiments) for displaying an image on the display unit;
Equipped with
The display control means is configured such that the display section has a plurality of display areas (a left side area A1 and a right side area A2 when divided into two, an upper left area A11, an upper right area A12, a lower left area A13, and a lower left area when divided into four). The lower right area A14) is divided into two areas, and each of the plurality of display areas displays the partition side image (video display G21, G22 for effect and number notification display G23 when divided into two, and number of grants notification display G23 when divided into four). In a state where the animation display G41, G42 for production and the number notification display G43) are displayed, another corresponding image (remaining number of continuous games image G31, division-based control means (fourth and fifth embodiments) for controlling the display means to display an acquisition number display image G32, a remaining grant number display image G33, a stop order notification image G34, and an operation notification image G35; (a function of the performance side MPU 92 to execute display control processing for an additional period; and a function of the VDP 103 to execute division image drawing processing).

According to feature E1, when a divided side image is displayed in each of a plurality of display areas partitioned on the display unit, another corresponding image that is not an image with the same content is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas. is displayed. As a result, while drawing attention to the compartment-side images displayed in each of the multiple display areas, display contents different from these compartment-side images are provided by separate corresponding images that are displayed independently of the multiple display areas. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, it is possible to suitably display the information on the display means.

Feature E2. The gaming machine described in Feature E1, characterized in that the different corresponding image is displayed as if it exists in front of the multiple display areas.

According to feature E2, in a configuration in which a separate corresponding image is displayed while a partition side image is displayed in each of a plurality of display areas, the separate corresponding image is located in front of the plurality of display areas. This makes it possible to make other corresponding images stand out.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein the different corresponding image is displayed across the plurality of display areas so as to straddle the boundaries of the plurality of display areas.

According to feature E3, the partition side images are displayed within the range of their respective display areas, whereas the separate corresponding images are displayed across the multiple display areas so as to straddle the boundaries of the multiple display areas. Ru. This makes it possible to display another corresponding image in a larger size than the partition-side image.

Feature E4. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the separate corresponding image is an image for notifying a player of predetermined content.

According to feature E4, separate corresponding images for notifying players of predetermined content are displayed independently without being restricted to a plurality of display areas, so that notification of predetermined content can be suitably performed. It becomes possible.

Feature E5. The display control means displays an after-operation image (a given number notification display G23 if the division is divided into two, a grant number notification display G23 if the division is divided into four, etc.) based on the operation of the operation means (production operating device 121) during the valid operation period. A means for displaying a number notification display G43) on the display section (a function for displaying the display shown in FIG. 43(c) or FIG. 44(c) in the VDP 103);
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the separate corresponding image is an image that allows the player to recognize that the operation means should be operated during the operation validity period.

According to feature E5, the different corresponding image that allows the player to recognize that the operation means should be operated during the valid operation period is displayed independently without being limited to multiple display areas, so that it is possible to preferably notify the player that the operation means should be operated during the valid operation period.

Feature E6. Any one of features E1 to E5 characterized in that the number of display areas displayed as the plurality of display areas is different between a first display situation (when divided into two) and a second display situation (when divided into four). The gaming machine described in .

According to feature E6, the number of display areas displayed as multiple display areas differs between the first display status and the second display status, making it possible to diversify the display content when displaying partition side images using multiple display areas.

Feature E7. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the partition side images in each of the plurality of display areas are displayed using the same image data.

According to feature E7, since the partition-side images in each of the plurality of display areas are displayed using the same image data, it is possible to display the partition-side images while reducing the processing load.

Note that for the configuration of features E1 to E7, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M5, Features N1 to N4, Features O1 to O5, Features P1 to P5, Features Q1 to Q13, Features R1 to Any one or more configurations among R5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

Each invention of the feature D group and the feature E group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a storage section that stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball firing device and directed toward the gaming area according to the player's firing operation. is fired. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a lottery process is executed, for example, or a process for increasing the number of game balls available to the player is executed. Ru.

In a slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game in a situation where gaming value such as medals is being bet, a lottery process is executed by a control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary that the display on the display means be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group F>
Feature F1. A game round (game) is started based on the occurrence of a predetermined start trigger (operation of the start lever 41 in a situation in which game media is bet), and a predetermined end trigger (operation of the start lever 41 in a situation where game media is bet) occurs. A game round control means (executes the processing of steps S305 to S312 in the main side MPU 72) that controls the execution of each game round so that the relevant game round ends based on the occurrence of the rotation stop operation (rotation stop operation by 42 to 44). function) and
A predetermined target game round (in the sixth embodiment, the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5; in the eighth embodiment, the remaining number of bonuses is "0" in the AT state ST5) A caution event that causes a predetermined caution event (a caution display by displaying a caution image G52) to be executed in response to the occurrence of a game or a game in which the ending condition is satisfied (a game in which the ending condition is satisfied) that allows the player to take a prescribed caution. Control means (in the sixth embodiment, the function to execute the control process of the caution display in the production side MPU 92, in the eighth embodiment, the function to execute the processing of step S4103 and step S4109 in the production side MPU 92, in the ninth embodiment Now, the function of executing the processing of step S4305 and step S4309 in the production side MPU 92),
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that when the next game round is started with respect to the game round of the predetermined target in a situation where the predetermined caution event is being executed, the execution of the predetermined caution event can be continued.

According to the feature F1, since a predetermined caution event is executed in response to the occurrence of a game session with a predetermined target, it is possible to urge a player to take a predetermined caution in response to the occurrence of a game session with a predetermined target. In this case, when the next game round is started for the predetermined target game round in a situation where the predetermined caution event is being executed, the execution of the predetermined caution event can be continued. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the execution of the predetermined caution event is continued without being terminated when a new game is played, and it is possible to ensure an opportunity to make the player aware of the predetermined caution event. Become.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the predetermined cautionary event is an event that allows the player to be careful about becoming absorbed in the game.

According to feature F2, by executing the predetermined warning event, it is possible to warn the player against becoming absorbed in the game. By providing the configuration of feature F1 above, it is possible to ensure an opportunity for the player to recognize an event that calls attention to the player against becoming absorbed in the game.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, characterized in that a situation may occur in which execution of the predetermined caution event is ended before the next game round for the predetermined target game round is started.

According to feature F3, the execution of the predetermined caution event is not only continued when the next game session starts for the predetermined target game session, but also when the execution of the predetermined caution event continues in the next game session for the predetermined target game session. It is possible to generate a situation in which the execution of the predetermined caution event is terminated before the predetermined attention event is started. This makes it possible to diversify the relationship between the execution of the predetermined caution event and the game rounds.

Feature F4. The caution event control means is a means for terminating the execution of the predetermined caution event based on the elapse of a predetermined duration period from the start of the execution of the predetermined caution event. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S3009 of the side MPU 92.

According to feature F4, since the predetermined caution event is terminated based on the elapse of a predetermined duration period from the start of its execution, the period during which the player confirms the predetermined caution event is the predetermined duration period. It becomes possible to reliably secure the event over the period of time, and it also becomes possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the trigger for ending the predetermined caution event.

Feature F5. The game round of the predetermined target is characterized in that it is a game round when a predetermined game state (pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the sixth embodiment, AT state ST5 in the eighth and ninth embodiments) ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4.

According to feature F5, in a configuration where a predetermined target game time occurs when a predetermined game state ends, a predetermined caution event is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined target game time, so that the predetermined game state ends. It is possible to urge the player to take certain precautions when doing so.

Feature F6. When the predetermined gaming state ends, an end corresponding display corresponding to the end of the predetermined gaming state (in the sixth embodiment, a bonus end display, in the eighth embodiment, an AT end display, in the ninth embodiment, an end display) image G61, total number of games image G62, and total number of acquisitions image G63). In the embodiment, the production side MPU 92 has a function of executing the processing of steps S4102 and step S4108, and in the ninth embodiment, the production side MPU 92 has a function of executing the processing of steps S4302, step S4304, step S4309, and step S4310). ,
The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the execution period of the predetermined caution event may overlap with the entire or part of the execution period of the termination correspondence display.

According to feature F6, when the predetermined gaming state ends, an end correspondence display is performed, so that it is possible to make the player clearly aware that the predetermined gaming state has ended. In this case, the execution period of the predetermined caution event may overlap with the entire or part of the execution period of the termination correspondence display. This makes it possible for the player who is paying attention to the termination response display to also recognize the predetermined cautionary event.

Feature F7. The caution event control means is a means for starting the predetermined caution event in a situation where the termination correspondence display is being executed (step S2805 and steps S3002 to S3004 of the production side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature F6, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function for executing processing.

According to feature F7, since the predetermined caution event is started in a situation where the end response display is being executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the predetermined caution event has been executed with the end of the predetermined gaming state as a trigger. becomes.

Feature F8. A situation in which the predetermined caution event ends before execution of the termination correspondence display ends, and a situation in which the predetermined caution event ends after execution of the termination correspondence display ends may occur. The gaming machine according to feature F6 or F7.

According to feature F8, a situation in which the predetermined caution event ends before the execution of the termination correspondence display ends, and a situation in which the predetermined caution event ends after the execution of the termination correspondence display ends, can occur. It is possible to diversify the timing at which the predetermined caution event ends in relation to the end timing of the end correspondence display.

Feature F9. The termination response control means causes the termination response display to be executed based on the occurrence of a specific opportunity (bet setting of gaming media) necessary for starting a new gaming round in a situation where the termination response display is being executed. Ending means (in the sixth embodiment, the function of the production side MPU 92 to execute the process of step S2903, in the eighth embodiment, the function of the production side MPU 92 to execute the process of step S4108, in the ninth embodiment, the production side The gaming machine according to any one of features F6 to F8, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of step S4309 and step S4310 of the MPU 92.

According to feature F9, the termination correspondence display is terminated based on the occurrence of a specific opportunity necessary to start a new game round in a situation where the termination correspondence display is being executed. This makes it possible to prevent the process from continuing for an excessively long time.

Note that for the configuration of features F1 to F9, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M5, Features N1 to N4, Features O1 to O5, Features P1 to P5, Features Q1 to Q13, Features R1 to Any one or more configurations among R5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1. A predetermined game progress means (a function for executing the reel control process of the main MPU 72) that progresses a predetermined game based on the operation of the player (the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the execution of the lottery process (FIG. 13) triggered by the operation of the start lever 41 and the stopping of the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R triggered by the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44);
A restriction generating means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3116, S3117, S3212, and S3213 of the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment) for generating a progress restriction state (a freeze period in the sixth embodiment) in which the start or progress of the predetermined game is restricted based on the occurrence of a restriction trigger (the end of the final game in the AT state ST5 in the sixth embodiment);
A warning event control means for executing a predetermined warning event (warning display by displaying a warning image G52) that allows a player to be alerted to a predetermined warning in the progress restriction situation (in the sixth embodiment, a function for executing a control process for warning display in the AT state ST5 in the performance side MPU 92);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature G1, by executing a predetermined target event, it is possible to call a predetermined attention to the player. In this case, since the predetermined caution event is executed in a progress restriction situation in which the start or progress of the predetermined game is restricted, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the predetermined caution event.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the predetermined caution event is an event that allows the player to be careful about becoming absorbed in the game.

According to feature G2, by executing the predetermined warning event, it is possible to warn the player against becoming absorbed in the game. By having the configuration of feature G1 described above, it is possible to draw the player's attention to an event that calls attention to the player against becoming absorbed in the game.

Feature G3. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, wherein the caution event control means causes execution of the predetermined caution event to start after the progress restriction situation is started.

According to feature G3, since the execution of the predetermined caution event is started after the progress restriction situation is started, it is possible to start the execution of the predetermined caution event under a situation where the progress of the predetermined game is restricted.

Feature G4. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, wherein the caution event control means causes execution of the predetermined caution event to end before the progress restriction situation ends.

According to feature G4, since the execution of the predetermined caution event ends before the progress restriction situation ends, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game from proceeding during the predetermined caution event.

Feature G5. The caution event control means is a means for terminating the execution of the predetermined caution event based on the elapse of a predetermined duration period from the start of the execution of the predetermined caution event. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the process of step S3009 of the side MPU 92.

According to feature G5, since the predetermined caution event is terminated based on the elapse of a predetermined duration period from the start of its execution, the period during which the player confirms the predetermined caution event is the predetermined duration period. It becomes possible to reliably secure the event over the period of time, and it also becomes possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the trigger for ending the predetermined caution event.

Feature G6. The restriction generation means generates the progress restriction situation when a predetermined gaming state (AT state ST5 in the sixth embodiment) ends;
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, wherein the caution event control means causes the predetermined caution event to be executed in the progress restriction situation when the predetermined gaming state ends. .

According to feature G6, when a predetermined gaming state ends, a progress restriction situation occurs and a predetermined caution event is executed in the progress restriction situation. This makes it possible to call the player to a predetermined caution when a predetermined gaming state ends.

Feature G7. End response control means (effect in the sixth embodiment) for causing an end response display (AT end display in the sixth embodiment) to be performed when the predetermined gaming state ends. A function of executing the processing of step S2804 and step S2903 of the side MPU 92),
The gaming machine according to feature G6, wherein the termination correspondence display can be continued even after the progress restriction situation ends.

According to feature G7, when the predetermined gaming state ends, an end correspondence display is performed, so that it is possible to make the player clearly aware that the predetermined gaming state has ended. In this case, since the end correspondence display can be continued even after the progress restriction situation ends, it becomes possible for the player to clearly recognize that the predetermined gaming state has ended.

Feature G8. The caution event control means is a means for starting the predetermined caution event in a situation where the termination correspondence display is being executed (step S2805 and steps S3002 to S3004 of the production side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature G7, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function for executing processing.

According to feature G8, since the predetermined caution event is started in a situation where the termination response display is being executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the predetermined caution event has been executed with the end of the predetermined gaming state as a trigger. becomes.

Feature G9. The termination response control means is configured to determine that, in a situation where the termination response display is being executed, a specific trigger (bet setting of gaming media) necessary for the progression restriction situation to end and a new gaming round to start a new game round has occurred. The gaming machine according to feature G7 or G8, further comprising means for terminating the termination corresponding display (a function of executing the process of step S2903 of the production side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment).

According to feature G9, the termination correspondence display is terminated based on the occurrence of a specific opportunity necessary to start a new game round in a situation where the termination correspondence display is being executed. This makes it possible to prevent the process from continuing for an excessively long time.

Note that for the configuration of features G1 to G9, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M5, Features N1 to N4, Features O1 to O5, Features P1 to P5, Features Q1 to Q13, Features R1 to Any one or more configurations among R5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. When the predetermined gaming state (AT state ST5 in the sixth and seventh embodiments) ends, a predetermined caution event (a caution display by displaying a caution image G52) that allows the player to receive a prescribed caution is executed. a first caution event control means (a function that executes the process of step S3310 of the production side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment and the control process of the caution display);
A second caution event control means for executing the predetermined caution event when the predetermined gaming state continues (in the sixth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S3404 and step S3408 in the production side MPU 92, and a caution) A function of executing display control processing, in the seventh embodiment, a function of executing step S3504 and caution display control processing in the production side MPU 92),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature H1, by executing the predetermined caution event when the predetermined gaming state ends, it becomes possible to urge the player to take a predetermined caution when the predetermined gaming state ends. Moreover, even if the predetermined gaming state continues, the predetermined caution event is executed, thereby making it possible to increase the frequency with which the predetermined caution event is executed.

Feature H2. The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the predetermined caution event is an event that allows the player to be careful about becoming absorbed in the game.

According to feature H2, by executing the predetermined warning event, it is possible to call the player's attention against getting absorbed in the game. By providing the configuration of feature H1 above, it is possible to diversify the situations in which an event that calls attention to the player against becoming absorbed in the game occurs.

Feature H3. Even if the predetermined gaming state continues, the predetermined gaming state actually continues after the performance that allows the player to recognize that the predetermined gaming state may end is executed. Means for generating a revival-compatible performance (revival-compatible performance in the sixth and seventh embodiments) in which a performance that makes the player recognizeable (in the sixth embodiment, steps S3401 to S3407 in the performance-side MPU 92) (in the seventh embodiment, a function to execute the processing of steps S3501 to S3507 in the production side MPU 92),
The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, wherein the second caution event control means causes the predetermined caution event to be executed in a situation in which the revival corresponding performance occurs.

According to feature H3, by executing the revival response performance, it is possible to give the player the surprise that the predetermined gaming state actually continues after being made to think that the predetermined gaming state has ended. In this case, in a situation where a revival compatible performance occurs, there is a possibility that the predetermined gaming state will end in the resurrection compatible performance by executing a predetermined caution event in the same way as when the predetermined gaming state actually ends. When a predetermined game state ends in a situation where a performance that makes the player recognizeable is being executed, it is easy to make the player think that.

Feature H4. The first attention event control means is configured to terminate execution of the predetermined attention event based on the occurrence of a first termination trigger (passage of a predetermined display duration period). a function of executing the processing of steps S3005 to S3009 of the side MPU 92),
The second caution event control means includes a second termination means (second termination means) for terminating the execution of the predetermined caution event based on the occurrence of a second termination trigger (bet setting of gaming media) different from the first termination trigger. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the process of step S3408 of the production side MPU 92 in the embodiment of No. 6.

According to feature H4, the termination of the predetermined caution event is made different by different ending conditions between the predetermined caution event that is executed when the predetermined gaming state ends and the predetermined caution event that is executed when the predetermined gaming state continues. It becomes possible to make conditions suitable for each situation.

Feature H5. The gaming machine described in Feature H4, wherein the second attention event control means terminates the execution of the predetermined attention event based on the occurrence of a first termination trigger.

According to feature H5, the predetermined caution event executed when the predetermined gaming state continues ends not only when the second end opportunity occurs but also when the first end opportunity occurs. As a result, the predetermined caution event that is executed when the predetermined gaming state continues can be terminated at the same trigger as the predetermined caution event that is executed when the predetermined gaming state ends, but it can be terminated at a different trigger. This makes it possible to terminate the process even if there is a problem.

Feature H6. According to feature H4 or H5, the first termination trigger is when a predetermined duration period (predetermined display duration period) elapses after execution of the predetermined caution event is started. Game machine.

According to feature H6, the predetermined caution event that is executed when the predetermined gaming state ends is terminated based on the elapse of a predetermined duration period from the start of its execution. It is possible to reliably secure a period for the player to confirm the event over a predetermined duration, and it is also possible to reduce the processing load for identifying the trigger for ending the predetermined caution event.

Feature H7. The game according to any one of features H4 to H6, wherein the second end opportunity is the occurrence of a specific opportunity (bet setting of game media) necessary for starting a new game round. Machine.

According to feature H7, the predetermined caution event that is executed when the predetermined gaming state continues is terminated based on the occurrence of a specific trigger necessary for starting a new game round, so the predetermined caution event is executed when the predetermined gaming state continues. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being continued in a situation where a new game round has already started.

Feature H8. The rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the execution of a predetermined game based on the player's operation (a winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13) triggered by the operation of the start lever 41 and the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44) a predetermined game proceeding means (a function of executing the reel control process of the main side MPU 72) that advances the reels (stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R);
A progress restriction situation (freeze period in the sixth embodiment) in which the start or progress of the predetermined game is restricted based on the occurrence of a restriction trigger (the end of the final game in AT state ST5 in the sixth embodiment) a restriction generating means (a function for executing the processes of step S3116, step S3117, step S3212, and step S3213 of the main side MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment);
Equipped with
The first caution event control means causes the predetermined caution event to be executed in the progress restriction situation,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7, wherein the second caution event control means causes the predetermined caution event to be executed in a situation that is not the progress restriction situation.

According to feature H8, since the predetermined caution event that is executed when the predetermined game state ends is executed in a progress restriction situation where the start or progress of the predetermined game is restricted, the predetermined game cannot be executed during the execution of the predetermined caution event. It is possible to prevent this from starting or progressing. On the other hand, since the predetermined caution event that is executed when the predetermined gaming state continues is executed in a situation that is not a progress restriction situation, the predetermined game cannot be started or progressed even during the execution of the predetermined caution event. It becomes possible.

Note that for the configuration of features H1 to H8, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M5, Features N1 to N4, Features O1 to O5, Features P1 to P5, Features Q1 to Q13, Features R1 to Any one or more configurations among R5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

The inventions of the feature F group, the feature G group, and the feature H group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a storage section that stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball firing device and directed toward the gaming area according to the player's firing operation. is fired. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or a process for increasing the number of game balls available to the player is executed. Ru.

In a slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game in a situation where gaming value such as medals is being bet, a lottery process is executed by a control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those illustrated above, it is necessary to ensure that games are played appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A situation setting means (a function for executing the process of step S705 in the main MPU 72) for setting an advantageous shift possible situation (second section SC2);
Advantageous transition means (step S604 of the main MPU 72) that transitions the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (pseudo bonus state ST4, AT state ST5 in the sixth embodiment) that is advantageous to the player when the situation is such that the advantageous transition is possible. (a function to execute the process of step S2706 and step S2707 of the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment),
Advantage notification control means (a function for executing the process of step S714 in the main MPU 72) that controls the advantage notification means (section display section 67) so as to be in the notification state (lighting state) in the advantageous shift possible situation;
When the advantageous transition possible situation ends, there is a specific opportunity in the game (in the sixth embodiment, in the case of pseudo-bonus state ST4, all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating, and in the case of AT state ST5, a freeze period is triggered). notification termination means (a function of executing the processes of step S2710, step S3119, and step S3215 of the main side MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment) for terminating the notification state in the advantageous notification means based on the occurrence of the termination); ,
Equipped with
The trigger for ending the advantageous transition possible situation is the first situation ending opportunity (when the second section SC2 ends with the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the sixth embodiment) and the second situation ending opportunity (the sixth There is at least a case in which the second section SC2 ends with the end of the AT state ST5 in the embodiment of
When the advantageous transfer possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the first situation end opportunity, and when the advantageous transfer possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the second situation end opportunity, the specific trigger A gaming machine characterized by having different characters.

According to feature I1, the game state can transition to an advantageous game state when an advantageous transition is possible, so the player will hope that the advantageous transition will occur. In addition, by providing an advantageous notification means that becomes a notification state when an advantageous transition is possible, it is possible to know whether or not an advantageous transition is possible by checking the advantageous notification means. In this case, in a configuration in which at least a first situation end trigger and a second situation end trigger exist as triggers for ending an advantageous transition possible situation, the specific trigger that ends the notification state in the advantageous notification means among the various triggers that occur in the game is different between a case in which the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the first situation end trigger and a case in which the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the second situation end trigger. This makes it possible to set the timing for ending the notification state in the advantageous notification means to an appropriate timing that corresponds to the type of trigger for ending the advantageous transition possible situation.

Feature I2. As the advantageous gaming state, there are at least a first advantageous gaming state (pseudo bonus state ST4) and a second advantageous gaming state (AT state ST5), which have relatively different advantages,
The first situation termination opportunity is an opportunity for the advantageous shift possible situation to end in response to the end of the first advantageous gaming state,
The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the second situation termination opportunity is an opportunity for the advantageous shift possible situation to end in response to the end of the second advantageous gaming state.

According to feature I2, there is a case where an advantageous transferable situation ends in response to the end of the first advantageous gaming state, and a case where an advantageous transferable situation ends in response to the end of the second advantageous gaming state. Among the various triggers that occur in the game, the specific trigger for ending the notification state in the advantage notification means is different. This makes it possible to set the timing at which the notification state in the advantageous notification means ends to be an appropriate timing that corresponds to the type of advantageous gaming state that triggers the termination of the advantageous shift possible situation.

Feature I3. Equipped with symbol display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that display symbols variably in each game,
The specific trigger in the case where the advantageous transfer possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the first situation end opportunity; and the specific opportunity when the advantageous transfer possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the second situation end opportunity. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, wherein each of the specific triggers occurs at a timing after the timing at which the fluctuating display of the symbols ends.

According to feature I3, there is a specific trigger in the case where an advantageous transfer possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the first situation end opportunity, and a specific opportunity when the advantageous transfer possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the second situation end opportunity. Each of the specific triggers occurs at a timing after the end of the variable display of the picture. As a result, even if the timing at which the notification state in the advantage notification means is terminated corresponds to the type of trigger for the end of the situation in which advantageous transfer is possible, the notification in the advantage notification means is It is possible to prevent the state from ending.

Feature I4. The second specific opportunity (the end of the freeze period in the sixth embodiment), which is the specific opportunity when the advantageous transfer possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the second situation end opportunity, is the end of the first situation. In one game, the first specific opportunity (in the sixth embodiment, all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating) is the specific opportunity when the advantageous shift possible situation ends based on the occurrence of an opportunity. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, characterized in that the trigger occurs at a later timing within a range.

According to feature I4, when the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of a second situation ending trigger, the notification state of the advantageous notification means ends based on the occurrence of a specific trigger that occurs at a later timing within one game than when the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of a first situation ending trigger. This makes it possible to vary the period during which the notification state of the advantageous notification means continues in the game in which it ends, depending on the type of trigger that ends the advantageous transition possible situation.

Feature I5. The gaming machine described in Feature I4, characterized in that the second specific trigger occurs when a specific period (freeze period) has elapsed since the occurrence of the first specific trigger.

According to feature I5, when a situation in which advantageous transfer is possible ends based on the occurrence of an opportunity to end the second situation, the advantageous transfer situation is terminated based on the occurrence of an opportunity to end the first situation, than when a situation in which advantageous transfer is possible ends based on the occurrence of an opportunity to end the first situation. In a game where the notification state of the means ends, it is possible to reliably ensure a long period in which the notification state continues.

Feature I6. The rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the execution of a predetermined game based on the player's operation (a winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13) triggered by the operation of the start lever 41 and the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44) a predetermined game proceeding means (a function of executing the reel control process of the main side MPU 72) that advances the reels (stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R);
Restriction generation means (main unit in the sixth embodiment) that generates a progress restriction situation (freeze period in the sixth embodiment) in which the start or progress of the predetermined game is restricted based on the occurrence of the first specific opportunity a function of executing the processes of step S3116, step S3117, step S3212, and step S3213 of the side MPU 72);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature I4 or I5, wherein the second specific trigger is the release of the progress restriction situation.

According to feature I6, in a configuration in which a progress restriction situation can occur based on the occurrence of a first specific opportunity in one game, a situation in which advantageous transition is possible ends based on the occurrence of a second situation end opportunity. , when the progress restriction situation is canceled, the notification state of the advantage notification means ends. As a result, in a game in which the notification state of the advantage notification means ends depending on the type of trigger for the end of the advantageous transfer possible situation, the notification state of the advantage notification means is configured to vary the period during which the notification state continues. This makes it possible to prevent a new game from starting before the game ends.

Feature I7. As the advantageous gaming state, there are at least a first advantageous gaming state (pseudo bonus state ST4) and a second advantageous gaming state (AT state ST5) which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous gaming state;
The first situation end trigger is a trigger for ending the advantageous transition possible situation in response to the end of the first advantageous game state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features I4 to I6, characterized in that the second situation ending trigger is a trigger for the advantageous transition possible situation to end in response to the end of the second advantageous gaming state.

According to feature I7, the first advantageous gaming state ends when the advantageous shift possible situation ends in response to the end of the second advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous gaming state. In the game, the notification state of the advantage notification means ends at a later timing than when the advantageous transfer possible situation ends. This makes it possible to ensure a long period in which the notification state of the advantage notification means is continued when the advantage transfer possible situation ends in response to the end of the relatively advantageous advantageous gaming state.

Note that for the configuration of features I1 to I7, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M5, Features N1 to N4, Features O1 to O5, Features P1 to P5, Features Q1 to Q13, Features R1 to Any one or more configurations among R5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

The invention of the above characteristic group I can solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a storage section that stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball firing device and directed toward the gaming area according to the player's firing operation. is fired. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a lottery process is executed, for example, or a process for increasing the number of game balls available to the player is executed. Ru.

In a slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game in a situation where gaming value such as medals is being bet, a lottery process is executed by a control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to ensure that notifications are given appropriately according to the game situation, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. A situation setting means (a function for executing the process of step S705 in the main MPU 72) for setting an advantageous shift possible situation (second section SC2);
Advantageous transition means (steps of the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment) for transitioning the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (AT state ST5 in the sixth embodiment) that is advantageous to the player when the situation is such that the advantageous transition is possible. a function to execute the processing of S2706 and S2707);
Advantage notification control means (a function for executing the process of step S714 in the main MPU 72) that controls the advantage notification means (section display section 67) so as to be in the notification state (lighting state) in the advantageous shift possible situation;
terminating the notification state in the advantageous notification means based on the occurrence of a specific opportunity (in the sixth embodiment, the end of a freeze period) in the game in which the advantageous gaming state and the advantageous shift possible situation are terminated; Notification termination means (a function of executing the processing of step S3119 and step S3215 of the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment);
Even if the advantageous gaming state continues, after the first effect (AT end display) that allows the player to recognize that the advantageous gaming state may end is executed, the A revival response control means that generates a revival response performance (revival response performance in the sixth and seventh embodiments) in which a second performance (resurrection display) that allows the player to recognize that the advantageous gaming state continues. (In the sixth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3401 to S3407 in the production side MPU 92, and in the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3501 to S3507 in the production side MPU 92),
Equipped with
The timing at which the second performance is started in the game in which the revival compatible performance is executed is the timing before the specific opportunity occurs in the game in which the notification state in the advantage notification means ends. A gaming machine.

According to feature J1, the gaming state can shift to an advantageous gaming state when the situation is such that an advantageous shift is possible, so the player expects a situation where an advantageous shift is possible. Furthermore, by providing an advantage notification means that becomes a notification state in a situation where advantageous transfer is possible, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not the advantageous transfer is possible by checking the advantage notification means. Further, by executing the revival response effect, it is possible to give the player the surprise that the predetermined gaming state actually continues after being made to think that the predetermined gaming state has ended.

In this case, the timing at which the second performance is started in the game in which the revival compatible performance is executed is the timing before the specific opportunity occurs in the game when the notification state in the advantage notification means ends. As a result, even if you check the advantage notification means in a situation where the first performance is being executed, it is possible to check whether the first performance is actually a performance that is being executed at the end of the advantageous gaming state or whether it is related to a revival compatible performance. It becomes possible to make it impossible for the player to distinguish whether it is a performance or not. Therefore, in a situation where the first performance is being executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the second performance will occur afterwards, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature J2. Equipped with symbol display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that display symbols variably in each game,
The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the specific trigger is a trigger that occurs when a specific period (freeze period) has elapsed from a predetermined timing when the fluctuating display of the symbols ended.

According to feature J2, when the advantageous gaming state and the advantageous transfer possible situation end, the notification state in the advantageous notification means ends when a specific period has elapsed from the predetermined timing when the fluctuating display of symbols in the game ended, In a game in which a revival compatible effect is executed, the second effect is started at a timing before a specific period elapses from the predetermined timing when the variable display of symbols ends. As a result, even if you check the advantage notification means in a situation where the first performance is being executed, it is possible to check whether the first performance is actually a performance that is being executed at the end of the advantageous gaming state or whether it is related to a revival compatible performance. It becomes possible to make it impossible for the player to distinguish whether it is a performance or not.

Feature J3. A predetermined game including a variable display of the symbols based on the player's operation (rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R based on the execution of the winning combination lottery process triggered by the operation of the start lever 41 (FIG. 13) and the stop button 42~ A predetermined game proceeding means (a function of executing the reel control process of the main MPU 72) that advances the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R triggered by the operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R;
A progress restriction situation in which the start or progress of the predetermined game is restricted based on the predetermined timing in the game where the advantageous game state and the advantageous transition possible situation end (freeze period in the sixth embodiment) ) (a function that executes the processing of steps S3116, S3117, S3212, and S3213 of the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature J2, wherein the progress restriction situation ends based on the elapse of the specific period.

According to feature J3, in a game where an advantageous gaming state and a situation in which advantageous transfer is possible end, the progress is restricted until a specific period elapses from the predetermined timing when the fluctuating display of symbols ends, and the progress restriction state ends. In this case, the notification state in the advantage notification means ends, so that in the game, the notification state in the advantage notification means does not end until a specific period has elapsed from the predetermined timing when the fluctuating display of the symbols ended. On the other hand, in a game in which a revival-compatible effect is executed, the second effect is started at a timing before a specific period elapses from the predetermined timing when the variable display of the symbols ends. As a result, even if you check the advantage notification means in a situation where the first performance is being executed, it is possible to check whether the first performance is actually a performance that is being executed at the end of the advantageous gaming state or whether it is related to a revival compatible performance. It becomes possible to make it impossible for the player to distinguish whether it is a performance or not.

Feature J4. The resurrection response control means is configured to cause a switching response period (pre-resurrection period), which is set as a shorter period than the specific period, to elapse from the predetermined timing when the fluctuating display of the symbols ends in the game in which the resurrection response effect is executed. Means for starting the second performance based on the fact that the performance side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment The gaming machine according to feature J2 or J3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following function.

According to feature J4, in a game in which a revival compatible effect is executed, the second effect is executed based on the passage of a switching compatible period that is set as a period shorter than a specific period from a predetermined timing when the fluctuating display of symbols ends. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the second performance is started at a timing earlier than the timing at which the notification state in the advantage notification means ends in a game where the advantageous gaming state and the advantageous shift possible situation end. It becomes possible.

Feature J5. The gaming machine described in Feature J4, characterized in that the revival response control means includes a means for starting the second performance based on the occurrence of a specific trigger (a bet setting on a gaming medium) required to start a new game round even if the switching response period has not elapsed since the predetermined timing at which the variable display of the image ended in the game in which the revival response performance is executed (a function for making a positive determination in step S3405 and executing the process of step S3406 based on the occurrence of a bet on the next game of the performance side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment).

According to feature J5, in a game in which a revival-responsive effect is executed, even if the switching-responsive period has not elapsed since the specified timing at which the display of the changing patterns ended, the second effect is started based on the occurrence of a specific trigger required to start a new round of play, making it possible to diversify the triggers for starting the second effect.

Feature J6. Means for executing the first effect before the specific opportunity occurs in the game when the advantageous gaming state and the advantageous transfer possible situation end (step S3309 of the effect-side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment) The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of (a).

According to feature J6, since the first performance is executed before a specific opportunity occurs in a game where an advantageous gaming state and a situation in which an advantageous transfer is possible end, it is possible to prevent an end of an advantageous gaming state and a situation in which an advantageous transfer is possible. It becomes possible to make the player recognize it. In this case, in a game in which a revival compatible effect is executed, the first effect is executed before the second effect is executed. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the advantageous gaming state will continue in the situation where the first effect is being executed.

Note that for the configuration of features J1 to J6, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M5, Features N1 to N4, Features O1 to O5, Features P1 to P5, Features Q1 to Q13, Features R1 to Any one or more configurations among R5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

The invention of the above characteristic group J can solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a storage section that stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball firing device and directed toward the gaming area according to the player's firing operation. is fired. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a lottery process is executed, for example, or a process for increasing the number of game balls available to the player is executed. Ru.

In a slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game in a situation where gaming value such as medals is being bet, a lottery process is executed by a control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. an advantageous transition means (a function of executing the processing of step S2706 and step S2707 of the main MPU 72) that transitions the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (AT state ST5 in the eighth embodiment) that is advantageous to the player;
The first target number (remaining number of grants measured by the AT continuation counter 74e), which is a number that can change as the game is executed in the advantageous gaming state, has become the ending target number (“0”). Based on this, the pre-end setting means (in the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3909 of the main MPU 72, In the embodiment No. 9, the function of executing the process of step S4209 of the main MPU 72),
Based on the fact that the second target number (remaining number of games measured by the end waiting counter), which is a number that can change as the game is executed in the pre-termination state, has become the end target number (“0”) Advantage ending means for ending the advantageous gaming state (in the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S3912 and step S3913 of the main side MPU 72, and in the ninth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4212 and step S4213 of the main side MPU 72) function) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature K1, when the first target number reaches the end target number in an advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state does not end, but becomes a pre-termination state in the advantageous gaming state, and the first target number in the pre-termination state. The advantageous gaming state ends when the number of 2 targets reaches the end number of targets. As a result, the object to be focused on in order to identify the trigger for ending an advantageous gaming state is changed midway through, making it possible to increase the player's attention to the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Feature K2. The first target number is the number of remaining gaming values that can be given or increased in the advantageous gaming state,
The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein the second target number is the remaining number of games that can be executed in the pre-termination state.

According to feature K2, before entering the pre-end state in an advantageous gaming state, the player pays attention to whether or not the number of remaining gaming values becomes the number to be ended; In this case, the player will pay attention to whether or not the remaining number of games is the number to be completed. In general, it is easier for players to understand whether or not the number of remaining games will be the target number to end than whether or not the number of remaining game values will be the target number to end. By configuring the pre-end state to end when the number of games reaches the end target number, the advantageous gaming state ends in a structure in which the target to be focused on in order to specify the end opportunity in an advantageous gaming state is changed midway through. It becomes easier for the player to identify the trigger.

Feature K3. The gaming machine according to feature K2, wherein the pre-termination state ends after one game.

According to feature K3, since the pre-end state ends in one game, it is possible to prevent the pre-end state from continuing excessively.

Feature K4. A gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, characterized in that it is equipped with end response control means (a function for executing the processing of step S4102 of the presentation side MPU 92 in the eighth embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step S4302 of the presentation side MPU 92 in the ninth embodiment) that causes an end response display (an AT end display in the eighth embodiment, an end explicit display in the ninth embodiment) corresponding to the end of the advantageous gaming state to be started when the pre-end state is started.

According to feature K4, since the termination correspondence display is started when the pre-termination state is started, it is easier for the player to view the termination correspondence display than in a configuration in which the termination correspondence display is started when the pre-termination state ends. This allows for more opportunities for confirmation.

Feature K5. The end correspondence display includes a result correspondence display (total number of games image G62, total number of wins image G63) corresponding to the results of each game executed in the advantageous gaming state,
The gaming machine according to feature K4, wherein the result of the game executed in the pre-termination state is not reflected in the content of the result correspondence display.

According to feature K5, the end corresponding display includes a result corresponding display corresponding to the outcome of each game executed in the advantageous gaming state, so that a player who checks the end corresponding display can understand not only that the advantageous gaming state has ended, but also the outcome of each game executed in that advantageous gaming state. In this case, the outcome of the game executed in the pre-end state is not reflected in the content of the result corresponding display in the end corresponding display. This makes it possible to prevent the content of the result corresponding display that has started to be displayed from being changed midway in a configuration that ensures a long display period for the end corresponding display including the result corresponding display.

Feature K6. The end correspondence display does not include a result correspondence display (total number of games image G62, total number of wins image G63) corresponding to the results of each game executed in the advantageous gaming state,
When the game in the pre-termination state is executed, this gaming machine displays a result correspondence display ( The total game number image G62, the total number of acquisitions image G63) are provided with a result corresponding control means (a function of executing the process of step S4304 of the production side MPU 92 in the ninth embodiment). The gaming machine described in feature K4.

According to feature K6, the result correspondence display corresponding to the result of each game executed in the advantageous gaming state is not included in the end correspondence display, and when a game in the pre-termination state is executed, the result correspondence display corresponding to the result of each game executed in the advantageous gaming state is Results corresponding to the results of each game executed in the current advantageous gaming state, including the executed game, are displayed. As a result, in a configuration that ensures a long display period for the end-related display, it is possible to perform a result-based display that corresponds to the overall result of the advantageous gaming state.

Feature K7. Equipped with symbol display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that display symbols variably in each game,
The gaming machine according to feature K6, wherein the result correspondence control means starts the result correspondence display when the fluctuating display of the symbols ends in the game in the pre-termination state.

According to feature K7, since the result-based display starts when the fluctuating display of symbols ends in the game in the pre-end state, it is possible to display the result-based content based on the result of the game in the pre-end state. becomes.

Feature K8. A situation setting means (a function for executing the process of step S705 in the main MPU 72) for setting an advantageous shift possible situation (second section SC2);
Situation terminating means for terminating the advantageous transfer possible situation based on the occurrence of a situation termination opportunity (establishment of an ending condition) in the advantageous transfer possible situation (a function of executing the processing of step S3214 and step S3215 in the main MPU 72) and,
Equipped with
The advantageous transition means transfers the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state when the advantageous transition is possible,
When the advantageous shift possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the situation end opportunity, even if the first number of targets is not the number of ends in the advantageous gaming state, the pre-termination state The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K7, characterized in that the advantageous gaming state ends without occurring.

According to feature K8, since the gaming state can shift to an advantageous gaming state when the situation is such that an advantageous shift is possible, the player expects a situation where an advantageous shift is possible. In addition, since the advantageous shift possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the situation end opportunity, it is possible to prevent the advantageous shift possible situation from continuing excessively. In this case, if the advantageous transfer possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the situation end opportunity, the pre-end state will occur even if the first target number is not the end target number in the advantageous gaming state. The advantageous gaming state ends without any trouble. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous gaming state from continuing even though the advantageous transition possible situation has ended in a configuration where the advantageous gaming state enters the pre-end state when the advantageous gaming state ends. .

Note that for the configuration of features K1 to K8, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M5, Features N1 to N4, Features O1 to O5, Features P1 to P5, Features Q1 to Q13, Features R1 to Any one or more configurations among R5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

The invention of the feature K group described above can solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a storage section that stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball firing device and directed toward the gaming area according to the player's firing operation. is fired. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a lottery process is executed, for example, or a process for increasing the number of game balls available to the player is executed. Ru.

In a slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game in a situation where gaming value such as medals is being bet, a lottery process is executed by a control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to increase the player's attention to the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. Based on the occurrence of an update opportunity (winning one of the index values IV=1 to 13 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13)) in a predetermined gaming state (AT state ST5 in the eighth embodiment) , information updating means (main in the eighth embodiment) for updating the termination trigger information (numerical information of the AT continuation counter 74e) of the termination trigger storage means (AT continuation counter 74e) to the side closer to the termination target information (“0”). function of executing the process of step S3906 of the side MPU 72);
A means for terminating the predetermined gaming state after the termination trigger information becomes the termination target information (a function of executing the processing of steps S3912 to S3914 of the main MPU 72 in the eighth embodiment);
When a predetermined update trigger (winning one of the index values IV = 1 to 9 in the winning combination lottery process (Fig. 13)) occurs and the player performs an award corresponding operation (winning the first bell or winning the first bell). When the stop button 42 to 44 in the stop order that enables the establishment of a 2-bell winning is performed, a predetermined benefit (granting of "15" gaming media) is given to the player, and the predetermined renewal trigger is A predetermined benefit granting means (step S3710 of the main MPU 72 in the eighth embodiment) that prevents the predetermined benefit from being granted to the player when the granting corresponding operation is not performed by the player when function) and
Equipped with
The information updating means updates the termination trigger information regardless of whether the predetermined update trigger occurs, the player performs the grant corresponding operation, or the player does not perform the grant corresponding operation. The gaming machine is characterized in that the information is updated to be closer to the end target information by the amount of common numerical information ("12" which is the result of subtracting "3" which is the number of bets from "15").

According to feature L1, based on the occurrence of an update opportunity in a predetermined gaming state, the termination opportunity information in the termination opportunity storage means is updated to approach the termination target information, and the termination trigger information becomes the termination target information. Based on this, the predetermined gaming state ends. In this case, if a predetermined update opportunity occurs and the player performs a granting operation, the predetermined benefit will be granted to the player, and if a predetermined update opportunity occurs and the player In a configuration in which the predetermined benefit is not granted to the player if the award corresponding operation is not performed, if the predetermined update trigger occurs, the award corresponding operation is performed by the player, and if the award corresponding operation is not performed. In either case, the termination trigger information is updated to be closer to the termination target information by the amount of common numerical information. As a result, when a predetermined update opportunity occurs, the termination trigger information is updated to be closer to the termination target information by the common numerical information, regardless of whether the prescribed benefit has been granted or not. It becomes possible to prevent the end time of a predetermined gaming state from being delayed depending on the operation mode. Therefore, the game can be played suitably.

Feature L2. Predetermined display control means (production side in the eighth embodiment) that controls the display of a predetermined display means (image display device 63) so that a termination trigger corresponding display (remaining grant number display image G12) corresponding to the termination trigger information is performed. Equipped with MPU92),
The predetermined display control means is
When the predetermined update trigger occurs and the player performs the grant corresponding operation, the value displayed in the termination trigger corresponding display is updated by the value corresponding to the common numerical information. a first update control means (a function that executes the process of step S3802 of the production side MPU 92 in the eighth embodiment) for causing the display to be performed in the first update display mode (sequential update shown in FIG. 66(A)); ,
If the predetermined update trigger occurs and the player does not perform the grant corresponding operation, the value corresponding to the common numerical information of the value displayed in the termination trigger correspondence display is A second update control means (step S3607 of the production side MPU 92 in the eighth embodiment) that causes the update display to be performed in the second update display mode (the visibility reduction effect G66 and batch update shown in FIG. 66(B)) and a function of executing the process of step S3804);
The gaming machine according to feature L1, comprising:

According to feature L2, based on the occurrence of an update opportunity in a predetermined gaming state, the end opportunity information in the end opportunity storage means is updated to approach the end target information, and the end opportunity information becomes the end target information. In a configuration in which a predetermined gaming state is terminated based on the termination trigger information, a termination trigger corresponding display corresponding to the termination trigger information is performed on the predetermined display means. This allows the player to predict the end time of a predetermined gaming state by checking the display corresponding to the end trigger.

In this case, if a predetermined update trigger occurs and the player performs a grant corresponding operation, the value corresponding to the common numerical information of the value displayed in the termination trigger corresponding display is updated. If the display is performed in the first update display mode and a predetermined update trigger occurs and the player does not perform a grant corresponding operation, the common value of the value displayed in the termination trigger corresponding display is The updated display of the value corresponding to the numerical information is performed in the second updated display mode. As a result, in a configuration where when a predetermined update opportunity occurs, regardless of whether a predetermined benefit has been granted or not, the termination trigger information is updated to be closer to the termination target information by the common numerical information. The value displayed in the termination trigger corresponding display is updated by the value corresponding to the common numerical information regardless of whether or not the predetermined benefit has been granted. It becomes possible to set an appropriate display mode corresponding to whether or not it has been given.

Feature L3. The second update display mode is a display mode in which the update display for the value corresponding to the common numerical information is more difficult for the player to recognize than the first update display mode. Game machine.

According to feature L3, in the second update display mode, the display mode of the update display when updating the value displayed in the end trigger corresponding display by the value corresponding to the common numerical information is better than the first update display mode. Due to the display format that is difficult for players to recognize, the termination trigger information is updated to be closer to the termination target information by the amount of common numerical information, even though the prescribed update trigger has occurred but the prescribed benefit is not granted. It becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize this.

Feature L4. The second update display mode is characterized in that the period required to complete the update display of the values corresponding to the common numerical information is shorter than the first update display mode. The gaming machine described in feature L2 or L3.

According to feature L4, the second update display mode has a shorter update period than the first update display mode when the value displayed in the end trigger corresponding display is updated by the value corresponding to the common numerical information. Due to this display mode, the player can easily see a situation where the termination trigger information has been updated to be closer to the termination target information by the common numerical information even though the prescribed update trigger has occurred but the prescribed benefit has not been granted. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility of confirmation.

Feature L5. The second update control means includes:
Visibility reducing means (steps of the production side MPU 92 in the eighth embodiment) to bring the visibility of the content displayed on the predetermined display means into a visibility reduced state (visibility reduction effect G66) where the visibility of the content displayed on the predetermined display means is lower than before. function to execute the process of S3607),
Update execution means (direction side in the eighth embodiment) for causing an update display to be performed by the value corresponding to the common numerical information of the value displayed in the end trigger corresponding display in the visibility reduced state. a function of executing the process of step S3804 of the MPU 92);
The gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L4, characterized by comprising:

According to feature L5, when a predetermined update opportunity occurs but the predetermined benefit is not granted, the visibility of the content displayed on the predetermined display means is reduced to lower visibility than before, and the relevant In a state where visibility is reduced, an update display is performed for the value corresponding to the common numerical information of the values displayed in the termination trigger correspondence display, so it is possible to indicate that the termination trigger information has been updated closer to the termination target information. It becomes possible to make it difficult for players to recognize.

Feature L6. Equipped with a plurality of symbol display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that display symbols in a variable manner,
The provision corresponding operation is an operation for stopping the fluctuating display of the symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas in a predetermined order;
The visibility reducing means specifies that the order in which the variable display of the symbols is stopped is different from the predetermined order even in a situation where the variable display of the symbols in all of the symbol display areas is not stopped. When the visibility is reduced, the visibility is reduced,
The update execution means updates and displays a value corresponding to the common numerical information of the value displayed in the termination trigger corresponding display when the variable display of the symbol in all the symbol display areas is stopped. The gaming machine according to feature L5, wherein:

According to feature L6, in a configuration in which a predetermined benefit is given when a predetermined update trigger occurs and the fluctuating display of symbols is stopped in a predetermined order, the fluctuating display of symbols in all symbol display areas is Even in a situation where the display is not stopped, visibility is reduced if it is determined that the order in which the variable display of the patterns is stopped is different from the predetermined order. As a result, the player recognizes that visibility has decreased due to an error in the stopping order. In this situation, when the variable display of symbols in all symbol display areas is stopped, the values displayed in the end trigger correspondence display are updated by the value corresponding to the common numerical information. It is possible to update the display corresponding to the termination trigger in a situation where the degree of attention of the player to the predetermined display means has decreased due to the reduced visibility state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the termination trigger information has been updated to bring it closer to the termination target information even though the predetermined benefit has not been granted.

Feature L7. The predetermined update opportunity occurs based on winning a predetermined winning combination (index value IV=1 to 9) in the winning lottery process,
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L6, wherein the award corresponding operation is an operation to stop the fluctuating display of symbols in a predetermined manner when the predetermined combination is won.

According to feature L7, when a predetermined combination is won and the operation to stop the fluctuating display of symbols is performed in a predetermined manner, a predetermined benefit is given.When a predetermined combination is won and the predetermined pattern is In a configuration in which a predetermined benefit is not granted when an operation to stop the variable display of symbols is performed in a different manner, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Note that for the configuration of features L1 to L7, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M5, Features N1 to N4, Features O1 to O5, Features P1 to P5, Features Q1 to Q13, Features R1 to Any one or more configurations among R5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

The invention of the feature L group described above can solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a storage section that stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball firing device and directed toward the gaming area according to the player's firing operation. is fired. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a lottery process is executed, for example, or a process for increasing the number of game balls available to the player is executed. Ru.

In a slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game in a situation where gaming value such as medals is being bet, a lottery process is executed by a control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the one illustrated above, it is necessary to ensure that games can be played suitably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature M group>
Feature M1. Predetermined orbiting bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R),
a driving means (stepping motor 142) for rotating the predetermined rotating body;
A drive control means (a function of executing the reel control process and the stepping motor control process of the main side MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment) that drives and controls the drive means;
Equipped with
The drive control means includes:
Acceleration control means that executes acceleration control for accelerating the predetermined orbiting body (executes the processes of steps S4503 to S4511, steps S4601 to S4607, and steps S4903 to S4914 of the main side MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment) function) and
Constant speed control means for executing constant speed control for rotating the predetermined orbiting body at a constant speed after the acceleration control is completed (executes the processes of step S4518 and step S4521 of the main side MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment) function) and
Stop control means (stop control of the main side MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment) that executes stop control for stopping the rotation of the predetermined orbiting body when a predetermined stop trigger (operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44) occurs. functions), and
Equipped with
The acceleration control means is configured to control the speed of the predetermined orbiting body when the supply of operating power is stopped in a predetermined operating condition before the stoppage of the predetermined orbiting body is completed, and when the supply of operating power is restarted. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a post-supply start means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4903 to S4914 of the main side MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment) for newly starting acceleration control.

According to feature M1, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a predetermined operating situation before the stop of the predetermined orbiting body is completed, when the supply of operating power is restarted, the acceleration control of the predetermined orbiting body is performed. will be newly started. As a result, when the supply of operating power is resumed, it becomes possible to start a new acceleration of the specified orbiting body without waiting until the abnormal rotation of the specified orbiting body is detected, and the supply of operating power is resumed. After restarting, it is possible to shorten the period required until the acceleration control of a predetermined orbiting body is completed and constant speed rotation is started. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably play a game using the rotation of the orbiting body.

Feature M2. When it is determined that the rotation of the predetermined orbiting body is not performed normally, means for starting the acceleration control of the predetermined orbiting body anew (a means of the main side MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature M1, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S4528.

According to feature M2, when it is determined that the rotation of the specified rotating body is not normal, acceleration control of the specified rotating body is newly started, so that if an abnormality occurs in the rotation of the specified rotating body, it is possible to deal with it by starting the rotation anew. In this case, by having the configuration of feature M1, if the supply of operating power is stopped in a specified operating situation before the stopping of the specified rotating body is completed, acceleration control of the specified rotating body is newly started when the supply of operating power is resumed. This makes it possible to start new acceleration of the specified rotating body when the supply of operating power is resumed without waiting until a rotation abnormality of the specified rotating body is detected, and it is possible to shorten the period required for the acceleration control of the specified rotating body to be completed and constant speed rotation to be started after the supply of operating power is resumed.

Feature M3. The post-supply start means is configured to restart the supply of operating power even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the predetermined operating condition after the acceleration control of the predetermined orbiting body is completed. The gaming machine according to feature M1 or M2, wherein the acceleration control of the predetermined orbiting body is newly started.

According to feature M3, even if the supply of operating power is stopped after the acceleration control of the predetermined orbiting body is completed, the acceleration control of the predetermined orbiting body is renewed when the supply of operating power is restarted. Therefore, when the supply of operating power is restarted, it is only necessary to newly start acceleration control of a predetermined orbiting body without specifying whether or not acceleration control has been completed. It becomes possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature M4. A rotating body (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) different from the predetermined rotating body,
The acceleration control means is configured to adjust the operating power when the supply of operating power is stopped in the predetermined operating condition after the stop of the other orbiting body is completed and before the stop of the predetermined orbiting body is completed. Any one of the features M1 to M3 characterized in that when the supply of the orbiting body is resumed, the acceleration control of the predetermined orbiting body is newly started without executing the acceleration control for the other orbiting body. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature M4, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a predetermined orbiting body is in a predetermined operating state before the stop is completed, and another orbiting body has been stopped, the operating power is When the supply of the orbiting body is restarted, acceleration control is not executed for another orbiting body, but acceleration control is newly started for the predetermined orbiting body. This makes it possible to prevent rotating bodies that have already stopped from rotating again, while allowing only rotating bodies that have been in a predetermined operating state to start rotating at a constant speed at an early stage.

Feature M5. Predetermined operation storage means for storing predetermined operation information (information of "1") when the predetermined orbiting body is in the predetermined operation status (rotation flag and each stop completion flag of the main side RAM 74 in the tenth embodiment) 164a-164c) and
means for supplying power during power outage (power supply device 54) that enables the predetermined operation information to be stored and retained in the predetermined operation storage means in a situation where the supply of operating power is stopped;
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M4, characterized by comprising:

According to feature M5, when the predetermined orbiting body is in a predetermined operating state, power is supplied to the predetermined operation storage means in which predetermined operation information is stored, so that the supply of operating power is not started. In such a case, simply by determining whether or not the predetermined motion information is stored in the predetermined motion storage means, it becomes possible to specify whether or not acceleration control for a predetermined orbiting body should be newly started.

Note that for the configuration of features M1 to M5, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M5, Features N1 to N4, Features O1 to O5, Features P1 to P5, Features Q1 to Q13, Features R1 to Any one or more configurations among R5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics N group>
Feature N1. The orbiting body (reels 32L, 32M, 32R),
a driving means (stepping motor 142) for rotating the orbiting body;
a drive control means for driving and controlling the drive means (a function for executing reel control processing and acceleration control processing of the main MPU 72 in the eleventh embodiment);
Equipped with
The driving means is a stepping motor (stepping motor 142) that rotates the rotating body by being excited,
The drive control means executes a special excitation pattern (partially based on the pseudo-stop table 171) in which the drive means is excited in a predetermined phase (excitation in phase A) and then excited in a specific phase (excitation in phase B). (excitation pattern)) (a function for executing the processes of steps S5101 to S5111 and steps S5114 to S5119 of the main MPU 72 in the eleventh embodiment),
The special control means generates a non-excitation period in which no excitation is performed for the drive means after the predetermined phase is excited in the special excitation pattern and before the specific phase is excited. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature N1, a situation occurs in which a special excitation pattern is repeated in which a specific phase is excited after a specific phase is excited in the drive means, making it possible to use the rotation of the orbiting body to create an effect. In this case, a non-excitation period occurs after the specific phase is excited in the special excitation pattern and before the specific phase is excited. This makes it possible to create an effect that utilizes the rotation of the orbiting body while suppressing the temperature rise of the drive means. This makes it possible to optimally play games that utilize the rotation of the orbiting body.

Feature N2. Feature N1 is characterized in that the non-excitation period is less than or equal to the period during which the predetermined phase is energized in the special excitation pattern, and is less than or equal to the period during which the specific phase is energized in the special excitation pattern. The game machine described.

According to feature N2, the non-excitation period is less than or equal to the period in which a predetermined phase is excited in the special excitation pattern and is less than or equal to the period in which a specific phase is excited in the special excitation pattern. It is possible to prevent the period in which the circulating body is stopped from becoming excessively long during the period in which the performance is being performed.

Feature N3. The special control means is configured to perform no excitation on the drive means after the specific phase is excited and before the predetermined phase is excited when the special excitation pattern is repeatedly generated. The gaming machine according to feature N1 or N2, characterized in that an excitation period is generated.

According to feature N3, in a situation where the special excitation pattern is repeated, excitation of a predetermined phase is performed not only after excitation of a predetermined phase and before excitation of a specific phase, but also after excitation of a specific phase and excitation of a predetermined phase. There is also a non-excitation period before this is done. This makes it possible to perform effects using the rotation of the rotating body while suppressing the temperature rise of the driving means.

Feature N4. The non-excitation period occurs after the predetermined phase is energized and before the specific phase is energized, and after the specific phase is energized and before the predetermined phase is energized. The gaming machine according to feature N3, wherein the non-excitation period that occurs is the same or substantially the same.

According to characteristic N4, in a situation where the special excitation pattern is repeated, a non-excitation period occurs not only after excitation of a predetermined phase but before excitation of a specific phase, but also after excitation of a specific phase. In a configuration in which a non-excitation period occurs even before excitation of a predetermined phase is performed, these non-excitation periods are the same or substantially the same. Thereby, there is no need to separately prepare a configuration for controlling the non-excitation period, so it is possible to simplify the configuration for the control.

Note that for the configuration of features N1 to N4, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M5, Features N1 to N4, Features O1 to O5, Features P1 to P5, Features Q1 to Q13, Features R1 to Any one or more configurations among R5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

Each invention of the feature M group and the feature N group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a storage section that stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball firing device and directed toward the gaming area according to the player's firing operation. is fired. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or a process for increasing the number of game balls available to the player is executed. Ru.

In a slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game in a situation where gaming value such as medals is being bet, a lottery process is executed by a control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably play games that utilize the rotation of the orbiting body, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristics Group O>
Feature O1. Object specifying means (steps of the main MPU 72 in the twelfth embodiment) for specifying selection objects to be selected as lottery targets among multiple types of selection objects (various addresses set in the AT migration lottery table 172 in the twelfth embodiment) a function that executes the processes from S5307 to S5309);
Set information for lottery (in the twelfth embodiment) in which numerical information for lottery (various lottery determination values set in the AT migration lottery table 172 in the twelfth embodiment) is set in association with the plurality of types of selection targets. an information storage means (main side ROM 73 in the twelfth embodiment) that stores in advance the AT migration lottery table 172;
Information reading means (processing of step S5310 of the main side MPU 72 in the twelfth embodiment function) and
A validity determination means (a function of executing the processes of step S5311 and step S5312 of the main MPU 72 in the twelfth embodiment) that performs a validity determination using the numerical information for lottery read out by the information reading means;
Equipped with
The lottery set information includes the selection target ("in the AT transition lottery table 172 of the twelfth embodiment" A gaming machine characterized in that an address "k" is set.

According to feature O1, the selection numerical information corresponding to the selection target identified as the selection target is read out using the selection set information, and the win/loss determination is performed using the read selection numerical information. In this case, the selection target for which selection numerical information that will definitely be determined to be a loss in the win/loss determination is set is set in the selection set information. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the win/loss determination does not result in a win, even without preparing a determination process to determine whether or not to perform the win/loss determination. This makes it possible to perform the lottery process in an optimal manner.

Feature O2. The lottery set information includes the selection targets (“k+1” to “k+5” in the AT transition lottery table 172 of the twelfth embodiment) in which the lottery numerical information that can be determined to be a win in the win/fail determination is set. '' address) is set.

According to feature O2, in a configuration in which a plurality of selection targets are set in the lottery set information for which lottery numerical information that can be determined to be a win can be determined as a winner in the validity determination, it is certain that the selection target is a winner in the validity determination. The selection target for which the numerical value information for lottery to be determined is set is set in the set information for lottery. As a result, it is possible to produce the excellent effects already explained by simply setting an additional selection target that will definitely be a loser in the lottery collection information prepared to set multiple selection targets that can be a winning candidate. becomes.

Feature O3. In the lottery set information, the plurality of types of selection targets are set in a predetermined order,
The target specifying means specifies an offset value with respect to a first order of the predetermined order in order to specify in which order in the lottery set information the selected objects are to be selected as the lottery targets. The gaming machine according to feature O1 or O2.

According to feature O3, by using the configuration for specifying the offset value with respect to the first order in the lottery set information, it is possible to create a situation where the winner is reliably lost in the determination of success or failure.

Feature O4. The target specifying means determines that in a predetermined gaming situation (a situation in which the AT transition confirmation flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1"), the above-mentioned object is definitely determined to be a failure in the validity determination. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3, characterized in that the selection target to which lottery numerical information is set is specified as the lottery target.

According to feature O4, in a predetermined gaming situation, the win/fail judgment will definitely result in a loss, so it is specified whether or not the game is in a predetermined gaming situation, and if it is a predetermined gaming situation, the win/fail judgment is not executed. Even without preparing a determination process, it is possible to prevent an event in which a player wins in a win/fail determination from occurring in a predetermined gaming situation.

Feature O5. The target specifying means is set with the numerical value information for lottery that can be determined to be a win in the win/fail judgment in a specific gaming situation (a situation where the value of the AT transition confirmation flag in the main side RAM 74 is "0"). The selection target corresponding to the game content event (result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13)) is specified as the lottery target, and in the predetermined gaming situation, the game content event is The gaming machine according to feature O4, characterized in that the selection object to which the numerical information for lottery is set is determined as the lottery object to be definitely determined to be a failure in the win/fail determination as the lottery object.

According to feature O5, in a configuration in which, in a specific game situation, the presence or absence of a win in a win/fail determination occurs depending on a game content event, in a predetermined game situation, no matter which game content event occurs, a win is definitely won in a win/fail determination. becomes. As a result, even if you do not have to prepare a determination process that specifies whether or not the game is in a predetermined game situation and prevents the win/fail judgment from being executed if the game situation is the predetermined game situation, you can win based on the win/fail judgment in the predetermined game situation. It is possible to prevent such an event from occurring.

Note that for the configuration of features O1 to O5, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M5, Features N1 to N4, Features O1 to O5, Features P1 to P5, Features Q1 to Q13, Features R1 to Any one or more configurations among R5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature P group>
Feature P1. A lottery information group (13th Information storage means (main side ROM 73) that stores in advance the first initial award number lottery table 173 and the second initial award number lottery table 174 in the embodiment;
Information reading means for reading out the lottery numerical information corresponding to the selection target numerical information that is a lottery target in the lottery information group (function of executing the process of step S5406 of the main MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment) and,
Predetermined validity determination means (main side MPU 72 in the 13th embodiment) that executes a predetermined validity determination (step S5408 of the main side MPU 72 in the 13th embodiment) using the numerical information for lottery read out by the information reading means. (a function to execute the processing of step S5407 and step S5408);
By updating the selection target numerical information that becomes the lottery target in the case of a failure in the predetermined validity determination, the selection target numerical information is updated to the selection target numerical information in the next order in the lottery information group. Selection updating means (a function for executing the process of step S5409 of the main MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment) for making the selection subject to the predetermined propriety determination;
Equipped with
As the lottery information group, the information storage means includes a first lottery information group (first initial award number lottery table 173 in the thirteenth embodiment) used in a predetermined gaming situation (normal AT) and a specific gaming situation. At least a second lottery information group (second initial award number lottery table 174 in the thirteenth embodiment) used in (special AT) is stored,
In the first lottery information group, the plurality of selection target numerical information are set,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second lottery information group includes a plurality of selection target numerical information that are part of the plurality of selection target numerical information and are serial numbers.

According to feature P1, in a specified game situation, the selection target numerical information set in the first lottery information group is selected in sequence, and the selection target numerical information corresponding to the selection target numerical information that has been selected is read from the first lottery information group to perform a specified win/lose judgment. In addition, in a specific game situation, the selection target numerical information set in the second lottery information group is selected in sequence, and the selection target numerical information corresponding to the selection target numerical information that has been selected is read from the second lottery information group to perform a specified win/lose judgment.

In this case, the first lottery information group has a plurality of selection target numerical information set, whereas the second lottery information group has some of the plurality of selection target numerical information set. A plurality of numerical information items to be selected are set as consecutive numbers. As a result, even if the number of selection target numerical information set in the second lottery information group is smaller than the number of selection target numerical information set in the first lottery information group, these selection It becomes possible to standardize target numerical information. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform the lottery process suitably.

Feature P2. The gaming machine described in Feature P1, characterized in that the selection target numerical information set in the second selection information group is numerical information whose maximum value is the same as the maximum value of the selection target numerical information set in the first selection information group, whose minimum value is greater than the minimum value of the selection target numerical information set in the first selection information group, and which is a consecutive number.

According to feature P2, the maximum value of the selection target numerical information set in the second lottery information group is the same as the maximum value of the selection target numerical information set in the first lottery information group. This is numerical information whose minimum value is larger than the minimum value of the selection target numerical information set in the first lottery information group and is a serial number. As a result, even if the number of selection target numerical information set in the second lottery information group is smaller than the number of selection target numerical information set in the first lottery information group, these selection It becomes possible to match the maximum values of the target numerical information, and it becomes possible to sequentially select target numerical information having a common maximum value as a target for a predetermined appropriateness determination.

Feature P3. Means (main side in the thirteenth embodiment) for setting the maximum value in the target storage means (lottery number counter of the main side RAM 74 in the thirteenth embodiment) regardless of either the predetermined gaming situation or the specific gaming situation. a function of executing the process of step S5402 of the MPU 72),
The information reading means is configured to read out the lottery numerical information corresponding to the selection target numerical information of the value stored in the target storage means,
Feature P2 characterized in that the selection updating means is configured to subtract 1 from the value stored in the target storage means when the predetermined success/failure determination results in a failure in the predetermined gaming situation. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature P3, when the predetermined validity determination is started in either the predetermined gaming situation or the specific gaming situation, a common selection target numerical value is used in each of the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group. The maximum value of the information is set in the target storage means. Then, the numerical value information for lottery corresponding to the selection target numerical information of the value stored in the target storage means is read out from the first lottery information group or the second lottery information group, and the read numerical value for lottery A predetermined validity determination is performed using the information. If the predetermined validity determination results in a failure, the value stored in the target storage means is subtracted by 1, and the selection target numerical information of the value after the 1 subtraction becomes a new lottery target, and the predetermined validity determination is executed. be done. In this way, since the maximum value of selection target numerical information is common between the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group, when the first lottery information group is referred to and the second lottery information group Regardless of whether the information group is referred to, it is possible to perform a predetermined appropriateness determination using a common processing configuration.

Feature P4. When the numerical value information for lottery is read out from the second lottery information group and the predetermined validity determination is performed, any of the selection target numerical information in the second lottery information group is determined to be a winner in the predetermined validity determination. The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P3, characterized in that the determination is made.

According to feature P4, even if the second lottery information group has a configuration in which a plurality of selection target numerical information that is a part of the plurality of selection target numerical information and is a serial number is set, When the numerical information for lottery is read out from the second lottery information group and a predetermined judgment is made, the numerical information to be selected from the second lottery information group is determined to be a winner in the predetermined judgment. In a situation where the second lottery information group is referred to, it is possible to prevent selection target numerical information that is not set in the second lottery information group from becoming a target of the predetermined correctness determination.

Feature P5. The information storage means stores a result-corresponding information group (a thirteenth embodiment) in which result-corresponding information (initial award number in the thirteenth embodiment) is set in correspondence with the selection target numerical information of the first lottery information group. The initial grant number table 175) in the embodiment is stored in advance,
This gaming machine has a means for reading out and utilizing the result correspondence information corresponding to the selection target numerical information that has been won in the predetermined validity determination from the result correspondence information group (steps of the main MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the process of S5411.

According to feature P5, in a configuration in which result correspondence information corresponding to selection target numerical information that is a lottery target when a winner is determined in a predetermined validity determination is read out from the result correspondence information group and used, the second Since the lottery information group has a configuration in which a plurality of selection target numerical information that is a part of the plurality of selection target numerical information and is a serial number is set, the second lottery information group is used. Even in a situation where a predetermined correctness determination is performed, it is possible to use the result correspondence information group used when a predetermined correctness determination is performed using the first lottery information group as is.

Note that for the configuration of features P1 to P5, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M5, Features N1 to N4, Features O1 to O5, Features P1 to P5, Features Q1 to Q13, Features R1 to Any one or more configurations among R5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

Each of the inventions of the characteristic group O and the characteristic group P can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines are equipped with a storage section for storing gaming balls, and the gaming balls stored in the storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or a process is executed to increase the number of gaming balls available to the player.

In a slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game in a situation where gaming value such as medals is being bet, a lottery process is executed by a control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to ensure that lottery processing is performed appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature Q group>
Features Q1. A program storage means (main in the fourteenth to sixteenth embodiments) that stores in advance a read instruction for reading a program (CALLS instruction in the fourteenth and fifteenth embodiments, CALLS instruction and CALLV instruction in the sixteenth embodiment) side ROM73) and
a program execution unit (a function of executing various read instructions of the main MPU 72 in the fourteenth to sixteenth embodiments) that reads the program targeted by the read instruction and executes processing by the program;
Equipped with
The read command includes a first read command (a 3-byte CALLS command in the fourteenth to sixteenth embodiments) and a second read command (a two-byte CALLS command in the fourteenth and fifteenth embodiments) with different amounts of data. A gaming machine characterized in that a command (in the sixteenth embodiment, a 2-byte CALLS command or a CALLV command) is included.

According to feature Q1, a first read command and a second read command are set as read commands for reading a program so that the data amounts are different. This makes it possible to reduce the program capacity by using the read command with the smaller amount of data, while appropriately reading the program by using the read command with the larger amount of data in a situation where the read command with the smaller amount of data cannot be used. This makes it possible to appropriately execute processing using the program.

Features Q2. Both the first read instruction and the second read instruction have a data capacity in bytes,
The gaming machine according to feature Q1, wherein the second read command has a data capacity smaller than that of the first read command by a predetermined number of bytes.

According to feature Q2, in a configuration in which the first read command and the second read command have different data capacities, both have data capacities in bytes, so they can be treated as instructions in bytes.

Feature Q3. The second read command is a command (a 2-byte CALLS in the fourteenth to sixteenth embodiments) for reading a program stored in a predetermined range of addresses ("8000h" to "8BFFh") in the program storage means. command) and
The first read instruction is an instruction (a 3-byte CALLS instruction in the fourteenth to sixteenth embodiments) for reading a program stored at an address outside the predetermined range in the program storage means. The gaming machine described in feature Q1 or Q2.

According to feature Q3, the second read instruction is an instruction for reading a program stored at an address within a predetermined range in the program storage means, and the first read instruction is an instruction for reading a program stored at an address outside the predetermined range in the program storage means. This is an instruction to read the current program. This makes it possible to vary the range of addresses to be read depending on the types of read instructions with different data capacities.

Features Q4. The address included in the predetermined range is a predetermined number of bits consecutive from the most significant bit, including the most significant bit of the address, and is a part of the upper range bits (upper 4 bits) of the address. The gaming machine according to feature Q3, wherein the addresses have the same numerical information.

According to feature Q4, the address of the program to be read by the second read command is a predetermined number of bits consecutive from the most significant bit, including the most significant bit of the address, and some bits of the address. These are addresses where the numerical information of certain upper range bits is the same. This makes it possible to make the numerical information of the upper range bits of the address of the program to be read by the second read command the same.

Features Q5. The entire predetermined address of the program to be read is set in the first read instruction,
The second read command is set with information on designated bits (12 bits excluding the upper 4 bits), which are the bits excluding the upper range bits of the predetermined address of the program to be read. The gaming machine described in feature Q4, which is characterized by:

According to feature Q5, in a configuration in which the numerical information of the upper range bits of the address of the program to be read by the second read instruction is the same, the second read instruction uses the upper range bits of the predetermined address of the program to be read by the second read instruction. Information on the designated bits, which is the bits excluding the range bits, is set. As a result, compared to the first read instruction in which the entire predetermined address of the program to be read is set, the address information set in the second read instruction is reduced, and the data capacity of the second read instruction is reduced. It is possible to reduce the number of commands compared to the first read command.

Features Q6. The program execution means is a means (a fourteenth The gaming machine according to feature Q5, characterized in that it includes the mask circuit 181 and the addition circuit 182 in the sixteenth embodiment.

According to feature Q6, the second read instruction is executed in a configuration in which the second read instruction is set with information on designated bits of a predetermined address to be read, excluding the upper range bits. In this case, a predetermined address of the program to be read is derived by combining the numerical information of the upper range bits with the information of the specified bit set in the second read instruction. This makes it possible to derive the entire predetermined address by the second read command in a configuration where the second read command sets information on specified bits that are part of the predetermined address rather than the entire predetermined address. Become.

Feature Q7. The second read instruction has a smaller data capacity than the first read instruction,
According to any one of features G1 to G6, the program to be read by the second read command is a program that is executed more frequently than the program to be read by the first read command. The game machine described.

According to feature Q7, in a configuration where the second read command has a smaller data capacity than the first read command, the program to be read by the second read command is smaller than the program to be read by the first read command. Since the program is also a program that is executed frequently, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of a read instruction for reading a program that is executed frequently.

Features Q8. The second read instruction has a smaller data capacity than the first read instruction,
According to any one of features G1 to G6, the program to be read by the second read command has a smaller data capacity than the program to be read by the first read command. The game machine described.

According to feature Q8, in a configuration where the second read command has a smaller data capacity than the first read command, the program to be read by the second read command is smaller than the program to be read by the first read command. Since the program also has a small data capacity, it is possible to secure a large number of programs that can be read by the second read command, which has a relatively small data capacity.

Features Q9. A correspondence information group (a group of correspondence information) in which a correspondence relationship between a predetermined address necessary for reading a program stored in the program storage means and identification information (index data) whose data capacity is smaller than the predetermined address is set. The index table 183 according to the sixteenth embodiment is stored in advance (a storage area for storing the index table 183 in the main ROM 73 according to the sixteenth embodiment);
The entire predetermined address of the program to be read is set in the first read instruction,
The gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q8, wherein the identification information is set in the second read command.

According to feature Q9, a correspondence information group is stored in advance in which a correspondence relationship between a predetermined address necessary for reading a program and identification information whose data capacity is smaller than that of the predetermined address is stored in advance. The above-mentioned identification information is set in the read command instead of the predetermined address itself. This makes it possible to make the data capacity of the second read instruction smaller than that of the first read instruction in which the entire predetermined address of the program to be read is set.

Features Q10. The program execution means includes means for reading out an address corresponding to the identification information set in the second read instruction from the correspondence information group (index understanding circuit 184 and address reading circuit 185 in the sixteenth embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature Q9, which is characterized by having the following features:

According to feature Q10, in a configuration in which identification information is set in the second read instruction, when the second read instruction is executed, the address corresponding to the identification information set in the second read instruction is It is read out from the correspondence information group. This makes it possible to derive the entire predetermined address by the second read command in a configuration in which identification information having a smaller data capacity than the predetermined address is set in the second read command instead of the entire predetermined address. becomes possible.

Features Q11. Correspondence information group (16th embodiment (a storage area for storing the index table 183 of the main ROM 73 in the sixteenth embodiment);
The second read instruction is an instruction (a 2-byte CALLS instruction in the sixteenth embodiment) for reading a program stored at an address in a predetermined range (“8000h” to “8BFFh”) in the program storage means. can be,
The first read instruction is an instruction (a 3-byte CALLS instruction in the sixteenth embodiment) for reading a program stored at an address outside the predetermined range in the program storage means,
The second read instruction has a smaller data capacity than the first read instruction,
The read command includes a third read command (CALLV command in the sixteenth embodiment) in which the identification information is set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q8, wherein the program corresponding to the identification information is stored at an address outside the predetermined range in the program storage means.

According to feature Q11, the second read instruction is an instruction for reading a program stored in a predetermined range of addresses in the program storage means, and the first read instruction is an instruction for reading a program stored in an address outside the predetermined range in the program storage means. This makes it possible to vary the range of addresses to be read depending on the type of read instruction with a different data capacity.

Further, a correspondence information group is stored in advance in which a correspondence relationship between a predetermined address necessary for reading a program and identification information whose data capacity is smaller than that of the predetermined address is stored in advance, and the third read command includes: The above identification information is set instead of the predetermined address itself. This makes it possible to make the data capacity of the third read instruction smaller than that of the first read instruction in which the entire predetermined address of the program to be read is set.

Furthermore, the program corresponding to the identification information set in the correspondence information group is stored in the program storage means not in the predetermined range whose address is specified by the second read command, but in the predetermined range whose address is specified by the first read command. stored externally. As a result, the addresses in the range that are not read by the second read instruction, which has a relatively small data capacity among the first read instruction and the second read instruction, can be read by the third read instruction, which has a smaller data capacity than the first read instruction. It becomes possible to read the data.

Feature Q12. The program execution means includes means for reading out an address corresponding to the identification information set in the third read command from the correspondence information group (index understanding circuit 184 and address reading circuit 185 in the sixteenth embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature Q11, which is characterized by having the following features:

According to feature Q12, in a configuration where identification information is set in the third read instruction, when the third read instruction is executed, the address corresponding to the identification information set in the second read instruction is It is read out from the correspondence information group. This makes it possible to derive the entire predetermined address by the third read command in a configuration where the third read command does not include the entire predetermined address but identification information whose data capacity is smaller than that of the predetermined address. becomes possible.

Feature Q13. The address included in the predetermined range is a predetermined number of bits consecutive from the most significant bit, including the most significant bit of the address, and is a part of the upper range bits (upper 4 bits) of the address. Addresses with the same numerical information,
The entire predetermined address of the program to be read is set in the first read instruction,
Information on specified bits (12 bits excluding the upper 4 bits), which are the bits excluding the upper range bits of a predetermined address of the program to be read, is set in the second read instruction;
The gaming machine according to feature Q11 or Q12, wherein the third read command has a smaller data capacity than the second read command.

According to feature Q13, the address of the program to be read by the second read command is a predetermined number of bits consecutive from the most significant bit, including the most significant bit of the address, and some bits of the address. These are addresses where the numerical information of certain upper range bits is the same. This makes it possible to make the numerical information of the upper range bits of the address of the program to be read by the second read command the same.

In addition, in a configuration where the numerical information of the upper range bits of the address of the program to be read by the second read instruction is the same, the second read command excludes the upper range bits of the predetermined address of the program to be read. The specified bit information corresponding to the specified bits is set. As a result, compared to the first read instruction in which the entire predetermined address of the program to be read is set, the address information set in the second read instruction is reduced, and the data capacity of the second read instruction is reduced. It is possible to reduce the number of commands compared to the first read command.

Furthermore, in the configuration where the second read command has a smaller data capacity than the first read command as described above, the third read command has a smaller data capacity than the second read command. This makes it possible to diversify the types of read instructions in terms of data capacity.

Note that for the configuration of features Q1 to Q13, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M5, Features N1 to N4, Features O1 to O5, Features P1 to P5, Features Q1 to Q13, Features R1 to Any one or more configurations among R5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic R group>
Feature R1. A program storage means (main side ROM 73 in the fourteenth to sixteenth embodiments) that stores in advance a read command for reading the program (CALLS command and CALLV command in the fourteenth to sixteenth embodiments);
a program execution unit (a function of executing various read instructions of the main MPU 72 in the fourteenth to sixteenth embodiments) that reads the program targeted by the read instruction and executes processing by the program;
In a configuration with
Correspondence information group (16th embodiment (a storage area for storing the index table 183 of the main ROM 73 in the sixteenth embodiment);
The read instruction includes a specific read instruction (CALLV instruction in the sixteenth embodiment) in which the identification information is set, rather than the entire predetermined address of the program to be read. Game machine.

According to feature R1, a group of correspondence information in which a correspondence relationship between a predetermined address necessary for reading a program and identification information whose data capacity is smaller than that of the predetermined address is stored in advance, and a group of correspondence information is stored in advance. The above-mentioned identification information is set in the instruction instead of the entire predetermined address. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity of a specific read command compared to a configuration in which the entire predetermined address of the program to be read is set. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute processing using a program.

Feature R2. The program execution means includes means (index understanding circuit 184 and address reading circuit 185 in the sixteenth embodiment) for reading an address corresponding to the identification information set in the specific read command from the correspondence information group. The gaming machine according to feature R1.

According to feature R2, in a configuration in which identification information is set in a specific read instruction, when a specific read instruction is executed, the address corresponding to the identification information set in the specific read instruction is the correspondence relationship information. read from the group. This makes it possible to derive the entire predetermined address by the specific read command in a configuration where identification information with a smaller data capacity than the predetermined address is set in the specific read command instead of the entire predetermined address. becomes.

Feature R3. The read instruction includes a first read instruction (a 3-byte CALLS instruction in the sixteenth embodiment) and a second read instruction (a two-byte CALLS instruction in the sixteenth embodiment) having a smaller data capacity than the first read instruction. instructions) are included,
The second read instruction is an instruction for reading a program stored at an address in a predetermined range (“8000h” to “8BFFh”) in the program storage means,
The first read instruction is an instruction for reading a program stored at an address outside the predetermined range in the program storage means,
The gaming machine according to feature R1 or R2, wherein the program corresponding to the identification information is stored at an address outside the predetermined range in the program storage means.

According to feature R3, the second read instruction is an instruction for reading a program stored at an address within a predetermined range in the program storage means, and the first read instruction is an instruction for reading a program stored at an address outside the predetermined range in the program storage means. This is an instruction to read the current program. This makes it possible to vary the range of addresses to be read depending on the types of read instructions with different data capacities.

Furthermore, the program corresponding to the identification information set in the correspondence information group is stored in the program storage means not in the predetermined range whose address is specified by the second read command, but in the predetermined range whose address is specified by the first read command. stored externally. As a result, addresses in the range that are not read by the second read instruction, which has a relatively small data capacity among the first read instruction and the second read instruction, are read by a specific read instruction whose data capacity is smaller than the first read instruction. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature R4. The address included in the predetermined range is a predetermined number of bits consecutive from the most significant bit, including the most significant bit of the address, and is a part of the upper range bits (upper 4 bits) of the address. Addresses with the same numerical information,
The entire predetermined address of the program to be read is set in the first read instruction,
Information on specified bits (12 bits excluding the upper 4 bits), which are the bits excluding the upper range bits of a predetermined address of the program to be read, is set in the second read instruction;
The gaming machine according to feature R3, wherein the specific read command has a smaller data capacity than the second read command.

According to feature R4, the address of the program to be read by the second read command is a predetermined number of bits consecutive from the most significant bit, including the most significant bit of the address, and is a part of the bits of the address. These are addresses where the numerical information of certain upper range bits is the same. This makes it possible to make the numerical information of the upper range bits of the address of the program to be read by the second read instruction the same.

In addition, in a configuration where the numerical information of the upper range bits of the address of the program to be read by the second read instruction is the same, the second read command excludes the upper range bits of the predetermined address of the program to be read. The specified bit information corresponding to the specified bits is set. As a result, compared to the first read instruction in which the entire predetermined address of the program to be read is set, the address information set in the second read instruction is reduced, and the data capacity of the second read instruction is reduced. It is possible to reduce the number of commands compared to the first read command.

Furthermore, in the configuration where the second read command has a smaller data capacity than the first read command as described above, the specific read command has a smaller data capacity than the second read command. This makes it possible to diversify the types of read instructions in terms of data capacity.

Feature R5. The program execution means is a means (a fourteenth The gaming machine according to feature R4, characterized in that it includes the mask circuit 181 and the addition circuit 182 in the sixteenth embodiment.

According to feature R5, in a configuration in which the second read instruction is set with designated bit information, which is the number of bits excluding the upper range bits of the specified address to be read, when the second read instruction is executed, the specified address of the program to be read is derived by combining the designated bit information set in the second read instruction with the numerical information of the upper range bits. As a result, in a configuration in which the second read instruction is set with designated bit information that is a part of the specified address rather than the entire address, it becomes possible to derive the entire specified address by the second read instruction.

Note that for the configuration of features R1 to R5, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M5, Features N1 to N4, Features O1 to O5, Features P1 to P5, Features Q1 to Q13, Features R1 to Any one or more configurations among R5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

Each invention of the feature Q group and the feature R group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a storage section that stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball firing device and directed toward the gaming area according to the player's firing operation. is fired. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a lottery process is executed, for example, or a process for increasing the number of game balls available to the player is executed. Ru.

In a slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game in a situation where gaming value such as medals is being bet, a lottery process is executed by a control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably execute processing using a program, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: The rotating body starts rotating based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player A gaming machine that gives benefits to

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine, 31... Reel unit, 32L... Left reel, 32M... Middle reel, 32R... Right reel, 41... Start lever, 42-44... Stop button, 54... Power supply device, 63... Image display device, 63a... Liquid crystal display unit, 67... Section display unit, 72... Main side MPU, 73... Main side ROM, 74... Main side RAM, 74e... AT continuation counter, 92... Performance side MPU, 101... Memory module, 103... VDP, 105 ...Buffer for development, 106a...First frame area, 106b...Second frame area, 121...Operation device for production, 142...Stepping motor, 164a to 164c...Stop completion flag, 171...Pseudo stop table, 172...AT transition Lottery table, 173...First initial award number lottery table, 174...Second initial award number lottery table, 175...Initial award number table, 181...Mask circuit, 182...Addition circuit, 183...Index table, 184...Index grasping circuit , 185...Address reading circuit, A1...Left side area, A2...Right area, A11...Left upper area, A12...Right upper area, A13...Left lower area, A14...Right lower area, D1...Image data at the time of division, D2 to D5...Image data, DA1...First section area, DA2...Second section area, G21, G22...Video display for presentation, G23...Number of grants notification display, G31...Remaining number of continuous games image, G32...Number of acquisitions Display image, G33...Remaining number of grants display image, G34...Stop order notification image, G35...Operation notification image, G41, G42...Video display for performance, G43...Number of grants notification display, G52...Caution image, G61...End clear Image, G62...Total number of games image, G63...Total number of acquisitions image, G66...Visibility reduction effect.

Claims (1)

a first caution event control means for causing a predetermined caution event to be executed that allows a predetermined caution to be given to a player when a predetermined gaming state ends;
Even if the predetermined gaming state continues, the predetermined gaming state actually continues after the predetermined effect that allows the player to recognize that the predetermined gaming state may end is executed. means for generating a revival response effect in which a specific effect is executed to make the player aware of the fact;
a second caution event control means for causing the predetermined caution event to be executed in a situation where the revival response effect occurs;
Equipped with
In a situation where a new game is not started, the period from the start of the predetermined effect to the start of the specific effect is the period from the start of the predetermined effect until the start of the predetermined caution event and the predetermined effect. The period is longer than the total period from the start of the cautionary event until the end of the specified cautionary event, and
The second caution event control means is configured to not cause the predetermined caution event to be executed if a game is newly started before the predetermined caution event is started in a situation where the revival compatible performance occurs. A gaming machine with special features.

Images